This is a modern-English version of A Voyage with Captain Dynamite, originally written by Rich, Charles Edward. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.



Suddenly he half rose in the tossing boat and shouted to the rowers (Page 13)

A VOYAGE
WITH
CAPTAIN DYNAMITE

BY

CHARLES EDWARD RICH

Publishers mark

NYC
A. S. BARNES & COMPANY
1907

Copyright, 1907, by
A. S. BARNES & COMPANY
All rights reserved


CONTENTS.

CHAPTER PAGE
I. Caught in a Storm 1
II Carried Away to the Sea 11
III "She's like a battleship below." 24
IV. A Lesson in Patriotism 37
V. Sending the Message 51
VI. "Long live a free Cuba!" 63
VII. In the Danger Zone 73
VIII. A Run-In with the Gunboat 86
IX. The Late Night Message 99
X. Into Enemy Territory 112
XI. Captured by Spaniards 125
XII. Next up, Gomez 139
XIII. Harry Refuses to Betray Captain Dynamite 151
XIV. The Hidden Passage 165
XV. Dawn Execution 177
XVI. The Great Escape 185
XVII. "You Will Be Shot as Spies" 198
XVIII. Captain Dynamite Discovers Juanita 208
XIX. Reeling in the Net 218
XX. Captain Dynamite to the Rescue 231
XXI. General Serano Meets Captain Boom 242
XXII. The Escape—Villamonte Defeated Again 254
XXIII. Back to Mariella 266
XXIV. The Escape from the Lagoon 275
XXV. Home Again 291

A VOYAGE WITH CAPTAIN DYNAMITE


CHAPTER I

Caught in a Storm

"Let go the jib halliards, Mason. Lay out there, Bert, and get in that slack sail. It's blowing a bit. Gee, see that bank of wind coming up."

"Release the jib halyards, Mason. Get out there, Bert, and pull in that slack sail. It's getting a bit windy. Wow, check out that gust of wind approaching."

The little pleasure boat careened and took aboard a few barrels of water as she faced a sudden puff of wind that almost put her on her beam ends. But she was a game little craft, and came back from the onslaught of the elements with a sturdiness that indicated strong timbers, and a build that was meant to cope with the sudden squalls that come out of a clear sky off the coast of Martha's Vineyard during the early autumn days.

The small pleasure boat tilted and took on some water when a sudden gust of wind nearly tipped her over. But she was a tough little vessel, bouncing back from the assault of the elements with a strength that showed she was built from solid materials, designed to handle the sudden storms that can appear out of nowhere on the coast of Martha's Vineyard during early autumn days.

"She's good for anything that you will get around these parts, and she is the fastest boat of her length in these waters."

"She’s perfect for anything you can find around here, and she’s the fastest boat of her size in these waters."

This recommendation by Tom, the veteran skipper of the summer fleet, had been sufficient to complete the sale of the sloop to three enthusiastic boys. And the boat had made good her reputation and served her purpose well.[Pg 2] During the two months that the boys had owned her, there had been few days when she had not been in commission, either cruising for blue fish, or skimming along the shores of the island in a pleasant, summer way, lazily passing the days away for the youngsters, who lolled contentedly on her deck.

This recommendation from Tom, the experienced captain of the summer fleet, was enough to finalize the sale of the sloop to three excited boys. The boat had proven her worth and served her purpose well.[Pg 2] During the two months that the boys had owned her, there were few days when she wasn't in use, either fishing for bluefish or cruising along the island's shores in a laid-back summer style, while the boys relaxed happily on her deck.

Since we shall follow the crew of the yacht through many adventures, let us make their acquaintance at once. At the helm stood Harry Hamilton, a boy of sixteen, strong of build and an athlete of renown within the circles of his school. Honest and straightforward in all his dealings, and with a cheery disposition, he commanded the respect and admiration of his fellows, and because of his natural characteristics, was usually looked upon as the leader in their sports. With his parents he was spending his vacation at their summer home at Cottage City.

Since we’ll be following the yacht crew through many adventures, let’s meet them right away. At the helm stood Harry Hamilton, a 16-year-old who was strong and well-known as an athlete in his school. Honest and straightforward in all his interactions, with a cheerful attitude, he earned the respect and admiration of his peers, and because of his natural traits, he was often seen as the leader in their sports. He was spending his vacation with his parents at their summer home in Cottage City.

With him were two schoolmates, Geoffrey Mason and Bertram Wilson, who were staying with him. Bertram was about Harry's age. Geoffrey, nicknamed "Midget" Mason, or the "Midget," was a year younger than his chums, and although small for his age, was strong and wiry. Light hearted and fun loving, he was always the life of any gathering of boys. He was one of Harry Hamilton's staunchest friends[Pg 3] and admirers. For weeks the boys had enjoyed the sailing, bathing, fishing, golf, and other sports, but their particular diversion was sailing. Under the instruction of old Tom, the boys were soon able to handle alone the little boat that they had bought by clubbing together their resources.

With him were two classmates, Geoffrey Mason and Bertram Wilson, who were staying over. Bertram was about Harry's age. Geoffrey, nicknamed "Midget" Mason, or just the "Midget," was a year younger than his friends and, though small for his age, was strong and wiry. Cheerful and fun-loving, he was always the life of any group of boys. He was one of Harry Hamilton's closest friends and admirers. For weeks, the boys had been enjoying sailing, swimming, fishing, golf, and other sports, but their favorite activity was sailing. Under the guidance of old Tom, the boys quickly learned to handle the little boat they had bought by pooling their resources.[Pg 3]

"Don't worry, mother, she's as safe as a scow," Harry would say, as he saw the expression of anxiety spread over his mother's face when he announced that they were off for a day's cruising.

"Don't worry, Mom, she's as safe as can be," Harry would say, noticing the look of worry on his mother's face when he told her they were going out for a day's cruise.

On this day they had started early in the morning for a blue-fishing cruise, and all had gone well until the homeward voyage. The cockpit was full of big fish and the boys took much pleasure in anticipating their reception when they made fast to the pier. The little sloop was skimming along under full sail, when just off Edgartown a stiff puff of wind struck them.

On this day, they set off early in the morning for a blue-fishing trip, and everything went smoothly until the journey back home. The cockpit was filled with large fish, and the boys were excited about how they would be greeted when they docked at the pier. The little sloop was gliding along under full sail when, just off Edgartown, a strong gust of wind hit them.

Harry jammed the helm hard down and the boat responded gamely, coming quickly up into the wind. It was then that he called sharply to Mason to let go the jib halliards. The sail was so light and the wind slapped it from side to side with such angry vehemence that it would not run down on the stay. Harry dropped the helm, and holding it down with the pressure of his leg, seized the down haul and brought the jib, flapping and pounding, down to the bowsprit.[Pg 4]

Harry yanked the steering wheel down hard, and the boat responded quickly, turning into the wind. That’s when he shouted to Mason to release the jib halyards. The sail was so light, and the wind was so strong that it kept slapping it from side to side, making it impossible to bring it down on the stay. Harry let go of the steering wheel, using his leg to hold it in place, grabbed the downhaul, and pulled the jib down to the bowsprit as it flapped and pounded.[Pg 4]

"Get out there and furl that jib, Bert," he shouted. "We'll have to reef down the mainsail soon."

"Get out there and fold that jib, Bert," he shouted. "We'll need to reduce the mainsail soon."

Bert climbed cautiously out of the cockpit and made his way along the slippery deck until he reached the bowsprit. Clinging to the mainmast, he steadied himself while he surveyed the thrashing sail, whose folds of canvas hung over and trailed in the water until, caught every now and then by the wind, it bellied out like a balloon. A wave bigger than the rest completely submerged the bowsprit as the boat plunged into the trough of the sea.

Bert carefully climbed out of the cockpit and navigated the slippery deck until he got to the bowsprit. Holding on to the mainmast, he steadied himself while watching the flailing sail, its canvas folds hanging over and dragging in the water, occasionally catching the wind and puffing up like a balloon. A wave larger than the others completely submerged the bowsprit as the boat dropped into the trough of the sea.

To furl the jib it was necessary to climb out on the lower stay, which acted as a foot rope, and it required the agility of a cat to hang on and drag the water-soaked, wind-thrashed sail onto the bowsprit and make it fast with canvas stops. For a moment Bert hesitated, but Harry waved to him eagerly to go on. Bert nodded in assent and began to climb gingerly out onto the stay. Harry held the boat up into the wind to aid his companion in getting in the wet and flapping sail.

To lower the jib, Bert had to climb out onto the lower stay, which served as a foot rope. It took the agility of a cat to hang on and pull the soaked, wind-beaten sail onto the bowsprit and secure it with canvas stops. For a moment, Bert hesitated, but Harry eagerly waved him on. Bert nodded in agreement and carefully started to climb out onto the stay. Harry steered the boat into the wind to help his friend gather the wet, flapping sail.

They plunged into wave after wave, carrying Bert almost completely under, as a bather goes under a comber in the surf. But he hung onto the light spar with one hand while he dragged in the sail with the other. When his task was com[Pg 5]pleted and he climbed inboard again, Bert was as wet as if he had been overboard.

They dove into wave after wave, nearly submerging Bert completely, like a swimmer getting taken under by a big wave at the beach. But he held onto the light spar with one hand while pulling in the sail with the other. Once he finished his task and climbed back on board, Bert was as drenched as if he had fallen overboard.

Then came the task of reefing the mainsail, which the boys accomplished successfully, though not without a hard struggle, for the wind increased in violence every moment. Holding the boat, which now carried only a few square yards of canvas, well up into the wind, they pounded along with the gunwale under the rushing water. She rode a little easier and the boys settled down for a breathing spell.

Then came the job of reefing the mainsail, which the boys managed to do successfully, though not without a tough struggle, as the wind increased in strength every moment. Keeping the boat, which now had just a small amount of sail up, pointed into the wind, they rushed along with the water splashing over the sides. She handled a bit better, and the boys took a moment to catch their breath.

"There is nothing to be done now but to let her run," said Harry, as he gripped the helm hard to meet a sudden plunge into a head sea.

"There’s nothing we can do now but let her go," said Harry, as he gripped the steering wheel tightly to handle a sudden drop into a rough sea.

"But we are heading straight out to sea," said Bert, with a tone of worriment in his voice.

"But we are going straight out to sea," said Bert, with a worried tone in his voice.

"Can't be helped. This wind has not reached its limit yet, and I would not dare to try to take her in before it. It might take the mast out of her."

"There's no helping it. This wind hasn't peaked yet, and I wouldn't risk taking her in before it does. It could snap the mast."

"It's getting dark, too," said Mason, nervously.

"It's getting dark, too," Mason said, feeling nervous.

"That can't be helped either."

"That can't be helped either."

"Can't you ease her off for the Massachusetts shore?"

"Can't you help her get to the Massachusetts shore?"

"I tell you, Bert, there is nothing to be done with safety but to keep her right up into the eye of the wind."

"I’m telling you, Bert, the only way to ensure safety is to head directly into the wind."

"But this blow may last for a day or two."[Pg 6]

"But this impact might linger for a day or two."[Pg 6]

"Now look here, Bert, you and I have been caught in one or two hard blows and we have pulled out all right together. If you think you know more about handling this boat than I do, I will turn the helm over to you and you can have your own way."

"Listen, Bert, you and I have been through some tough times and we've come out fine together. If you think you know better than I do when it comes to handling this boat, I'm happy to hand over the helm to you and let you do things your way."

"Skipper," said Bert, with a return of his natural good humor, "I seek neither the honor nor the responsibility. Keep the helm and sail her on to whatever port this blooming gale may be heading us for. It looks to me as if we would make the coast of Ireland for our first stop."

"Skipper," Bert said, regaining his usual good mood, "I don’t want the honor or the responsibility. You take the helm and steer us toward whatever port this crazy storm is taking us to. It seems to me that our first stop is going to be the coast of Ireland."

"She is not making as much headway as she appears to be. I have got her jammed way up into the wind."

"She's not making as much progress as she seems to be. I've got her stuck way upwind."

The sky was constantly growing darker and the wind seemed each moment to increase in fury. To add to the discomfort of the situation, it began to rain. The wind howled and shrieked and lashed the surface of the water into a white foam, lifting at times the crests from the waves and hurling the fine spray into the faces of the boys.

The sky was getting darker, and the wind seemed to get stronger with every passing moment. To make things worse, it started to rain. The wind howled and screamed, whipping the water into a frothy white foam, occasionally lifting the tops off the waves and spraying the boys in the face with fine mist.

Darkness was falling rapidly, and away off in the distance behind them the lights of Cottage City flashed out as the cottagers began to light the lamps.

Darkness was setting in quickly, and far off in the distance behind them, the lights of Cottage City blinked on as the residents started to turn on their lamps.

Harry sat silently at the helm, with his eyes fixed on the sail, now and then changing their course[Pg 7] a little as the gusty wind veered a point or two.

Harry sat quietly at the helm, his eyes locked on the sail, occasionally adjusting their course a bit as the strong wind shifted slightly. [Pg 7]

On they plunged into the teeth of the ever increasing gale. Soon complete darkness shut in around them and it was impossible to see beyond the bow of the boat, that at times rose high on the crest of a rushing wave and then swooped down to meet the next with a crash that sent a shiver through her timbers. But she was a sturdy little craft, and shaking herself like an animal, she would rise lightly to the top of the next wave, ready to fight it out to the end.

On they pushed into the teeth of the growing storm. Soon, complete darkness closed in around them, and it was impossible to see beyond the front of the boat, which at times rose high on the crest of a rushing wave and then dropped down to meet the next one with a crash that sent a shiver through her frame. But she was a tough little vessel, and shaking herself like an animal, she would rise easily to the top of the next wave, ready to keep battling to the end.

Mason and Bert perched grimly on the windward rail of the cockpit. Neither had spoken for a long time.

Mason and Bert sat silently on the windward rail of the cockpit. Neither of them had said a word for quite a while.

"Take a turn at the pump, Bert," said Harry, "I think she is taking water."

"Take a turn at the pump, Bert," Harry said, "I think she's taking on water."

Bert started towards the pump, slipped on the fish that filled the cockpit and pitched head-foremost into the lee scuppers.

Bert made his way to the pump, slipped on the fish that filled the cockpit, and fell headfirst into the lee scuppers.

"Throw half a dozen of those fish into the cuddy and chuck the rest overboard," said Harry, who, notwithstanding their serious situation, could not refrain from laughing at Bert's frantic efforts to regain his feet among the slippery cargo. "We may need some of them for food before we get out of this, but the others are in the way."

"Throw half a dozen of those fish into the cabin and toss the rest overboard," said Harry, who, despite their serious situation, couldn't help but laugh at Bert's desperate attempts to stand up on the slippery cargo. "We might need some of them for food before we get out of this, but the others are just in the way."

Mason climbed down from his perch with care and helped to throw the fish overboard.[Pg 8]

Mason carefully climbed down from his spot and helped toss the fish overboard.[Pg 8]

"Pretty dangerous situation, skipper," said the imperturbable youngster, "when we have to sacrifice the cargo. However, over they go."

"Pretty dangerous situation, captain," said the calm young guy, "when we have to sacrifice the cargo. But over they go."

The little cabin, or cuddy, of the boat was so low that it was with difficulty that one could crawl into it. On either side the boys had fitted up small bunks that served for lounging during calm weather, and in the middle of this space, on the centreboard box, they had arranged a table on which stood a small oil stove. Here they frequently cooked their luncheons when cruising.

The tiny cabin, or cuddy, of the boat was so low that it was hard to crawl into it. On either side, the boys had set up small bunks that they used for relaxing during calm weather, and in the middle of this space, on the centerboard box, they had placed a table with a small oil stove on it. They often cooked their lunches here while cruising.

After the fish were disposed of, Bert manned the pump, and for five minutes was busy getting the water out of the hold.

After the fish were thrown out, Bert operated the pump and spent five minutes working on getting the water out of the hold.

"This blow has opened up some of her seams," said Harry, as Bert began to puff. "We shall have to work to keep the water out of her, boys."

"This hit has opened up some of her seams," Harry said as Bert started to puff. "We need to work to keep the water out of her, guys."

"What about eating?" asked Mason, whose stomach never quailed, even in the face of danger.

"What about eating?" asked Mason, whose stomach never wavered, even when facing danger.

"We'll go without eating for the present, young man, and you may think yourself very lucky if you get out of this even with an empty stomach."

"We'll skip eating for now, young man, and you should consider yourself very lucky if you get out of this with just an empty stomach."

"O, fudge, I can sneak down into the cuddy and fix up a nice mess of baked beans that will make your mouth water. There are three cans left. Besides, if we are going to drown, what's the use of drowning on empty stomachs?"[Pg 9]

"O, fudge, I can slip down into the cabin and make a delicious batch of baked beans that will make your mouth water. There are three cans left. Besides, if we're going to drown, what's the point of drowning with empty stomachs?"[Pg 9]

"Don't you even put your head in that cuddy, Midget," said Harry, sharply. "If anything should happen to this boat you would be drowned like a rat in a trap, in there."

"Don’t even think about putting your head in that cabin, Midget," Harry said sharply. "If anything happens to this boat, you’ll be drowned like a rat in a trap in there."

"Pish, pish and tush, tush, what's the use of having a skipper if he is going to upset his craft? Bert, it is high time the crew mutinied. What—"

"Pish, pish and tush, tush, what's the point of having a captain if he's just going to ruin his own ship? Bert, it’s about time the crew revolted. What—"

At this moment a big wave struck the bow of the boat and swept her from stem to stern, filling Mason's open mouth with salt water.

At that moment, a huge wave hit the front of the boat and soaked her from front to back, filling Mason's open mouth with saltwater.

"Skipper," he sputtered, as soon as he could speak, "I confidently believe you did that on purpose."

"Skipper," he stammered, as soon as he could talk, "I genuinely think you did that on purpose."

"This is not a time for your nonsense, Mason," said Harry, somewhat sternly.

"This isn't the time for your nonsense, Mason," Harry said, a bit sternly.

As he spoke, a fiercer gust of wind, veering a point or two, caught the sloop amidships, and before Harry could let go the sheet or bring her closer up, she heeled over to the blast until the water poured in a torrent into the cockpit. Harry jammed down the helm and let go the mainsheet and she righted herself, trembled under the strain and plunged ahead once more into the seas.

As he spoke, a stronger gust of wind, shifting slightly, hit the sloop in the middle, and before Harry could release the sheet or steer her closer, she leaned over to the wind until water gushed into the cockpit. Harry pushed down on the helm and let go of the mainsheet, and she straightened up, shook under the pressure, and surged forward into the waves again.

It was mere chance that both Bert and Mason were not swept into the sea by the sudden careening of the boat. As it was, they were thrown into the cockpit, and when they climbed back in the darkness to their places on the weather rail,[Pg 10] the Midget wore a much more serious expression on his naturally comical face.

It was just luck that both Bert and Mason weren't thrown into the sea by the sudden lurch of the boat. Instead, they were tossed into the cockpit, and when they climbed back in the darkness to their spots on the weather rail,[Pg 10] the Midget had a much more serious look on his naturally funny face.

"You are right, Hal," he said, solemnly, "I guess it's no joke after all."

"You’re right, Hal," he said seriously, "I guess it’s not a joke after all."

The rain was now coming down in vicious torrents that beat in the boys' faces, almost blinding them.

The rain was now pouring down in fierce torrents that hit the boys' faces, nearly blinding them.

Suddenly in the blackness ahead there flashed a bright, green light like the eye of some monster of the deep. It appeared to be about as high above them as the mast head of the sloop. They each saw it at the same time, and each knew, with a thrill of horror, what it meant.

Suddenly, in the darkness ahead, a bright green light flashed like the eye of some deep-sea monster. It seemed to be about as high above them as the masthead of the sloop. They all saw it at the same moment, and each felt a thrill of horror, knowing what it meant.

"Hold fast," shouted Harry, in tones that could just be heard above the howling of the gale, and at the same time he put the helm hard down. "She's almost on us."

"Hang on," yelled Harry, his voice barely audible over the howling wind, as he turned the steering wheel sharply down. "She's nearly on us."

It was too late. There was a crash and the sound of splintering timbers.

It was too late. There was a crash and the sound of breaking wood.

The big steamer cut the little craft in two as cleanly as with a knife.

The big steamboat sliced the small boat in half just like a knife would.


CHAPTER II

Swept Away by the Ocean

As the big, black hull of the steamer crashed into the sail boat, a loud shout went up from her deck. The note of fright in it penetrated even through the shrieks of the gale.

As the large black hull of the steamer collided with the sailboat, a loud shout erupted from her deck. The fear in the shout cut through even the howls of the wind.

"Boat under our starboard bow, sir—we've run her down."

"There's a boat under our starboard bow, sir—we've collided with her."

The warning shout and the cry that announced the disaster were punctuated only by a breath. Then followed a babel of orders and the quick clanging of signal bells in the engine room. The sudden churning of the screws in the angry waters told that the steamer's engines were reversed.

The warning shout and the cry that signaled the disaster were interrupted only by a breath. Then came a jumble of orders and the rapid ringing of signal bells in the engine room. The sudden churning of the screws in the rough waters indicated that the steamer's engines were in reverse.

A man rushed out of the cabin and took a commanding place on the steamer's bridge.

A man ran out of the cabin and took charge at the steamer's bridge.

"Where did she go down?" he shouted in the ear of the mate, who clung to the rail and peered back into the darkness.

"Where did she go down?" he shouted in the mate's ear, who held on to the rail and looked back into the darkness.

"About a hundred feet aft, sir," the man answered, pointing into the blackness that enveloped the steamer.

"About a hundred feet back, sir," the man replied, pointing into the darkness surrounding the steamer.

"Lower the port lifeboat," shouted the newcomer on the scene to the men who were collected on the forward deck.[Pg 12]

"Lower the port lifeboat," yelled the newcomer to the guys gathered on the front deck.[Pg 12]

He darted back toward the cabin as he spoke and the sound of creaking ropes told that his orders were being rapidly carried out.

He dashed back to the cabin as he spoke, and the creaking ropes signaled that his orders were being quickly followed.

"The boat will never live in this sea," shouted the mate.

"The boat will never survive in this sea," yelled the first mate.

The man turned at the cabin door with a scowl.

The man turned at the cabin door with a frown.

"You heard my orders," he said, sharply. "There are lives to be saved and it is not a question whether the boat will live. We will make her live. Call for volunteers if the men have any scruples about trusting themselves with me, but get the boat into the water at once. Every minute counts."

"You heard my orders," he said, sharply. "There are lives to be saved, and it’s not a question of whether the boat will survive. We will make sure she does. Call for volunteers if the men have any doubts about trusting themselves with me, but get the boat in the water right away. Every minute counts."

He was gone but a second and emerged from the cabin in a heavy suit of oilskins. He sprang nimbly down the companionway to the deck.

He was gone for just a moment and came out of the cabin wearing a thick oilskin suit. He quickly jumped down the stairs to the deck.

"Who goes with me in the boat?" he shouted to the assembled crew.

"Who’s coming with me in the boat?" he shouted to the gathered crew.

"I, sir, and I," cried the men in chorus, all anxious to be in the boat with their commander.

"I, sir, and I," shouted the men together, all eager to be in the boat with their leader.

"You, and you, and you," he shouted, as he designated six men with a quick movement of his forefinger. The men tumbled over the side into the boat that was tossing like a cockle shell in the waves that threatened to dash her to pieces against the big steamer. The captain slipped over the side and took his place in the stern. It was a difficult task to get the boat safely off, but[Pg 13] it was finally accomplished by skill and strength; and as she rode away from the side on the top of a nasty roller she was greeted with a cheer from the disappointed men who had been left behind and who longed to be with their commander in his perilous undertaking.

"You, you, and you," he shouted, pointing at six men with a quick flick of his finger. The men jumped over the side into the boat that was bobbing around like a shell in the waves threatening to smash it against the big steamer. The captain climbed over the side and took his spot at the back. Getting the boat off safely was a tough job, but[Pg 13] it was eventually done with skill and strength; and as she floated away from the side on top of a rough wave, she was met with cheers from the disappointed men left behind who wished to be with their commander in his dangerous mission.

As they rowed away from the steamer there was no sign in the darkness of the little boat they had run down, but the man at the tiller steered as determinedly as if he knew for just what point in the blackness he was headed. With his head bent slightly forward and his big body swaying with the rock and pitch of the lifeboat he kept his eyes fixed straight ahead.

As they paddled away from the steamer, there was no indication in the darkness of the small boat they had just passed, but the person at the helm steered with resolve as if he knew exactly where he was headed in the shadows. With his head slightly forward and his large frame swaying with the motion of the lifeboat, he kept his gaze focused straight ahead.

Suddenly he half rose in the tossing boat and shouted to the rowers, who were bending their backs to the oars that every now and then would sink deep into a towering wave and the next instant swing viciously through the air as the boat rolled up on the crest of a big billow.

Suddenly he half stood up in the rocking boat and shouted to the rowers, who were straining against the oars that would sometimes dive deep into a huge wave and the next moment swing sharply through the air as the boat rolled up on the top of a big swell.

"Steady all," he called in a deep growl. "Now hold her."

"Steady now," he called in a deep voice. "Now hold her."

The men dug their oars into the tumbling sea in an effort to bring the boat to a standstill, but the waves caught her and hurried her on. The sailors caught a fleeting glimpse in the darkness of the bottom of an upturned boat to which three boys were clinging. The man at the tiller[Pg 14] swung the boat's head around as they swept by and, caught broadside on by a big wave, she rolled for a moment as if she was about to capsize. But the trained sailors held stoutly to the leeward oars, and the boat righted herself and rose like a cork on the wave and settled down so close to the wrecked yacht that the man in the stern leaned over and tossed the end of a rope beyond the heads of the boys.

The men plunged their oars into the choppy sea, trying to stop the boat, but the waves pushed her onward. In the darkness, the sailors briefly spotted the bottom of an overturned boat that three boys were clinging to. The man at the tiller[Pg 14] turned the boat as they passed, and when a large wave hit them side-on, it made the boat tilt as if it might flip over. But the experienced sailors firmly held the oars on the downwind side, and the boat steadied itself, bobbing back up like a cork on the wave, settling close to the wrecked yacht. The man in the stern leaned over and tossed a rope beyond the boys' heads.

"Catch it and make fast to something," he cried, as the rope fell. "We cannot get any closer to you without smashing this boat. Jump!"

"Grab it and tie it to something!" he shouted, as the rope dropped. "We can't get any closer to you without wrecking this boat. Jump!"


When Harry came to the surface after the collision he found that he was not hurt and, shaking his head like a dog, he prepared to make a fight for his life against the sea. His first thought was of his companions, but it was impossible to tell what their fate had been. It took all his strength to battle with the waves and keep himself afloat. Now and then, as he was carried helplessly to the crest of a big billow, he tried to peer into the darkness that surrounded him. He could see nothing but empty blackness. It was impossible to swim, had he known in which direction to head. All he could do was to husband his strength to keep on the surface and to breast and rise with each wave that passed under him.[Pg 15]

When Harry surfaced after the crash, he realized he wasn't injured. Shaking his head like a dog, he prepared to fight for his life against the ocean. His first thought was for his friends, but he couldn't tell what had happened to them. It took all his strength to fight the waves and keep himself afloat. Occasionally, as he was tossed to the top of a large wave, he tried to look into the darkness around him. All he could see was endless blackness. It was impossible to swim, even if he knew which way to go. All he could do was conserve his strength to stay on the surface and rise with each wave that passed beneath him.[Pg 15]

He knew it would be useless to shout, for his voice was weak from his exertions and could not be heard above the howling of the wind and the lash of the sea. He could faintly hear the commotion on the steamer and see the lights from her portholes when she rode a high wave. But he had no hope that any boat that might be lowered could reach him in that sea.

He realized it would be pointless to shout since his voice was too weak from his efforts and wouldn’t carry over the howling wind and crashing waves. He could barely hear the chaos on the steamer and catch glimpses of the lights from its portholes whenever it rode up on a big wave. But he had no hope that any boat lowered could reach him in those rough waters.

Once he thought he heard faint cries for help near him, and as he sank into the trough of a sea, a black mass swept by him. He groped wildly to reach it and his hand touched a dangling rope. He seized it with the frenzy of a drowning man and the next instant had pulled himself alongside of what proved to be the wreck of the yacht. He dragged himself up and threw his arms over the keel and for the first time since he had been swept under the surface of the water drew a long breath. The touch of something solid in that angry sea put new life into him and he shouted feebly for very joy.

Once he thought he heard faint cries for help nearby, and as he sank into the trough of a wave, a dark shape swept past him. He groped desperately to reach it and his hand grasped a dangling rope. He grabbed it with the urgency of a drowning person and the next moment had pulled himself alongside what turned out to be the wreck of the yacht. He hoisted himself up and threw his arms over the keel, and for the first time since he had been pulled under the water, he took a deep breath. The feel of something solid in that turbulent sea gave him new life, and he shouted weakly in sheer joy.

An answering cry, weak as his own, came from the other side of the wreck and he saw two heads just above the line of the keel. Bert and Mason had also been fortunate enough to reach the upturned half of the boat, and for a time at least all were saved from the maw of the sea.

An answering shout, as weak as his own, came from the other side of the wreck, and he saw two heads just above the line of the keel. Bert and Mason had also been lucky enough to reach the upturned half of the boat, and for a while, at least, everyone was saved from the grip of the sea.

Just then the lifeboat reached them and the rope cast by the captain's strong hand fell over[Pg 16] their heads. Harry caught it and managed to make it fast to a ring bolt. Then without hesitation the boys one by one dropped off into the water and half swimming and half dragging themselves by the rope, made their way from the wreck to the lifeboat into which they were pulled by strong hands. As soon as they were dragged aboard, the boys sank to the bottom of the boat exhausted.

Just then, the lifeboat reached them and the rope thrown by the captain’s strong hand fell over[Pg 16] their heads. Harry grabbed it and tied it securely to a ring bolt. Then, without any hesitation, the boys dropped into the water one by one and, half swimming and half pulling themselves along the rope, made their way from the wreck to the lifeboat, where strong hands pulled them in. As soon as they were dragged aboard, the boys collapsed to the bottom of the boat, completely exhausted.

"How many of you were there?" asked the captain, as the last of the three boys was pulled into the boat.

"How many of you were there?" asked the captain as the last of the three boys was pulled into the boat.

"Only three," answered Harry, weakly.

"Just three," Harry replied, weakly.

"All right, then," said the captain, with a tone of relief in his voice, "You are all accounted for. Pull men."

"Alright, then," said the captain, sounding relieved, "You're all here. Pull, men."

By the time they reached the steamer the boys had revived and were able to scramble up the rope-ladder that was lowered over the side. The captain was the last to go aboard. As he reached the deck he looked at the bedraggled youngsters with a good-natured smile.

By the time they got to the steamer, the boys had regained their strength and managed to climb up the rope ladder that was lowered over the side. The captain was the last to board. When he got to the deck, he looked at the disheveled kids with a kind smile.

"Better come below and get on some dry clothes," he said, as he nodded his head to the mate on the bridge.

"Better come down and put on some dry clothes," he said, nodding to the mate on the bridge.

The bells in the engine-room jingled and the big steamer began to forge ahead again into the storm as if nothing had happened to delay her[Pg 17] voyage. The drenched boys gladly followed the captain into his cabin. He was a man of enormous build, big-boned and muscular. His head was covered with a mass of curling blond hair and his face was clean-shaven. As he threw off his oilskins and tossed them into a corner of the cabin the boys saw to their astonishment that he wore a fashionable suit of summer flannels and a handsome negligée shirt. His trousers, which were turned up at the bottom in the latest mode, were suspended by a fancy leather belt and his feet were encased in low tan shoes. He looked like the owner of a yacht off on a summer pleasure cruise, but to the eye of the veriest land lubber it would be at once apparent that the steamer which he commanded was not a yacht. He was about thirty years old and carried his size and weight with an ease that showed the training of an athlete.

The bells in the engine room chimed, and the large steamer started moving forward again into the storm as if nothing had interrupted her voyage. The soaked boys eagerly followed the captain into his cabin. He was a massive man, big-boned and muscular. His head was covered with a mass of curly blond hair and his face was clean-shaven. As he took off his oilskins and tossed them into a corner of the cabin, the boys were amazed to see that he wore a stylish suit of summer flannels and a nice dress shirt. His trousers, which were turned up at the bottom in the latest fashion, were held up by a fancy leather belt, and his feet were in low tan shoes. He looked like the owner of a yacht on a summer vacation, but even the most inexperienced landlubber would clearly see that the steamer he commanded was not a yacht. He was about thirty years old and carried his size and weight with an ease that showed he had the training of an athlete.

After he had thrown aside his oilskins, he began to rummage through a big chest and finally threw out a lot of old togs for the inspection of his involuntary guests.

After he tossed aside his rain gear, he started digging through a big chest and eventually pulled out a bunch of old clothes for his unexpected guests to see.

"Good deal like a Baxter Street fit, I guess," he said, laughing. There was just a touch of brogue in his voice. "Never mind. Chuck off the wet ones. These will have to do until we can get the others dried in the engine-room. Roll[Pg 18] up the trousers and sleeves and look out that I don't tread on the tails of your coats."

"Just like a Baxter Street outfit, I suppose," he said, laughing. There was a hint of an accent in his voice. "No worries. Take off the wet ones. These will have to work until we can get the others dried in the engine-room. Roll up the pants and sleeves and make sure I don't step on the ends of your jackets."

The boys were glad to get out of their wet and chilled clothing and needed no second invitation. They were a funny looking trio when they had rigged themselves out in the captain's duds. The sleeves of the Midget's coat hung to the ground and his trousers' legs doubled up twice before he could walk. Harry was the tallest of the three and yet the captain's clothes hung on him like a sack on a pole.

The boys were happy to change out of their wet and cold clothes and didn’t need to be asked twice. They looked pretty silly when they put on the captain's gear. The sleeves of the Midget's coat dragged on the ground, and his pants were rolled up twice just so he could walk. Harry was the tallest of the three, but even his outfit looked like a sack on a pole.

"Now I'll bet you are hungry," said the captain as he surveyed the boys with a twinkle of amusement in his eyes. "What do you say to a cup of hot coffee and bite of biscuit? This ship is no hotel, as you will find before you get through with her. Nothing better in the cabin than in the fo'c'sel. But we have plenty of the sort we have and as often as we want it."

"Now I bet you're hungry," said the captain, looking at the boys with a playful glint in his eye. "How about a cup of hot coffee and a biscuit? This ship isn't a hotel, as you'll see before you're done with her. There's nothing better in the cabin than in the forecastle. But we've got plenty of what we have, and we can have it as often as we want."

He stepped to the door of the cabin as he spoke and called to a man on deck:

He walked over to the cabin door as he spoke and called out to a guy on deck:

"Send the cook aft."

"Send the chef back."

"Aye, aye, sir," came an answering shout through the howling of the wind. Presently another man appeared in the doorway and stood respectfully awaiting orders.

"Yes, sir," came a shout in response over the howling wind. Soon, another man appeared in the doorway and stood there, waiting for orders with respect.

"Cook, have these clothes taken to the engine-room to dry and then bring us a pot of coffee and[Pg 19] some biscuits. And serve coffee to the men on watch—it is a nasty night."

"Cook, take these clothes to the engine room to dry and then bring us a pot of coffee and[Pg 19] some biscuits. And serve coffee to the men on watch—it’s a rough night."

"Aye, aye, sir," answered the man cheerily. It was plain the men were glad to serve their captain.

"Sure thing, sir," the man replied cheerfully. It was clear that the men were happy to serve their captain.

In a short time the boys were sitting around the small table in the cabin eagerly discussing the coffee and hardtack as if it had been the most delicious repast.

In no time, the boys were gathered around the small table in the cabin, eagerly talking about the coffee and hardtack as if it were the most delicious meal.

A remark made by the captain had stuck in Harry's mind, and he took the first opportunity to put the question that was bothering him.

A comment made by the captain had stuck in Harry's mind, and he took the first chance to ask the question that was bothering him.

"Where are you going to land us, captain?"

"Where are you taking us, captain?"

The big man leaned back in his chair and laughed long and loud. The boys looked at him in surprise. It was not an agreeable laugh although there was no ill-humor in it.

The big man reclined in his chair and laughed heartily. The boys stared at him in surprise. It wasn't a friendly laugh, even though there was no bad mood behind it.

"What in thunder does he see to laugh at?" whispered Bert to Harry in a disgusted tone.

"What on earth does he find so funny?" Bert whispered to Harry in a disgusted tone.

"Wait, we shall find out in good time."

"Wait, we'll find out soon enough."

"We should like to be put ashore at Cottage City, if you please," continued Harry, ignoring the captain's merriment, "but if that is too much out of your way, Nantucket will do and we can take the boat home in the morning."

"We'd like to be dropped off at Cottage City, if that's okay with you," Harry said, ignoring the captain's laughter, "but if that's too far out of your way, Nantucket works too, and we can catch the boat home in the morning."

Again the captain went off into a paroxysm of laughter. The peals of loud guffaws grated on the ears of the anxious boys.

Again the captain burst into a fit of laughter. The loud guffaws grated on the nerves of the anxious boys.

"He can't be a bad man at heart," whispered[Pg 20] Mason to Harry, "or he wouldn't have taken so much trouble and run so much risk to pick us up after his steamer ran us down."

"He can't be a bad person deep down," whispered[Pg 20] Mason to Harry, "or he wouldn't have gone through all that trouble and taken so many risks to rescue us after his steamer hit us."

"No, I don't understand it. I feel as if I were being kidnapped," said Bert.

"No, I don't get it. It feels like I'm being kidnapped," said Bert.

Presently the captain's fit of humor passed and his face became serious again.

Currently, the captain's mood shifted and his expression turned serious once more.

"Boys," he said, "I shall have to ask you to take things as they are and ask no questions. You are my guests. Do not worry."

"Boys," he said, "I need you to accept things as they are and not ask any questions. You’re my guests. Don’t worry."

"But, captain, we must get home," said Mason petulantly.

"But, captain, we have to get home," Mason said irritably.

The man smiled at the speaker.

The man smiled at the speaker.

"I hope we will all get home sometime," he said, quietly.

"I hope we all get home soon," he said softly.

"You speak as if there were some doubt about it," said Harry quickly.

"You talk like there's any doubt about it," Harry said quickly.

"There is," answered the captain, slowly.

"There is," replied the captain, slowly.

The boys looked at one another in dismay. What did it mean? Harry was the first to recover his composure.

The boys exchanged worried glances. What did it mean? Harry was the first to regain his composure.

"You surely intend to land somewhere," he said, half questioningly.

"You must have a destination in mind," he said, half questioning.

"Sure—if we are lucky."

"Sure—if we're lucky."

"You mean that this storm is so bad that there is danger we may not weather it?"

"You mean this storm is so severe that there's a risk we might not make it through?"

Again the captain laughed his big laugh.

Again, the captain let out his hearty laugh.

"We'll weather this all right. It's only a cap[Pg 21]ful of wind for the old Mariella. She has ridden out many a storm that would make this one look like thirty cents."

"We'll get through this just fine. It's just a cap[Pg 21]ful of wind for the old Mariella. She's weathered many storms that would make this one seem like nothing."

"Then if there is no danger from the weather, we demand that you land us at the nearest port."

"Then if the weather poses no threat, we request that you take us to the nearest port."

Harry drew himself up and looked very important as he spoke. The captain only smiled indulgently.

Harry straightened up and looked really important as he spoke. The captain just smiled kindly.

"You might as well learn at the start, young gentlemen," he said quietly, "that there is no such word as demand recognized by Captain Dynamite."

"You might as well learn from the beginning, young gentlemen," he said quietly, "that there is no such word as demand acknowledged by Captain Dynamite."

"Sounds like a pirate name," whispered the irrepressible Midget, loud enough to be heard by the captain.

"Sounds like a pirate name," whispered the unstoppable Midget, loud enough for the captain to hear.

"I am something of a pirate," said the big man as if in reply. "Now I will be quite frank with you. I shall not make any port except that of my destination and that will be, if we have luck, in about six days from to-night. I am sorry that you will have to remain with me against your wishes, but you will admit that I am not responsible for your coming aboard. In fact, if you will pardon the allusion to the little accident back there, you are very lucky to be where you are and not tucked away in Davy Jones' locker. I shall consider you my guests and you may have the free run of the ship, but it will be impossible[Pg 22] for you to leave it until we reach port. Make the best of the situation, boys. It has been forced on us both."

"I’m a bit of a pirate," said the big man as if responding. "Honestly, I won’t stop at any port except my destination, which, if we’re lucky, will be in about six days from tonight. I’m sorry you have to stay with me against your will, but you have to admit I’m not responsible for you coming on board. In fact, if you’ll excuse the reference to the little mishap back there, you’re pretty lucky to be where you are instead of stuck in Davy Jones’ locker. I’ll consider you my guests, and you can move around the ship freely, but you won't be able[Pg 22] to leave until we reach port. Make the best of the situation, guys. It’s something we both have to deal with."

Harry jumped up impulsively, and held out his hand to the big man across the table.

Harry jumped up suddenly and extended his hand to the big guy across the table.

"Do not think we are ungrateful, sir. We know that we owe our lives to you and that you risked yours to save us from drowning. But you forget that we have folks ashore who will think we are drowned if we cannot get some word to them."

"Don't think we're ungrateful, sir. We know that we owe our lives to you and that you risked yours to save us from drowning. But you forget that we have family on shore who will believe we are drowned if we can't send them some word."

The big skipper jumped to his feet, grasped Harry's outstretched hand and shook it warmly.

The big captain jumped to his feet, grabbed Harry's outstretched hand, and shook it warmly.

"My boy," he said, "it is unfortunate and I regret it as much as you, but it cannot be helped. If we pull through this voyage all right, you will be able to get a message to your folks in the course of two weeks. Now, it is pretty well into the night and I must go on deck for the last watch, so you had better turn in."

"My boy," he said, "it's unfortunate and I regret it just as much as you do, but there's nothing we can do about it. If we make it through this voyage okay, you'll be able to send a message to your family in about two weeks. Now, it's getting late and I need to head up on deck for the last watch, so you should probably get some rest."

As he spoke, the captain opened a door that led off the cabin and disclosed a room as large as an ordinary stateroom with two berths on each side.

As he talked, the captain opened a door that led out of the cabin and revealed a room about the size of a regular stateroom, with two berths on each side.

"Here are four bunks. Turn in and sleep well. By the way, begin to feel any little qualms at the stomach yet?"

"Here are four bunks. Get some rest and sleep well. By the way, are you starting to feel any stomach jitters yet?"

The steamer, while like a house in comparison with the small boat in which they had been tossed[Pg 23] about, was still rolling and heaving in the heavy seas with which she was battling. But the boys were all good sailors and none of them felt anything like an attack of seasickness.

The steamer, while feeling like a house compared to the small boat they had been tossed around in[Pg 23], was still rolling and pitching in the rough seas it was struggling against. But the boys were all experienced sailors, and none of them felt any signs of seasickness.

Harry, whose anxiety for the worry and pain which his absence would cause those on shore, could not get off his mind the subject, and in a persistent way returned to it like a terrier to a bone.

Harry, who was anxious about the worry and pain his absence would cause those on shore, couldn't shake the thought from his mind and kept coming back to it like a dog with a favorite toy.

"Well, captain," he said, "admitting that for some reason which you do not care to tell us, it is impossible for you to land until the end of your voyage; will it not be possible to hail some passing vessel and send a message back that we are safe and sound?"

"Well, captain," he said, "considering that for some reason you’re not willing to share, you can’t land until the end of your journey; isn’t there a way to signal a passing ship and send a message back that we’re safe and sound?"

The captain's face darkened, and a look such as the boys had not seen there before, spread over his countenance. Instinctively they fell back from him in his anger.

The captain's expression turned grim, and a look the boys had never seen on him before crossed his face. Instinctively, they stepped back from him in his anger.

"I have told you that the situation cannot be remedied. Let us not discuss the matter further. You are my guests. Do not force me to make you my prisoners."

"I’ve told you that the situation can’t be fixed. Let’s not talk about it anymore. You’re my guests. Don’t make me turn you into my prisoners."


CHAPTER III

"She's like a battleship below."

As the captain left the cabin the boys looked at one another without speaking, for some minutes.

As the captain left the cabin, the boys looked at each other in silence for a few minutes.

"What do you make out of him?" asked Bert, who was the first to break the silence.

"What do you think of him?" asked Bert, who was the first to break the silence.

"Sure enough pirate" said the Midget, confidently. "Gee, did you see his face?"

"Definitely a pirate," said the Midget, confidently. "Wow, did you see his face?"

"Yes, he evidently has a very bad temper and it will be well for us not to cross him too far," said Harry, thoughtfully; "but I don't propose to stay on this ship any longer than is necessary, whatever her mission, and I shall keep my eyes open for a chance to get ashore, or to signal some passing vessel."

"Yeah, he clearly has a really bad temper, and it’s best we don’t push him too far," Harry said, thinking it over. "But I don’t plan to stay on this ship any longer than I have to, no matter what its mission is, and I’ll be on the lookout for a chance to get off or to wave down any passing ship."

"Well, we cannot do anything in the escape line to-night, so we might as well take his advice and turn in," said Bert, with a yawn.

"Well, we can't do anything in the escape line tonight, so we might as well take his advice and get some sleep," said Bert, yawning.

An inspection of the stateroom showed a very comfortable room fitted with two narrow bunks on each side. They were neatly made up, and the linen was fine and clean. Thoroughly worn out, the boys prepared for bed and for the time cast their troubles aside.[Pg 25]

An inspection of the stateroom revealed a cozy room with two narrow bunks on either side. They were neatly made, and the linens were nice and clean. Exhausted, the boys got ready for bed and for the moment set their troubles aside.[Pg 25]

As they were about to jump into their bunks, a slight grating noise was heard. They all stopped and waited in silence. There was no further sound. It seemed to have come from the cabin beyond. After a second's thought, Harry stepped quickly out of the stateroom and to the door that led to the deck.

As they were getting ready to jump into their beds, they heard a faint scraping noise. They all paused and listened in silence. There was no other sound. It seemed to come from the cabin next door. After a moment's thought, Harry quickly stepped out of the stateroom and headed to the door that led to the deck.

"We are no longer guests," he said, quietly, as he turned back into the stateroom and jumped into his bunk with resignation.

"We're not guests anymore," he said quietly, turning back into the stateroom and jumping into his bunk with resignation.

"What do you mean?" asked Bert, in a whisper.

"What do you mean?" Bert asked in a whisper.

"I mean that we are prisoners," answered Harry. "The door of the cabin is locked on the outside. That is the noise we heard. However, we can do nothing to-night, and as I am very tired and sleepy I am going to turn in."

"I mean that we’re trapped," Harry replied. "The cabin door is locked from the outside. That’s the noise we heard. Anyway, there’s nothing we can do tonight, and since I’m really tired and sleepy, I’m going to bed."

"Say, Hal," said Mason, in an awed tone, "what are we up against?"

"Hey, Hal," Mason said in a amazed tone, "what are we facing?"

"Search me," replied Harry, in a sleepy voice. "We may be able to learn something in the morning. Let's go to sleep now. We may need all our wits by and by."

"Search me," Harry replied, sounding sleepy. "We might find out something in the morning. Let's get some sleep now. We might need all our wits later."

Notwithstanding the mystery of their situation the boys were soon fast asleep, and when they awoke, the sun was streaming through the port holes of the cabin. The steamer seemed to be moving along on an even keel. Apparently they had ridden out the storm of the night before.[Pg 26] Harry was the first to spring from his bunk. He hastened to the cabin, his first impulse being to try the door and see if they were still prisoners. He started with surprise when he reached the outer room. At the table in the centre sat the captain working at some maps and papers. He looked up pleasantly as Harry entered.

Despite the mystery of their situation, the boys quickly fell asleep, and when they woke up, the sun was shining through the cabin portholes. The steamer appeared to be moving smoothly. It seemed they had weathered the storm from the night before.[Pg 26] Harry was the first to jump out of his bunk. He rushed to the cabin, eager to try the door and see if they were still prisoners. He was surprised to find the captain sitting at the table in the center, working on some maps and papers. The captain looked up with a friendly smile as Harry entered.

"Good morning," he said cheerily, "did you sleep well after your ducking?"

"Good morning," he said cheerfully, "did you sleep well after your dunking?"

"Perhaps we should have slept better if we had not been locked in," answered Harry, a little surprised at his own temerity.

"Maybe we would have slept better if we hadn't been locked in," Harry replied, somewhat surprised by his own boldness.

The man laughed good-humoredly.

The man laughed cheerfully.

"Oh, that should not have disturbed you," he said. "You see we did not seem to understand each other very well last night when I left you. I think we shall do better to-day. Now what do you say to some breakfast? You have slept pretty late. It is twelve o'clock. There are your clothes. You all better tumble out and get dressed. I am hungry myself and just about to turn in. I have been on deck all night. The storm has passed, and we are making very good time on our voyage, you will be glad to hear, no doubt."

"Oh, that shouldn’t have bothered you," he said. "You see, we didn’t seem to really understand each other last night when I left. I think we’ll do better today. So, what do you say to some breakfast? You’ve slept in quite a bit. It’s twelve o’clock. There are your clothes. You all should get up and get dressed. I’m hungry myself and just about to head to bed. I’ve been on deck all night. The storm has passed, and we’re making really good time on our journey, which I’m sure you’ll be happy to hear."

All the temper of the night before had disappeared, and the captain was again the big, bluff, good-natured man that had first impressed the boys. There was nothing to do but to follow[Pg 27] his advice and watch for developments, and Harry, putting aside any thought of further prying into the affairs of the mysterious ship and her strange skipper for the present, returned to the stateroom and began to dress. The captain went to the door of the cabin and called. Again the same man answered with a respectful salute.

All the tension from the night before had vanished, and the captain was once again the big, friendly guy who had first impressed the boys. There was nothing to do but to follow[Pg 27] his advice and wait for things to unfold. Harry set aside any thoughts of digging further into the mysterious ship and its strange captain for now, went back to the stateroom, and started getting dressed. The captain went to the cabin door and called out. Once again, the same man responded with a respectful salute.

"Tell the cook to serve breakfast."

"Ask the chef to make breakfast."

"Aye, aye, sir."

"Yes, sir."

These words seemed to be the extent of the man's vocabulary. The boys soon learned that it was the only spoken formula of the ship's crew unless in reply to questions, which were rarely asked. The captain's words were commands. He ruled the entire ship's company with a power as absolute as that of a monarch. But the yoke did not seem to gall. The men's obedience was the sort that is given to one loved and honored.

These words seemed to be all the man could say. The boys quickly realized that it was the only thing the ship's crew said out loud, except when answering questions, which were hardly ever asked. The captain's words were orders. He led the whole crew with a power as absolute as that of a king. But the burden didn’t seem to weigh them down. The men’s obedience was the kind shown to someone they loved and respected.

By the time the boys had gotten into their clothes, which had been carefully dried and pressed, they found that breakfast had been spread in the cabin. It was as tempting as a meal at home. The hard tack of the night before had been replaced by an omelet, hot biscuits, fried potatoes, and a steaming pot of coffee, which from previous experience the boys knew to be good. The savory odor of the food appealed strongly to their appetites, and for the moment[Pg 28] they forgot everything except that they were very hungry and that there were good things to eat at hand. The captain took his place smilingly at the head of the table, and the Midget whispered to Harry:

By the time the boys got dressed in their carefully dried and pressed clothes, they found breakfast laid out in the cabin. It looked just as tempting as a meal at home. The hard tack from the night before was replaced by an omelet, hot biscuits, fried potatoes, and a steaming pot of coffee, which the boys knew from previous experience was really good. The delicious smell of the food made their appetites surge, and for a moment[Pg 28] they forgot everything except how hungry they were and how great the food looked. The captain cheerfully took his place at the head of the table, and the Midget whispered to Harry:

"He's not such a bad sort, after all. I wonder what kind of a pirate he is, anyway."

"He's not such a bad guy, after all. I wonder what type of pirate he is, anyway."

"Sit down, boys, and buckle to. Hard tack does not stay long by you, but I told you last night I only eat what I give my men so that I could offer you nothing better then. I hope you will enjoy your breakfast. I have a very good cook. Used to sub at the Waldorf but got into a little trouble on shore and is trying the sea. Stuck his mate under the rib with a carving knife and is taking a voyage with me for the benefit of his health."

"Sit down, guys, and get ready to eat. Hardtack doesn’t last long with you, but I told you last night I only eat what I provide for my crew, so I can’t offer you anything better. I hope you enjoy your breakfast. I have a really great cook. He used to work at the Waldorf but got into a bit of trouble on land and is now trying life at sea. He stabbed his mate with a carving knife and is taking this trip with me for his health."

"Aren't you afraid he might do the same to you some time if he lost his temper?" asked Mason, looking at the captain with his eyes as big as saucers. He did not like the idea of sailing with a desperado of that sort.

"Aren't you worried he might do the same to you someday if he loses his temper?" Mason asked, staring at the captain with wide eyes. He didn't like the idea of sailing with someone like that.

"Oh, no," answered the big man, carelessly; "I should stick first, you know, and then it was in self defense that the blow was struck. Let me give you some of this omelet. You will find it as good as any you could get at home."

"Oh, no," replied the big guy, dismissively; "I should go first, you know, and then it was self-defense when the hit was thrown. Let me serve you some of this omelet. You'll find it's just as good as anything you could get at home."

The boys looked at the strange man in won[Pg 29]der. They could not make out his character. But they ate their breakfast with a relish just the same, and the captain entertained them with tales of the sea that made them alternately laugh at his drollery or wonder at his daring. Not that he ever brought himself into the stories, but the boys knew that he was the hero of the adventures which he related, because they felt that he would have acted in just the way his heroes did. There was a strange air about the man that attracted them to him. They felt that he would be a firm friend and an unrelenting enemy. They liked to be with him, liked to hear him talk, liked to see him smile, but they all felt that they should dread to incur his anger.

The boys stared at the strange man in wonder. They couldn’t figure him out. But they still enjoyed their breakfast, and the captain kept them entertained with sea tales that made them laugh at his humor or marvel at his bravery. He never included himself in the stories, but the boys knew he was the hero of the adventures he told, because they sensed he would have acted just like his heroes did. There was something about the man that drew them in. They felt he would be a loyal friend and a fierce enemy. They enjoyed being around him, liked listening to him talk, liked seeing him smile, but they all felt they would hate to make him angry.

He was rough and unpolished, but he dressed like a dandy. He had evidently changed his clothing since coming off watch, for he wore at breakfast another flannel suit and low, patent leather shoes. His trousers were carefully creased and turned up. He resembled more, in appearance, a prosperous broker than the captain of a steamer whose mysterious character made him seem all the more out of place aboard. When they had finished breakfast he took a gold cigarette case from his pocket, and offered it to the boys.

He was rugged and unrefined, but he dressed like a stylish guy. He had obviously changed his clothes since his watch ended because he wore a different flannel suit and some low, shiny shoes at breakfast. His pants were neatly creased and cuffed. He looked more like a successful broker than the captain of a steamer, whose mysterious vibe made him feel even more out of place on board. After they finished breakfast, he pulled out a gold cigarette case from his pocket and offered it to the guys.

"Smoke?" he asked, carelessly.

"Want a smoke?" he asked, carelessly.

The boys declined with thanks. The captain[Pg 30] stretched himself and yawned as he rose from the table.

The boys politely declined. The captain[Pg 30] stretched and yawned as he got up from the table.

"Now, young gentlemen," he said, "I am going to turn in. Make yourselves at home. I take it that I have your word that you will not concern yourselves with that which does not concern you."

"Alright, guys," he said, "I'm going to bed now. Make yourselves comfortable. I trust you all to keep to yourselves and not get involved in things that aren’t your business."

"That depends upon how you construe the remark," said Harry, promptly. "I should prefer to remain a prisoner in this cabin than not to use my senses to my own advantage. For one, captain, I shall not promise except that I will not do anything that might be considered prying into your affairs. We feel sufficiently under obligations to you to prevent us from taking advantage of your hospitality. It might be proper for me to tell you, though, that I shall make every effort to get off your ship. Not that I object to your company, but because we all feel that we owe it to the folks at home."

"That depends on how you interpret the comment," Harry replied quickly. "I'd rather stay locked up in this cabin than ignore my instincts for my own benefit. For starters, captain, I won't make any promises other than that I won't interfere in your business. We feel grateful enough to you to avoid taking advantage of your kindness. However, I should let you know that I'm going to do everything I can to leave your ship. It's not that I don't enjoy your company, but we all think it's our responsibility to those at home."

The captain laughed. He did not seem at all annoyed at Harry's frank statement.

The captain laughed. He didn’t seem bothered at all by Harry’s honest comment.

"Begorra, I like you for your honesty. Go on deck and get the air. You will find that I have not much to fear in the way of losing your company just at present. Believe me, though, youngsters"—here he became serious again—"if I could do so—with—what shall I say—with safety, I should be only too glad to put you ashore[Pg 31] and to relieve the anxiety of those who are waiting for you. But in this matter I must be the judge, for there are more persons involved and more interests at stake in the voyage of the Mariella than you can conceive. But I will put no restrictions on you. Go on deck and amuse yourselves as well as you can and make the best of the situation. Before we part company you will understand my position better. Wait, I will introduce you to the mate."

"Honestly, I appreciate your straightforwardness. Go up on deck and get some fresh air. You'll see that I’m not really worried about losing your company right now. But, believe me, kids"—he turned serious again—"if I could—well, how should I say it—safely, I would be more than happy to drop you off onshore and ease the worries of those waiting for you. However, in this situation, I have to be the one to decide, because there are more people involved and more at stake on the voyage of the Mariella than you realize. But I won't impose any restrictions on you. Go on deck and try to have a good time and make the best of things. Before we go our separate ways, you’ll understand my position better. Hold on, I’ll introduce you to the mate.[Pg 31]"

He stepped to the cabin door and called:

He walked up to the cabin door and shouted:

"Suarez."

"Suárez."

"Aye, aye, sir," came the prompt response, and a small man appeared in the doorway.

"Aye, aye, sir," came the quick reply, and a short man showed up in the doorway.

"Suarez," said the captain, "these are the young gentlemen we picked out of the sea last night. They are rather unwilling voyagers, for which they cannot be blamed. Take them on deck and let them have the run of the ship."

"Suarez," said the captain, "these are the young men we rescued from the sea last night. They're not exactly eager travelers, which is understandable. Take them on deck and let them explore the ship."

The mate looked up quickly at the captain in a questioning manner, as if he would like to protest, if he dared. The captain smiled.

The mate looked up at the captain quickly, clearly wanting to ask something, if he felt he could. The captain smiled.

"The run of the ship, Suarez," he repeated, as if in answer to the unspoken protest.

"The ship's journey, Suarez," he said again, as if responding to an unvoiced objection.

Again the mate saluted, and turned gravely to the deck, followed by the boys. He was a small, swarthy man, in great contrast to the captain. He looked like a Spaniard. His hair[Pg 32] was black and he wore a mustache and goatee, and his small, black eyes were as alert as a cat's and seemed to take in everything at once in all parts of the ship. His expression was one of keen shrewdness, but there was a look of care and anxiety that softened it. His actions and manner were those of a man who does not wish to attract attention. As they reached the deck he turned to the boys, and bowing, said with a slight foreign accent:

Again, the mate greeted them and turned seriously to the deck, followed by the boys. He was a small, dark-skinned man, which was a stark contrast to the captain. He looked like a Spaniard. His hair was black, and he had a mustache and goatee, while his small, black eyes were as alert as a cat's and seemed to notice everything all at once on the ship. His expression showed sharp intelligence, but there was also a look of concern and anxiety that softened it. His actions and demeanor were those of someone who didn’t want to draw attention. As they reached the deck, he turned to the boys and, bowing, said with a slight foreign accent:

"Good morning, young gentlemen. I hope you rested well after your unfortunate experience. The captain says you are to have the run of the ship. Make yourselves at home, and if there is anything that I can do to add to your pleasure, pray call upon me without reserve."

"Good morning, young men. I hope you slept well after your unfortunate experience. The captain says you can explore the ship freely. Make yourselves at home, and if there's anything I can do to make your stay more enjoyable, please don't hesitate to ask."

His voice was soft, and he spoke with a great politeness of manner.

His voice was gentle, and he spoke with a lot of politeness.

"He's too smooth," whispered Mason. "He will bear watching."

"He's way too slick," Mason whispered. "We should keep an eye on him."

The mate did not seem inclined to further conversation. He bowed again, waved his hand as if to indicate that the ship was theirs, and turned and walked to the bridge.

The crew member didn't seem interested in chatting any more. He nodded again, waved his hand as if to say that the ship was theirs, and then turned and walked to the bridge.

The boys looked around them. There was nothing to be seen but an expanse of water. There was not a sign of land or a vessel. The storm of the night before had subsided, except[Pg 33] that the waves were still running high under a brightly shining sun. Harry put his hand to his eyes to shade them, and scanned the horizon in every direction, but there was not even a speck to be seen.

The boys looked around. All they could see was a vast stretch of water. There was no sign of land or any boats. The storm from the night before had calmed down, except[Pg 33] the waves were still rolling high under a bright sun. Harry shielded his eyes with his hand and searched the horizon in every direction, but there wasn’t even a speck in sight.

"The captain was right when he said there was not much danger of losing our company," he said, as he finished his observation.

"The captain was right when he said there wasn't much risk of losing our group," he said, as he wrapped up his observation.

"Unless we jump over and swim for it."

"Unless we leap over and swim for it."

"What would we swim for?"

"What would we swim for?"

"I am very well satisfied to keep the planks under my feet and wait for something to turn up."

"I feel completely fine just standing on these planks and waiting for something to happen."

"Me, too," piped the Midget. "Let's make a round of the ship."

"Me too," said the Midget. "Let's take a tour of the ship."

The steamer was comparatively small. In the darkness of the night and the storm, and viewed from the little sloop, she had looked like an ocean liner as she suddenly came upon them. Everything about her was spick and span. The decks were as clean as holy stone and water could make them, and all the brasswork shone brightly in the sun. The decks seemed strangely deserted. Suarez, the mate, paced the bridge stolidly. On the forward deck two men were on lookout. In the pilot-house a sailor stood at the wheel, while behind him stood a man whose eyes roamed constantly from the compass to the horizon.

The steamer was relatively small. In the dark of night and the storm, seen from the little sloop, it had looked like a cruise ship as it suddenly appeared before them. Everything about it was spotless. The decks were as clean as holy stone and water could make them, and all the brass fittings gleamed brightly in the sunlight. The decks felt oddly empty. Suarez, the mate, paced the bridge with a stoic expression. On the forward deck, two men were keeping watch. In the pilot house, a sailor was at the wheel, while behind him, a man constantly scanned the compass and the horizon.

The boys walked to the gunwale and looked[Pg 34] over at the broad expanse of sea. For some time no one spoke. Each was thinking of the worry and anxiety that those at home were suffering.

The boys walked to the edge of the boat and looked[Pg 34] out at the wide stretch of sea. For a while, no one said anything. Everyone was lost in thoughts about the worry and stress that their families back home were feeling.

"Say, Hal," said Bert, finally, "what do you make out of this craft? Of course it is out of the question to think of a pirate in these days, but there is certainly some mystery about this steamer and her captain."

"Hey, Hal," Bert finally said, "what do you think of this ship? It's totally unrealistic to consider a pirate these days, but there’s definitely something mysterious about this steamer and her captain."

"Did you notice he said that if he could do so with safety he would put us ashore? What does that word 'safety' mean? There is no danger from the elements, he admits. What other danger threatens him if he goes ashore? There is some mystery here and as we have become a part of it it is up to us to find out what it is."

"Did you catch that he said if he could do it safely, he would drop us off? What does that word 'safely' mean? He admits there's no danger from the elements. What other threat is there if he goes ashore? There's some mystery here, and since we've become part of it, it's our responsibility to find out what it is."

"Yes, but how?"

"Yes, but how do we?"

"By keeping our eyes and ears open is all I can suggest now."

"All I can suggest now is to keep our eyes and ears open."

"Let's go forward and take a look around."

"Let's move ahead and check things out."

The boys strolled along the deck that narrowed into a passage about three feet wide as they reached the forward house, which apparently contained the petty officers' rooms. In the centre was the door that opened into the engine-room. Only the upper works of the big engines were visible. The boys stopped. A man, evidently the engineer, or one of his assistants, sat[Pg 35] on a leather-covered seat facing the levers and indicators. He looked up for a moment from the paper he was reading, and nodded to the boys with a smile, and then returned to his reading without a word.

The boys walked along the deck, which narrowed into a passage about three feet wide as they reached the front house, which seemed to hold the petty officers' rooms. In the center was the door that led into the engine room. Only the upper parts of the large engines were visible. The boys paused. A man, clearly the engineer or one of his assistants, sat[Pg 35] on a leather-covered seat facing the levers and gauges. He looked up briefly from the paper he was reading, nodded to the boys with a smile, and then went back to his reading without saying a word.

"Fine morning, sir, after the storm," said Bert.

"Great morning, sir, after the storm," said Bert.

The man nodded again without raising his eyes from his paper.

The man nodded again without looking up from his paper.

"Cheery lot of conversationalists," said Bert, in disgust, as they moved on.

"Great group of talkers," said Bert, in disgust, as they continued on.

At the forward end of the house was the galley. As they reached this a black, woolly head popped out of the open half-door. The negro grinned widely and quickly drew back his head.

At the front of the house was the kitchen. As they got there, a black, curly-haired head popped out of the open half-door. The guy grinned broadly and quickly pulled his head back inside.

"Good morning, Sambo," said the persistent Bert.

"Good morning, Sambo," said the determined Bert.

The negro bobbed his head, and grinned still more broadly, but did not speak a word.

The Black man nodded his head and smiled even wider, but didn't say a word.

"All lost their tongues," said Bert.

"Everyone was speechless," Bert said.

Just forward of the deck house a small hatch stood open. It led to a narrow iron ladder that ran almost perpendicularly down into the dark depths below. The boys peered into the blackness without being able to distinguish anything.

Just in front of the deck house, a small hatch was open. It led to a narrow iron ladder that went almost straight down into the dark depths below. The boys looked into the darkness but couldn’t make out anything.

"I am going down," said Harry, after a moment's pause.

"I’m going down," said Harry, after a moment's pause.

He stepped over the edge and placing his foot[Pg 36] on the first rung of the ladder, began to descend with great caution. The others watched him anxiously until he disappeared in the darkness. They waited at the hatch for a long time before he reappeared. When he did he climbed out with a serious face and drew his companions away to the other side of the steamer's deck.

He stepped over the edge and placed his foot[Pg 36] on the first rung of the ladder, starting to go down carefully. The others watched him nervously until he vanished into the darkness. They hung around the hatch for a while before he came back. When he did, he climbed out with a serious expression and led his friends to the other side of the steamer's deck.

His expression indicated that he had discovered something of more than ordinary interest.

His expression showed that he had found something particularly intriguing.

"What is it?" whispered Bert, when they were out of range of the galley and engine-room.

"What is it?" Bert whispered when they were out of earshot of the galley and engine room.

Harry leaned toward his companions impressively as he answered in an awed tone:

Harry leaned toward his friends, sounding amazed as he replied:

"Say, fellows, she's a regular warship down below."

"Hey, guys, she's like a full-on battleship down there."


CHAPTER IV

A Lesson in Patriotism

The boys huddled together at an obscure part of the deck and Harry described to them what he had seen below decks.

The boys gathered in a tucked-away spot on the deck, and Harry told them about what he had seen below.

"There are two eight pounders and two rapid fire guns with their noses poked against port holes that can be opened at a moment's notice. And besides these, there is an arsenal of small arms like rifles, pistols, swords, and cutlasses. Everything seems to be in apple pie order and all ready for use. If we were living in the days of the old pirate ships, I should say that we were likely to fly the black flag at any moment."

"There are two eight-pound cannons and two rapid-fire guns aimed at portholes that can be opened in an instant. In addition to these, there's a stockpile of small weapons like rifles, pistols, swords, and cutlasses. Everything looks perfectly organized and ready to go. If this were the era of old pirate ships, I would say we're about to raise the black flag at any moment."

"What do you make of it, Hal?" asked Bert.

"What do you think about it, Hal?" asked Bert.

"I tell you I cannot make anything of it. It is beyond me. The only thing we can do is to keep our weather eyes open and watch for developments. It is certainly a ship of mystery and the captain does not apparently propose to enlighten us as to her character. But he seems to be an honest man, and I think we are perfectly safe in leaving all to him, and I believe that sometime we shall know what we are up against. In the meantime, however, as I warned him, I shall[Pg 38] make every effort to get off the ship, or to notify some passing craft that we are on board safe and sound, so that word may be carried to those on shore. They must believe that we are drowned by this time, particularly if they have picked up the wreck of the yacht."

"I honestly can't make sense of it. It's beyond me. All we can do is stay alert and watch for what happens next. It's definitely a mysterious ship, and the captain doesn't seem willing to explain anything about it. But he appears to be a good guy, and I think we're safe leaving everything to him. I believe we'll eventually find out what we're dealing with. In the meantime, as I warned him, I’ll[Pg 38] do everything I can to get off the ship or signal to any passing boats that we're on board and okay, so that someone on shore knows we're alive. They must think we're dead by now, especially if they found the wreck of the yacht."

"Let's go aft and take a look over the cabin while the captain is asleep. All's fair in love and war, you know, and we are certainly entitled to find out all we can about our surroundings, particularly in view of Hal's investigations below."

"Let's head to the back and check out the cabin while the captain is asleep. Everything's fair in love and war, you know, and we definitely have the right to discover as much as we can about our surroundings, especially considering Hal's inquiries below."

The boys strolled leisurely aft, taking care not to arouse the suspicions of any one about the decks. They entered the cabin. All was still. The sun shone brightly through the port holes and lay in a wide beam on the big map that the captain had been studying when the boys turned out of bed.

The boys walked casually to the back, making sure not to raise any suspicions from anyone on deck. They entered the cabin. Everything was quiet. The sun shone brightly through the portholes, casting a wide beam on the large map that the captain had been examining when the boys got out of bed.

"Let's have a look at this," said Bert, quickly approaching the table as he spoke. "It may tell us something of our destination."

"Let’s check this out," Bert said, moving quickly toward the table as he spoke. "It might give us some clues about where we’re headed."

The boys gathered eagerly around.

The guys gathered eagerly around.

The map was a hydrographic chart of the Caribbean Sea. Cuba and Porto Rico appeared on a large scale. The boys studied it in silence and finally Mason shook his head in despair.

The map was a detailed chart of the Caribbean Sea. Cuba and Puerto Rico were shown in great detail. The boys examined it quietly, and finally, Mason shook his head in frustration.

"That does not tell much," he said. "We may be going to Cuba or Porto Rico, but if we[Pg 39] are, why all this secrecy and those firearms?"

"That doesn't say much," he said. "We might be heading to Cuba or Puerto Rico, but if we[Pg 39] are, then what's with all this secrecy and those guns?"

"They may fit in together more closely than you think," said Harry, who had been studying the map thoughtfully.

"They might be more closely connected than you realize," said Harry, who had been looking at the map with deep concentration.

"What do you mean?" asked Bert.

"What do you mean?" Bert asked.

"I do not mean anything yet. Let us wait. Speculation and guessing will not solve this mystery."

"I don't mean anything yet. Let's wait. Speculating and guessing won't solve this mystery."

"Look here," said the Midget, who had been browsing around the cabin. He had lifted one of the cushions from a settee and disclosed beneath a locker which contained a number of flags of different colors and shapes.

"Check this out," said the Midget, who had been exploring the cabin. He had lifted one of the cushions from a couch and revealed a locker underneath that contained a variety of flags in different colors and shapes.

"What are those?" asked the boys in chorus.

"What are those?" the boys asked together.

"They are signal flags. Now let's find the code and then we can signal some passing ship."

"They're signal flags. Now let's look for the code so we can signal a passing ship."

"Here's the code," announced Harry, who, as soon as Mason had spoken had gone to a little book shelf on the wall of the cabin. "But how are we to get the flags up without attracting attention?"

"Here's the code," announced Harry, who, as soon as Mason had spoken, went to a small bookshelf on the wall of the cabin. "But how are we supposed to get the flags up without drawing attention?"

"Easy. We will make up our signal and then take the flags necessary to show it and conceal them where we can get them at any moment. Then when we sight a vessel we can bend them onto the halliards and have them aloft before anyone can interfere. It would be a minute or two before they could haul them down, even if[Pg 40] they discovered them at once, and in that time it is likely that the other ship would have read them. Anyway, it is worth trying."

"Simple. We’ll create our signal and then grab the flags we need to display it, keeping them hidden where we can access them quickly. When we spot a ship, we can attach them to the halliards and raise them before anyone has a chance to stop us. It would take a minute or two for them to bring them down, even if[Pg 40] they notice right away, and during that time, it’s likely the other ship would interpret them. Anyway, it’s worth a shot."

"I think you are right," said Harry. "Nothing venture, nothing have. Let's make the signal."

"I think you're right," said Harry. "Nothing ventured, nothing gained. Let's make the signal."

He took the code book from the shelf and opened it on the table.

He grabbed the code book from the shelf and laid it open on the table.

"In the first place, it is necessary to know what you want to say before you pick out your flags. Now what shall the message be?"

"In the first place, you need to know what you want to say before you choose your flags. So, what should the message be?"

"Say we have been kidnapped by a pirate ship and want assistance," suggested the Midget, wisely.

"Let’s say we’ve been taken hostage by a pirate ship and need help," suggested the Midget, wisely.

"Nonsense," replied Bert, "we don't want to say anything about the ship. We have nothing against her, nor her captain. Didn't they save our lives? All that we want is to be taken off and if that is not possible to have word sent home that we are all right, and then we can see the thing out comfortably. In fact, I for one, would much prefer staying aboard if it were possible to get word ashore. We do not know what interesting adventures may be in store for us aboard this strange craft."

"Nonsense," Bert replied, "we don’t want to say anything negative about the ship. We have nothing against her or her captain. Didn’t they save our lives? All we want is to be rescued, and if that’s not possible, to get a message sent home that we’re alright, and then we can handle things comfortably. In fact, I personally would much rather stay on board if we could get a message to shore. We don’t know what exciting adventures might be waiting for us on this strange vessel."

"Well, anyway, let's frame a message."

"Well, anyway, let's put together a message."

"It's got to be short, for we cannot use any more flags than is absolutely necessary, as we may be discovered before we can get them up. How's this: 'Report Hamilton, Mason, and Wilson[Pg 41] picked up from wrecked yacht off Cottage City by steamer Mariella. All well.'"

"It's got to be short because we can’t use any more flags than absolutely necessary; we might be discovered before we can get them up. How about this: 'Report Hamilton, Mason, and Wilson[Pg 41] picked up from wrecked yacht off Cottage City by steamer Mariella. All well.'"

"Fine," said Mason. "Hal, your massive intellect astonishes me more and more each day."

"Fine," Mason said. "Hal, your incredible intelligence amazes me more and more every day."

After some discussion, the boys selected the proper flags and laid them to one side. The problem of getting them aloft then presented itself.

After some discussion, the boys picked out the right flags and set them aside. The issue of how to get them up then came up.

"There must be halliards already bent for the use of signals," said Harry. "I will go out on deck and have a quiet look for them."

"There should already be halyards set up for signaling," said Harry. "I'll head out on deck and take a quick look for them."

He returned shortly from his inspection.

He came back quickly from his inspection.

"Everything is ready for instant use," he reported, "but we must have the flags bent onto a separate piece of rope so that all we shall have to do is to fasten the rope to the halliards and send the flags aloft. And then we must also stow the flags somewhere where we can get at them easily as soon as we see another vessel."

"Everything is set for immediate use," he reported, "but we need to attach the flags to a separate piece of rope so that all we have to do is secure the rope to the halliards and raise the flags. Plus, we need to store the flags somewhere accessible so we can grab them quickly when we spot another vessel."

"Leave that to me, captain," said Mason, saluting with a grin. "Right under my bunk is a place. All you fellows watch where I put them, so that if I am not with you when the ship comes along you can do the trick. No telling when a man of my fiery temper may be put in irons on a ship like this."

"Leave that to me, captain," Mason said with a grin and a salute. "There's a spot right under my bunk. You guys keep an eye on where I put them, so if I'm not around when the ship comes, you can handle it. You never know when someone with my fiery temper might end up in handcuffs on a ship like this."

The boys carefully stowed away the flags after they had bent them in their proper order to a[Pg 42] spare piece of rope which Mason picked up on deck. They now felt that they had done as much as lay within their power to relieve the anxiety of the folks at home, and all that remained was to keep a sharp lookout for a passing ship. They arranged watches so that one of them should be on deck during all of the daylight hours, and all hands were to keep their eyes open through the port holes and from such other points of vantage as they could take at all times when it was light enough to see a passing ship.

The boys carefully packed away the flags after arranging them properly with a[Pg 42] spare piece of rope that Mason found on deck. They felt they had done everything possible to ease their families' worries back home, and now all that was left was to watch for a passing ship. They set up a schedule so that one of them would be on deck throughout the daylight hours, and everyone was to stay alert through the port holes and from any other good vantage points whenever it was light enough to spot a passing ship.

This satisfactorily off their minds, the boys took more interest in a survey of their prison ship, for so they had begun to look upon her, although each one of them had made up his mind that he would like to see the adventure out.

This settled in their minds, the boys became more interested in exploring their prison ship, as they had started to think of it, even though each of them had decided they wanted to stick it out through the adventure.

That night before dinner they met the captain again in the cabin. The maps were still lying on the table.

That night before dinner, they met the captain again in the cabin. The maps were still on the table.

"Do you see this big island here, boys?" he asked. "It looks big on the map, but it is a very small spot on the face of the earth, and yet its people have suffered more misery, injustice, and oppression than the world will ever know."

"Do you see this big island here, guys?" he asked. "It looks large on the map, but it's a tiny spot on the planet, and yet the people there have endured more suffering, injustice, and oppression than the world will ever understand."

"Discontented people always quarrelling with their government are usually unhappy. They bring most of their misery on themselves."

"Unhappy people who are constantly arguing with their government tend to be discontent. They often create much of their own unhappiness."

Harry spoke carelessly. He was not much[Pg 43] interested in the wrongs of Cuba. He was surprised to see the captain's eyes flash again with that fierce fire that had marked them when he first defied him.

Harry spoke without thinking. He wasn’t very[Pg 43] interested in the injustices of Cuba. He was taken aback to see the captain's eyes light up again with that intense fire that had been there when he first challenged him.

"Discontented, is it," almost shouted the captain. "And do you know why, boy?"

"Are you feeling discontented?" the captain almost shouted. "Do you know why, kid?"

"I am sure I do not, Captain Dynamite, except that it is apparently born in them."

"I’m pretty sure I don’t, Captain Dynamite, except that it seems to be something they’re naturally gifted with."

"Yes, that's the way most of the world, ignorant of poor Cuba's trials, looks at the matter. Statesmen have investigated and reported back to the halls of Congress and Cuba and her wrongs have been laid away in the dusty archives."

"Yes, that's how most of the world, unaware of Cuba's struggles, views the situation. Politicians have looked into it and reported back to Congress, while Cuba and her injustices have been filed away in the dusty archives."

"Look," he said, pointing again at the map, and involuntarily the boys gathered closer around him and peered at the parchment. "That land, as God made it, was the fairest that the eye ever looked upon."

"Look," he said, pointing again at the map, and without meaning to, the boys moved in closer around him and stared at the parchment. "That land, as God created it, was the most beautiful sight ever seen."

Captain Dynamite paused for a moment and seemed to grow more calm. He seated himself with his elbows on the table behind him and deftly rolled a cigarette with one hand. The boys, interested now because of his intense feeling, waited for him to continue.

Captain Dynamite paused for a moment and appeared to calm down. He sat down with his elbows on the table behind him and skillfully rolled a cigarette with one hand. The boys, now intrigued by his strong emotions, waited for him to continue.

"Youngsters," he said finally, "let me give you a little piece of history of these 'discontented' folks and perhaps you will regard their condition with different eyes and hearts. Your text-books[Pg 44] at school have undoubtedly told you that Spanish rule in Cuba began in 1511, when Diego Valesquez subjugated the peaceful natives, and the Spanish methods of conquest made a record that lives to this day.

"Young people," he said at last, "let me share a bit of history about these 'discontented' individuals, and maybe you’ll see their situation in a new light. Your textbooks[Pg 44] at school have probably mentioned that Spanish rule in Cuba started in 1511, when Diego Velázquez conquered the peaceful natives, and the Spanish conquest methods left a legacy that still exists today."

"See this island here," said the captain, pointing to Hayti. "At that time almost uninhabited, its wild shores and hidden inlets served as places of concealment for buccaneers. These pirates of the Spanish Main not alone indulged in the adventurous pastime of smuggling, but they attacked and plundered Spanish trading ships and even made forceful expeditions upon land, ravaging cities and towns. They were encouraged in their depredations by other nations unfriendly to Spain. Henry Morgan, one of these buccaneers, who was commissioned as a privateer, was knighted by England in 1671 because of his prowess as a legalized pirate.

"Check out this island here," said the captain, pointing to Hayti. "Back then, it was almost uninhabited, with its wild shores and hidden inlets serving as hideouts for pirates. These pirates of the Spanish Main not only engaged in the risky business of smuggling, but they also attacked and looted Spanish trading ships and even launched raids on land, pillaging cities and towns. They received support in their exploits from other nations that were hostile to Spain. Henry Morgan, one of these pirates, who was given a privateer commission, was knighted by England in 1671 because of his skills as a legalized pirate.

"In 1762, Havana was besieged by the English and the Seven Years War began. The British were successful and under English rule the ports of Cuba were opened to free trade and an era of progress was inaugurated. But it was short lived, and in 1763 Cuba fell again into the hands of Spain, England trading the island for Florida. The two first governors under the new Spanish régime were liberal, just, and progressive. They[Pg 45] were Luis de Las Casas, appointed in 1790, and the Count of Santa Clara, who succeeded him in 1796.

"In 1762, Havana was under siege by the British as the Seven Years War kicked off. The British were successful, and with English control, Cuba's ports opened up to free trade, ushering in a period of progress. However, this was short-lived, and in 1763, Cuba fell back into Spanish hands, with England trading the island for Florida. The first two governors of the new Spanish regime were liberal, fair, and progressive. They were Luis de Las Casas, appointed in 1790, and the Count of Santa Clara, who took over in 1796.[Pg 45]"

"It was about 1810 that the general discontent of the colonist with the tyrannical home government resulted in the formation of political societies whose purpose was to plan insurrections in the hope of wresting the island from Spanish rule, as did Buenos Ayres, Venezuela, and Peru. There was no open revolt for ten years, when the revolutionary leaders proclaimed a governing law, and after two years of turmoil the king yielded to their demands. But as Spain's promises were made only to be broken, other insurrections soon sprang up among the colonists. One of the most important revolutionary movements of those days was led by Narciso Lopez, a Venezuelan. This was in 1848. He was unsuccessful, but escaped with many of his followers to New York, where he found many sympathizers and practical aid. The United States government frustrated his attempt in 1849 to return to Cuba with a small invading force. A year later he reached the island with six hundred men, but was forced to take to his ship again, and with a Spanish gunboat close astern, made Key West and disbanded the expedition.

Around 1810, widespread dissatisfaction among the colonists with the oppressive home government led to the creation of political groups aimed at planning uprisings in hopes of freeing the island from Spanish control, much like Buenos Aires, Venezuela, and Peru had done. There was no open rebellion for a decade, until revolutionary leaders announced a governing law, and after two years of chaos, the king conceded to their demands. However, since Spain’s promises were often unfulfilled, further uprisings quickly emerged among the colonists. One of the most significant revolutionary movements of that time was led by Narciso Lopez, a Venezuelan, in 1848. He was unsuccessful but managed to escape with many of his followers to New York, where he found a lot of support and practical help. The U.S. government thwarted his attempt to return to Cuba in 1849 with a small invasion force. A year later, he arrived on the island with six hundred men but was forced to retreat back to his ship, narrowly escaping with a Spanish gunboat closely pursuing him, and made it to Key West where he disbanded the expedition.

"By this time the Lopez revolution had gained[Pg 46] much fame and many sympathizers in the United States who, while they were not inspired with the patriotic sentiment that stirred him, were strong admirers of his courage and determination. With a small band of four hundred and fifty men, and with Colonel Crittenden, of Kentucky, a West Pointer who won his title in the Mexican War, as second in command, Lopez started for Cuba from New Orleans the next year. On landing, Crittenden and one hundred and fifty men remained near the shore to guard the supplies, while Lopez, with the rest of the little invading army, marched inland. Both parties were discovered by the Spaniards, surrounded, and after a desperate resistance, completely wiped out."

"By this time, the Lopez revolution had gained[Pg 46] significant fame and many supporters in the United States who, while not motivated by the same patriotic feelings that drove him, greatly admired his bravery and resolve. With a small group of four hundred and fifty men, and Colonel Crittenden from Kentucky, a West Pointer who earned his rank in the Mexican War, as his second-in-command, Lopez set off for Cuba from New Orleans the following year. Upon landing, Crittenden and one hundred and fifty men stayed near the shore to guard the supplies, while Lopez, along with the rest of the small invading force, marched inland. Both groups were discovered by the Spaniards, surrounded, and after a fierce fight, were completely wiped out."

"Do you mean that Lopez and Crittenden were both killed?" asked Bert, who had listened to the captain's recital with intense interest.

"Are you saying that Lopez and Crittenden were both killed?" asked Bert, who had listened to the captain's story with intense interest.

"Lopez and Crittenden and every man jack of the expedition," replied the captain, solemnly.

"Lopez and Crittenden and everyone else on the expedition," the captain replied seriously.

"Who was the next to try it?" asked Harry, whose eyes shone with excitement.

"Who’s next to give it a try?" asked Harry, his eyes sparkling with excitement.

"Up to this time the grievances that inspired the Cuban colonists to revolt were mostly of a political character, based upon that bone of contention that inspired your own revolution against the British—taxation without representation. The little island to-day pays to Spain[Pg 47] every year over $20,000,000 in revenue. In 1868, a lawyer named Cespedes declared independence of Spanish rule on a little plantation at Yara. He had back of him only one hundred and twenty-eight men, but in a few weeks after his declaration ten thousand men gathered under his leadership. A republican form of government was established, with Cespedes at its head. General Quesada commanded the poorly equipped but determined and patriotic army. Until 1878 the insurgents held the field with about fifty thousand men. They constantly met and vanquished the Spanish forces under the Count of Valmaseda, but the resources of the Spaniards were greater, and finally the Cubans were disintegrated, but still maintained a guerilla warfare, constantly harassing and defeating the Spanish forces sent against them. But neither side made any progress toward the end and at the end of the year both were ready for a compromise, which resulted in the treaty of El Zanjon. At this time the Spaniards were commanded by General Campos, and the insurgents by Gen. Maximo Gomez—that grand old warrior who still holds the field for Cuba against the forces of Spain—I kiss his hand."

Up to this point, the complaints that drove the Cuban colonists to revolt were mostly political, centered around that same issue that fueled your own revolution against the British—taxation without representation. Today, the small island pays Spain[Pg 47] over $20,000,000 in taxes every year. In 1868, a lawyer named Cespedes proclaimed independence from Spanish rule on a small plantation in Yara. He started off with just one hundred and twenty-eight men, but within weeks, ten thousand joined him. A republican government was set up, with Cespedes at the helm. General Quesada led the poorly equipped yet determined and patriotic army. Until 1878, the insurgents maintained control with around fifty thousand men. They consistently faced and defeated the Spanish forces led by the Count of Valmaseda, but the Spanish had greater resources, and eventually the Cubans were weakened. Still, they continued guerrilla warfare, consistently undermining and defeating the Spanish troops sent against them. Neither side made headway, and by the year’s end, both were ready for a compromise, leading to the treaty of El Zanjon. At that time, the Spanish were led by General Campos, and the insurgents by General Maximo Gomez—that great old warrior who still fights for Cuba against Spain’s forces—I salute him.

Captain Dynamite, as he mentioned the name of Gomez, rose to his feet, bowed solemnly and reverentially, and lifted to his lips an imaginary hand.[Pg 48]

Captain Dynamite, when he heard the name of Gomez, stood up, bowed seriously and respectfully, and brought an invisible hand to his lips.[Pg 48]

"Fighting, still fighting for Cuba," he whispered as he resumed his seat. After a moment's pause he shook himself as if awakening from a dream and continued his narrative.

"Still fighting for Cuba," he whispered as he sat back down. After a brief pause, he shook himself like he was waking up from a dream and continued his story.

"That treaty promised Cuba representation in the Spanish Cortes, or congress, but while it was kept in the letter it was broken in spirit. The government obtained control of the polls and the deputies, or representatives elected were always government tools or sympathizers. So poor Cuba, after her long struggle, was no better off than before, and in 1894 José Marti, at the head of a new insurrection, set sail from New York with three ships, men, and munitions of war. But the United States authorities stopped them. Marti then joined Gomez in Cuba and was killed in a skirmish. He was succeeded in command by General Gomez, who still fights on with a hungry, ill-clad handful of men against the best of Spain's army. One hundred and forty-five thousand men have been sent against him but he still fights; he still lives to fight, although he is over seventy-five years old.

"That treaty promised Cuba a voice in the Spanish Cortes, or congress, but while it was technically upheld, it was ignored in practice. The government took control of the elections, and the deputies, or elected representatives, were always loyal to the government or its supporters. So poor Cuba, after her long struggle, ended up no better off than before, and in 1894, José Marti, leading a new rebellion, sailed from New York with three ships, men, and weapons. But the U.S. authorities stopped them. Marti then joined Gomez in Cuba and was killed in a battle. He was succeeded in command by General Gomez, who continues to fight with a starving, poorly equipped group of men against the best of Spain's army. One hundred and forty-five thousand soldiers have been sent against him, but he still fights; he still lives to fight, even though he is over seventy-five years old."

"I have told you of the dogged determination, the splendid patriotism of the men who are fighting to lift the yoke of Spain from poor Cuba. Surely there must be something more than mere political wrongs to inspire such a spirit. You[Pg 49] have heard of Weyler—'Butcher Weyler' they call him, and he is proud of the title. Frightened by the courage and resistance of the insurgent army, Spain looked about for a man capable of crushing the indomitable spirit of the rebels. In Weyler she thought she had found the man. He arrived in Havana in 1896. Among his first acts looking to the pacification of Cuba was his order of concentration. You have heard perhaps of the wretched 'reconcentrados?' They are the product of Weyler's order. Under this policy nearly a million peaceful Cubans, farmers and dwellers in the country, have been driven from their homes into nearby cities and their deserted houses burned to the ground. These people are mostly women and children and old men—non-combatants. In this way Weyler sought to stop the aid that was being given to the insurgents in the field. From the 'pacificos,' as they are known the rebels could at any time secure food, clothing, and shelter.

"I have told you about the stubborn determination and the incredible patriotism of the men fighting to free Cuba from Spanish rule. There has to be something more than just political injustice that fuels such a spirit. You[Pg 49] have heard of Weyler—people call him 'Butcher Weyler,' and he takes pride in this name. Terrified by the bravery and resistance of the rebel army, Spain searched for a man who could crush the unyielding spirit of the fighters. They believed they had found that man in Weyler. He arrived in Havana in 1896. One of his first acts aimed at pacifying Cuba was his order for concentration. You may have heard about the unfortunate 'reconcentrados?' They are the result of Weyler's order. Under this policy, nearly a million peaceful Cubans, farmers and rural residents, have been forced from their homes into nearby cities, while their abandoned houses were burned to the ground. Most of these people are women, children, and elderly men—non-combatants. Weyler aimed to cut off the support the rebels were receiving from the 'pacificos,' as they are called, who could supply the insurgents with food, clothing, and shelter at any time."

"Concentrated in the towns, without food or money to buy it, and many without clothing, these reconcentrados quickly became the victims of famine and disease. A part of Weyler's order of concentration provided for the gifts of ground to cultivate, and the Spaniard's answer to the charge of inhumanity is a shrug of the shoulders[Pg 50] and the reply that the reconcentrados starve because they are too lazy to work. 'We give them the land,' he says, 'and they will not till it.' True, they gave them land, but no seed to sow and no tools to reap and they have no money to buy them. Everything they owned is in the heap of ashes that marks the spot where the little thatched cottage once stood. Thousands and thousands of human beings are herded together like cattle, with no means to feed themselves, and, unlike cattle, with no one to feed them.

"Trapped in the towns, without food or money to buy any, and many without clothes, these reconcentrados quickly fell victim to starvation and illness. Part of Weyler's concentration order included allocating land for them to farm, and the Spaniards’ response to accusations of cruelty is a shrug and the claim that the reconcentrados are starving because they are too lazy to work. 'We give them the land,' he says, 'and they won’t cultivate it.' It’s true they provided land, but no seeds to plant and no tools to harvest, and they have no money to purchase them. Everything they owned is reduced to ashes where their small thatched homes once stood. Thousands upon thousands of people are crammed together like cattle, with no way to feed themselves, and unlike cattle, with no one to provide for them.[Pg 50]"

"Why, I have seen—I have been told by those who have seen it—of little children with the skin drawn like parchment over their bodies. And boys, when you think that among these poor victim's of Spain's pacification policy are the wives and children, sisters and sweethearts of the struggling insurgents in the field, is it any wonder that the spirit of independence will not down in the Pearl of the Antilles?"

"Honestly, I've heard from people who have witnessed it—little kids with skin stretched tight like parchment over their bodies. And guys, when you consider that among these poor victims of Spain's pacification policy are the wives, children, sisters, and sweethearts of the insurgents fighting for their cause, is it any surprise that the spirit of independence won't fade away in the Pearl of the Antilles?"

That the captain was a man of feeling and education there could be no further doubt in the minds of the captive boys. That he should have taken the trouble to thus enlighten them on the subject of Cuba's wrongs was a compliment to their understanding which was not lost.

That the captain was a thoughtful and educated man was clear to the captured boys. His effort to explain Cuba's injustices to them was a compliment to their understanding that they appreciated.


CHAPTER V

Sending the message

The captain no longer interfered in any way with the actions of his young guests. They were entirely free to do as they pleased on the ship, and apparently were under no surveillance. As they came on deck on the fourth morning at sea, the day was beautifully bright and clear. The sky was taking on that peculiar blue that is seen only in the lower latitudes. The atmosphere seemed to have thinned, and the horizon to have moved away a mile or two. The sea was as smooth as glass and the steamer was ploughing her way along at the rate of fifteen knots (miles) an hour. As usual, the decks were deserted, with the exception of the man at the wheel and the two lookouts who were always on post, day and night, no matter how clear the day, or how unnecessary the double watch might seem.

The captain no longer got involved in the activities of his young guests. They were completely free to do whatever they wanted on the ship, and it seemed like no one was watching them. When they came onto the deck on the fourth morning at sea, the day was bright and clear. The sky was taking on that unique blue that you only see in warmer latitudes. The atmosphere felt lighter, and the horizon seemed to stretch a mile or two further away. The sea was as smooth as glass, and the ship was cruising along at a speed of fifteen knots (miles) per hour. As usual, the decks were empty except for the person at the wheel and the two lookouts who were always on duty, day and night, no matter how clear it was or how unnecessary the double watch seemed.

It was the custom of the boys in the morning to distribute themselves around the deck so that they could take in all the points of the compass, and for a time each would study the horizon with careful scrutiny, in the hope of sighting some vessel to which they might signal. Every[Pg 52]thing had been carefully arranged so that as soon as a ship of any sort was seen, word was to be passed quietly from one to another without attracting the attention of anyone on deck, and then each knew his duty.

It was the routine for the boys in the morning to spread out around the deck so they could see all directions, and for a while, each would look at the horizon closely, hoping to spot a vessel they could signal. Everything had been arranged carefully so that as soon as any kind of ship was spotted, the news would be quietly passed from one to another without drawing the attention of anyone on deck, and then each one knew their role.

Hamilton was the custodian of the flags. On him rested the responsibility of displaying the signal so that the passing ship might read the message.

Hamilton was in charge of the flags. He was responsible for showing the signal so that the passing ship could read the message.

The boys had studied the compass and the maps that were each day displayed in the captain's cabin, and they knew that they were headed south. Although that gave them little or no clew to their ultimate destination, they felt some comfort in the knowledge that the shore of America lay to the starboard, and away off somewhere beyond the dreary horizon was the country they all loved, and where their anxious friends and families were awaiting some word from them.

The boys had looked over the compass and the maps that were displayed every day in the captain's cabin, and they knew they were heading south. While that didn’t really help them figure out their final destination, it gave them some comfort to know that the shore of America was on their right, and far beyond the dull horizon was the country they all loved, where their worried friends and families were waiting for any news from them.

Bert's post was a little forward of the beam on the starboard side. As he took his place this morning, his heart was heavy. He was thoroughly tired of the monotony of the voyage, and the mystery that enveloped the ship was beginning to wear upon him. For days now they had sailed without seeing anything but a dreary expanse of water on every side, unbroken by anything that was human. Porpoises played[Pg 53] around the bows of the steamer, and gulls shrieked as they swooped above her. Now and then a fish leaped out of the water as the steamer ploughed through the waves.

Bert's post was slightly off the beam on the starboard side. As he took his position this morning, he felt weighed down. He was completely worn out by the monotony of the voyage, and the mystery surrounding the ship was starting to get to him. For days, they had been sailing without seeing anything but a dreary stretch of water all around, with no sign of humanity. Porpoises played[Pg 53] around the front of the steamer, and gulls cried out as they swooped above her. Occasionally, a fish would leap out of the water as the steamer cut through the waves.

Bert leaned on the rail with his chin resting in his hands and his eyes fixed upon the blank before him. Suddenly he raised his head, and an expression of surprise crept into his face. He turned and looked stealthily around him. Harry was slowly walking up and down the main deck just aft of the fo'c'sle where the lookouts were stolidly pacing.

Bert rested his chin on his hands as he leaned on the railing, staring off into space. Suddenly, he lifted his head, and a look of surprise crossed his face. He turned and glanced around cautiously. Harry was slowly pacing back and forth on the main deck just behind the forecastle, where the lookouts were steadily walking.

Bert again turned his eyes toward the horizon. What appeared like a thread in comparison with the vastness of space around them wavered above a small black speck. Bert watched it with eager eyes. At this moment Harry stopped in his walk as he approached the starboard side, and placing his arms on the rail looked out over the sea in the direction of the black thread. Then the boys turned to one another and a questioning glance passed between them. Little by little they moved in toward one another until they met.

Bert again gazed at the horizon. What looked like a thread against the vastness of space around them trembled above a tiny black dot. Bert watched it intently. At that moment, Harry halted his walk as he got closer to the starboard side, resting his arms on the railing while looking out over the sea toward the black thread. Then the boys turned to each other, and a questioning glance exchanged between them. Gradually, they inched closer together until they met.

Harry looked carefully around him before he whispered:

Harry glanced around cautiously before he whispered:

"Bert, I think it is a steamer."[Pg 54]

"Bert, I think it's a steamer."[Pg 54]

"I'm sure of it, Hal. Have you got the signals ready?"

"I'm sure of it, Hal. Do you have the signals ready?"

"I can get them in a minute, but she is too far away yet."

"I can get them in a minute, but she's still too far away."

"You know passing vessels always study one another with a glass."

"You know that ships passing by always watch each other with binoculars."

"But I do not believe she could make out our signals even with a glass, yet."

"But I don't think she could see our signals even with binoculars, yet."

At this moment one of the men on lookout turned and looked up at the second mate, who silently paced the bridge.

At that moment, one of the lookouts turned and glanced up at the second mate, who was quietly walking back and forth on the bridge.

"Steamer off the starboard bow, sir," he said, quietly.

"There's a steamer off the starboard bow, sir," he said quietly.

"Keep closer watch. I've seen her," replied the mate, gruffly.

"Keep a closer eye on her. I've seen her," the mate replied, gruffly.

"Aye, aye, sir," came the usual response, without a change in tone.

"Aye, aye, sir," came the typical reply, without any change in tone.

Involuntarily the boys turned their eyes aft to the captain's cabin. As they did so the door opened gently and the natty, flannel-garbed figure of the commander moved out onto the deck and to the bridge. He carried a glass in his hand, which he raised to his eyes after he had spoken a few words to the mate.

Involuntarily, the boys glanced back at the captain's cabin. As they did, the door opened smoothly, and the neatly dressed captain appeared on the deck and made his way to the bridge. He held a glass in his hand, which he lifted to his eyes after exchanging a few words with the mate.

"I thought so," said Bert, dolefully. "You can't lose him."

"I thought so," Bert said sadly. "You can't lose him."

"Never mind," said Harry, "if she comes near enough I will get the signals up before he can[Pg 55] stop me, and we will have to take chances on their being read before he can get them down."

"Don't worry," said Harry, "if she gets close enough, I’ll send up the signals before he can[Pg 55] stop me, and we’ll just have to hope they are seen before he can take them down."

"But aren't you afraid of what he may do?" asked Bert, in some fear.

"But aren't you afraid of what he might do?" Bert asked, a little scared.

"What can he do?"

"What can he do?"

"He seems to be capable of doing a whole lot that might be unpleasant. For instance, he might put you in irons and chuck you down in the hold."

"He seems to be able to do a lot of things that could be quite unpleasant. For example, he might put you in handcuffs and throw you down in the hold."

"I do not think he would dare do that. But anyway, I am going to take the chance. We owe it to the folks at home."

"I don't think he would dare to do that. But anyway, I'm going to take the chance. We owe it to the people back home."

"You are right there, Hal. I'm with you whatever comes of it."

"You’re right there, Hal. I’m with you no matter what happens."

"Oh, he's not a cannibal, or a pirate. He might be pretty mad and perhaps use us a bit rough at first, but I think he would laugh at it afterward, when he recovered his temper."

"Oh, he's not a cannibal or a pirate. He might be a bit crazy and could treat us roughly at first, but I think he'd laugh about it later once he calms down."

"Gee, but think of all the unpleasant things that might happen before he decided that it was time to laugh."

"Wow, just think of all the awful things that could happen before he decided it was time to laugh."

Harry smiled at the mournful face of his chum, and turned again to look at the speck in the distance. Seemingly, it had grown larger. The captain, who had finished his scrutiny, looked down at them and smiled and waved his hand.

Harry smiled at his friend's sad expression and turned back to gaze at the dot in the distance. It seemed to have gotten bigger. The captain, having completed his observation, looked down at them and smiled while waving his hand.

"Sleep well, lads?" he called to them pleasantly.[Pg 56]

"Did you sleep well, guys?" he asked them cheerfully.[Pg 56]

They nodded sheepishly in reply.

They nodded shyly in response.

"I can't help liking him," replied Bert.

"I can't help but like him," replied Bert.

"There is something big and honest about him like a Newfoundland dog," answered Harry. "I feel sort of mean about trying to trick him. He would be a good friend and a mighty bad enemy."

"There’s something big and genuine about him, like a Newfoundland dog," Harry replied. "I feel a bit bad about trying to fool him. He’d make a great friend and a really tough enemy."

The captain took another look at the approaching vessel, spoke in a confidential tone to the mate, and again disappeared into his cabin.

The captain glanced at the approaching ship again, spoke quietly to the mate, and then went back into his cabin.

"She's coming on," said Harry, with satisfaction. "Unless she changes her course, I will send up the signals in five minutes." He looked at his watch as he spoke. "Pshaw, I'm always forgetting that the salt water has somewhat interfered with the internal arrangements of this affair," he continued, laughing.

"She's making progress," Harry said, pleased. "Unless she changes direction, I'll send up the signals in five minutes." He glanced at his watch as he spoke. "Oh, I always forget that the saltwater has messed with the internal workings of this thing," he continued, chuckling.

By this time the strange steamer was pretty well hull up and the boys could distinguish her masts and funnel as well as see what appeared to be flags fluttering in the breeze.

By this time, the weird steamer was mostly visible, and the boys could make out her masts and funnel, as well as what seemed to be flags waving in the breeze.

"In order that we shall not cause any suspicion, Bert," said Harry, presently, "you go and get the Midget and stroll forward. I do not need your help any more than to distract attention from me as much as possible."

"In order to avoid raising any suspicion, Bert," Harry said after a moment, "you go get the Midget and walk ahead. I only need you to help divert attention away from me as much as you can."

Bert turned, and walking around the deck, joined Mason who, while he had heard the call[Pg 57] of the lookout man and knew that there was a steamer in sight, had not deserted his post, although he was keen with anxiety when Bert reached him.

Bert turned and walked around the deck to join Mason, who, even though he had heard the lookout's call[Pg 57] and knew a steamer was in sight, hadn't left his post, although he was visibly anxious when Bert got to him.

"Where is she?" he asked, eagerly.

"Where is she?" he asked, eagerly.

"She's off the starboard bow, but don't ask fool questions. Move up forward so that Hal can get a chance to have the flags up."

"She's off the right front, but don't ask stupid questions. Move up front so Hal can have a chance to raise the flags."

Although burning with a desire to watch the proceedings, the boys kept their faces steadfastly turned to the bow as Harry began in an unconcerned manner to work his way aft. He slowly climbed the companionway that led to the upper deck, and carelessly approached the mast to which the signal halliards were attached.

Although eager to watch what was happening, the boys kept their faces turned to the bow as Harry casually made his way to the back. He slowly climbed the stairs that led to the upper deck and casually walked over to the mast where the signal halyards were tied.

He stood there for a moment as if watching the oncoming steamer, but his eyes were scanning the decks and the bridge on which the second mate slowly paced to and fro. Then he turned his back to the mast and as he stood with his hands clasped behind him, he cast off the halliards from the cleat to which they were fastened. He was almost concealed from view by the big mast.

He stood there for a moment, seemingly watching the approaching steamer, but his eyes were actually scanning the decks and the bridge where the second mate was slowly walking back and forth. Then he turned away from the mast, and as he stood with his hands clasped behind him, he unfastened the halliards from the cleat where they were secured. The large mast nearly hid him from sight.

When he had loosened the ropes, he turned quickly, and taking the end of another rope from under his coat tied the two together. After one final peep around the mast he threw his coat open boldly, made several quick turns and unwound from his body the rope to which the signal[Pg 58] flags were attached. Then with a strong pull he began to send them aloft rapidly.

When he loosened the ropes, he quickly turned around and took the end of another rope from under his coat, tying the two together. After one last look around the mast, he boldly threw his coat open, made a few quick moves, and unwound the rope that the signal[Pg 58] flags were attached to from his body. Then, with a strong pull, he started sending them up quickly.

As the colors sped upward and broke into the wind, his heart almost stopped beating from excitement.

As the colors flew up and danced in the wind, his heart nearly stopped from excitement.

Now they were half way up to the masthead and no one had seen them. The second mate still paced the bridge with his back to him. He glanced at the captain's cabin. No one appeared from there.

Now they were halfway up to the masthead and no one had seen them. The second mate still walked the bridge with his back to him. He looked over at the captain's cabin. No one came out from there.

"I shall get them up," he whispered to himself through his tightly shut teeth, "but will they be read?"

"I'll wake them up," he whispered to himself through his clenched teeth, "but will anyone actually read it?"

Now they were chock with the pulley block and he made the ends of the halliards fast to the cleat and stood back to view his work. It seemed scarcely possible that they should not be seen and read by the passing steamer which was now so close that he could almost make out her colors with the naked eye.

Now they were loaded up with the pulley block, and he secured the ends of the halyards to the cleat, stepping back to admire his work. It hardly seemed believable that they wouldn’t be seen and read by the passing steamer, which was now so close that he could almost make out her colors with the naked eye.

With a feeling of triumph he looked aloft at the flags that, aided by a friendly breeze and the motion of the steamer, were fluttering out straight from the masthead. As he dropped his eyes from aloft he started back with a slight cry of fear and surprise.

With a feeling of victory, he looked up at the flags that, helped by a gentle breeze and the motion of the steamer, were waving out straight from the masthead. As he lowered his gaze, he recoiled with a small cry of fear and surprise.

The head of Suarez, the mate, appeared above an after companionway, his eyes flashing with[Pg 59] anger. He rushed at the boy like an enraged animal, but Harry, determined to protect his signal as long as possible, stepped to the mast and took a capstan bar from its place at the base and stood defiantly awaiting the onslaught of the mate, who rushed upon him regardless of his threatening attitude. Before Harry knew what had happened the bar flew out of his hands, and he lay sprawling on the deck from a blow from the open hand of the mate.

The head of Suarez, the first mate, appeared above the companionway, his eyes flashing with[Pg 59] anger. He charged at the boy like a furious animal, but Harry, determined to defend his signal for as long as possible, stepped to the mast, grabbed a capstan bar from its spot at the base, and stood defiantly, preparing for the mate's attack. The mate rushed at him, ignoring his threatening stance. Before Harry realized what had happened, the bar flew from his hands, and he ended up sprawling on the deck after a blow from the mate's open hand.

Suarez paid no further attention to him, but seizing the halliards hauled down the signal. The scuffling of feet and the fall of the heavy capstan bar caused the second mate to turn quickly, and at the same moment the captain's door opened and he stepped out on the deck. His face flushed with anger as he saw the signal-flags, and then he turned quickly to the other vessel.

Suarez ignored him and pulled the ropes to lower the signal. The sound of feet shuffling and the heavy capstan bar hitting the deck made the second mate turn around fast, just as the captain opened his door and stepped out onto the deck. His face was red with anger when he saw the signal flags, and then he quickly turned to look at the other ship.

As he did so, Harry, whose eyes followed his, saw what he believed to be an answering signal, creep up the mast of the passing steamer. Suarez saw it, too, for he turned to Harry with an ugly look in his eyes.

As he did this, Harry, whose eyes were on him, noticed what he thought was a reply, moving up the mast of the passing steamer. Suarez noticed it as well, as he turned to Harry with a nasty look in his eyes.

"The mischief is done, you young devil," he said.

"The trouble is done, you little rascal," he said.

"I hope so," answered Harry, quietly rubbing the arm on which he had fallen. "Your hand is heavy, Suarez."[Pg 60]

"I hope so," Harry replied, quietly rubbing his arm where he had fallen. "Your hand is heavy, Suarez."[Pg 60]

"I am sorry if I hurt you, Master Hamilton," said the man, somewhat more calmly, "but you are guilty of insubordination and you have broken your word to the captain."

"I’m sorry if I hurt you, Master Hamilton," the man said, somewhat more calmly, "but you're guilty of insubordination and you've broken your word to the captain."

"You are mistaken, Suarez," said a deep voice behind them, and they both looked quickly around to find Captain Dynamite beside them, his glass raised to his eyes as he scanned the passing steamer. "Master Hamilton made me no promise; in fact, he warned me that he would take the first opportunity that presented itself to get ashore, or to communicate with a passing ship. He has been too sharp for us, that is all."

"You’re wrong, Suarez," said a deep voice behind them, and they both quickly turned to see Captain Dynamite next to them, his glass raised to his eyes as he looked at the passing steamer. "Master Hamilton didn’t make me any promise; in fact, he told me he would seize the first chance he got to get off the ship or to contact a passing vessel. He’s just been too clever for us, that’s all."

"Message received all right, captain?" asked Harry, eagerly.

"Got the message loud and clear, captain?" asked Harry, eagerly.

Dynamite smiled at the boy's assurance.

Dynamite smiled at the boy's confidence.

"Yes, received and acknowledged," he answered; and then turning to Suarez he continued, in a low tone:

"Yeah, got it and noted," he replied; and then turning to Suarez, he continued in a quiet voice:

"I do not think it has done any harm. She does not apparently wish to learn anything further of us."

"I don't think it has caused any harm. She doesn't seem to want to know anything more about us."

"Captain Dynamite," said Harry, warmly, "there is a big load off my mind, and now we will stick to you through thick and thin. We owe our lives to you, and we are not ungrateful. Whether you wish to take us into your confidence or not, I do not believe, whatever may be the[Pg 61] mystery of your voyage, that there is anything dishonorable about it, and you can count on us as part and parcel of your crew. We have succeeded in getting word to our friends at home as I told you I would try to do; now we are yours to command."

"Captain Dynamite," Harry said warmly, "I feel so relieved, and now we’ll stand by you no matter what. We owe you our lives, and we’re grateful. Whether you want to share your secrets with us or not, I don’t think there’s anything shady about your journey, no matter what the mystery is, and you can count us as part of your crew. We’ve managed to get a message to our friends back home, just like I said I would; now we’re ready to follow your orders."

The captain looked down into Harry's earnest face, his own quite serious and solemn.

The captain looked down at Harry's sincere face, his own expression serious and solemn.

"You are a fine lot of lads," he said, "and if I was on a pleasure cruise I would not ask for better companions, but look you, this voyage of mystery, as you call it, is a very serious piece of business and I wish you were all safe ashore and well out of it."

"You’re a great bunch of guys," he said, "and if I were on a fun trip, I couldn’t ask for better company. But listen, this mystery voyage you talk about is a really serious matter, and I wish you were all safely on land and out of it."

"But we don't want to be out of it, captain," asserted Harry, stubbornly. Bert and Mason had now joined the group on the after deck.

"But we don't want to miss out, captain," Harry insisted stubbornly. Bert and Mason had now joined the group on the back deck.

"No, captain," piped the Midget, "we are in it so far and we want to stick. You can't chuck us overboard very well, and as long as we have got to be a part of your expedition, I think you better muster us in as a part of the crew."

"No, captain," said the Midget, "we're in this now and we want to stay. You can't just throw us overboard, and since we have to be part of your expedition, I think you should officially include us as part of the crew."

"Well, youngsters, as much as I regret it, you may have to cast your fortunes in with ours after all, but until that necessity arises we will go along as we are, I your host and you my unwilling guests."

"Well, kids, as much as I hate to say it, you might have to join us in our situation after all, but until that moment comes, we'll continue as we are, me as your host and you as my unwilling guests."

"No, not unwilling now, cap," replied Mason.[Pg 62] "So long as the folks know we are safe and sound I think I had rather be aboard this queer craft with you than any place I can think of just now. What do you say, Bert?"

"No, I'm not unwilling now, cap," replied Mason.[Pg 62] "As long as the folks know we're safe and sound, I think I'd rather be on this weird boat with you than anywhere else I can think of right now. What do you say, Bert?"

"Right, as usual."

"Correct, as always."

"Well, boys, while I have perfect confidence in your integrity and all necessity for further secrecy is about past, still I think for your own good, in view of possible happenings, it is best that I and my mission remain a mystery to you."

"Well, guys, while I completely trust your honesty and there's no need for more secrecy now that everything's out in the open, I still think it's better for you both if I and my mission stay a mystery to you."

The captain turned toward his cabin as he spoke, as if to terminate the conversation.

The captain turned towards his cabin as he spoke, almost like he was trying to end the conversation.

"Perhaps it is not such a mystery after all, captain," said Harry, quietly. "We must be pretty near the coast of Cuba."

"Maybe it's not really a mystery, captain," Harry said quietly. "We must be pretty close to the coast of Cuba."

The man turned quickly, a glint of that fierce light in his eyes, and then he burst into a hearty laugh.

The man turned quickly, a spark of that intense light in his eyes, and then he broke into a loud laugh.

"Pretty sharp youngsters, eh, Suarez?" he said. "We may be able to make some use of them yet. I think they better dine with us to-night."

"Pretty sharp kids, huh, Suarez?" he said. "We might be able to put them to use after all. I think they should have dinner with us tonight."


CHAPTER VI

Long live free Cuba!

Although used to the eccentricities of costume in which the captain indulged, Harry was not prepared for the formal gentleman who greeted them as they entered the cabin that night.

Although he was accustomed to the captain's quirky costume choices, Harry was not ready for the formal gentleman who welcomed them as they stepped into the cabin that night.

Captain Dynamite was in full evening dress, and Harry could not help thinking how well he looked with his big, athletic form draped in conventional attire. But he had not looked for such dress on shipboard, or at least on a ship of the mysterious character of the Mariella.

Captain Dynamite was dressed to the nines, and Harry couldn't help but notice how great he looked with his tall, athletic build in formal wear. But he hadn't expected to see such attire on a ship, especially on a vessel as mysterious as the Mariella.

"Welcome to our little dinner party," said the captain, solemnly, as he shook each boy by the hand and pointed to seats on the big divan. "This is the first time that strangers have graced our board on this occasion. I hope it portends a successful ending to our voyage."

"Welcome to our little dinner party," the captain said seriously, shaking each boy's hand and indicating seats on the large sofa. "This is the first time we've had strangers join us for this occasion. I hope it means a successful end to our journey."

"We certainly hope so too, captain. We should be very sorry to feel that our presence on your steamer might cause trouble to you."

"We really hope so too, captain. We would be very sorry to think that our being on your ship could cause you any trouble."

"O, one never knows what the morrow may bring. This is our farewell night. To-morrow we enter the zone of danger. But to-night we will be merry. Is not that an excellent idea?"[Pg 64]

"Oh, you never know what tomorrow might bring. This is our farewell night. Tomorrow we enter the danger zone. But tonight, let's have fun. Isn't that a great idea?"[Pg 64]

"The idea is all right, captain, but where is the danger?"

"The idea is good, captain, but where's the risk?"

"Ah, that you may know to-morrow."

"Ah, that you may know tomorrow."

"All right, cap," said Mason, carelessly throwing one leg over the other and thrusting his thumbs into the armholes of his vest, "we'll stick to you."

"All right, boss," said Mason, casually throwing one leg over the other and sticking his thumbs into the armholes of his vest, "we'll stick with you."

"I believe you will, boys, but it will be my care to keep you free from harm if possible. That is one reason why I have made so much of a mystery to you of the voyage of the Mariella. Whatever may befall us you will have had no part in the purpose of this voyage, and remember, above all things, that you are American citizens. There are American consuls in every port and Uncle Sam will take care of his own, perhaps not with the alacrity that we sometimes could wish for, but in due course of time. So shout loudly for Uncle Sam if you need him and if he does not hear you, don't forget that John Bull speaks your language."

"I believe you will, guys, but I’ll do my best to keep you safe if I can. That’s one reason I’ve kept the journey of the Mariella so mysterious for you. No matter what happens, you won’t be responsible for the purpose of this trip, and remember, above all else, that you are American citizens. There are American consuls in every port, and Uncle Sam will look out for his own, maybe not as quickly as we sometimes wish, but eventually. So shout loudly for Uncle Sam if you need him, and if he doesn’t hear you, don’t forget that John Bull speaks your language."

The boys were puzzled by the captain's speech, but they knew him well enough to realize that it would be useless to question him. At this point the mate entered the cabin. His appearance was so odd that Bert had to hide his face behind his handkerchief to laugh. His expression was as solemn as the captain's. He wore a pair[Pg 65] of blue pilot cloth trousers, a vest with brass buttons and an old-fashioned swallow-tailed coat. The trousers, which were badly creased and puckered from long service inside the tops of his sea boots, were now pulled down outside, but the wide tops of the boots showed in a ring at the knee.

The boys were confused by the captain's speech, but they knew him well enough to understand that questioning him would be pointless. Just then, the mate walked into the cabin. He looked so funny that Bert had to cover his face with his handkerchief to laugh. His face was as serious as the captain's. He was wearing a pair[Pg 65] of blue pilot cloth trousers, a vest with brass buttons, and an old-fashioned swallow-tailed coat. The trousers, which were wrinkled and puckered from being tucked into his sea boots for so long, were now let down, but the wide tops of the boots were visible in a ring around his knees.

The captain greeted him in the same dignified way that he had received the boys, and he gravely took a seat on the divan beside them. The next to put in an appearance was the engineer, who wore his service uniform. The second mate was the last to arrive. He was dressed in blue flannel vest and trousers and a Tuxedo coat. Notwithstanding his own almost faultless attire, the captain did not seem to notice the negligé of his men. He greeted each warmly and in the same sober manner. When they had all assembled, he rang a bell and the steward promptly responded.

The captain welcomed him in the same formal way he had greeted the boys and seriously sat down on the couch next to them. The engineer, wearing his service uniform, was the next one to show up. The second mate was the last to come in, dressed in blue flannel pants and a tuxedo coat. Despite his nearly perfect outfit, the captain didn't seem to notice his crew's casual clothing. He greeted each of them warmly and in the same serious tone. Once everyone had gathered, he rang a bell, and the steward quickly came in.

"You may serve dinner," he said. "There are seven at table to-night."

"You can serve dinner," he said. "There are seven at the table tonight."

"A fair prospect for a good run to-morrow, captain," said Suarez, rubbing his hands with the air of one who looked forward with pleasure to a coming event.

"A promising chance for a good run tomorrow, captain," said Suarez, rubbing his hands like someone who was eagerly anticipating a future event.

"Sure one never knows what the daylight will show," answered the captain, with a touch of his brogue. "We may find ourselves in the very[Pg 66] divil of a hornets' nest when the sun shows over the horizon. But Suary, me boy, we have pulled together out of many a bad hole, haven't we, old man, and we are ready for another, eh?"

"Sure, you never know what the daylight will reveal," replied the captain, with a hint of his accent. "We might find ourselves in the middle of a real mess when the sun rises. But Suary, my boy, we’ve gotten through many tough spots together, haven’t we, old friend, and we’re ready for another one, right?"

"The captain knows he can count on me when there is any fighting to be done in the good cause."

"The captain knows he can rely on me whenever there's fighting to be done for a good cause."

"Fighting, eh," whispered Bert to Harry. "What do you suppose these queer guys are talking about?"

"Fighting, huh," whispered Bert to Harry. "What do you think these weird guys are talking about?"

"I think I begin to have a small notion."

"I think I'm starting to get a little idea."

"What do you divine, most noble chief?"

"What do you see, most noble chief?"

"I do not think it would be wise to say until I am surer of my facts."

"I don’t think it’s smart to say anything until I’m more sure of my facts."

"And do your suspicions point to some dreadful mystery of the deep?" whispered Mason, with mock fear, while his mischievous eyes sparkled with fun.

"And do you think there's some terrible secret lurking in the depths?" whispered Mason, playfully fearful, as his playful eyes glimmered with mischief.

"Something perhaps a little more serious than we have been mixed up in before, if I am right."

"Something maybe a bit more serious than what we've been involved in before, if I'm correct."

"Really."

"Seriously."

"As serious as powder and bullets can be."

"As serious as gunpowder and bullets can get."

"Powder and bullets," repeated Bert in some alarm. "What do you mean, Hal?"

"Powder and bullets," Bert repeated with some worry. "What do you mean, Hal?"

"I tell you I cannot speak until I am surer of my ground. You know I made an expedition into the hold to-day while the hatches were open."

"I’m telling you I can’t talk until I’m more certain of my situation. You know I went into the hold today while the hatches were open."

"Yes, but you did not tell us that anything that you saw there was at all suspicious."[Pg 67]

"Yes, but you didn't mention that anything you saw there seemed suspicious at all."[Pg 67]

"I do not know that it is, but I can tell you this: instead of carrying a general cargo of merchandise for trading purposes, as we are supposed to do, we are loaded to the gunwales with guns and ammunition."

"I don’t know what it is, but I can tell you this: instead of carrying a general load of goods for trade like we’re supposed to, we’re packed to the brim with guns and ammo."

"Well, guns and ammunition are perfectly legitimate articles of merchandise."

"Well, guns and ammo are totally legitimate products."

"That all depends upon where and for what purpose they are shipped."

"That all depends on where they are shipped and for what purpose."

"What do you mean?"

"What do you mean?"

"If two nations are at war and a nation supposed to be friendly to each should send arms and ammunition to one or the other, it would be a violation of international law, and would be looked upon as an act of war on the part of the friendly nation."

"If two countries are at war and a country that is supposed to be friendly to both sends weapons and ammunition to either side, it would violate international law and be seen as an act of war by the friendly country."

"But suppose the nation had nothing to do with it and that the cargo was shipped by individuals who were in sympathy with the cause of one or the other?"

"But what if the country wasn't involved at all and the cargo was sent by individuals who supported one side or the other?"

"The friendly nation is supposed to see to it that no such cargo is shipped from its shores, and the vessel undertaking such a task ranks as a pirate and is called a filibuster."

"The friendly nation is expected to ensure that no such cargo is shipped from its shores, and the ship taking on this task is considered a pirate and is referred to as a filibuster."

"But there are no two nations now at war, so that theory cannot hold good."

"But there are no two nations currently at war, so that theory doesn't hold up."

"There are no two nations at war, but there is a nation that has had on its hands for many years[Pg 68] a warfare within its own borders as Captain Dynamite told us very entertainingly to-day."

"There aren't two nations at war, but there is a nation that has been dealing with a conflict within its own borders for many years[Pg 68], as Captain Dynamite entertainingly informed us today."

"O, Cuba?"

"Oh, Cuba?"

"Yes, Cuba."

"Yeah, Cuba."

"And do you think that Captain Dynamite is one of those buccaneers that he told us about?"

"And do you think Captain Dynamite is one of those pirates he told us about?"

"Let us wait and see."

"Let's wait and see."

"Say, but that would be fine, wouldn't it, Hal?"

"Well, that would be great, right, Hal?"

"You might not think it so fine if a Spanish warship should open fire on us."

"You might not think it's so great if a Spanish warship started firing on us."

"But we will not mix up in their quarrel."

"But we won't get involved in their argument."

"No, but a Spanish gunboat would mix it up with us very quickly if she saw us first."

"No, but a Spanish gunboat would definitely engage us quickly if it spotted us first."

"What right would she have to interfere with a ship flying the American flag?"

"What right does she have to interfere with a ship flying the American flag?"

"If we could not give a proper account of ourselves in her waters she would stand on very little ceremony."

"If we couldn't properly explain ourselves in her waters, she wouldn't hold back at all."

"And do you think we are likely to get mixed up in any real fighting with real powder and bullets?" asked Bert, in some dismay.

"And do you think we might get involved in actual fighting with real gunpowder and bullets?" asked Bert, feeling a bit worried.

"I don't know. Look out, the captain is watching us."

"I don't know. Watch out, the captain is watching us."

"Gee," whispered Mason, "I wish I was back in Cottage City."

"Wow," whispered Mason, "I wish I was back in Cottage City."

Captain Dynamite, who had been talking with his officers while the boys discussed their situation in whispers, now looked over at them curiously.[Pg 69] Harry did not care at present to have to explain his suspicions. At this moment, fortunately, the steward entered with the soup and created a diversion. Captain Dynamite rose, and waving his arm toward the table, said:

Captain Dynamite, who had been chatting with his officers while the boys quietly talked about their situation, now glanced over at them with curiosity.[Pg 69] Harry wasn't in the mood to explain his suspicions. Fortunately, at that moment, the steward came in with the soup and created a distraction. Captain Dynamite stood up and gestured toward the table, saying:

"Gentlemen, dinner is served. Let us be seated."

"Gentlemen, dinner is ready. Please take your seats."

The captain took his place at the head of the table, and his men grouped themselves around him while the boys found seats near the bottom and facing all. It was certainly a curious gathering for a dinner table: the four bronzed, earnest-faced men at one end of the table and the three fresh-faced, wondering youngsters at the other. For a moment there was a deep silence, and Bert leaned over to Harry and whispered:

The captain took his seat at the head of the table, and his crew gathered around him while the boys chose seats near the bottom, facing everyone. It was definitely an unusual dinner gathering: four tanned, serious-looking men at one end and three wide-eyed, curious young boys at the other. For a moment, there was a heavy silence, and Bert leaned over to Harry and whispered:

"Say, Hal, I feel as if something ought to explode, or the captain ought to break out the black flag. This atmosphere is getting too tense for me."

"Hey, Hal, I feel like something's about to blow up, or the captain should raise the black flag. This tension is getting too much for me."

"'Sh, keep quiet," said Mason, "don't you see old Dynamite is going to say something? Perhaps he may let us into his secret. He seems to be feeling pretty good natured."

“Shh, keep it down,” Mason said, “don’t you see old Dynamite is about to say something? Maybe he’ll let us in on his secret. He seems to be in a pretty good mood.”

"Gentlemen," said the captain, rising at his seat, "fill your glasses."

"Gentlemen," said the captain, standing up from his seat, "fill your glasses."

As he spoke, he passed a black bottle that stood at his right hand to the mate, who filled[Pg 70] his glass and passed the bottle on to the engineer.

As he talked, he handed a black bottle that was next to him to the mate, who filled[Pg 70] his glass and handed the bottle to the engineer.

"There is lemonade in that pitcher at your hand, youngsters," said the captain. "Fill your glasses."

"There’s lemonade in that pitcher by you, kids,” said the captain. “Pour yourselves some.”

The boys did as directed and the captain raised his glass of grog high in air. His men rose silently from their seats and did likewise.

The boys followed orders, and the captain lifted his glass of grog high into the air. His crew stood up quietly from their seats and did the same.

"Here's to the good cause and confusion to its enemies," he said, in a deep voice.

"Cheers to the good cause and confusion to its enemies," he said in a deep voice.

"Good luck to the cause," shouted the men as they dashed off their liquor and sat solemnly down again.

"Good luck to the cause," the men shouted as they downed their drinks and sat back down with serious expressions.

For half an hour scarcely a word was spoken, as they all did full justice to the cook's excellent dinner. When they were through, the steward removed the cloth and the captain brought out a box of cigars which he passed around, this time not overlooking the boys, but they each refused, with thanks. The steward replaced the black bottle and it made another circuit of the table. After a short silence, during which the men puffed vigorously on their cigars, the captain said quietly:

For half an hour, hardly anyone spoke as they all enjoyed the cook's amazing dinner. Once they finished, the steward took away the tablecloth, and the captain pulled out a box of cigars to share, this time including the boys, who each politely declined with gratitude. The steward brought back the black bottle, and it went around the table again. After a brief silence, during which the men smoked their cigars, the captain said quietly:

"Men, to-morrow we begin to get busy. You all know what dangers we are facing and you have all been through them before. I know you will acquit yourselves well if it comes to a tight rub,[Pg 71] for your hearts are all with the cause. That we may all know to what end to bend our individual endeavors, and in case anything should happen to any of us, I will now read to you the orders under which we are sailing. Always remember our compact. We have our numbers. If number one falls, number two takes command, and to him you give your true allegiance, always with your minds free from personal ambitions and petty jealousies, working only as human machines for the good of the cause."

"Guys, tomorrow we start to get to work. You all know what dangers we’re up against, and you’ve faced them before. I know you’ll do great if things get tough, [Pg 71] because you’re all committed to the cause. So that we all know what we’re striving for, and in case anything happens to any of us, I’m going to read the orders for our mission. Always remember our agreement. We have our ranks. If number one goes down, number two takes charge, and you owe him your loyalty, keeping your minds clear of personal ambitions and petty rivalries, working together like well-oiled machines for the good of the cause."

The men turned and looked nervously in the direction of the boys. The captain noticed their suspicious glances.

The men turned and glanced nervously at the boys. The captain noticed their wary looks.

"Do not fear," he said, addressing particularly the furtive-eyed Suarez, "I will answer for them. They are my guests."

"Don't worry," he said, looking especially at the suspicious-eyed Suarez, "I'll take responsibility for them. They are my guests."

There was in the captain's tone just a touch of defiance, as if he challenged opposition to his views.

There was a hint of defiance in the captain's tone, as if he was challenging anyone who opposed his views.

"Now listen, and mark well the directions in the order. It is in Spanish, but I will read it to you in English, as I believe none among you, save Suarez and myself, understand Spanish."

"Now listen closely and pay attention to the instructions in the right order. It's in Spanish, but I'll read it to you in English since I don't think anyone here, except for Suarez and me, understands Spanish."

The captain produced from a large wallet a paper which he read slowly, dwelling long upon those passages containing detailed instructions:>

The captain pulled out a piece of paper from a large wallet and read it slowly, lingering on the sections with detailed instructions:>

Headquarters of the Independent Government in Cubitas.

To Captain Dynamite,
     Boston, Massachusetts, U. S. A.

To Captain Dynamite,      Boston, Massachusetts, U. S. A.

Greeting:

Greeting

When, with the assistance of a power higher than mortal endeavor, you shall have safely brought your expedition within the lines of the enemy's ships, proceed with all possible dispatch to that point on the coast mutually agreed upon by us at our last meeting. There, should a kind and just Providence so will it, you will find your landing covered by five hundred men under Captain Morgan, who is your friend. From him you will receive any necessary further instructions. May our just cause shield you from harm and bring you safely through your dangerous mission to the arms of your friends who kiss your hand.

When, with the help of a higher power, you’ve safely brought your expedition within the enemy ships' lines, proceed as quickly as possible to the location on the coast we agreed upon at our last meeting. There, if fate allows, you’ll find your landing secured by five hundred men led by Captain Morgan, who is your ally. He will provide you with any further instructions you might need. May our righteous cause protect you from harm and ensure your safe return to your friends who await you.

(Signed) Betancourt.

(Signed) Betancourt.

Gomez.

Gomez.

"You know those names, my friends," said Dynamite, after reading the order. "In their name and in ours, out of the fullness of our hearts, I give you our toast—Viva Cuba Libre!"

"You know those names, my friends," said Dynamite, after reading the order. "In their name and in ours, from the bottom of our hearts, I give you our toast—Viva Cuba Libre!"

The men sprang to their feet and raising their glasses while their eyes shone with the fever of excitement, shouted:

The men jumped up and raised their glasses, their eyes shining with excitement as they shouted:

"Viva, viva, Cuba libre!"

"Long live free Cuba!"

"I thought so," said Harry, as the sound died away.

"I figured as much," said Harry, as the sound faded.

"What does that lingo mean?" asked Bert.

"What does that slang mean?" asked Bert.

"It means 'hurrah for free Cuba,'" answered Harry.

"It means 'cheers for free Cuba,'" answered Harry.


CHAPTER VII

In the Hot Zone

Harry was awakened the next morning by the clanking of heavy chains, rumbling of iron trucks, banging of doors, creaking of cordage, and the hoarse shouts of men. Above the unusual din the voice of the captain rose deep and resonant. Harry sat up in his bunk in wonderment. The usually quiet and methodical ship seemed to have in an instant been transformed into what to the ear might easily resemble an iron foundry. The noise also aroused Bert and Mason.

Harry was woken up the next morning by the sound of heavy chains clanking, iron trucks rumbling, doors banging, ropes creaking, and men shouting hoarsely. Above all the noise, the captain’s voice rang out deep and strong. Harry sat up in his bunk, amazed. The typically quiet and orderly ship suddenly felt like an iron foundry to his ears. The commotion also stirred Bert and Mason awake.

"What's our friend the buccaneer up to now?" queried Mason, rubbing his sleepy eyes.

"What's our friend the pirate doing now?" Mason asked, rubbing his sleepy eyes.

"The sooner we get on deck, the quicker we shall find out," answered Harry, jumping from his bunk and beginning to dress hurriedly.

"The sooner we get on deck, the faster we'll find out," replied Harry, jumping out of his bunk and starting to get dressed quickly.

"Sounds to me suspiciously like a pirate chief and his blood-thirsty crew preparing to board an unsuspecting ship," said the irrepressible Midget, as he poked his head into his shirt. "Shouldn't be a bit surprised when we get on deck to find a lot of evil-faced men armed to the teeth—you know pirates are always evil-faced. By the way, did you ever know how the expression[Pg 74] 'armed to the teeth' originated? Well, you see, after a pirate has stuck his belt full of pistols and cutlasses, and has both hands full of guns, he just chucks a dirk in his mouth and then, of course, he is armed to the teeth. Singular how you fellows are always drawing on my fund of general information. One dollar, please."

"Sounds to me like a pirate captain and his ruthless crew getting ready to board an unsuspecting ship," said the unstoppable Midget, as he poked his head into his shirt. "I wouldn't be surprised if we get on deck and find a bunch of men with menacing faces all armed to the teeth—you know pirates always look menacing. By the way, did you ever find out how the phrase[Pg 74] 'armed to the teeth' started? Well, you see, after a pirate fills his belt with pistols and swords, and has both hands full of guns, he just puts a dagger in his mouth and then, of course, he's armed to the teeth. It's funny how you guys keep coming to me for random information. One dollar, please."

"Stop your nonsense, Midget," said Harry. "Remember what Captain Dynamite said last night. We are in the zone of danger to-day."

"Quit your nonsense, Midget," Harry said. "Remember what Captain Dynamite told us last night? We're in the danger zone today."

The noise had now somewhat subsided, and by the time the boys were dressed the usual quiet pervaded the ship.

The noise had calmed down a bit, and by the time the boys were dressed, the ship was filled with its usual quiet.

Harry stepped from their stateroom into the main cabin and was surprised to see the captain sitting quietly at the table with his back turned to him. His elbows were resting on the table and his face was in his hands. He was looking intently at some object in front of him. He did not move as Harry approached, and the boy could see that he was gazing at a portrait.

Harry stepped out of their stateroom into the main cabin and was surprised to see the captain sitting quietly at the table with his back to him. His elbows were resting on the table, and his face was in his hands. He was staring intently at something in front of him. He didn't move as Harry got closer, and the boy could see that he was looking at a portrait.

"Good morning, sir," said Harry, stopping at a respectful distance. "Have we struck the danger zone, yet?"

"Good morning, sir," Harry said, pausing at a respectful distance. "Have we reached the danger zone yet?"

"Danger—danger?"

"Warning—warning?"

The captain almost shrieked the words as he leaped to his feet, and clasping the portrait to his breast as if to protect it, turned fiercely on the boy.[Pg 75]

The captain nearly shouted the words as he jumped to his feet, clutching the portrait to his chest as if to guard it, then turned angrily toward the boy.[Pg 75]

"O, it's you," he said quickly, on recognizing Harry. Then he passed his hand over his eyes as if returning from a trance.

"O, it's you," he said quickly, recognizing Harry. Then he rubbed his eyes like he was coming out of a daze.

"I was with her when you spoke," he said softly, "and then the thought of danger drives me mad. See——"

"I was with her when you spoke," he said softly, "and then the thought of danger drives me crazy. Look——"

The captain held out the photograph for the boy's inspection. It was the picture of a beautiful young woman of Spanish type, with dark hair and eyes.

The captain showed the photograph to the boy for him to look at. It was a picture of a stunning young woman of Spanish descent, with dark hair and eyes.

"This time I take her home as my bride. She has promised it. I have left her too long at the mercy of Weyler's bloodhounds. But Gomez will see that no harm comes to my Juanita. He has promised. The general has promised, and soon—very soon, I shall take her away—away from this danger zone."

"This time I'm bringing her home as my wife. She promised me that. I've let her stay too long at the mercy of Weyler's enforcers. But Gomez will make sure that my Juanita stays safe. He has promised. The general has promised, and soon—very soon, I'll take her away—from this dangerous place."

The big man seemed dreaming again as his eyes rested with an expression as soft as a woman's on the fair face of the girl. Then with that characteristic shake of his huge body he placed the portrait carefully in an inner pocket, next his heart, and turned again to Harry with his dare-devil laugh on his lips.

The big man looked like he was daydreaming again, his eyes softening with an expression similar to a woman's as he gazed at the girl's pretty face. Then, with his usual big-body shake, he carefully tucked the portrait into an inner pocket next to his heart and turned back to Harry, a daring laugh on his lips.

"Ha, ha! Danger zone? Oh, sure, we are in it. But we are ready for 'em, my boy. All's in shipshape for friend or foe. We've set a smiling face to the fore, my lad, but a broad laugh would[Pg 76] uncover some moighty sharp teeth." At this moment the mate hurriedly entered the cabin and saluted.

"Ha, ha! Danger zone? Oh, definitely, we're in it. But we're prepared for them, my boy. Everything's in order for both friends and enemies. We've got a friendly smile on our faces, my lad, but a big laugh would[Pg 76] reveal some very sharp teeth." At that moment, the mate rushed into the cabin and greeted them.

"What is it, Suarez?" asked the captain, quickly.

"What’s going on, Suarez?" the captain asked quickly.

"Smoke off the starboard bow, sir."

"There's smoke off the right front, sir."

"Can you make her out?"

"Can you see her?"

"Not yet, sir."

"Not yet, sir."

"Call me when you can."

"Text me when you can."

The mate saluted again and retired. The captain turned away from Harry unceremoniously, and Bert and Mason having joined him, the boys went on deck. There was no change apparent that would have accounted for the strange noises that had awakened them, except that the hatches were now fastened down with heavy iron bars and the little forward hatch where Harry had made his first tour of inspection was guarded by two men, who stood with folded arms on either side. There were now two men on lookout aft as well as forward. They paced slowly to and fro, their eyes fixed astern. Amidships, on both the starboard and port sides, a man walked backward and forward over a space of about fifteen feet, always closely scanning the sea on either side. Off the starboard bow could be seen a thin thread of smoke that rose almost perpendicularly in the still air.

The crew member nodded again and stepped back. The captain turned away from Harry without a word, and with Bert and Mason joining him, the boys headed up on deck. There was nothing obvious that could explain the strange noises that had woken them, except that the hatches were now secured with heavy iron bars, and the small forward hatch where Harry had first looked around was being watched by two men, standing with their arms crossed on either side. There were now two men on lookout at the back as well as the front. They paced slowly back and forth, their eyes fixed on the rear. In the middle of the ship, on both the starboard and port sides, a man walked back and forth over a space of about fifteen feet, always keeping a close watch on the sea on either side. Off the starboard bow, a thin column of smoke could be seen rising almost straight up into the still air.

The boys had never before seen so many men[Pg 77] on deck at the same time. Not a word was spoken as the lookouts fore and aft passed and repassed each other. On the bridge both mates were on duty.

The boys had never seen so many men[Pg 77] on deck all at once. No one said a word as the lookouts at the front and back kept passing each other. Both mates were on duty on the bridge.

"Say, where do you suppose all these dummies sprang from, anyway?" asked Mason, as he surveyed the scene in astonishment. "I wonder if there are any more where they came from?"

"Hey, where do you think all these dummies came from, anyway?" asked Mason, looking around in disbelief. "I wonder if there are more where these came from?"

"Let's go down and interview our friend Sambo," said Harry. "He has been growing communicative lately. Yesterday he deigned to say 'Yas, sah.' Maybe we can coax something more out of him."

"Let's go down and talk to our friend Sambo," said Harry. "He's been opening up a lot lately. Yesterday, he actually said 'Yes, sir.' Maybe we can get him to share more."

When they reached the galley, to the boys' great surprise, the negro poked his head out over the half door and grinning broadly, said:

When they got to the kitchen, to the boys' surprise, the black man peeked his head over the half door and grinned widely, saying:

"Mornin', sahs."

"Morning, sirs."

"Why, Sambo," said Bert, in astonishment, "where did you find your tongue?"

"Wow, Sambo," Bert said in surprise, "where did you find your voice?"

"Always pick it up again in danger zone, sah."

"Always grab it again in the danger zone, sir."

"There goes that danger zone again," said Mason, in disgust. "I don't believe there is any danger between here and the equator, Sambo."

"There goes that danger zone again," Mason said, disgusted. "I don’t think there’s any danger between here and the equator, Sambo."

"Name not Sambo, sah. George Washington Jenks, New York, U. S. A., at yo' service, gents."

"Don't call me Sambo, sir. George Washington Jenks, New York, U.S.A., at your service, gentlemen."

Finding the negro in such an unusual mood the boys grouped themselves about the door intending to draw the man out if possible, and learn what[Pg 78] they could that might serve to confirm their suspicions as to the purpose of their cruise. As Harry stepped up to the door and brought the man's entire body into view, he noticed with amazement that he wore a cartridge belt and pistol holster from which the butt of a revolver peeped.

Finding the guy in such an unusual mood, the boys gathered around the door, hoping to get him to open up and share anything they could that might confirm their suspicions about the purpose of their trip. As Harry approached the door and brought the man's entire body into view, he was amazed to see that he was wearing a cartridge belt and a pistol holster with the butt of a revolver sticking out.

"Why, George, what are you carrying a pistol for this morning. Afraid the crew will mutiny?"

"Why, George, why are you carrying a gun this morning? Are you worried the crew will revolt?"

"Always carry gun in danger zone, sah," replied the negro, grinning still more.

"Always carry a gun in a dangerous area, sir," replied the man, grinning even wider.

"The whole ship has gone crazy over the danger zone," said Bert.

"The whole ship has lost it over the danger zone," Bert said.

"Yas, sah," said George Washington. "May have mix-up bime-by," and he jerked his thumb over his starboard shoulder.

"Yeah, sir," said George Washington. "There might be a mix-up later," and he pointed his thumb over his right shoulder.

"Mix-up with the captain?"

"Mix-up with the captain?"

"Humph. George Wash'n Jenks not such a blame fool's that. Mix-up with steamer coming up to starboard. May be, may be not. Not such a mucher at guessing."

"Humph. George Wash'n Jenks isn't that much of a fool. There was a mix-up with the steamer coming up on the right. Maybe, maybe not. Not that great at guessing."

"Is that why you are carrying a pistol; because a steamer is coming up?"

"Is that why you’re carrying a gun; because a boat is coming up?"

"Always carry gun in danger zone, sah," and again the negro grinned tantalizingly.

"Always carry a gun in a dangerous area, sir," and again the man grinned mischievously.

"George Washington Jenks, New York, U. S. A., I have a nice, green one dollar bill saved from a watery grave," said Harry, "and if[Pg 79] you will tell us what the danger zone is, you can have it."

"George Washington Jenks, New York, U.S.A., I have a nice, green one dollar bill saved from a watery grave," said Harry, "and if[Pg 79] you tell us what the danger zone is, you can have it."

As Harry spoke he pulled a bill out of his pocket and displayed it temptingly before the negro. George Washington Jenks looked at it covetously out of the corner of his eye. Then he shook his head proudly.

As Harry spoke, he took a bill out of his pocket and flaunted it enticingly in front of the Black man. George Washington Jenks glanced at it with longing from the corner of his eye. Then he shook his head defiantly.

"Better go ask Cap'n Dynamite. Might be he need the money. George Wash Jenks don't."

"Better go ask Cap'n Dynamite. He might need the money. George Wash Jenks doesn't."

"I guess you are true blue, Wash," laughed Harry, as he put the money back in his pocket.

"I guess you're really dependable, Wash," laughed Harry, as he put the money back in his pocket.

"You pretty good guesser, sah. Not such a mucher myself."

"You’re a pretty good guesser, sir. I'm not that great at it myself."

The boys, convinced that they could gain no information from the negro, and realizing the uselessness of attempting to question any others of the crew, strolled aft again. It seemed to Harry that the thread of smoke had grown a little thicker. The captain opened his door and stepped out on deck, glass in hand. He signalled to Suarez, who came aft at his bidding.

The boys, sure that they couldn't get any information from the Black man, and recognizing that trying to question any other crew members was pointless, walked back toward the rear of the ship. Harry thought the smoke had gotten a bit thicker. The captain opened his door and stepped out onto the deck with a binocular in hand. He signaled to Suarez, who came to him as requested.

"Can you make her out yet, Suarez?"

"Can you see her yet, Suarez?"

"Not yet, captain, but she is headed to cross our bow and should be hull up in a few minutes."

"Not yet, captain, but she's on a course to cross our front and should be visible in a few minutes."

For five minutes both men stood with their glasses trained on the smoke. Finally Suarez[Pg 80] dropped his to his side with the air of a man who has learned what he wished to know.

For five minutes, both men stood with their glasses focused on the smoke. Finally

"Yes?" said the captain, interrogatively.

"Yes?" the captain asked.

"It's the little one we dodged last time."

"It's the small one we avoided last time."

"The Belair. So I thought. Change the course two points to starboard. We will go astern unless she gets curious and I suppose she will. Yes, see, she is heading up for us. Hold your course; it would be folly to change it now. If we can't bluff it through, why we can—well, do the next best thing, Suarez, eh—call her hand."

"The Belair. That's what I thought. Shift the course two points to the right. We’ll go backward unless she gets curious, and I think she will. Yeah, look, she’s coming straight for us. Maintain your course; it would be foolish to change it now. If we can’t bluff our way through, then we can—well, do the next best thing, Suarez, right?—call her out."

Dynamite threw back his head and laughed heartily.

Dynamite threw his head back and laughed loudly.

"Everything is in readiness for the call, sir," said the mate, gravely.

"Everything is set for the call, sir," the mate said seriously.

"Very well, Suarez; tell Battersea to notify the men below to stand by."

"Sure thing, Suarez; tell Battersea to let the guys down below know to be ready."

The boys looked at one another in mute wonder. Then there were other men below, and for what? Harry's mind reverted to that forward compartment so well stocked with munitions of war.

The boys stared at each other in silent amazement. Then there were other men below, and for what reason? Harry's thoughts went back to that cramped compartment filled with weapons of war.

"Bert," he whispered, "I guess they were right about that danger zone, and although I'm not 'such a mucher' at guessing, as our friend Jenks of New York, says, maybe we'll have that mix-up."

"Bert," he whispered, "I guess they were right about that danger zone, and even though I'm not 'that great' at guessing, like our friend Jenks from New York says, maybe we'll have that mess-up."

For nearly an hour the quiet routine aboard the Mariella continued. The captain slowly paced the after deck, now and then scanning[Pg 81] the oncoming stranger through his glasses. There was an air of suppressed excitement in the silence. By this time the other steamer was clearly discernible with the naked eye, and the boys could see that she was a small gunboat flying a foreign flag, which they guessed to be Spanish. She had two large guns mounted forward, and a number of rapid fire guns aft and amidships.

For almost an hour, the calm routine on the Mariella went on. The captain slowly walked around the back deck, occasionally looking out at the approaching ship through his glasses. There was a feeling of restrained excitement in the quiet. By now, the other steamer was clearly visible to the naked eye, and the boys could see that it was a small gunboat with a foreign flag, which they thought was Spanish. It had two large guns mounted at the front and several rapid-fire guns at the back and in the middle.

She was a tiny craft for a fighter and apparently had once been a pleasure yacht; but she looked saucy and dangerous as she came on toward them. As Harry looked along the quiet decks of the staid and sober Mariella he could not help comparing her to a big dignified Newfoundland dog with a snapping terrier perking boldly up to her.

She was a small ship for a fighter and it seemed she used to be a luxury yacht; but she looked bold and risky as she approached them. As Harry glanced along the calm decks of the serious and proper Mariella, he couldn't help but compare her to a big, dignified Newfoundland dog with a feisty terrier eagerly bouncing up to her.

They could now distinguish the forms of men on the gunboat's decks.

They could now make out the shapes of men on the gunboat's decks.

"Come over here to the starboard rail, boys," said the captain, suddenly turning to them. "You may help to carry out more successfully the little farce we are about to attempt. Show yourselves as much as possible and act as if you were curiously interested in our friend, the gunboat, as no doubt you are."

"Come over to the right side, guys," the captain said, suddenly turning to them. "You can help us pull off this little stunt we're about to try. Make yourselves visible and act like you're really interested in our friend, the gunboat, because I’m sure you are."

At this moment a black-bearded little man, who had been strutting pompously on the bridge of the gunboat, raised a megaphone to his lips and a volley of foreign words, perfectly unintel[Pg 82]ligible to the boys, was shot out into the atmosphere.

At that moment, a little man with a black beard, who had been walking around confidently on the bridge of the gunboat, lifted a megaphone to his mouth and shouted a barrage of foreign words that were completely unintelligible to the boys, into the air.

In a moment the captain sent back a reply to what had evidently been a demand for a description of his ship.

In a moment, the captain sent back a reply to what was clearly a request for a description of his ship.

"The Mariella, Boston for San Juan, Porto Rico; general merchandise and three passengers returning from school."

"The Mariella, Boston to San Juan, Puerto Rico; general merchandise and three passengers returning from school."

"That's us," whispered Mason. "Look important now. This is as good as playing charades. Can you guess the word, Hal?"

"That's us," Mason whispered. "Act serious now. This is just like playing charades. Can you guess the word, Hal?"

For a few minutes those on the deck of the gunboat seemed to be discussing the reply. The little man on the bridge gesticulated violently as he apparently argued with a subordinate officer. Finally he put his marine glasses to his eyes again and for fully a minute Harry felt that he was studying them and Captain Dynamite, who stood facing him, his big form looming up to its full height, while a smile played around the corner of his mouth.

For a few minutes, the people on the deck of the gunboat appeared to be discussing the response. The little man on the bridge was gesturing wildly as he seemingly argued with a subordinate officer. Finally, he brought his binoculars back to his eyes and for about a minute, Harry felt like he was being scrutinized, along with Captain Dynamite, who stood facing him, his large figure towering at its full height, while a smile flickered at the corner of his mouth.

Suddenly the little man danced up and down like a jumping jack, shot his arms in the air and waved them wildly. Then he seized the megaphone and aimed it at the captain's head. This time the boys could understand the words that he poured out, for he spoke in broken English.

Suddenly, the little man jumped up and down like a jumping jack, threw his arms in the air, and waved them around wildly. Then he grabbed the megaphone and pointed it at the captain's head. This time, the boys could understand the words he shouted out, as he spoke in broken English.

"Ah, ah," he shouted, "I know you now, you el Capitaine Dynamite, el filibust, el buccaneer, el[Pg 83] pirate. Surrend—surrend in Queen's name."

"Ah, ah," he shouted, "I recognize you now, Captain Dynamite, the pirate, the buccaneer. Surrender—in the name of the Queen."

The little man's words had an electrical effect on the captain. The smile faded away and his mouth became a set, straight line. In a moment he was all action.

The little man's words had a jarring effect on the captain. The smile disappeared and his mouth turned into a firm, straight line. In an instant, he was in full motion.

"Go ahead full speed, Suarez," he shouted. "All hands to quarters."

"Full speed ahead, Suarez," he yelled. "Everyone to your stations."

In a moment his orders were transmitted from mouth to mouth and as quickly the quiet decks became transformed. Men in a seemingly endless stream rushed up through the forward hatch from below and scattered about the decks with soldier-like regularity, each taking, without the least confusion, a station to which he had apparently been assigned. Every man was armed with sword, pistol, and rifle, and almost before the boys had recovered from the first gasp of astonishment, the bulwarks were lined with rows of fully armed, determined looking men, who stood silently at their posts awaiting further orders.

In an instant, his orders spread from person to person, and just as quickly, the quiet decks transformed. Men rushed up in what seemed like an endless stream through the forward hatch from below and scattered across the decks with military precision, each taking their assigned position without any confusion. Every man was armed with a sword, pistol, and rifle, and almost before the boys could fully grasp the initial shock, the sides of the ship were lined with rows of fully armed, determined-looking men who stood silently at their posts, waiting for further orders.

George Washington Jenks stepped out of his galley, his black, shining face as usual on a broad grin. He looked aft at the boys, pointed to the gunboat and chuckled.

George Washington Jenks stepped out of his kitchen, his black, shining face always sporting a big grin. He looked back at the boys, pointed to the gunboat, and laughed.

"George Wash Jenks is not such a bad guesser after all," said Harry. "Mix-up has arrived all right."

"George Wash Jenks isn't such a bad guesser after all," Harry said. "The mix-up has definitely happened."

"Say, but Hal, do you think there is going to[Pg 84] be any real fighting?" asked Bert. All of the boys were intensely excited and nervous from their unusual surroundings.

"Hey, Hal, do you think there's actually going to[Pg 84] be any real fighting?" Bert asked. All the boys were really excited and nervous because of their unusual surroundings.

"It looks a heap like it."

"It looks a lot like it."

"And here we are right in the middle of it without as much as a hat pin to do business with," moaned Mason.

"And here we are right in the middle of it without even a hat pin to do business with," complained Mason.

The captain, who had darted into his cabin a moment before, now emerged with a cartridge belt buckled around his flannel coat and two army pistols at his sides. He carried three other pistols in his hands.

The captain, who had rushed into his cabin just moments ago, now stepped out with a cartridge belt fastened around his flannel coat and two army pistols at his sides. He held three more pistols in his hands.

"Here, boys," he said, as he approached them and handed one to each; "these are for protection only. Do you know how to use them?"

"Here, guys," he said as he walked up to them and gave one to each. "These are just for protection. Do you know how to use them?"

"Only give us something to shoot at and we will show you," piped the Midget.

"Just give us something to aim for and we'll prove it to you," said the Midget.

"Well, if you have to shoot, there are your marks," was the reply, as he pointed to the gunboat.

"Well, if you have to shoot, there are your targets," was the reply, as he pointed to the gunboat.

In the meantime equal activity had been displayed on the Spaniard. Her decks swarmed with men, and over the still water was borne a jargon of unintelligible orders.

In the meantime, equal activity was happening on the Spanish ship. Her decks were packed with crew members, and across the calm water came a mix of unintelligible orders.

Suddenly there came a sharp command from the little man on the bridge. Dynamite understood it and raised his hand as if to warn the boys back. There was a puff of smoke at the gunboat's bow and then a loud report.[Pg 85]

Suddenly, a loud command came from the little man on the bridge. Dynamite recognized it and raised his hand as if to signal the boys to step back. There was a puff of smoke at the front of the gunboat, followed by a loud bang.[Pg 85]

A solid shot whistled across the bows of the Mariella and ricochetted over the water into the distance.

A sharp shot whizzed past the front of the Mariella and bounced off the water into the distance.

"Crowd on all steam, Suarez," shouted the captain, shaking his fist at the gunboat. "We will first try the wise man's course and run away, but if we cannot shake off that little terrier, we'll have to show our teeth."

"Crowd on all steam, Suarez," yelled the captain, shaking his fist at the gunboat. "We'll first take the smart route and run away, but if we can't lose that little dog, we'll have to show our teeth."

Then turning to the Spaniard again he put his megaphone to his lips and shouted to the little commander, who still capered and gesticulated on the bridge:

Then turning to the Spaniard again, he brought his megaphone to his lips and shouted to the little commander, who was still dancing around and waving his arms on the bridge:

"Yes, I am el Capitaine Dynamite. Come on and take me if you can. Viva, Cuba Libre."

"Yes, I am Captain Dynamite. Come on and catch me if you can. Long live Free Cuba."


CHAPTER VIII

A Run-In with the Gunboat

The Mariella swung slowly around until she presented only her stern and the width of her hull as a mark for her enemy, and then under a full head of steam she started to show her heels to the Spaniard. But clouds of heavy, black smoke began to roll upward from the gunboat's funnel, showing that she, too, was crowding on steam for the chase.

The Mariella turned slowly until only her rear and the width of her hull were visible to her enemy, and then with full steam ahead, she began to flee from the Spaniard. But thick black smoke started to billow from the gunboat's funnel, indicating that it, too, was ramping up steam for the pursuit.

The puff of smoke, the bark of the gun, the shot skipping over the water across their bows, much as a child scales a flat stone across a mill pond, opened the boys' eyes to the seriousness of the situation. They fingered their revolvers nervously and watched the black bow of the Spaniard anxiously, expecting to see another white burst of smoke.

The puff of smoke, the gunshot, the bullet skipping over the water in front of them, like a kid skipping a flat stone across a pond, made the boys realize how serious things were. They nervously fidgeted with their revolvers and anxiously watched the black bow of the Spaniard, bracing themselves for another flash of white smoke.

But the little commander evidently believed he could rely on the speed of his vessel to overtake the Mariella, for after the warning shot, he did not fire again, and with throbbing engines the steamers settled down to a trial of speed.

But the little commander clearly thought he could count on the speed of his ship to catch up to the Mariella, because after the warning shot, he didn’t fire again, and with their engines roaring, the steamers got ready for a speed contest.

"If we could only imagine that as a starting gun this would make a first-rate yacht race," said[Pg 87] Bert, after they had been running for some minutes.

"If we could just think of this as a starting gun, it would kick off an amazing yacht race," said[Pg 87] Bert, after they had been running for a few minutes.

"Yes, and for a richer stake than ever a yacht raced for before," replied the captain, who had overheard the remark. Harry thought of the portrait of the beautiful girl that lay next the man's heart, and wondered if he meant her, but when he remembered the ringing defiance in his voice as he shouted back to the Spaniard, "Viva, Cuba Libre," he was inclined to believe that the man's spirit of patriotism rose superior to his love just now.

"Yeah, and for a bigger prize than any yacht has ever raced for," replied the captain, who had overheard the comment. Harry thought about the portrait of the beautiful girl that was close to the man's heart and wondered if he was talking about her. But when he recalled the strong defiance in his voice as he shouted back to the Spaniard, "Long live Free Cuba," he felt that the man's sense of patriotism was taking precedence over his love at that moment.

By this time the veil of mystery that had hung over the ship and her purpose had been pretty well lifted by the sequence of events, and the boys were convinced that they were a part of some secret mission against Spain in the interests of Cuba.

By this point, the mystery surrounding the ship and its purpose had largely dissipated due to the unfolding events, and the boys were convinced that they were involved in some secret mission against Spain in support of Cuba.

Harry had little time for speculation as to the motives that inspired the captain, for another puff of white smoke appeared at the gunboat's bow and a shot whistled by close to the starboard rail. The Mariella had been slowly drawing away from her pursuer, and the Spanish commander evidently feared his prey would escape.

Harry didn’t have much time to wonder about the captain’s motives because another puff of white smoke appeared at the bow of the gunboat, and a shot whizzed by close to the starboard rail. The Mariella had been gradually pulling away from her pursuer, and the Spanish commander clearly worried that his target would get away.

Suarez, on the bridge, turned anxiously aft as if expecting instructions, but Captain Dynamite only set his lips into that firm, straight line and raised his glasses to watch the enemy's movements.

Suarez, on the bridge, turned nervously toward the back as if waiting for instructions, but Captain Dynamite just pressed his lips into a tight line and lifted his glasses to observe the enemy's actions.

Another puff of smoke, a sharp report, and a[Pg 88] shot struck the water one hundred yards astern, but in direct line with the Mariella.

Another puff of smoke, a loud bang, and a[Pg 88] shot hit the water one hundred yards behind, but directly in line with the Mariella.

"They've got the direction, but not the range," muttered the captain. "Hard a-starboard, Suarez, for half a minute, and then take your course again. We'll give that gunner another guess."

"They have the direction, but not the range," the captain muttered. "Hard a-starboard, Suarez, for thirty seconds, and then take your course again. Let's give that gunner another shot."

The Mariella swung to starboard just enough to take her out of the direct course of her pursuer.

The Mariella tilted to the right just enough to move her out of the direct path of her chaser.

"Now, try it again, Mister Sharpshooter," sung out the captain, although the Spaniard was by this time far out of range of his voice. "It will take you some time to pick up your target once more."

"Now, give it another shot, Mister Sharpshooter," called out the captain, even though the Spaniard was already too far away to hear him. "It’ll take you a while to find your target again."

The Spaniard sent two other shots after them in quick succession, but they fell harmlessly to port. The quick swinging of the Mariella out of her course had disconcerted the gunners.

The Spaniard fired two more shots at them rapidly, but they missed and fell harmlessly to the left. The swift turn of the Mariella off her path had thrown the gunners off their game.

"Don't you think you youngsters better go below?" said the captain, joining the boys, while he calmly rolled a cigarette. "I haven't much respect for their marksmanship, but you never can tell where a stray shot may fall."

"Don't you think you kids should head down below?" said the captain, joining the boys as he casually rolled a cigarette. "I don't have much confidence in their aim, but you never know where a random shot might land."

By this time the sensation of nervousness and anxiety that had followed the first shot had passed, and the boys were as eager to see the affair to an end as if they had been spectators at a play. They did not yet seem to feel themselves[Pg 89] a part of the drama that might so easily be turned into a tragedy.

By this time, the feeling of nervousness and anxiety that had followed the first shot had faded, and the boys were just as eager to see the situation resolved as if they were watching a play. They didn't yet seem to recognize themselves[Pg 89] as part of the drama that could easily turn into a tragedy.

"If we are not in the way I should much prefer to remain here," said Harry, "and if we are going to be shot I had rather have it done on deck than in a stuffy cabin."

"If we're not in the way, I’d really prefer to stay here," said Harry, "and if we're going to be shot, I'd rather it happen on deck than in a cramped cabin."

"Very well, I guess you are safe enough. Anyway, we shall be out of range in about fifteen minutes. Ah, she's going to try it again."

"Okay, I think you're safe enough. Anyway, we’ll be out of range in about fifteen minutes. Ah, she’s going to try it again."

Another shot fell only a few feet astern.

Another shot landed just a few feet behind us.

Captain Dynamite placed his glasses on the roof of the deck house, tossed his cigarette over the side, and removing his coat, folded it carefully and placed it beside the glasses.

Captain Dynamite set his glasses on the roof of the deckhouse, tossed his cigarette overboard, and took off his coat, folding it neatly and placing it beside the glasses.

"You are getting a little too close, Mister Goodshot," he said, rolling back his cuffs. "I guess a dose of your own medicine is about due." Turning to the bridge, he called:

"You’re getting a bit too close, Mr. Goodshot," he said, rolling back his cuffs. "I think it's time you got a taste of your own medicine." Turning to the bridge, he called:

"Keep her steady, Suarez."

"Keep her steady, Suarez."

"Aye, aye, sir," responded the mate. There was a note of glee in his voice and he rubbed his hands together with an air of great satisfaction, as he watched his commander's preparations. He seemed to know what they portended, although the boys could see no purpose in them.

"Aye, aye, sir," replied the mate. There was excitement in his voice as he rubbed his hands together with a sense of great satisfaction, watching his commander's preparations. He appeared to understand what they meant, even though the boys could see no reason for them.

The captain now stepped quickly to the after rail, and placing his finger underneath it, seemed to be pressing upon something. A square section[Pg 90] of the deck began to slide silently and mysteriously away, leaving a black hole up through which there rose slowly a rapid fire gun. There was a sharp click of snapping bolts as the new section of deck came into place.

The captain quickly moved to the back railing and pressed his finger underneath it, as if activating something. A square section[Pg 90] of the deck started to slide away quietly and mysteriously, revealing a black hole through which a rapid-fire gun slowly emerged. There was a sharp click as bolts snapped into place with the new section of the deck.

"Now there will be something doing," whispered Bert.

"Now something's going to happen," whispered Bert.

Quickly taking his place on the saddle of the gun the captain trained it with the hand of an expert. It seemed but a second from the time he ran his eye along the sights before the discharge came. Without waiting to see the result of his shot, he turned the muzzle a little to the right, sighted it again quickly and fired.

Quickly taking his position on the gun's saddle, the captain expertly aimed it. It felt like just a moment from when he lined up the sights to when the shot fired. Without pausing to check the impact of his first shot, he slightly adjusted the muzzle to the right, quickly aimed again, and fired.

The boys watched breathlessly, straining their eyes to see the result, but without avail. Captain Dynamite rose, wiped his hands with a silk handkerchief and walked to the deck house for his glasses.

The boys watched eagerly, squinting to see the outcome, but it was no use. Captain Dynamite stood up, wiped his hands with a silk handkerchief, and walked to the deck house to get his glasses.

"They are both out of commission, bedad," he said, after a minute's inspection. "Scoot for the inlet, Suarez, me boy."

"They're both not working, wow," he said, after a minute's inspection. "Get to the inlet, Suarez, my friend."

"Aye, aye, sir," replied the mate, gleefully. "Don't you think you better give them one more for good measure, sir?"

"Aye, aye, sir," the mate replied happily. "Don’t you think you should give them one more for good measure, sir?"

"Enough's a-plenty, Suarez. We'll have her hull down before eight bells. Would you like to see what a little gun like that can do?"[Pg 91]

"That's more than enough, Suarez. We'll have her hull down before eight o'clock. Do you want to see what a small gun like that can do?"[Pg 91]

He turned to Harry as he spoke and handed him the marine glasses. They were a powerful pair and as Harry regulated them to his vision he seemed to be almost on board the Spanish gunboat. All was confusion on her decks. The "both" referred to by the captain as being out of commission, were the port and starboard guns, with which she had been potting at the Mariella. Captain Dynamite's shots had each scored a bull's-eye.

He turned to Harry while speaking and handed him the binoculars. They were a powerful pair, and as Harry adjusted them to his vision, it felt like he was almost on board the Spanish gunboat. Everything was chaotic on her decks. The "both" mentioned by the captain as being out of action referred to the port and starboard guns, which had been firing at the Mariella. Captain Dynamite's shots had each hit the target perfectly.

In the turmoil, Harry could see that someone had been injured and was being borne away by his companions. He lowered the glasses and held them out to the captain.

In the chaos, Harry noticed that someone was hurt and was being carried away by his friends. He lowered the glasses and handed them to the captain.

"You have laid up a man for repairs, I think, sir," he said.

"You’ve set a guy up for some fixes, I think, sir," he said.

The captain waved the glasses back with something like a shudder.

The captain waved the glasses away with a bit of a shudder.

"I am sorry," he said, quietly. "The poor chap was only doing his duty. I aimed at metal and not human bodies. I hope he is not much hurt."

"I’m sorry," he said softly. "The poor guy was just doing his job. I was aiming for metal, not people. I hope he’s not seriously hurt."

He turned to the rail again, touched the spring, and the gun slowly sank out of sight, the section of the deck that concealed it slipping into place again with a click. Putting on his coat he entered the cabin, leaving the boys in possession of the glasses. For some time they were greatly inter[Pg 92]ested in watching, turn by turn, the proceedings on the deck of the gunboat, but finally the Mariella made such good use of her heels that even with the glasses, they could make out nothing but the outlines of the Spaniard.

He turned back to the rail, pressed the spring, and the gun slowly disappeared from view, the section of the deck that hid it sliding back into place with a click. After putting on his coat, he entered the cabin, leaving the boys with the binoculars. For a while, they were really interested in watching, taking turns observing the action on the deck of the gunboat, but eventually the Mariella was moving so quickly that even with the binoculars, they could only see the outlines of the Spanish ship.

When they turned again to the deck of their own steamer, they were surprised to see that it had once more resumed its usual appearance. The armed men had disappeared, the second mate paced the bridge, and only the lookouts occupied the decks. It was now twelve o'clock, and eight bells sounded clearly on the still, tropical air. The boys recollected for the first time that they had had no breakfast, just as Captain Dynamite stuck his head out of the cabin door.

When they turned back to the deck of their boat, they were surprised to see it had once again returned to its usual state. The armed men were gone, the second mate was walking on the bridge, and only the lookouts were on the decks. It was now noon, and eight bells rang clearly in the quiet, tropical air. The boys remembered for the first time that they hadn't eaten breakfast, just as Captain Dynamite poked his head out of the cabin door.

"Come on, lads," he called, cheerily; "sure we've let the Spanish terrier cheat our stomachs."

"Come on, guys," he called, cheerfully; "we really let the Spanish terrier trick our stomachs."

The exciting events of the morning had not impaired the boys' appetites, and they promptly responded to the call. When they went on deck again only a speck on the horizon marked the pursuing gunboat.

The thrilling events of the morning hadn’t diminished the boys' appetites, and they quickly answered the call. When they returned to the deck, only a tiny dot on the horizon indicated the chasing gunboat.

"Few of their old tubs can measure paces with the old Mariella," said the captain, with satisfaction, as he swept the sea with his glasses.

"Few of their old boats can keep up with the old Mariella," said the captain, pleased, as he scanned the sea with his binoculars.

"She looked as if she had once been a pleasure yacht," said Harry.

"She looked like she used to be a luxury yacht," Harry said.

"So she was, my boy. The Spaniards bought[Pg 93] her from a New York millionaire, but she was an old model then, and they have top-hampered her with armor and guns until they have knocked what little speed she had out of her. We'll not even see a whiff of their smoke in half an hour."

"So there she is, my boy. The Spaniards bought[Pg 93] her from a New York millionaire, but she was an old model back then, and they've weighed her down with armor and guns until they've taken away what little speed she had. We won't even catch a whiff of their smoke in half an hour."

"Will she continue so hopeless a chase?"

"Will she keep chasing something so hopeless?"

"O, sure she will. She hopes to trap us down the coast. See, there are the shores of Cuba."

"O, for sure she will. She plans to corner us down the coast. Look, there are the shores of Cuba."

The boys turned quickly as he pointed over their starboard bow and saw a low dark line in the distance.

The boys turned quickly when he pointed over their right side and saw a low dark line in the distance.

"Hurrah," shouted Bert.

"Hooray," shouted Bert.

"Hurrah for what?" asked the captain, smiling at the enthusiastic boy who swung his cap as he shouted.

"Hooray for what?" asked the captain, smiling at the excited boy who waved his cap as he cheered.

"Why, just hurrah," answered Bert, sheepishly. "I began to think all land had disappeared from the face of the ocean."

"Wow, just awesome," replied Bert, feeling a bit embarrassed. "I was starting to think all the land had vanished from the surface of the ocean."

"Then you don't like the water?"

"Then you don’t like the water?"

"Heretofore I always considered myself dead stuck on it, but hereafter terra firma for mine. Something that you can dig your heels into and where disagreeable Spaniards don't send bullets whistling around your ears. How soon will we make Havana, captain?"

"Until now, I always thought I was completely stuck on it, but from now on, solid ground for me. Something you can really hold onto and where annoying Spaniards aren’t shooting at you. How soon will we reach Havana, captain?"

One of Dynamite's roaring laughs greeted this question of Bert's.

One of Dynamite's loud laughs responded to Bert's question.

"Me boy," he said, as soon as he caught his[Pg 94] breath, "if we should sail into Havana harbor every mother's son of us would be shot by sunrise to-morrow."

"Listen, kid," he said, as soon as he caught his[Pg 94] breath, "if we sail into Havana harbor, every single one of us would be shot by sunrise tomorrow."

"But you are going to land somewhere?" questioned Harry.

"But are you actually going to land somewhere?" asked Harry.

"Sure there's a fine bit of a place down the coast that we'll take a peep into before the moon's high to-night—barrin' any more Spanish terriers. Sure they're thick on this coast. A pack of snarling mongrels, and all snapping at the heels of Captain Dynamite. It's a proud man I should be with a head on me that's worth five thousand dollars to the man who can take it to Weyler."

"Sure, there’s a nice little spot down the coast that we’ll check out before the moon is up tonight—unless we run into more Spanish terriers. They’re pretty common along this coast. A pack of growling mutts, all snapping at Captain Dynamite’s heels. I’d be a proud man with a head on me that's worth five thousand dollars to whoever can take it to Weyler."

"Do you mean that the Spaniards have put a price of five thousand dollars on your head?" asked Harry in amazement, as he backed away from the man instinctively.

"Are you saying that the Spaniards have put a bounty of five thousand dollars on you?" Harry asked in shock, as he instinctively stepped back from the man.

"That was before my last voyage," chuckled the captain. "I would not be surprised if they had boosted the quotation a point or two since then. Gomez will know the latest market price."

"That was before my last trip," laughed the captain. "I wouldn't be surprised if they raised the quote a point or two since then. Gomez will know the latest market price."

The boys looked at him with awe. Here was a man who, though sailing into the enemy's waters, boldly laughed at the thought that there was a price on his head.

The boys stared at him in amazement. Here was a man who, even while sailing into enemy territory, confidently laughed at the idea that there was a bounty on his head.

"He's the finest buccaneer I ever met outside of story books," whispered Mason, as if meeting[Pg 95] buccaneers was an every day occurrence with him.

"He's the best pirate I’ve ever met outside of storybooks," whispered Mason, as if running into pirates was a regular thing for him.

"Suarez," called the captain, "lay off and on until eight bells, then call me. I'm going to take a nap. We can't make the inlet until sundown."

"Suarez," the captain called, "stay on and off until eight bells, then let me know. I'm going to take a nap. We won't reach the inlet until sundown."

Slowly Cuba rose out of the sea as the Mariella ploughed her way toward her shores. The long dark line began to take shape against the azure sky and to form itself into hills and valleys. The dark mass turned to a deep shade of brown and then to green as the brilliant verdure of the island caught the rays of the sun. When they were near enough to distinguish the contour of the coast line, the steamer's course was changed and for a time she stood out to sea again.

Slowly, Cuba emerged from the ocean as the Mariella made its way toward the shore. The long dark line began to take shape against the bright blue sky, becoming hills and valleys. The dark mass shifted to a deep brown and then to green as the vibrant vegetation of the island reflected the sunlight. When they got close enough to see the outline of the coastline, the steamer changed its course and headed back out to sea for a while.

"What are we doing that for?" enquired Bert, anxiously.

"What are we doing that for?" Bert asked nervously.

"Didn't you hear the captain tell Suarez to stand off and on until eight bells? We are probably going to make a landing somewhere here, but it is not yet time."

"Didn't you hear the captain tell Suarez to stay close and then go back until eight bells? We're probably going to land somewhere around here, but it's not time yet."

At this moment eight bells struck and without waiting to be called, Captain Dynamite opened the door of the cabin and stepped out on deck. Once again he had changed his costume and was now attired in white duck and wore a white yachting cap. As a breeze blew his coat aside, the boys could see that he still wore the cartridge belt and pistols. He scanned the shore for a[Pg 96] moment and then turning to the mate, who still stood on the bridge, he said:

At that moment, the clock chimed eight times, and without waiting to be called, Captain Dynamite opened the cabin door and stepped out onto the deck. He had once again changed his outfit, now dressed in white duck and wearing a white yachting cap. As a breeze blew his coat aside, the boys noticed that he still had his cartridge belt and pistols on. He looked towards the shore for a[Pg 96] moment and then turned to the mate, who was still on the bridge, and said:

"Well done, Suarez. At sundown I will take her in."

"Good job, Suarez. I'll bring her in at sunset."

The coast at this point seemed covered with a thick, tropical growth of palms and high, rank weeds, interlaced thickly with vines that reached to the water's edge. Back a few hundred feet the land rose abruptly, forming the foothills of the mountainous inland. The boys looked closely for some inlet or bay into which the Mariella might steam, but there seemed to be no break in the thick foliage so far as the eye could reach. In the silhouette formed by the rising hills two palms, taller than the others, stood out against the sky like lone sentinels guarding the shore against invading buccaneers.

The coast here was covered in dense tropical vegetation with palms and tall, wild weeds, all tangled up with vines that reached right down to the water's edge. A few hundred feet back, the land rose sharply, forming the foothills leading into the mountains inland. The boys searched carefully for any inlet or bay where the Mariella could navigate, but there was no visible break in the thick greenery as far as they could see. In the outline created by the rising hills, two palms, taller than the rest, stood out against the sky like solitary guards protecting the shore from invading pirates.

At dinner, the captain was in a particularly agreeable mood.

At dinner, the captain was in a especially good mood.

"Well, my young pirates, how are you enjoying your cruise?" he asked jokingly. "It's pretty nearly at an end and all danger for you is about past. In an hour or so we shall be safely within the sheltering arms of Cuba, and I think it is about time I introduced myself to you. I am plain Michael O'Connor, sometimes known as Dynamite Mike, but more generally styled Captain Dynamite—at your service. I am neither a[Pg 97] buccaneer, pirate, nor privateer, but an humble Cuban sympathizer who takes his life in his hand now and then to bring arms and ammunition to the men who are fighting for the good cause of Cuba libre. I do this, first, because I love Cuba; second, because it is a very lucrative profession; third, because I like danger."

"Well, my young pirates, how's the cruise treating you?" he asked playfully. "It's almost over, and all the danger for you is nearly behind us. In about an hour, we'll be safely in the welcoming embrace of Cuba, and I think it’s time I introduced myself. I'm just Michael O'Connor, sometimes called Dynamite Mike, but more commonly known as Captain Dynamite—here to serve you. I'm not a[Pg 97] buccaneer, pirate, or privateer, but a humble Cuban supporter who occasionally risks his life to deliver firearms and ammunition to the brave souls fighting for the noble cause of Cuba libre. I do this, first, because I love Cuba; second, because it's a very profitable job; and third, because I enjoy a bit of danger."

"But, Captain Dynamite, why should an Irishman love Cuba?" asked Harry.

"But, Captain Dynamite, why should an Irish guy love Cuba?" Harry asked.

"Sure, I'm only half Irish. My mother was a Cuban and I was born on the island on my father's little sugar plantation. The Spaniards shut him up as an insurgent. He died in jail—tortured to death I shall always believe—and my mother died of a broken heart in the arms of my childhood sweetheart, Juanita. I was not there. I left the island when only a youngster, to shift for myself in the States. I took to the sea and I shall always be thankful that I did, for it has enabled me in some measure to avenge the death of my father. But now to your own affairs, my boys. After we have safely disposed of our cargo, I shall be free to make a straight run for the States, and as I shall have others aboard for whose safety I shall be responsible, I think probably you had better stick to the old Mariella. I did think of getting you onto the railroad to Havana, but your lack of passports might cause you trouble."[Pg 98]

"Sure, I'm only half Irish. My mom was Cuban, and I was born on my dad's small sugar plantation on the island. The Spaniards imprisoned him as an insurgent. He died in jail—tortured to death, as I will always believe—and my mom died of a broken heart in the arms of my childhood sweetheart, Juanita. I wasn’t there. I left the island when I was just a kid to fend for myself in the States. I took to the sea, and I'm always grateful I did because it allowed me, in some way, to avenge my father's death. But now, back to your own matters, my boys. Once we safely unload our cargo, I’ll be free to head straight to the States. Since I’ll have others on board whose safety I’ll be responsible for, you’d better stick to the old Mariella. I thought about getting you on the train to Havana, but your lack of passports might get you into trouble."[Pg 98]

"We'll stick by the Mariella, captain," said Harry. "What do you say, fellows?"

"We'll stick with the Mariella, captain," said Harry. "What do you think, guys?"

"Sure, the Mariella for us."

"Sure, the Mariella for us."

"All right, that's settled. I think it's about time to run to cover."

"Okay, that's decided. I think it's time to take cover."

As they stepped out on deck the tropical twilight was fading and the steamer was now close within the dark shadow of the shore. Captain Dynamite went forward to the bridge.

As they stepped out onto the deck, the tropical twilight was fading, and the steamer was now within the dark shadow of the shore. Captain Dynamite made his way to the bridge.

"Turn in, Suarez. It has been a long day for you. I will take her now."

"Get some rest, Suarez. It’s been a long day for you. I’ll take her from here."

The mate saluted and left the bridge. The captain entered the wheelhouse and the man relinquished the spokes and stood silently to one side. The captain swung the wheel over quickly, with a sure, firm hand, and the bow of the Mariella came around until she was headed directly for the wooded shore. Harry saw him raise his eyes and look once at the sentinel palms.

The mate acknowledged and left the bridge. The captain stepped into the wheelhouse, and the man let go of the spokes, standing quietly to one side. The captain quickly turned the wheel with a confident, steady hand, and the bow of the Mariella swung around until it was pointed straight at the treed shore. Harry watched as he lifted his eyes to glance at the sentinel palms.

Then the engine-room bell clanged loudly and the Mariella shot at full speed, head on for the shore.

Then the engine-room bell rang out loudly and the Mariella sped towards the shore at full speed.


CHAPTER IX

The Midnight Text

Harry clutched the rail involuntarily. It seemed as if at any moment they would strike the shore with a crash, and yet he could not but believe that the captain knew what he was doing. He stood quietly at the wheel, scarcely moving it after he had once taken his course, but his eyes were fixed intently ahead.

Harry gripped the rail tightly. It felt like they were about to hit the shore with a jolt, but he couldn't shake the belief that the captain knew what he was doing. The captain stood calmly at the wheel, hardly adjusting it after setting their course, but his gaze was locked intently on the path ahead.

Nearer and nearer they rushed to the shore. Now they were almost upon it. Harry steadied himself, and cast one quick glance at the captain. Now the bow cut the thick foliage like a knife, but there was no shock, and the Mariella, with trees and vines scraping her sides and rising almost to her funnel-top, shot into a broad lagoon that lay completely hidden by the dense foliage at the entrance.

Nearer and nearer they rushed to the shore. Now they were almost there. Harry steadied himself and took a quick look at the captain. Now the bow sliced through the thick vegetation like a knife, but there was no jolt, and the Mariella, with trees and vines scraping against her sides and rising almost to her funnel-top, plunged into a wide lagoon that was entirely hidden by the dense foliage at the entrance.

As they passed in, Harry looked back. The passage through which they had entered was scarcely wider than the steamer, and formed on either side by two points of rock. It needed a bold and skillful hand to bring them safely through that naturally-masked channel. The foliage dropped partly back again but there still remained[Pg 100] a gaping hole to show where the steamer had pushed her way through.

As they entered, Harry looked back. The passage they had come through was barely wider than the steamer and was flanked on either side by two rock formations. It took a steady and skilled hand to guide them safely through that naturally concealed channel. The greenery partially fell back again, but there was still [Pg 100] a gaping hole where the steamer had forced its way through.

Again the bells in the engine-room clanged, the screw churned the water violently; there was a roar and rattle of the anchor chains, and within twice her own length the Mariella came to a standstill and her dangerous voyage was safely terminated.

Again the bells in the engine room rang loudly, the propeller stirred the water fiercely; there was a loud clanging and rattling of the anchor chains, and within twice its own length, the Mariella came to a stop and her perilous journey safely ended.

"Washington," called the captain, leaning out of the wheelhouse; "shut the door."

"Washington," the captain called, leaning out of the wheelhouse, "close the door."

"Aye, aye, sah," responded the negro, as he emerged from the galley. "George Wash Jenks knows his duty."

"Aye, aye, sir," replied the Black man as he came out of the kitchen. "George Wash Jenks knows his job."

Two of the men lowered a boat and jumped in. The negro followed with a long boat hook. They rowed back to the entrance of the inlet, and Jenks with his hook, deftly pulled the vines and creeping plants across it again. In five minutes none could have told that the luxurious growth had been disturbed.

Two of the men lowered a boat and jumped in. The Black man followed with a long boat hook. They rowed back to the entrance of the inlet, and Jenks, with his hook, skillfully pulled the vines and creeping plants across it again. In five minutes, no one could have told that the lush growth had been disturbed.

The tropical night now began to settle rapidly over the still lagoon. The business of making the steamer snug at her anchorage, which is usually attended by the creaking of cordage, the clanking of chains, and the discordant shouts of sailors and commanders, was carried on almost in silence. The orders of the captain and mate were given in tones scarcely louder than used in[Pg 101] ordinary conversation, but the men responded with alacrity. Within half an hour the Mariella, her throbbing engines stilled, lay silently at anchor and not a sound broke the stillness of the night. The shore of the main coast piled up in a black mass, without shape or color, in front of them, while the protecting arm that shielded them from the ocean loomed high above the steamer's funnel, showing in silhouette against the star-lighted sky in fantastically waving lines of palm leaves.

The tropical night quickly settled over the calm lagoon. The usual sounds of securing the steamer at its anchorage—the creaking of ropes, the clanking of chains, and the loud shouts of sailors and officers—were almost absent. The captain and mate issued orders in voices barely louder than an ordinary conversation, but the crew responded promptly. Within half an hour, the Mariella, her engines quiet, rested silently at anchor, and not a sound disturbed the stillness of the night. The main coast rose before them like a dark mass, shapeless and colorless, while the protective land that shielded them from the ocean towered above the steamer's funnel, outlined against the starry sky with the fantastically swaying lines of palm leaves.

Tired out with the exciting and unusual events of the day, the boys, after gazing for a time at the strange, silent scene around them, retired to their bunks, and were soon fast asleep.

Tired from the exciting and unusual events of the day, the boys, after looking at the strange, silent scene around them for a while, went to their bunks and quickly fell asleep.

Captain Dynamite lay dreamily back in a steamer chair on the quarter deck, lazily puffing a cigarette, but his eyes were intently fixed on the black shore. The steamer was in total darkness. Not a lamp was lighted except a small red lantern, like a signal light, that hung over the side facing the shore.

Captain Dynamite was relaxed in a steamer chair on the quarter deck, casually smoking a cigarette, but his eyes were focused on the dark shore. The steamer was completely dark. Not a single light was on except for a small red lantern, like a signal light, that hung over the side facing the shore.

The captain lighted a match and looked at his watch.

The captain struck a match and checked his watch.

"Five minutes to midnight," he murmured. "They are late. Can anything have gone wrong? Ah, there's the signal now."

"Five minutes to midnight," he said quietly. "They’re late. What could have gone wrong? Ah, there's the signal now."

A small red light flashed out of the darkness of the shore. Three times it showed, and then[Pg 102] disappeared. A dark figure that had been standing by the light on the Mariella swung it three times from side to side.

A small red light blinked from the darkness of the shore. It flashed three times, and then[Pg 102] vanished. A dark figure that had been standing by the light on the Mariella swung it three times from side to side.

Captain Dynamite rose from his chair, stretched his great body lazily and walked to the rail. As he did so, he threw open his coat and eased up one of the pistols in its holster. His hand remained resting on the butt.

Captain Dynamite got up from his chair, stretched his large body casually, and walked to the railing. As he did this, he opened his coat and pulled out one of the pistols from its holster. His hand stayed on the handle.

A small boat with two rowers, and a man in the stern, shot out from the black shadow of the shore onto the star-lighted surface of the lagoon. They rowed without the splash of an oar straight to the Mariella.

A small boat with two rowers and a man in the back quickly emerged from the dark shadow of the shore onto the star-lit surface of the lagoon. They rowed silently without making a splash, heading directly to the Mariella.

"Who goes there?" called Dynamite in a whisper, as the boat shot under the steamer's quarter.

"Who’s there?" whispered Dynamite, as the boat sped under the steamer's side.

"Independencia," came the prompt reply, and in a second the dark form amidships tossed over a rope ladder. In a moment more the man in the stern of the small boat had scrambled over the rail of the Mariella and strode rapidly aft. He sprang lightly up the steps to the quarter-deck, and seizing the hand of Captain Dynamite, who met him at the companionway, shook it vigorously.

"Independence," came the quick reply, and in an instant the dark figure in the middle of the boat threw over a rope ladder. Moments later, the man in the stern of the small boat had climbed over the rail of the Mariella and hurried towards the back. He jumped up the steps to the quarter-deck and grabbed the hand of Captain Dynamite, who met him at the companionway, shaking it enthusiastically.

"Captain Morgan, sure it's glad I am to see ye again."

"Captain Morgan, I’m really glad to see you again."

"God bless you, O'Connor. Another of your[Pg 103] dare-devil expeditions safely ended. We didn't look for you for two nights yet."

"God bless you, O'Connor. Another one of your[Pg 103] reckless adventures wrapped up safely. We didn't search for you for two nights yet."

"Fair weather and only one little brush with a small gunboat. Altogether, quite an uneventful trip. And how goes the cause of independence, Captain?"

"Nice weather and just one minor encounter with a small gunboat. Overall, it was a pretty uneventful trip. So, how's the fight for independence going, Captain?"

"We still hold our own, O'Connor, despite the butcher's boasts. We left them two hundred dead and wounded at our last three meetings, while our loss was only five killed and ten wounded."

"We're still doing our part, O'Connor, regardless of the butcher's claims. We left them with two hundred dead and wounded in our last three encounters, while we only lost five killed and ten wounded."

"Bravo, Morgan, we'll wear them out yet. Let them pour their troops into Cuba by the thousand. Disease, our insidious ally and insurgent bullets will take care of all they can send."

"Great job, Morgan, we’ll wear them down eventually. Let them send their troops to Cuba by the thousands. Disease, our sneaky ally, and enemy bullets will handle everything they can throw at us."

"Aye, but the bullets are getting scarce, O'Connor."

"Aye, but the bullets are running low, O'Connor."

"Ah, but there are enough here to do for ten thousand Spaniards," cried Dynamite, stamping excitedly on the deck, "and there will always be enough to go around so long as O'Connor lives, and the planks of the Mariella hold together."

"Ah, but there are enough here to keep ten thousand Spaniards busy," shouted Dynamite, excitedly stamping on the deck, "and there will always be plenty to go around as long as O'Connor is alive and the planks of the Mariella stay intact."

The woolly head and grinning countenance of George Washington Jenks showed above the top step of the companionway.

The woolly hair and smiling face of George Washington Jenks appeared above the top step of the staircase.

"And what of Gomez, Morgan?"

"And what about Gomez, Morgan?"

"Gomez is now with President Betancourt at Cubitas, waiting for a report of your expedition."[Pg 104]

"Gomez is currently with President Betancourt at Cubitas, waiting for a report on your expedition."[Pg 104]

"He shall have it within forty-eight hours Are your men ready for the landing?"

"He will have it within forty-eight hours. Are your guys ready for the landing?"

"The lagoon is guarded inland and shore. There is not a Spaniard within twenty miles."

"The lagoon is protected on both inland and shore sides. There's not a Spaniard within twenty miles."

"Then we will begin at once. What are you doing on the quarter-deck, you black rogue?"

"Then we’ll get started right away. What are you doing on the quarter-deck, you scoundrel?"

The captain had just discovered Jenks as he stood respectfully at the head of the companionway, apparently awaiting orders.

The captain had just spotted Jenks as he stood respectfully at the top of the stairs, seemingly waiting for instructions.

"Sut'nly, the Cap'n call?"

"Suddenly, the Captain calls?"

"No, I didn't call, blockhead. Get below."

"No, I didn't call, you fool. Go below."

"Ah, ain't such a mucher as a guesser, but sut'nly I guess the cap'n stamp him foot."

"Ah, I’m not much of a guesser, but I definitely think the captain is stomping his foot."

"You're right, Washington. I did stamp, but I didn't want you. However, as long as you are here bring out a chair for Captain Morgan and that box of cigars on my cabin table."

"You're right, Washington. I did stomp, but I didn't want you here. However, since you are here, get a chair for Captain Morgan and that box of cigars from my cabin table."

"Well, Washington, you are back in Cuba with a whole skin again," said Morgan, cordially extending his hand to the negro.

"Well, Washington, you’re back in Cuba safe and sound," said Morgan, warmly shaking hands with the man.

"Cap'n Morgan, suah," said Jenks, carefully rubbing his hand on his trousers before accepting the captain's. "Ah'm right glad to see you again, sah. O yes, sah, George Wash Jenks' skin am whole, sah. Cap'n Dynamite, he see to that, sah. Nevah leave Cap'n Dynamite, sah."

"Captain Morgan, for sure," said Jenks, carefully wiping his hand on his pants before shaking the captain's hand. "I'm really glad to see you again, sir. Oh yes, sir, George Wash Jenks is all in one piece, sir. Captain Dynamite made sure of that, sir. Never leave Captain Dynamite, sir."

"That's right, Washington, stick to the cap[Pg 105]tain and he'll pull you through, and Cuba needs a few more honest hearts like yours."

"That's right, Washington, stick with the captain and he'll get you through, and Cuba needs a few more honest people like you."

"Ah serve Cap'n Dynamite, sah. He serve Cuba."

"Ah serve Captain Dynamite, sir. He serves Cuba."

With great dignity the negro turned away and entered the cabin.

With great dignity, the Black man turned away and entered the cabin.

"An honest fellow, O'Connor, and seems devoted to you."

"An honest guy, O'Connor, and he definitely seems committed to you."

"Yes, I think Washington would follow me to the ends of the earth; but what are the orders, captain? We must be up and doing. I should not like to lie here long enough for the Spaniards to discover our landing-place."

"Yes, I believe Washington would follow me to the ends of the earth; but what are the orders, captain? We need to get moving. I wouldn't want to stay here long enough for the Spaniards to find our landing spot."

"Ah, there I am as ignorant as you. Here are sealed instructions from Gomez."

"Ah, I'm just as clueless as you are. Here are the sealed instructions from Gomez."

Captain Morgan handed a packet to O'Connor, who broke the seal eagerly. When he had read what the message contained the hand that held it dropped nervelessly by his side. He gasped as if for breath, and pulled nervously at the collar of his shirt like a man choking. Morgan, who noticed his singular actions started toward him.

Captain Morgan handed a packet to O'Connor, who eagerly broke the seal. After reading the message, the hand holding it fell weakly to his side. He gasped for air and tugged nervously at the collar of his shirt like someone choking. Morgan, noticing his odd behavior, started moving toward him.

"What's the matter, O'Connor?" he asked, anxiously. "Are you ill?"

"What's wrong, O'Connor?" he asked, nervously. "Are you sick?"

For a moment the captain did not answer, and then he said, faintly:

For a moment, the captain was silent, and then he said quietly:

"Wait. I must think."[Pg 106]

"Hold on. I need to think."

Morgan, wondering, but respecting his mood, stepped back. Captain Dynamite folded his arms and his head sank low on his chest. For fully five minutes he sat thus, and then suddenly leaped to his feet, clenched his hands, straightened up to his full heighth, and stamped his foot, loudly on the deck. The negro appeared with the steamer chair. He stopped in terror at the wild appearance of Captain Dynamite, and believing that he was the cause of his anger, stammered and stuttered in an effort to speak.

Morgan, curious but mindful of his mood, stepped back. Captain Dynamite crossed his arms and let his head droop onto his chest. He sat like that for a full five minutes, and then suddenly jumped to his feet, clenched his fists, stood up straight, and stamped his foot loudly on the deck. The black man showed up with the steamer chair. He froze in fear at Captain Dynamite's wild look and, thinking he was the reason for the captain's anger, stammered and struggled to find his words.

"Ah, sut'nly, came as fast as ah could, sah. George Wash Jenks no loafing nigger, sah."

"Ah, certainly, came as fast as I could, sir. George Wash Jenks isn’t a lazy guy, sir."

"Call Suarez," said Dynamite, in a low voice, ignoring the negro's attempted apologies.

"Call Suarez," Dynamite said quietly, ignoring the man's attempts to apologize.

"Misser Suarez turned in, sah."

"Mr. Suarez checked in, sir."

"Call Suarez," roared the captain, taking a threatening step in the direction of Jenks.

"Call Suarez," yelled the captain, taking a menacing step toward Jenks.

"Yas, sah," answered Jenks, his eyes big with wonder. "Needn't be so uppish. Ah shall sut'nly call Misser Suarez." Jenks backed away to the companionway in an effort to keep his face to the angry skipper and miscalculating his distance rolled backward down the stairs.

"Yeah, sir," replied Jenks, his eyes wide with amazement. "No need to be so snappy. I will definitely call Mr. Suarez." Jenks stepped back to the stairs, trying to keep his face toward the furious captain, but misjudging his distance, he rolled backward down the steps.

"You clumsy idiot," bellowed Dynamite, stepping to the top of the stairs and peering down into the darkness, out of which came a whisper:

"You clumsy idiot," shouted Dynamite, stepping to the top of the stairs and looking down into the darkness, from which a whisper emerged:

"Yas, sah. Ah shall sut'nly call Misser Suarez."[Pg 107]

"Yes, sir. I will definitely call Mr. Suarez."[Pg 107]

Dynamite stepped back, and without speaking to Morgan, who watched him anxiously, paced the quarter-deck with nervous strides. Suarez appeared in his pajamas, rubbing his eyes. The captain stopped as he saluted, and looked from one to the other of the men. Finally he said, holding out the message to Suarez:

Dynamite took a step back, and without saying a word to Morgan, who was watching him nervously, started pacing the quarter-deck with anxious steps. Suarez came out in his pajamas, rubbing his eyes. The captain paused as he saluted and glanced between the two men. Finally, he said, holding out the message to Suarez:

"Suarez—Morgan—here are the instructions regarding the removal of the cargo. They are simple. There is also news—bad news—but that concerns only me. Take this paper, Suarez, and with Captain Morgan's assistance carry out the orders to the letter. You are in command."

"Suarez—Morgan—here are the instructions for removing the cargo. They're straightforward. There's also some news—bad news—but it's only relevant to me. Take this paper, Suarez, and with Captain Morgan's help, follow the orders precisely. You're in charge."

Then he turned to Washington, who had followed Suarez to the quarter-deck.

Then he turned to Washington, who had followed Suarez to the quarter-deck.

"Bring me my night coat, Washington, and my rifle. Suarez, have the gig lowered. I am going ashore."

"Bring me my night coat, Washington, and my rifle. Suarez, have the boat lowered. I'm going ashore."

"Alone, captain?"

"All alone, captain?"

"Alone."

"Solo."

"And may I ask the captain where at this hour of the night?"

"And can I ask the captain where we are at this time of night?"

"To Gomez."

"To Gomez."

"Take a file of my men, O'Connor. The country between here and Cubitas is full of Spaniards."

"Grab a file of my guys, O'Connor. The area between here and Cubitas is packed with Spaniards."

"Thank you, Morgan. I have good, true men of my own who know the country as well as I do myself, but they would only hamper me. I[Pg 108] must make speed—speed, do you hear? Suarez, why do you stand there like a wooden Indian? Get my gig into the water."

"Thanks, Morgan. I have loyal guys who know the area just as well as I do, but they would just slow me down. I[Pg 108] need to hurry—hurry, do you get that? Suarez, why are you just standing there like a statue? Get my gig in the water."

"If you are bent upon going, O'Connor, and I know how useless it is to try to swerve you, why not take my boat. It is manned and lying at the ladder."

"If you're determined to go, O'Connor, and I know how pointless it is to try to change your mind, why not take my boat? It's ready and waiting at the ladder."

"That is better, Morgan. I will send it back to you. Come on, you lazy rascal, with that coat."

"That's better, Morgan. I'll send it back to you. Come on, you lazy rascal, with that coat."

He seized his coat and rifle, and ran down the stairway to the companionway, and along the deck to the point where Morgan's boat lazily floated on the black water.

He grabbed his coat and rifle, ran down the stairs to the hallway, and along the deck to where Morgan's boat floated idly on the dark water.

"Take your orders from Captain Dynamite," called Morgan to his men as O'Connor slid down into the boat. The negro who had followed close at his heels peered over the side and whispered pleadingly:

"Take your orders from Captain Dynamite," Morgan shouted to his men as O'Connor jumped into the boat. The Black man who had followed closely behind him leaned over the side and whispered desperately:

"Cap'n Dynamite, sah, you'se not going without George Wash Jenks?"

"Captain Dynamite, sir, you're not going without George Wash Jenks?"

"To the shore, lads, and pull for your lives," said O'Connor. The boat shot away from the steamer's side and was soon lost in the dark shadow of the shore.

"To the shore, guys, and row for your lives," said O'Connor. The boat raced away from the steamer's side and quickly disappeared into the dark shadow of the shore.

Washington shook his head deprecatingly, and returned to the quarter-deck, where he gravely saluted the mate.[Pg 109]

Washington shook his head in disapproval and went back to the quarter-deck, where he seriously saluted the mate.[Pg 109]

"Your servant, sah," he said. "Cap'n Dynamite he say you in command."

"Your servant, sir," he said. "Captain Dynamite says you're in charge."

"Bring a lantern, Washington, quick," said Suarez. Then turning to Morgan, he continued:

"Grab a lantern, Washington, hurry," said Suarez. Then turning to Morgan, he continued:

"What do you suppose the bad news can be that has so affected the chief and which he says concerns only him?"

"What do you think the bad news could be that has impacted the chief so much and that he says only relates to him?"

"Gomez's message will tell. Quick, boy, with that lantern."

"Gomez's message will get through. Hurry up, kid, with that lantern."

As Jenks stepped into the cabin, Harry, fully dressed, came out of his stateroom. The unusual noise on deck and the loud commands of the captain had awakened him.

As Jenks walked into the cabin, Harry, fully dressed, emerged from his stateroom. The strange noise on deck and the captain's loud commands had woken him up.

"What's up, Wash?" he asked.

"What's up, Wash?" he asked.

"Plenty. Cap'n Dynamite get bad news in message, and bang—he scoot for shore."

"Plenty. Captain Dynamite gets bad news in a message, and bam—he heads for shore."

"Captain gone ashore, to-night?"

"Captain went ashore tonight?"

"Suah, enough."

"Suah, that's enough."

"What's the bad news, Wash?"

"What's the bad news, Wash?"

"Nobody knows yet. George Wash Jenks get cap'n's lantern and then we find out."

"Nobody knows yet. George Wash Jenks gets the captain's lantern and then we'll find out."

He took the lantern from the hook, and with Harry behind him returned to the deck. Morgan took the light and held it so that Suarez could read the message.

He grabbed the lantern from the hook, and with Harry following him, went back to the deck. Morgan took the light and held it so Suarez could read the message.

"Ah, here it is" said the mate, after he had scanned the instructions. He read aloud:[Pg 110]

"Ah, here it is," said the mate after he had looked over the instructions. He read aloud:[Pg 110]

"'My heart is full of grief for you. Notwithstanding the heavy guard maintained around the house the Spaniards succeeded last night in seizing Juanita and have taken her to prison. She is charged with aiding the rebels. Come to me at once that we may plan together to effect her escape or rescue.'"

“I'm really upset about what happened to you. Despite the strong security around the house, the Spaniards managed to capture Juanita last night and took her to prison. She’s accused of helping the rebels. Come to me right away so we can figure out a plan to help her escape or rescue her.”

"Spaniards got Missee Juanita?" shouted Washington, who had listened eagerly while Suarez read. "I guess I go to cap'n."

"Did the Spaniards get Miss Juanita?" shouted Washington, who had been listening eagerly while Suarez read. "I guess I'm going to the captain."

The negro made a flying leap for the rail and in another instant would have dived into the sea toward the shore. Morgan was too quick, though, and seizing him by the collar dragged him back to the deck.

The man made a quick jump for the rail and in another moment would have jumped into the sea toward the shore. Morgan was too fast, though, and grabbing him by the collar pulled him back onto the deck.

"Never was such a mucher at guessing," murmured the negro.

"Never was anyone so good at guessing," murmured the Black man.

"What do you say to putting the boy ashore and letting him join O'Connor?" asked Morgan. "He knows the country and might be of much assistance to that stubborn man in his dangerous journey."

"What do you think about dropping the boy off and letting him join O'Connor?" Morgan asked. "He knows the area and could really help that stubborn guy on his risky journey."

"Please, Misser Suarez, sah, lemme go after Cap'n Dynamite. He and Missee Juanita need George Wash Jenks."

"Please, Mr. Suarez, sir, let me go after Captain Dynamite. He and Miss Juanita need George Wash Jenks."

The negro dropped on his knees as he pleaded with the mate.

The Black man dropped to his knees as he begged the first mate.

"And we will go with you, Washington."[Pg 111]

"And we will go with you, Washington."[Pg 111]

It was Harry who spoke, and the men turned to him in astonishment.

It was Harry who spoke, and the guys turned to him in shock.

"You do not know the danger, my boy," said Suarez, quietly.

"You don't realize the danger, kid," Suarez said quietly.

"We'll chance it. We owe Captain Dynamite a big debt. If there is a chance to help him in his trouble it is our duty to do so."

"We'll take the risk. We owe Captain Dynamite a lot. If there's a chance to help him out of his trouble, it's our responsibility to do it."

"It is a question whether you would help or hinder him."

"It’s uncertain whether you would help or hurt him."

Suarez was undecided. While he bore the boys no malice he had always chafed at their presence on the ship. No interest in them as individuals would have caused him to oppose their wishes. His thoughts, hopes, desires, and ambitions were all Cuba's. The fate of the three boys whose lives meant nothing to the cause, was nothing to him. Deep down in his heart he would be glad to rid the ship of them. But he feared the wrath of his chief. He walked the deck in silence for a few minutes and then, as if speaking to himself he said:

Suarez was conflicted. Although he had no ill will towards the boys, he had always found their presence on the ship annoying. His lack of interest in them as individuals would never have led him to oppose their wishes. His thoughts, hopes, desires, and ambitions were all focused on Cuba. The fate of the three boys, whose lives held no significance for the cause, meant nothing to him. Deep down, he would be relieved to get them off the ship. But he was afraid of his chief's anger. He walked the deck in silence for a few minutes, and then, as if talking to himself, he said:

"If any one should take one of the boats and make the shore during the night, their escape might not be discovered until daylight."

"If anyone took one of the boats and reached the shore during the night, their escape might not be noticed until morning."

As he finished speaking, George Washington Jenks beckoned to Harry, and together they made their way silently down to the main deck.

As he wrapped up his speech, George Washington Jenks signaled to Harry, and they quietly headed down to the main deck together.


CHAPTER X

Into Enemy Territory

Harry called Bert and Mason and explained the situation to them. Both were eager to accompany the expedition on shore. Washington was busy forward when the boys joined him. He had gathered and piled up under the rail a supply of guns and ammunition sufficient to arm a company of men. He had made good use of the few minutes the boys had occupied in dressing, for a small boat already lay alongside the steamer. Harry surmised that the men, who were all exceedingly fond of their commander, had assisted Washington in order that he might set out to give what aid he could to Captain Dynamite. There was scarcely a man among them but had made several voyages with him, and they well knew the danger that attended a journey through that part of the island, and the fate that awaited their chief if he should fall into the hands of the Spaniards. The mate was still in close conference with Captain Morgan, and either intentionally, or because of his preoccupation, paid no attention to the preparations of the little expedition.

Harry called Bert and Mason and explained what was going on. Both were eager to join the shore expedition. Washington was busy up front when the boys caught up with him. He had gathered and stacked a supply of guns and ammunition under the rail, enough to equip a company of men. He had made good use of the few minutes the boys spent getting ready, since a small boat was already tied up next to the steamer. Harry guessed that the men, who were all very fond of their commander, had helped Washington so he could head out and assist Captain Dynamite. Almost every man among them had made several trips with him, and they all understood the risks involved in traveling through that part of the island, as well as the fate that would await their chief if he fell into Spanish hands. The mate was still deep in discussion with Captain Morgan, and either intentionally or due to his distraction, he paid no attention to the preparations for the small expedition.

"What are you going to do with all those[Pg 113] guns?" asked Harry, as he surveyed the pile.

"What are you going to do with all those[Pg 113] guns?" asked Harry, as he looked over the pile.

"May be some big shooting," replied Washington, nodding his head, wisely. "More guns, more shooting."

"Could be some big shooting," replied Washington, nodding his head wisely. "More guns, more shooting."

"But how are we to carry that arsenal? If I am not mistaken travelling hereabouts is not the easiest thing in the world, and we shall want as little to hamper as possible."

"But how are we supposed to carry that arsenal? If I'm not wrong, traveling around here isn't the easiest thing in the world, and we want to have as little to weigh us down as possible."

"I guess young gemman right," said Washington, looking regretfully at the heap of guns.

"I guess the young gentleman is right," said Washington, looking regretfully at the pile of guns.

"Let us each take a gun and a pistol——"

"Let’s each grab a gun and a pistol——"

"And machete—machete," interrupted the negro, his eyes bulging, while he swung his arm as if wielding one of the short Cuban swords.

"And machete—machete," interrupted the man, his eyes wide, while he swung his arm as if he was using one of the short Cuban swords.

"All right, Washington, machete if you choose. They may do to cut our way through the underbrush."

"Alright, Washington, go ahead and take the machete if you want. It might help us clear a path through the bushes."

"Cut way through Spaniard," said Washington, still waving his arm excitedly.

"Cut right through the Spaniard," said Washington, still waving his arm excitedly.

"You can do all that kind of cutting, George Wash Jenks. Perhaps you would prefer a razor."

"You can handle all that cutting, George Wash Jenks. Maybe you'd rather use a razor."

"No, machete."

"No, machete."

"All right; machete it is, and I hope you will find something to use it on and work off some of that cutting energy."

"Okay; machete it is, and I hope you find something to use it on and burn off some of that cutting energy."

They then each selected from the supply of arms a rifle, pistol, and all the ammunition they could comfortably carry. They lowered them[Pg 114] into the small boat and were about to climb in when Harry stopped them.

They each picked out a rifle, a pistol, and as much ammo as they could easily carry from the supply. They loaded them[Pg 114] into the small boat and were about to get in when Harry stopped them.

"What about food, Washington?" he asked. "We'd better tote some along, I think."

"What about food, Washington?" he asked. "I think we should bring some with us."

With his usual energy, Harry had naturally taken command of the expedition.

With his typical enthusiasm, Harry had naturally taken charge of the expedition.

"How much of a tramp is it to where Captain Dynamite is going?"

"How far is it to where Captain Dynamite is heading?"

"Captain Dynamite go to Gomez—Gomez at Cubitas."

"Captain Dynamite goes to Gomez—Gomez in Cubitas."

"That does not mean anything to us. How far is it from here to Cubitas and how long will it take us to reach it?"

"That doesn't mean anything to us. How far is it from here to Cubitas and how long will it take to get there?"

"'Bout two days."

"About two days."

"All right. Now Washington, you get some ship biscuit, dried beef, and coffee from your stock in the galley and we will each carry our own rations. I guess we can get through on that grub for two days."

"Okay. Now Washington, grab some ship biscuit, dried beef, and coffee from your stock in the galley, and we’ll each carry our own rations. I think we can make it on that food for two days."

"And ah guess a leetle lasses for coffee, Misser Harry," pleaded the negro.

"And I guess a little lady wants some coffee, Mister Harry," pleaded the black man.

"How under the sun are you going to carry molasses, Washington? I guess you will have to take your coffee black and without sweetening."

"How in the world are you going to carry molasses, Washington? I guess you’ll have to drink your coffee black and unsweetened."

"Never was such a musser at guessing," murmured Washington, as he turned into the galley. He soon reappeared with the rations, four oilskin jackets, and a coffee pot. They[Pg 115] divided the food and each bundled up his supply in an oil skin and tied the package on his back. They were now ready to begin their journey, and one by one they silently slipped over the side and dropped into the boat below.

"Never was someone so bad at guessing," murmured Washington as he entered the kitchen. He soon came back with the food, four oilskin jackets, and a coffee pot. They[Pg 115] split the food and each wrapped up their share in an oilskin and tied the package to their backs. They were now ready to start their journey, and one by one, they quietly stepped over the side and climbed into the boat below.

"Washington, you take the tiller," said Harry. "You know the way."

"Washington, you steer the boat," said Harry. "You know the way."

"Yas, sah."

"Yes, sir."

"Do you know where to make a landing in the dark?"

"Do you know where to land in the dark?"

"George Wash Jenks knows every inch of the coast hereabouts with him eyes shut."

"George Wash Jenks knows every inch of the coast around here with his eyes closed."

"All right then. You get up in the bow, Midget, and keep a lookout ahead. Bert and I will row. It's not more than three hundred feet to the shore."

"Okay then. You get up in the front, Midget, and keep an eye out ahead. Bert and I will row. It's only about three hundred feet to the shore."

The boys bent to the oars and the little boat shot across the narrow streak of starlit water into the shadow of the rugged shore.

The boys leaned into the oars and the small boat sped across the narrow stretch of starlit water into the shadow of the rough shoreline.

"Stop!" whispered Mason quickly, when they were within a few feet of the beach. The boys backed water and brought the boat up within her own length.

"Stop!" Mason whispered urgently as they got within a few feet of the beach. The boys backed away and brought the boat to a stop, keeping it within its own length.

"What is it?" asked Harry, anxiously.

"What is it?" Harry asked, feeling anxious.

"There's a man on shore with a gun aimed plumb at us," replied Davis, pointing into the darkness ahead.

"There's a guy on the shore with a gun aimed straight at us," replied Davis, pointing into the darkness ahead.

"Him one of Misser Morgan's men," said[Pg 116] Washington. "Him all right, ah guess, maybe."

"Him one of Mr. Morgan's guys," said[Pg 116] Washington. "I guess he's good, maybe."

The boys started to row again when a loud command from shore made them rest on their oars with great dispatch.

The boys began to row again when a loud order from the shore caused them to quickly pause with their oars.

"Halt, or I'll fire."

"Stop, or I'll shoot."

The words came out of the darkness in deep, determined tones. The boys could dimly distinguish the form of a man standing on a little bluff above them, with his rifle aimed with disturbing accuracy directly at their boat.

The words emerged from the darkness in deep, firm tones. The boys could barely make out the shape of a man standing on a small bluff above them, with his rifle aimed with unsettling precision right at their boat.

"We are friends from the Mariella," called Harry, "and are on our way to join Captain Dynamite."

"We're friends from the Mariella," Harry called, "and we're on our way to meet Captain Dynamite."

"Captain Dynamite passed through the lines half an hour ago. He said he was travelling alone."

"Captain Dynamite came through the lines half an hour ago. He said he was traveling alone."

"Yes, that's right," answered Harry. "He thinks he is, but we want to help him. Let us come ashore and I will explain to you."

"Yes, that's right," Harry said. "He thinks he is, but we want to help him. Let us come ashore and I'll explain it to you."

"Halt, or I fire," again came the command.

"Halt, or I’ll shoot," the command came again.

"Don't you think we better go back, Hal?" whispered Mason, who had crouched down in the bow out of the way of a stray bullet. "I don't care much for this real gun business. It's too exciting for my constitution."

"Don’t you think we should head back, Hal?" whispered Mason, who had crouched down in the front to stay clear of a stray bullet. "I’m not really into this real gun stuff. It's way too intense for me."

"Don't you understand," persisted Harry, "that we are friends of Captain Dynamite and the cause?"[Pg 117]

"Don't you get it," Harry continued, "that we're friends of Captain Dynamite and the cause?"[Pg 117]

"Friends of the cause will give the countersign," said the voice in the same even tone.

"Supporters of the cause will provide the password," said the voice in the same calm tone.

"Washington, you ought to know the countersign," whispered Harry to the negro, who had listened to the conversation with open mouth. He shook his head as if he did not comprehend.

"Washington, you should know the password," Harry whispered to the Black man, who had listened to the conversation with his mouth agape. He shook his head as if he didn't understand.

"You know—the word that tells people that you are a friend of Cuba."

"You know—the word that shows people you are a friend of Cuba."

"O, dats de password—suah." Washington grinned with joy.

"O, that's the password—sure." Washington grinned with joy.

"Well, the password then; what is it?"

"Alright, what's the password?"

"Ah guess it is 'Independencia.'"

"Ah guess it is 'Independence.'"

"I hope you have guessed right this time."

"I hope you guessed correctly this time."

"Not such a mucher," murmured Washington, deprecatingly.

"Not so much," murmured Washington, downplaying it.

"Independencia," repeated Harry, loud enough for the man on shore to hear.

"Independence," Harry repeated, loud enough for the guy on shore to hear.

"Advance friends," said the sentinel, quickly lowering his gun.

"Go ahead, friends," said the guard, quickly lowering his gun.

The party landed without further opposition and found instead of one man, whose form they had been able to distinguish from the boat, ten or a dozen more a few feet back from the shore, squatting around a small fire, the light of which was masked by a thick growth of underbrush. They were all dark-skinned men with heavy growths of black beard. They looked up without displaying any particular interest as the[Pg 118] boys landed, but the sentinel who had challenged them came forward and held out his hand in greeting. He was undoubtedly an American.

The boat landed without any more trouble, and instead of just one man, they saw ten or a dozen others a few feet from the shore, sitting around a small fire, which was mostly hidden by thick bushes. All of them were dark-skinned men with thick black beards. They looked up when the boys landed but didn’t seem particularly interested. However, the guard who had challenged them stepped forward and reached out his hand in greeting. He was definitely American.

"Glad to see any one who speaks English," he said, as Harry approached and took his offered hand. "What are you boys doing here?"

"Glad to see someone who speaks English," he said as Harry walked over and shook his hand. "What are you guys doing here?"

"That's a long story," replied Harry, smiling. "Briefly, though, Captain Dynamite ran down our sail boat while we were sailing off Martha's Vineyard, picked us out of the water and brought us along whether we would or no."

"That's a long story," Harry said with a smile. "But to sum it up, Captain Dynamite ran down our sailboat while we were sailing near Martha's Vineyard, pulled us out of the water, and took us along whether we liked it or not."

"And where are you going now?"

"And where are you headed now?"

"To join Captain Dynamite. He may need our assistance."

"To team up with Captain Dynamite. He might need our help."

The man smiled.

The guy smiled.

"I am afraid you will be more likely to need his if you persist in your purpose," he said.

"I'm afraid you'll be more likely to need him if you keep going with your plan," he said.

"That, of course, is a matter of opinion," replied Harry, drawing himself up indignantly. "And to return the compliment may I ask what you are doing in Cuba?"

"That's just your opinion," Harry said, standing up indignantly. "And to return the favor, can I ask what you’re doing in Cuba?"

"Certainly," laughed the man. "I came with Morgan. We are soldiers of fortune."

"Sure," the man laughed. "I came with Morgan. We're soldiers of fortune."

"Then you are not a patriot?"

"Then you’re not a patriot?"

"Not exactly. I believe in the cause and I also believe that we will eventually win."

"Not really. I believe in the cause, and I also believe that we will eventually succeed."

"And then you expect your reward?"

"And then you expect your reward?"

"That's what we are fighting here for."[Pg 119]

"That's what we're fighting for here."[Pg 119]

"Sort of playing with fortune," chimed in Mason.

"Kind of flirting with fate," Mason interjected.

"Not exactly—sort of throwing dice with fate."

"Not really—it's like rolling dice with destiny."

"Well, come on, fellows," said Harry. "We are losing time and letting the captain get more of a lead on us."

"Come on, guys," Harry said. "We're wasting time and letting the captain get further ahead of us."

"So you are determined to go on?"

"So you're sure you want to go ahead?"

"I see no reason yet to turn back," replied Harry.

"I don't see any reason to turn back yet," replied Harry.

"But you do not know the country and its dangers."

"But you don’t know the country and its dangers."

"We have a good guide," said Harry, pointing to Washington.

"We have a great guide," said Harry, pointing to Washington.

The man leaned forward and peered in the darkness at the negro.

The man leaned forward and looked into the darkness at the Black man.

"Why, it's George Wash Jenks," he said in surprise. "Captain Dynamite's man. How are you, Wash?"

"Wow, it's George Wash Jenks," he said, surprised. "Captain Dynamite's guy. How are you, Wash?"

"Ah guess ah's all right, sah."

"Uh, I guess I'm fine, sir."

"Still guessing I see, Wash."

"Still guessing, I see, Wash."

"Not such a mucher, sah," the negro grinned broadly.

"Not that much, sir," the man smiled widely.

"Well boys, you are right about your guide. You can't go wrong around here while Wash is with you. Good luck to you. You will have to travel fast to catch up to Dynamite though. He was making express time and would not even stop to shake hands. All I could get out of him[Pg 120] was: 'Gomez—I must get to Gomez.' Nothing wrong, is there?"

"Well, guys, you’re spot on about your guide. You can’t go wrong as long as Wash is with you. Good luck! You'll need to move quickly to catch up to Dynamite. He was really speeding and didn’t even stop to shake hands. All I could get out of him[Pg 120] was: 'Gomez—I have to get to Gomez.' Nothing wrong with that, right?"

"No, nothing—nothing that concerns the cause. Good-bye. Come on, Washington."

"No, nothing—nothing about the cause. Goodbye. Let’s go, Washington."

Harry turned and started into the brush.

Harry turned and walked into the bushes.

"Not that way, Misser Harry," called Washington. "We keep by the shore a piece yet. Never get no further than six feet in there, ah guess."

"Not that way, Mr. Harry," called Washington. "We stay close to the shore still. We never go more than six feet in there, I guess."

He turned along the narrow beach below an overhanging bluff. For half an hour they hugged the shore.

He walked along the narrow beach beneath a steep cliff. For thirty minutes, they stayed close to the shore.

"Did the captain come this way do you think, Washington?" asked Harry.

"Do you think the captain came this way, Washington?" Harry asked.

"Don't guess this time, Misser Harry. No other way to come."

"Don't try to guess this time, Mr. Harry. There’s no other way to get here."

So far the going had been comparatively easy. They had to now and then clamber over jagged points of rocks that made out into the sea, and in the darkness they several times stumbled and fell, but no one was much hurt. Most of the way, however, had been along the sandy beach. Now Washington stopped and seemed to be looking for something. He peered out into the darkness over the sea and then shook his head. Then he stepped back toward the water and looked up at the skyline of the quickly rising inland country.[Pg 121]

So far, it had been relatively easy. They occasionally had to climb over sharp rocks jutting into the sea, and they stumbled and fell in the darkness a few times, but no one got seriously hurt. Most of the journey had been along the sandy beach. Now, Washington stopped and appeared to be searching for something. He looked out into the darkness over the sea and then shook his head. Then, he stepped back toward the water and gazed up at the silhouette of the rapidly rising inland landscape.[Pg 121]

"Lost the trail?" enquired Harry, after he had watched the negro's movements for some time in silence.

"Lost the trail?" Harry asked after silently observing the man's movements for a while.

"Not lost 'em, Misser Harry. Tryin' to find 'em. Big tree on leetle island. Can't see 'em." He pointed out over the sea where he had been gazing. Then he turned and pointed inland. "Big tree there. Can see him all right."

"Not lost them, Mr. Harry. Trying to find them. Big tree on little island. Can't see them." He pointed out over the sea where he had been looking. Then he turned and pointed inland. "Big tree there. Can see it just fine."

The boys looked up to where he pointed over the land and saw a large palm rising high above its fellows and clearly marked against the sky. It resembled the two big trees that had guided Captain Dynamite in making the entrance to the hidden lagoon. Evidently Washington was searching for some spot that was to be discovered by bringing the big tree on shore and the now invisible one on the island into line.

The boys looked up at where he pointed over the land and saw a tall palm tree standing out clearly against the sky. It looked like the two big trees that had helped Captain Dynamite find the entrance to the hidden lagoon. Clearly, Washington was looking for a spot that could be found by lining up the tall tree onshore with the now-hidden one on the island.

"George Wash Jenks, he find 'em. Don't worry 'bout dat," he said, as he walked about five feet to the right and then faced about and approached the bluff, which at this point was twenty feet high and thickly grown with brush and low entangling plants. He fumbled around among the vines and then turning to the boys called: "All right now."

"George Wash Jenks will find them. Don't worry about that," he said, as he stepped about five feet to the right, turned around, and walked toward the bluff, which was twenty feet high and thick with brush and low, tangled plants. He searched through the vines, then turned to the boys and called: "All right now."

As Harry came up he pointed at the bluff and then pulling aside the underbrush began to slowly work his way inward. The boys followed him.[Pg 122] The branches scratched their faces and the ground vines clung to their feet. They were entering a narrow cleft in the hill which was filled with rank vegetation.

As Harry approached, he pointed at the hill and then, moving the underbrush aside, started making his way in slowly. The boys followed him.[Pg 122] The branches scratched their faces and the ground vines stuck to their feet. They were entering a tight gap in the hill that was overgrown with thick plants.

"Keep a pushin'," said Washington. "Not so bad when we get in leetle more."

"Keep pushing," said Washington. "It's not so bad once we get a little more in."

They struggled on for about one hundred feet when the brush became less thick and finally they reached a narrow lane that had been hewed and trampled through the high growth. Their progress now became easier and with Washington in the lead they pushed ahead rapidly. They had made their way about half a mile inland when out of the brush came a voice that brought them to a standstill with a start.

They pushed on for about a hundred feet when the brush thinned out, and they finally reached a narrow path that had been carved and trampled through the tall vegetation. Their movement became easier now, and with Washington leading the way, they moved ahead quickly. They had traveled about half a mile inland when a voice suddenly came from the brush, stopping them in their tracks.

"Alto! Quien Va?"

"Stop! Who's there?"

"Dat another Misser Morgan's men," whispered Washington.

"That's another one of Mr. Morgan's men," whispered Washington.

"Independencia," said Harry, when he had recovered his breath, for the challenge coming unexpectedly from one concealed by the darkness and the bushes was somewhat startling. There was a low reply in Spanish and they proceeded without molestation.

"Independencia," Harry said, catching his breath, as the challenge came unexpectedly from someone hidden in the darkness and bushes, which was a bit surprising. There was a quiet response in Spanish, and they continued on without any trouble.

About every half a mile a mysterious voice challenged them, but the countersign secured for them uninterrupted progress. Through the waning night they pushed on, until the light in the sky[Pg 123] told them that day was breaking. Then Washington stopped. He had scarcely spoken since they took the trail.

About every half a mile, a mysterious voice challenged them, but the countersign ensured they could keep moving without interruption. They pressed on through the fading night until the light in the sky[Pg 123] signaled that dawn was approaching. Then Washington stopped. He had barely spoken since they began their journey.

"Missers," he said, as they halted, "better have breakfast now."

"Guys," he said, as they stopped, "we should grab breakfast now."

"Can we light a fire here safely?"

"Is it safe to light a fire here?"

"Yes, now; not bime bye."

"Yes, now; not later."

They unslung their improvised knapsacks and gathering some dry brush soon had a small fire burning. Washington made the coffee, procuring water from a stream that ran through the brush. The boys, thoroughly tired out, threw themselves down for a brief rest. They munched their crackers and dried beef with relish and drank coffee in turn from a tin cup that Washington had had the foresight to provide.

They took off their makeshift backpacks and quickly gathered some dry twigs, starting a small fire. Washington brewed the coffee, getting water from a stream nearby. The boys, completely worn out, lay down for a quick rest. They enjoyed their crackers and dried beef and took turns sipping coffee from a tin cup that Washington had wisely brought along.

"This seems very much like camping up at school," said Mason.

"This feels a lot like camping at school," Mason said.

"Yes, only I would prefer to have the boys in the bushes than a lot of Spaniards and Cubans with real bullets in their guns," replied Bert.

"Yeah, I’d rather have the guys in the bushes than a bunch of Spaniards and Cubans with real bullets in their guns," replied Bert.

"You always do look at the unromantic side of things, Bert. We haven't seen a Spaniard yet."

"You always focus on the unromantic side of things, Bert. We haven't encountered a Spaniard yet."

"Good and plenty when we get in the open," said Washington.

"There's plenty of good stuff when we get outside," said Washington.

"How do you know this country so well, Washington?" asked Harry.

"How do you know this country so well, Washington?" Harry asked.

"Born here, Misser Harry. I'se Cuban nigger."[Pg 124]

"Born here, Mister Harry. I'm a Cuban." [Pg 124]

"I thought you said you were 'George Wash Jenks, New York, U. S. A.?'"

"I thought you said you were 'George Wash Jenks, New York, U.S.A.?'""

"I suah are now, sah. I was only a picaninny when I ranned away with Massa Cap'n Dynamite."

"I sure am now, sir. I was just a kid when I ran away with Captain Dynamite."

"So you ran away with your young master, eh?"

"So you ran off with your young master, huh?"

"Yas, sah, dat's it."

"Yes, sir, that's it."

"And you've been with him ever since?"

"And you've been with him ever since?"

"Him couldn't lose me, sah." George grinned.

"Him can't lose me, sir." George grinned.

"And who is Miss Juanita?"

"And who is Miss Juanita?"

"Missee Juanita live on next plantation. She and Massa Capt'n Dynamite goin' to get married bime bye. He tell her so when he ranned away."

"Miss Juanita lives on the next plantation. She and Captain Dynamite are going to get married soon. He told her that when he ran away."

"Well Washington, it's sun up now and we better be moving if we expect to catch up with Massa Captain Dynamite."

"Well Washington, it's sunrise now and we should get going if we want to catch up with Captain Dynamite."

"We not catch Cap'n until we get to Cubitas."

"We won't catch the Captain until we get to Cubitas."

"Why not?"

"Why not?"

"Cap'n travel through this country faster'n any mule, and he not stop 'til he get there."

"Captain travels through this country faster than any mule, and he doesn't stop until he gets there."

"Not stop to sleep?"

"Not stopping to sleep?"

"No sleep, no eat. Missee Juanita in danger. I know the Massa Cap'n."

"No sleep, no eating. Missee Juanita is in danger. I know the Captain."


CHAPTER XI

Captured by the Spanish

The party, after breaking their fast, packed up their rations and started on again. The tangled forest of low growth through which they struggled began to thin out, and they found themselves in an almost open country at the foot of a range of mountains. Before they left the shelter of the bushes, Washington motioned the boys back, and dropping on his stomach, wriggled to the edge of the woods, where he made a long survey of the country. Seemingly satisfied, he beckoned to the others to come on, and they all cautiously crept out into the open country.

The group, after finishing their meal, packed up their supplies and continued on their way. The overgrown forest they had been battling through started to clear, and they found themselves in almost open land at the base of a mountain range. Before they left the cover of the bushes, Washington signaled the boys to stay back, dropped down on his stomach, and crawled to the edge of the woods, where he took a long look at the landscape. Appearing satisfied, he waved the others forward, and they all carefully crept out into the open area.

"Must keep eyes peeled now for Spaniards," said Washington. "Plenty of 'em 'tween here'n Cubitas."

"Must keep an eye out for Spaniards now," said Washington. "There are a lot of them between here and Cubitas."

"Which way now, Washington?" asked Harry.

"Which way now, Washington?" Harry asked.

The negro pointed straight ahead.

The Black person pointed straight ahead.

"Over that mountain?" queried Mason, in dismay.

"Over that mountain?" Mason asked, shocked.

"Suah—and then another—but that's Cubitas."

"Suah—and then another—but that's Cubitas."

They toiled on while the hot sun began to mount high in the sky. The perspiration dripped from their faces as they walked. The mountain[Pg 126] was thickly wooded to its very base and they made as rapid progress as possible in the wake of the doggedly plodding negro in the effort to gain the shade and the security of the trees.

They worked hard as the hot sun climbed higher in the sky. Sweat dripped from their faces as they walked. The mountain[Pg 126] was heavily forested all the way to the bottom, and they moved as quickly as they could to catch up with the determinedly slow-moving Black man, trying to reach the shade and safety of the trees.

"Half hour more and we find good place for siesta. Can't go on 'til sun goes down," said Washington, who had noticed the boys' fatigue.

"Just half an hour more, and we can find a good spot for a nap. We can't continue until the sun goes down," said Washington, who had seen how tired the boys were.

When they reached the foot of the mountain the negro struck off into the thick woods, and after a long climb they came out into a small glade, through which trickled a tiny stream. The boys drank greedily of the cool water, and Washington gathered boughs and leaves and soon rigged up a temporary shelter under the trees. Throwing themselves down beneath this, with their coats for pillows, all hands dropped off into a deep sleep.

When they got to the base of the mountain, the Black man headed into the dense woods. After a long climb, they emerged into a small clearing where a little stream flowed. The boys eagerly drank from the cool water, and Washington gathered branches and leaves to quickly set up a temporary shelter under the trees. They then laid down beneath it, using their coats for pillows, and all fell into a deep sleep.

When Harry awoke it was late afternoon. Bert was sitting up rubbing his eyes. Washington and Mason still slept on.

When Harry woke up, it was late afternoon. Bert was sitting up, rubbing his eyes. Washington and Mason were still asleep.

"I'm getting very tired of this sort of thing, Hal," whispered Bert, "I am afraid I was not cut out for a strenuous life. Do you think there are any Spaniards loafing around in this neighborhood?"

"I'm really getting tired of this, Hal," Bert whispered. "I don't think I was made for a hard life. Do you think there are any Spaniards just hanging around in this area?"

"Let's take a look while the others finish their nap," suggested Harry.

"Let’s check it out while the others finish their nap," suggested Harry.

The boys picked up their rifles and cautiously[Pg 127] entered the woods, moving from tree to tree and dodging around rocks and boulders in true Indian fashion. The excitement of thus picking their way through the woods caused them to forget that they were proceeding in anything but a direct line, and when they at last bethought themselves, neither could tell in which direction the camp lay behind them.

The boys grabbed their rifles and carefully[Pg 127] entered the woods, moving from tree to tree and zigzagging around rocks and boulders like true Indians. The thrill of navigating the woods made them forget they weren’t heading in a straight line, and when they finally stopped to think, neither of them could remember which way the camp was behind them.

They dared not shout, and they looked at each other in dismay.

They didn't dare to shout, and they exchanged worried glances.

"We are a brilliant pair," said Bert in disgust. "Now what are we to do? Have you any idea how far we have come, or in what direction?"

"We're a genius duo," Bert said in frustration. "So, what do we do now? Do you have any idea how far we've traveled or which way we're headed?"

"I think I have a general notion. Let's work back anyway."

"I think I have a basic idea. Let's figure it out anyway."

They faced about and began to make their way as rapidly as possible in the direction from which they believed they had come. Both were pretty well frightened for they realized the danger of becoming separated from their guide in that wild country, aside from the possibility of falling into the hands of Spaniards. In their nervous scare they hurried recklessly on, tripping now and then over trailing vines and plunging head on into thickets. Still they did not come upon the glade from which they had so unwisely strayed.

They turned around and started moving as quickly as they could in the direction they thought they had come from. Both were quite scared because they understood the danger of getting separated from their guide in that wild area, not to mention falling into the hands of Spaniards. In their anxious fear, they hurried recklessly, stumbling over trailing vines and crashing into thick bushes. Yet, they still couldn't find the glade they had foolishly left.

At last, convinced that they were not proceeding in the right direction, they stopped and[Pg 128] tried again to figure out the position of the camp. It was useless. They were now hopelessly lost. Harry looked up at the sun anxiously. It was getting low.

At last, realizing they weren't headed the right way, they stopped and[Pg 128] tried once more to determine where the camp was. It was pointless. They were now completely lost. Harry glanced at the sun with worry. It was getting low.

"It looks as if you and I were in another scrape, Bert," he said, trying to smile.

"It seems like you and I are in another mess, Bert," he said, trying to smile.

"We might wander for days without getting out of this labyrinth."

"We could drift for days without finding our way out of this maze."

"It's not so bad as that. We can get into the open all right by simply following the mountain down. But I do not know what good that would do us, for we could never find the pass through which we came."

"It's not as bad as that. We can get out into the open by just following the mountain down. But I don't see how that would help us, since we could never find the path we took to get here."

"No, and then there are the Spaniards."

"No, and then there are the Spaniards."

"Well, I suppose the Spaniards are a pretty serious proposition to Washington, who is their natural enemy, but I do not think they would do us much harm. We're American citizens, you know."

"Well, I guess the Spaniards are a pretty serious concern for Washington, who is their natural enemy, but I don't think they would hurt us much. We're American citizens, you know."

"They are not looking for American citizens out here, and we should have a hard time explaining. We couldn't say we came on the Mariella."

"They're not looking for American citizens out here, and we would have a tough time explaining. We couldn't say we arrived on the Mariella."

"No, that would hardly do. Still, we have not done anything to injure Spain, and we were certainly unwilling passengers on the Mariella. I do not see how they can do anything very disagreeable."

"No, that wouldn't work at all. Still, we haven't done anything to harm Spain, and we were definitely unwilling passengers on the Mariella. I just don't see how they can do anything too unpleasant."

"Judging from what Captain Dynamite says,[Pg 129] they are inclined to consider every one except a Spaniard as an enemy and a Cuban sympathizer."

"Based on what Captain Dynamite says,[Pg 129] they tend to view everyone who isn't Spanish as an enemy and a supporter of Cuba."

"Well, we've got to take some sort of a chance, so we might as well shout."

"Well, we've got to take a chance, so we might as well shout."

"All right, both together."

"Okay, both at once."

They sent up a "holloa" that rang through the trees.

They shouted out a "hello" that echoed through the trees.

"Mason—Washington," they shouted. "Answer. We have lost you."

"Mason—Washington," they shouted. "Are you there? We can’t find you."

Away in the distance they heard a faint answering call. In their efforts to retrace their steps they had wandered still further from their companions. They could not distinguish the words of the reply, but the sound gave them the direction, and with glad hearts they set off.

Away in the distance, they heard a faint response. In trying to find their way back, they had strayed even further from their friends. They couldn't make out the words of the reply, but the sound guided them, and with happy hearts, they set off.

Suddenly they heard a crackling in the bushes behind them.

Suddenly, they heard a crackling sound in the bushes behind them.

"Quien Vio?" called a voice. Their hearts sank within them. Turning quickly, they looked into the muzzles of four rifles.

"Who saw?" called a voice. Their hearts sank. Turning quickly, they looked down the barrels of four rifles.

"Gee, it's the Spaniards at last," whispered Bert. "Still I don't know but I had rather see them than no one. It was getting mighty lonesome."

"Wow, it's the Spaniards at last," Bert whispered. "Still, I’d rather see them than nobody. It was getting really lonely."

"They may be more of Morgan's men," said Harry.

"They might be more of Morgan's crew," Harry said.

"By jove, that's so. Let's try the countersign on them."[Pg 130]

"Wow, that's true. Let's use the countersign on them."[Pg 130]

"Don't," commanded Harry, quickly, catching his arm. "Suppose they were not. The word would convict us at once."

"Don't," Harry quickly ordered, grabbing his arm. "What if they weren't? That word would get us convicted right away."

"You're right."

"You’re right."

Had Washington been with them he would have recognized the Spanish challenge.

Had Washington been with them, he would have understood the Spanish challenge.

In the meantime the men had advanced, keeping the boys covered with their guns as if they were a pair of desperadoes who might attack them at any moment. They wore old and dirty uniforms, but it was plain that they had once been of regulation color and pattern.

In the meantime, the men had moved forward, keeping the boys covered with their guns as if they were a couple of outlaws who might strike at any moment. They wore old, grimy uniforms, but it was clear they had once been in standard colors and patterns.

"They are Spaniards fast enough," whispered Harry, as the men approached. "Cubans have no regular uniform." Then to the men he said:

"They're definitely Spaniards," Harry whispered as the men came closer. "Cubans don’t have an official uniform." Then he said to the men:

"Good afternoon, gentlemen. We are glad to see you. We are lost out here on your mountain. They are your mountains, I believe. We're Americans, you know."

"Good afternoon, gentlemen. We're happy to see you. We're a bit lost out here on your mountain. I think these are your mountains. We're Americans, just so you know."

"Ah, Americanos," said one of the men. "Surrend."

"Ah, Americans," said one of the men. "Surrender."

"Yes, Americanos if you prefer it so, but what do you want us to surrender?"

"Yes, Americans if that’s what you prefer, but what do you want us to give up?"

"Surrend," repeated the man, laying his hand roughly on Harry's rifle.

"Surrender," repeated the man, roughly placing his hand on Harry's rifle.

"O, the guns? Certainly. They are of no use to us, apparently."

"O, the guns? Sure. They don't seem to be any use to us."

Harry and Bert believing it to be the best policy[Pg 131] to be tractable, held out their guns with amiable smiles. They were snatched rudely from them. When the rifles were safely in the hands of the soldiers, a little fat man whom they had not seen before stepped out of the bushes, where he had evidently intended to remain until the prisoners were disarmed. He was an officer, judging from his side arms, and with great pomposity he now advanced, puffing and blowing, toward the boys. He said something in Spanish to one of the men, who replied: "Americanos."

Harry and Bert thought it was best to be agreeable[Pg 131], so they presented their guns with friendly smiles. But the guns were roughly taken from them. Once the rifles were securely in the soldiers' possession, a short, chubby man they hadn't seen before emerged from the bushes, where he had clearly intended to stay until the prisoners were disarmed. He looked like an officer, based on the sidearms he wore, and he pompously approached the boys, huffing and puffing. He said something in Spanish to one of the soldiers, who responded, "Americanos."

"Who you are doing here?" he demanded of Harry.

"Who are you doing here?" he asked Harry.

"O, sir," said Harry, "it is an agreeable surprise to find a gentleman who speaks our language so fluently," and he advanced with hand extended. The little man jumped back as if he feared the boy was about to strike and dodged behind his men, jabbering rapidly in Spanish. Evidently in response to some command, the four men rushed upon the boys and pinioned their hands behind their backs, tying them with gun straps.

"O, sir," Harry said, "it's a pleasant surprise to meet someone who speaks our language so well," and he stepped forward with his hand out. The little man recoiled as if he thought the boy was going to hit him and ducked behind his men, quickly talking in Spanish. Clearly in response to a command, the four men charged at the boys, grabbed their arms behind their backs, and tied them with gun straps.

"Look here," said Harry, indignantly. "I don't know who you are, but this is an outrage on two American citizens—do you understand?" He walked boldly up to the fat officer as he spoke and notwithstanding the boy's hands were now tied, the man backed away from him in fright.[Pg 132]

"Listen up," Harry said, feeling angry. "I don’t know who you think you are, but this is an attack on two American citizens—do you get it?" He marched right up to the overweight officer as he spoke, and even though the boy's hands were tied now, the man stepped back in fear.[Pg 132]

"You will have to answer for this to the United States—do you understand that?" continued Harry.

"You'll have to answer for this to the United States—do you get that?" Harry continued.

"Poof to United States," said the little man, snapping his fingers. He then gave another order in Spanish, and two of the men took up a position in front of the boys and two behind. The men in front began to march and those behind prodded the prisoners in the back with their guns, to indicate that they were to go on. There was nothing for the boys to do but submit, and slowly they began the descent of the mountain, the valorous commander keeping well to the rear.

"Poof to the United States," said the little man, snapping his fingers. He then gave another command in Spanish, and two of the men positioned themselves in front of the boys while two stood behind. The men in front started to march, and those behind nudged the prisoners with their guns to make it clear they needed to move. The boys had no choice but to comply, and gradually they began to make their way down the mountain, with the brave commander staying far back.

"These are your gentle Spaniards who wouldn't do a thing to you," said Bert, as they marched unwillingly along between their guards.

"These are your kind Spaniards who wouldn't hurt a fly," Bert said, as they marched reluctantly along between their guards.

"O, this pompous little fat man is some subordinate officer who is puffed up with his own importance. We will be all right when we get to headquarters and can see the commanding officer."

"O, this arrogant little fat man is just some low-ranking officer who is full of himself. We'll be fine once we get to headquarters and can talk to the commanding officer."

"I'm not so sure of that. They do not seem to be bubbling over with kindly respect for the United States."

"I'm not so sure about that. They don't seem to have much respect for the United States."

"Wait till we see the consul. You know O'Connor told us to call for our consul if we got into trouble."

"Wait until we see the consul. You know O'Connor told us to reach out to our consul if we got into any trouble."

"They may not let us see him."[Pg 133]

"They might not allow us to see him."[Pg 133]

"Then we'll—what will we do then, Bert?"

"Then what will we do, Bert?"

"Then it will be a case of measuring our wits against these fellows', and trying to make our escape. We may be able to get word to Captain Dynamite. Anyway Mason and Washington will probably discover that we have been captured and will go on to the captain."

"Then it will be a matter of matching our wits against these guys and trying to make our escape. We might be able to get a message to Captain Dynamite. In any case, Mason and Washington will likely find out that we've been captured and will inform the captain."

"Yes, but he has troubles of his own now to attend to."

"Yes, but he has his own problems to deal with now."

"Still I do not think he is the man to desert us entirely. He might get his friend Gomez to do something for us."

"Still, I don’t believe he’s the type to leave us completely. He might ask his friend Gomez to help us out."

"Well, a great deal depends on whether we have fallen into the hands of a small or large detachment of Spaniards. If it is only a skirmishing party, Gomez or Morgan might rescue us."

"Well, a lot depends on whether we've ended up in the hands of a small or large group of Spaniards. If it's just a scouting party, Gomez or Morgan might come to our rescue."

"Let us hope it is a small outfit. I don't like the spirit these chaps show, nor the contempt in which their fat commander seems to hold the United States."

"Let’s hope it’s a small group. I don’t like the attitude these guys have, nor the disdain their overweight leader seems to have for the United States."

They were now getting near the foot of the mountain. Suddenly Harry clutched Bert's arm.

They were now getting close to the bottom of the mountain. Suddenly, Harry grabbed Bert's arm.

"What is it?" asked Bert, startled by Harry's movement.

"What is it?" Bert asked, surprised by Harry's movement.

"Don't look to right or left. I just saw the Midget's white face peeking out at us as we passed that last clump of bushes. It's all right now. They know we are prisoners and you can trust[Pg 134] Mason for getting a move on." The boys tramped along with lighter hearts now that they were confident that their companion knew of their predicament.

"Don't look right or left. I just saw the Midget's white face peeking out at us as we passed that last clump of bushes. It's all good now. They know we're prisoners, and you can trust [Pg 134] Mason to get us moving." The boys walked along with lighter hearts now that they were sure their friend understood their situation.

"I hope they will not get pinched too," said Bert.

"I hope they don't get caught too," said Bert.

"Don't always look on the dark side of things, old chap," said Harry, a little testily. "Cheer up."

"Don't always focus on the negative, my friend," Harry said, a bit irritably. "Lighten up."

They were now in the open country again and made more rapid progress. The Spaniards moved along without any attempt at caution now. They well knew the Cuban methods of warfare, and did not fear an attack in the open. Opposed always by much superior numbers, the insurgents had learned that the only way to successfully cope with their enemy was to keep under cover and prosecute a guerilla warfare.

They were back in the open countryside and made faster progress. The Spaniards moved forward without being cautious now. They were well aware of the Cuban tactics and didn't fear an attack in the open. Always facing much larger numbers, the insurgents had learned that the only way to effectively deal with their enemy was to stay hidden and carry out guerrilla warfare.

As they climbed the top of a small hill the boys were surprised to see in front of them the outlying buildings of what seemed to be a town or city of some size and importance. When they approached nearer they found that these buildings were but poor huts or cabins, and formed a sort of irregular, narrow street that led into the town, which was situated about a mile beyond. As they entered the street the character of these shed-like habitations flashed upon the boys. They were the homes of the "reconcentrados" of whom[Pg 135] O'Connor had told them. The boys shuddered as they passed them and for a time scarcely dared to look to one side or the other for fear that they might see some horrible sight, so forcibly had O'Connor's description impressed them. Most of the huts were without doors and the interiors were open to a passing view. So hopeless were the miserable inmates that they did not even care to hide their suffering from the heartless eyes of the curious. The men laughed and joked as they passed on and Harry could not but feel that their jests were pointed by the misery of the reconcentrados.

As they climbed to the top of a small hill, the boys were surprised to see in front of them the outskirts of what looked like a town or city of some size and importance. When they got closer, they realized that these buildings were just poor huts or cabins, forming a sort of uneven, narrow street that led into the town, which was located about a mile away. As they entered the street, the boys quickly understood what these shed-like homes were. They were the dwellings of the "reconcentrados" that O'Connor had talked about. The boys shuddered as they passed them and for a while, they hardly dared to look to either side for fear of seeing something horrific, so strongly had O'Connor's description affected them. Most of the huts had no doors, and the insides were exposed to anyone passing by. The miserable residents were so hopeless that they didn’t even bother to hide their suffering from the unfeeling gaze of the curious onlookers. The men laughed and joked as they walked by, and Harry couldn’t help but feel that their jokes were overshadowed by the misery of the reconcentrados.

Finally a horrible curiosity turned their heads and they saw in front of one of the huts a group of four persons. They were a man, a woman, a child of perhaps fourteen, and a babe in its mother's arms. The man lay stretched at full length on his back at the roadside. His eyes, which were open, were turned upward to the sky. The woman sat with her back to the mud wall of the hut. Her eyes were fixed on the man at her feet. The child stood in the doorway looking with expressionless eyes out into space. The few rags that covered them only served to emphasize the emaciation of their bodies and limbs. It needed no trained eye to tell that they were starving. As the party passed, not one of the[Pg 136] four changed position or once turned their eyes. In their mute suffering they seemed unconscious of their surroundings.

Finally, a terrible curiosity turned their heads, and they saw in front of one of the huts a group of four people. There was a man, a woman, a child of about fourteen, and a baby in its mother's arms. The man lay stretched out on his back by the roadside. His open eyes were looking up at the sky. The woman sat with her back against the muddy wall of the hut, her eyes fixed on the man at her feet. The child stood in the doorway, staring blankly into space. The few rags covering them only highlighted the thinness of their bodies and limbs. It was clear to anyone that they were starving. As the group passed, none of the[Pg 136] four changed position or even glanced their way. In their silent suffering, they seemed unaware of their surroundings.

One of the guards looked and laughed brutally.

One of the guards glanced over and laughed harshly.

Harry tugged at his bonds. In his fierce indignation he would have struck down the man.

Harry pulled at his ropes. In his intense anger, he would have attacked the man.

Finally they passed out of this street of misery and entered the town. The boys had forgotten their own troubles in the contemplation of the suffering of the unhappy creatures behind them. The guards who had been slouching along at a swinging gait now straightened up and assumed a more soldierly air. At a word of command from their fat commander they halted before a building which was more imposing in appearance than its neighbors, and looked to be a public edifice of some sort. They marched, with their prisoners still between them, up the few steps that led to a wide doorway and into a large room on the right, where an officer was reclining in a lounging chair, lazily puffing a cigarette. It was now growing dark outside and the room was dimly lighted by a lamp that stood on the flat desk in front of the only occupant.

Finally, they left that street of misery and entered the town. The boys had forgotten their own problems while watching the suffering of the poor souls behind them. The guards, who had been slouching along casually, now straightened up and adopted a more soldierly stance. At a command from their plump commander, they stopped in front of a building that looked more impressive than its neighbors, seeming to be some sort of public structure. They marched, still flanking their prisoners, up the few steps leading to a wide doorway and into a large room to the right, where an officer was lounging in a chair, lazily smoking a cigarette. It was getting dark outside, and the room was dimly lit by a lamp on the flat desk in front of the only occupant.

The man straightened himself up as the squad entered, and the little commander saluted with great deference.

The man stood up straight as the squad came in, and the small commander saluted with a lot of respect.

"I told you so," said Harry, who noticed the[Pg 137] air of deep respect that now marked their captor. "The little fat man is only an understrapper. Now we shall have a hearing."

"I told you so," said Harry, who noticed the[Pg 137] air of deep respect that now marked their captor. "The little fat man is just a lackey. Now we’ll have a hearing."

While the little officer reported to his superior, the latter looked the boys over with some apparent curiosity. He asked a few questions and then uttering something that sounded like a judicial decision, he sank back in his chair again and lighted another cigarette.

While the young officer reported to his superior, the latter surveyed the boys with some noticeable curiosity. He asked a few questions, and then, saying something that sounded like a legal ruling, he leaned back in his chair again and lit another cigarette.

The guard faced about, prodded the boys in the back again with their guns to indicate that they were to move on, and the procession filed out into the street again. For a moment the boys could scarcely realize that they were to have no hearing, and then Harry turned to the fat man indignantly.

The guard turned around, poked the boys in the back again with their guns to signal that they needed to keep moving, and the group made their way back out into the street. For a moment, the boys could hardly grasp that they weren’t going to have a hearing, and then Harry turned to the overweight man, feeling angry.

"Are we not to be permitted to tell our story?" he demanded. "Where are you taking us? I demand a hearing as an American citizen in the presence of the American consul."

"Are we not allowed to tell our story?" he insisted. "Where are you taking us? I demand to be heard as an American citizen in front of the American consul."

The little man, who evidently understood much of what he said, chuckled, and the men, taking their cue from their commander, jabbed the boys once more in the back.

The little man, who clearly understood a lot of what he said, chuckled, and the men, following their leader’s cue, poked the boys again in the back.

"It's no use, Hal," said Bert. "We might as well wait and see what they intend to do with us."

"It's no use, Hal," Bert said. "We might as well just wait and see what they plan to do with us."

They passed from one narrow street to another[Pg 138] until they again halted in front of a building whose narrow windows were closely barred.

They moved from one narrow street to another[Pg 138] until they stopped again in front of a building with tightly barred windows.

"Looks uncomfortably like a jail," said Harry, as he surveyed the white front of the gloomy structure. A door on the level with the street opened, the guns prodded the boys in the back again, and they entered through the low portal into a dark corridor. The door closed behind them and they found they were alone with a black-bearded man who carried a bunch of large keys that jangled unpleasantly.

"Looks way too much like a jail," Harry said as he looked over the white front of the dreary building. A door at street level opened, the guns nudged the boys in the back again, and they stepped through the low entrance into a dark hallway. The door closed behind them, and they realized they were alone with a man who had a black beard and carried a bunch of large keys that jangled uncomfortably.

He motioned silently for the boys to follow him, and as they had no choice in the matter, they did so. At the end of the corridor the man opened a door and pointed in. The boys entered and the door swung to behind them silently.

He silently signaled for the boys to follow him, and since they had no choice, they complied. At the end of the hallway, the man opened a door and gestured inside. The boys went in, and the door closed quietly behind them.

It was almost dark, but through the barred window of the room just enough twilight crept to show the boys that they were in a room that contained only a wooden table, two chairs, and two low wooden beds.

It was nearly dark, but through the barred window of the room, just enough twilight came in to show the boys that they were in a room with only a wooden table, two chairs, and two low wooden beds.


CHAPTER XII

Next up, Gomez

When Mason and Washington awoke and discovered that their companions were missing, the negro became greatly excited.

When Mason and Washington woke up and found that their friends were gone, the Black man became really agitated.

"You stay here, Misser Midget," he said. "I go see if I can find 'em. They get lost in these woods, or catched by Spaniards. Don't you move 'til George Wash Jenks come back or you get lost too."

"You stay here, Misser Midget," he said. "I’m going to see if I can find them. They might be lost in these woods or caught by Spaniards. Don’t move until George Wash Jenks comes back or you might get lost too."

Washington took his rifle and disappeared among the trees, while Mason anxiously paced the small glade. The time passed slowly and the boy's nerves were strung to their highest tension. He started at the smallest rustle of the leaves in the trees around him, and began to imagine all sorts of disagreeable possibilities. What if Washington should be unable to find his way back or should fall into the hands of the Spaniards? And what if the Spaniards should discover him before Washington returned. His excited mind began to reflect pictures of a lone boy starving to death in the woods. And then the picture would change and he would be struggling against an overwhelming number of Spaniards, who[Pg 140] would seize and bind him and rush him off to suffer the horrors of the inquisition.

Washington took his rifle and vanished into the trees, while Mason nervously paced the small clearing. Time dragged on, and the boy's nerves were at their breaking point. He jumped at the slightest rustle of leaves around him, and began to imagine all kinds of terrible scenarios. What if Washington couldn’t find his way back or fell into the hands of the Spaniards? And what if the Spaniards found him before Washington returned? His racing mind conjured images of a lonely boy starving to death in the woods. Then the scene would shift, and he would see himself fighting against a huge number of Spaniards, who[Pg 140] would grab him, tie him up, and drag him off to endure the horrors of the inquisition.

Suddenly in the distance he heard the boys' shout. It sent the blood tingling through his veins. At least he was not quite alone in the woods while his companions were within hailing distance. He sent up a glad cry in response. Again came the shout and again he replied, and then with his heart more at ease, he sat down on a rock and waited for them to appear.

Suddenly, he heard the boys shouting in the distance. It made his blood rush with excitement. At least he wasn't completely alone in the woods, as his friends were close enough to call out to. He shouted back joyfully in response. The shout came again, and he replied once more. With his heart feeling lighter, he settled down on a rock and waited for them to show up.

There was a slight crackling in the bushes behind him. He turned quickly. Washington burst into the clearing, his eyes bulging with excitement.

There was a faint rustling in the bushes behind him. He turned quickly. Washington burst into the clearing, his eyes wide with excitement.

"Quick, Misser Midget," he said, seizing the boy's arm and dragging him off into the thicket.

"Quick, Mr. Midget," he said, grabbing the boy's arm and pulling him into the bushes.

"Spaniards got Misser Harry and Misser Bert and comin' this way."

"Spaniards brought Mister Harry and Mister Bert and are on their way here."

Crouching low in the bushes, they saw the prisoners marched by and were helpless to aid them. Once Washington gripped his gun and made a movement to dash out of cover, but his better sense prevailed.

Crouching low in the bushes, they watched as the prisoners were marched by, unable to help them. At one point, Washington gripped his gun and considered rushing out of cover, but he ultimately thought better of it.

"No use," he whispered. "Spaniards too many and must be more close by."

"No way," he whispered. "There are too many Spaniards, and they must be nearby."

When the party was well down the mountain, Washington pushed aside the bushes and straightened up. Turning to Mason, who was pale from[Pg 141] excitement, he said: "Now we make tracks for Massa Cap'n Dynamite. They take Missers where they take Missee Juanita. Massa cap'n he come back with one—two—three hundred men and he and Cap'n Morgan they make 'em sorry."

When the group had made it further down the mountain, Washington pushed aside the bushes and stood up straight. Turning to Mason, who looked pale from excitement, he said: "Now we head for Captain Dynamite. They take the ladies where they take Miss Juanita. Captain will come back with one—two—three hundred men, and he and Captain Morgan will make them regret it."

As there seemed to be nothing else to do but to seek reinforcements, Mason, with a heavy heart picked up his bundle and his rifle, and followed Washington through the woods. Their progress was slow, as the negro proceeded now with more caution. Darkness soon came upon them and made their advance still more difficult. The route that Washington was following often necessitated a climb up the almost perpendicular face of a rock as the mountain became more precipitous. Mason's hands bled from contact with the rough rocks, and he panted for breath. Still Washington pushed on, and when morning broke they found themselves at the top of the mountain.

As it seemed there was nothing else to do but look for reinforcements, Mason, feeling heavy-hearted, picked up his bundle and rifle and followed Washington through the woods. Their progress was slow, as the man of color moved with more caution now. Darkness quickly fell around them, making it even harder to advance. The path Washington was taking often required climbing up the steep face of a rock as the mountain became more rugged. Mason's hands were bleeding from the rough rocks, and he was out of breath. Still, Washington continued on, and when morning came, they found themselves at the top of the mountain.

"Take short rest," said Washington, unslinging his pack and sitting down with his back to a boulder. "Eat a bite and Wash make some coffee. Heap easier goin' down mountain."

"Take a short break," said Washington, taking off his pack and sitting down with his back against a boulder. "Eat something and I’ll make some coffee. It’ll be much easier going down the mountain."

"But you said there was still another mountain to climb, Washington," said Mason, wearily.

"But you said there was still another mountain to climb, Washington," said Mason, tiredly.

"Yas, sah, but Cubitas and Massa Cap'n Dynamite on top that one. May meet 'em[Pg 142] comin' down with one—two—three hundred men."

"Yeah, sir, but Cubitas and Massa Cap'n Dynamite are on top of that. We might run into them[Pg 142] coming down with one—two—three hundred men."

"I hope we meet them at the foot, Washington. I do not long for another climb like this one."

"I hope we meet them down below, Washington. I don't look forward to another climb like this one."

"Pretty tough one, suah 'nough, sah."

"Pretty tough one, sure enough, sir."

The descent was of course much easier than the climb, but nevertheless they found many obstacles in their way, and as caution dictated that they should keep well aside from any open trail, their progress down the mountain was scarcely more rapid than their climb had been. But they had the advantage of daylight and passed over the rough places with fewer bruises and cuts. They made one more short stop at about noon, and then pushed on again although the sun was now excessively hot, even as it filtered through the thick foliage. It was late afternoon when they reached the bottom of the mountain and entered the valley between the two ranges of hills. This valley was about a mile wide and through it flowed a narrow stream. The shores were wooded, but the rest of the country was an open plain. They waded the little river, and as they were about to clamber out on the other side, the familiar challenge rang out:

The descent was definitely easier than the climb, but they still faced many obstacles along the way. Since caution advised them to stay far from any open trails, their progress down the mountain was hardly faster than their ascent had been. However, they had the advantage of daylight and managed to navigate the rough spots with fewer bruises and cuts. They took one last short break around noon, then pressed on even though the sun was now extremely hot, even as it filtered through the thick foliage. It was late afternoon when they finally reached the base of the mountain and entered the valley between the two hills. This valley was about a mile wide, with a narrow stream flowing through it. The banks were wooded, but the rest of the land was an open plain. They crossed the small river, and just as they were about to climb out on the other side, the familiar challenge rang out:

"Alto!"

"Stop!"

"That General Gomez man. Say password," said Washington.[Pg 143]

"That General Gomez guy. Say password," said Washington.[Pg 143]

"Independencia," said Mason, with a slight quaver in his voice.

"Independence," said Mason, with a slight shake in his voice.

These unexpected challenges from invisible sentinels were somewhat wearing on the nerves. They passed on without interference.

These unexpected challenges from unseen watchers were a bit stressful. They moved on without causing any trouble.

"Where was that man stationed, Washington?" asked Mason.

"Where was that guy stationed, Washington?" asked Mason.

"Up top of head in big tree," chuckled the negro. "Good place to pop over Spaniard if he comes along. Not get by the next one so easy."

"Up in the big tree," the man laughed. "It's a great spot to take out a Spaniard if he comes by. He won't get past the next one so easily."

Washington was right. When they reached the foot of the mountain they were again challenged, and although Mason promptly gave the countersign, they were at once surrounded by a dozen armed men, who talked rapidly in Spanish. Washington, who spoke the language imperfectly, explained that they were the bearers of an important message for Captain Dynamite, and after many conferences aside and further questioning, two men were told off to accompany them, and they were allowed to proceed practically as prisoners.

Washington was right. When they got to the base of the mountain, they were challenged again, and although Mason quickly provided the password, they were immediately surrounded by a dozen armed men who spoke rapidly in Spanish. Washington, who spoke the language poorly, explained that they had an important message for Captain Dynamite, and after several side discussions and further questioning, two men were assigned to accompany them, and they were allowed to move forward basically as prisoners.

"All right now," said Washington, with a broad grin. "Got a suah 'nough body guard."

"All right now," said Washington, with a big grin. "Got a solid bodyguard."

A wide, well-used trail made the ascent of this mountain comparatively easy. When they reached the top, Mason was surprised to find a small settlement in the middle of which was a[Pg 144] large, low, wooden building, all four sides of which were patroled by sentinels. Toward this building their guard headed. They entered through a wide doorway and found themselves in a large, square room, with three other occupants. It was now quite dark, so that for a moment Mason did not recognize Captain Dynamite as one of the men. The three were in earnest converse at a long table, and for some time did not notice the new comers, who paused on the threshold.

A wide, well-used trail made climbing this mountain relatively easy. When they reached the top, Mason was surprised to see a small settlement in the middle of which was a[Pg 144] large, low wooden building, with sentinels patrolling all four sides. Their guard headed toward this building. They entered through a wide doorway and found themselves in a large square room with three other people. It was now quite dark, so for a moment Mason didn't recognize Captain Dynamite as one of the men. The three were engaged in serious conversation at a long table and didn't notice the newcomers who paused at the threshold for a while.

"That Massa Cap'n Dynamite, General Gomez, and President Betancourt," said Washington, pointing to the notable group.

"That Master Captain Dynamite, General Gomez, and President Betancourt," said Washington, pointing to the notable group.

Mason looked with interest at the old general who stood at the head of the table. He was easily distinguished because of his military bearing and accoutrements, for the grizzled warrior had one little weakness—a love of display. He was a much smaller man than Mason expected to see, but there was that in his rugged, tanned face and firm chin that at once commanded respect and attention. He bore his seventy odd years lightly and his slight form was as straight as a ramrod. His uniform, unlike those of his faithful followers, was immaculately spotless. His carbine, on which he rested, was gold mounted; the sabre at his side was elegantly chased and decorated, and the silver on his pistol handles glittered in the waning[Pg 145] light. As he turned his eyes on the group in the doorway, his heavy iron-grey eyebrows contracted into a scowl and he spoke quickly to O'Connor. The latter turned and started from his chair angrily.

Mason looked with interest at the old general who stood at the head of the table. He was easily identifiable because of his military demeanor and gear, since the seasoned warrior had one small weakness—a love for showiness. He was much shorter than Mason expected, but there was something in his rugged, tanned face and strong chin that instantly commanded respect and attention. He carried his seventy-plus years lightly, and his slim frame was as straight as an arrow. His uniform, unlike those of his loyal followers, was immaculately clean. His carbine, which he leaned on, had gold fittings; the saber at his side was elegantly designed and embellished, and the silver on the handles of his pistols sparkled in the fading[Pg 145] light. As he turned to look at the group in the doorway, his heavy iron-grey eyebrows furrowed into a scowl, and he quickly addressed O'Connor. The latter turned and jumped up from his chair angrily.

"What are you doing here?" he demanded.

"What are you doing here?" he asked.

"If you please, Massa Cap'n, ah——"

"If you don't mind, Captain, uh——"

"Let me explain, Wash," said Mason, advancing a step when he felt the hand of one of the guards fall heavily on his shoulder. "I think, captain," he continued, pointing to the man, "that we can get along now without the protection of these gentlemen."

"Let me explain, Wash," said Mason, taking a step forward when he felt the heavy hand of one of the guards on his shoulder. "I think, captain," he continued, pointing at the man, "that we can manage without these guys' protection now."

O'Connor waved his hand and the two men saluted and filed out.

O'Connor waved his hand, and the two men nodded and left.

Mason advanced boldly to the table and facing O'Connor, said:

Mason confidently approached the table and, facing O'Connor, said:

"Captain Dynamite, you should not blame Washington. It is his love for you and Miss Juanita that brings him here."

"Captain Dynamite, you shouldn’t blame Washington. It’s his love for you and Miss Juanita that brings him here."

"I suppose you are right, boy," said the captain, still scowling, "but I am in great trouble and I do not like to have my plans interfered with. But what brings you here?"

"I guess you're right, kid," the captain said, still frowning, "but I'm in a lot of trouble, and I don’t like it when my plans get messed up. So, what are you doing here?"

"Well, we heard that you were in trouble, and as Washington was going to join you, we thought we would come along, too, and be of what assistance we could."[Pg 146]

"Well, we heard you were in trouble, and since Washington was going to join you, we thought we’d come along too and help out however we could."[Pg 146]

The scowl faded from the man's face. He turned to General Gomez and spoke to him in Spanish. When he had finished, the old warrior looked the Midget over from head to foot and the stern lines of his face broke into a genial smile, gentle and reassuring. O'Connor stepped forward, and taking Mason's hand, shook it warmly.

The frown disappeared from the man's face. He turned to General Gomez and spoke to him in Spanish. When he was done, the old warrior looked Mason up and down and the serious lines of his face transformed into a friendly smile, warm and comforting. O'Connor stepped forward and warmly shook Mason's hand.

"I thank you, my boy, for your good intentions. You must have made excellent time over a rough and dangerous road, for you are here close at my heels. And your journey has left its marks, I see," he said, as he noticed Mason's cut and bruised face and hands, and his torn clothing. "But where are your friends?"

"I appreciate it, my boy, for your good intentions. You must have made great progress over a tough and risky road, since you’re right here behind me. And I can see that your journey has taken its toll," he said, noticing Mason's cut and bruised face and hands, along with his ripped clothing. "But where are your friends?"

"The Spaniards have got 'em," said Mason, laconically.

"The Spaniards have them," said Mason, matter-of-factly.

O'Connor looked first at the boy as if he thought it a joke, and then at Washington, in whose troubled face he read confirmation.

O'Connor first looked at the boy as if he thought it was a joke, and then at Washington, whose worried face confirmed his suspicions.

"Yas, Massa Cap'n; Spaniards got 'em, suah 'nough," said Washington, nodding his head vigorously in the affirmative.

"Yes, Master Captain; the Spaniards have them, for sure," said Washington, nodding his head vigorously in agreement.

"When, where, how did it happen?" asked O'Connor, rapidly.

"When, where, how did it happen?" O'Connor asked quickly.

"It was on the far side of the fust mountain, after we pass the fust clearing. Boys left the camp and before George Wash Jenks could find 'em 'long came Spaniards and snapped 'em up."[Pg 147]

"It was on the other side of the first mountain, after we passed the first clearing. The boys left the camp, and before George Wash Jenks could find them, along came the Spaniards and took them away."[Pg 147]

"Why did you let them leave the camp, you rascal? You know this country too well for that."

"Why did you let them leave the camp, you troublemaker? You know this area way too well for that."

"Went while George Wash Jenks was asleep," answered the negro sheepishly.

"Went while George Wash Jenks was asleep," the Black man replied, looking sheepish.

"Well, where did they take them?"

"Well, where did they take them?"

"Leettle town 'bout mile down clearing, ah 'spect.".

"Little town about a mile down the clearing, I expect."

"Humph! You don't know, then?"

"Hmph! You don't know, huh?"

"George Wash Jenks think it best to come to Massa Cap'n and not go snoopin' after Spaniard in the open. Got cotched too."

"George Wash Jenks thinks it's better to go to Captain and not go snooping around after the Spaniards out in the open. Got caught too."

"Yes, I guess you are right. Now, what is to be done? I wonder if the boys will know enough to keep their tongues still about the Mariella?" The captain looked questioningly at Mason as he spoke.

"Yeah, I guess you’re right. So, what should we do now? I wonder if the guys will be smart enough to keep quiet about the Mariella?" The captain gave Mason a questioning look as he spoke.

"You needn't fear, sir, that they will say or do anything likely to get you into trouble," said the boy, promptly.

"You don’t need to worry, sir, that they will say or do anything that could get you in trouble," the boy replied quickly.

O'Connor smiled at the boy's defence of his comrades.

O'Connor smiled at the boy's defense of his friends.

"I was not thinking of myself, my boy; but if it were known that they were in any way connected with the expedition of the Mariella it might go hard with them."

"I wasn't thinking about myself, son; but if it got out that they were in any way linked to the expedition of the Mariella, it could be really tough for them."

"I think they will understand that, sir."

"I believe they will get that, sir."

"Now, the next question is how to aid them. I think my own mission lies in their direction. But[Pg 148] you need freshening up a bit, and I'll wager you are hungry. I will send a man with you to my quarters. You will find soap and water there and a tin basin. The accommodations are a little primitive and not quite up to the Mariella's, but you can get some of the dirt out of those cuts. We will sup here when you are ready. Washington, you know the way to the mess-room. Go and fill up that empty stomach of yours and then return to me. You go back to Captain Morgan in an hour."

"Now, the next question is how to help them. I believe my mission is connected to theirs. But[Pg 148] you need to clean up a bit, and I'll bet you’re hungry. I’ll send someone with you to my room. You’ll find soap and water there, along with a tin basin. The setup is a bit basic and not quite like the Mariella's, but you can wash some of that dirt out of those cuts. We’ll have dinner here when you’re ready. Washington, you know the way to the mess hall. Go fill that empty stomach of yours and then come back to me. You can return to Captain Morgan in an hour."

"O, Massa Cap'n, not goin' to send George Wash Jenks back?"

"O, Master Captain, aren't you going to send George Wash Jenks back?"

"You will be best serving me, Washington. You will bear a dispatch of the utmost importance. It must be in Captain Morgan's hands within thirty-six hours in order that he may co-operate with us. I know of no other man who knows the road well enough to cover it in that time. You will also act as an escort to Miss Juanita's mother and her attendants."

"You will be serving me best, Washington. You'll be delivering an urgent message. It needs to reach Captain Morgan within thirty-six hours so he can work with us. I don’t know anyone else who knows the route well enough to make it in that time. You'll also be escorting Miss Juanita's mother and her attendants."

Proud of the distinction and eager to serve his master, as he insisted upon calling O'Connor, the negro straightened up.

Proud of the distinction and eager to serve his master, which he insisted on calling O'Connor, the man straightened up.

"Message shall be there, sah. Missee Juanita's mother shall have escort, too."

"Message will be there, sir. Miss Juanita's mother will also have an escort."

O'Connor called an orderly and sent him with Mason to his quarters. After washing and[Pg 149] tidying up his tattered clothing as well as he could, the boy returned to the military headquarters, where the three men were again in earnest conference. O'Connor motioned to a big wooden settee at one end of the room. Mason stretched out on this and, utterly worn out, his eyes closed and in five minutes he had dropped off into a heavy slumber.

O'Connor called for an orderly and sent him with Mason to his quarters. After washing and [Pg 149] doing his best to tidy up his worn-out clothes, the boy returned to the military headquarters, where the three men were once again deep in discussion. O'Connor gestured to a large wooden sofa at one end of the room. Mason lay down on it and, completely exhausted, closed his eyes and fell into a deep sleep within five minutes.

For half an hour longer the men continued their conference, and then, having come to some unanimous conclusion, they rose from the table. O'Connor, seeing the sleeping boy, stepped over to the settee and removing his coat, rolled it up and placed it gently under his head. Then, with a military salute to President Betancourt, he and General Gomez passed out of the building.

For another half an hour, the men kept discussing things, and then, after reaching a shared decision, they stood up from the table. O'Connor, noticing the sleeping boy, walked over to the couch, took off his coat, rolled it up, and carefully placed it under the boy's head. Then, giving a military salute to President Betancourt, he and General Gomez left the building.

Mason was suddenly awakened by the shouts of men and the jangling of guns and sabres. He sat up quickly and rubbed his eyes, looking around the room in a bewildered manner. At first the train of recent events would not form themselves properly in his mind. He could not for a moment recall the room in which he found himself, or how he got there. The moonlight was streaming in at the low open windows and fell upon the long table at which again sat the three men, while an orderly stood silently behind the chair of the general. They were apparently[Pg 150] eating, and hunger gnawing at the boy's stomach dulled any sense of delicacy and he rose and walked directly to the table.

Mason was suddenly jolted awake by the shouts of men and the clanking of guns and swords. He quickly sat up and rubbed his eyes, scanning the room in confusion. At first, he couldn't piece together the recent events in his mind. He couldn't remember for a moment where he was or how he had gotten there. Moonlight streamed in through the low open windows and illuminated the long table where the three men were once again seated, while an orderly stood quietly behind the general's chair. They appeared to be[Pg 150] eating, and the hunger gnawing at the boy's stomach dulled any sense of embarrassment, prompting him to rise and walk straight to the table.

"I think you said we would sup here, Captain," he said.

"I think you mentioned we would eat here, Captain," he said.

O'Connor turned and motioned to the orderly to bring a chair.

O'Connor turned and signaled to the orderly to bring a chair.

"I certainly did, my boy, but seeing you asleep I thought I would not disturb you at present. Sit down, and while you eat tell me all you know of the capture of the boys and the movements of their captors."

"I definitely did, my boy, but seeing you asleep, I thought I wouldn’t wake you up right now. Sit down, and while you eat, tell me everything you know about the boys’ capture and what their captors have been doing."

Mason told the details of the boys' capture and O'Connor repeated it in Spanish to Gomez and Betancourt. In the meantime outside of the building all was confusion, and through the open door and windows the boy could see that armed men were rapidly gathering in response to the loud commands of leaders. As fast as one squad or company formed, it moved off and down the mountain trail by which Mason and Washington had approached the plateau. Another squad began forming at once. There seemed to be a constant stream of men pouring down the mountain side.

Mason shared the details of the boys' capture, and O'Connor translated it into Spanish for Gomez and Betancourt. Meanwhile, outside the building, chaos reigned, and through the open door and windows, the boy could see armed men quickly gathering in response to the loud commands from their leaders. As soon as one squad or group was assembled, it headed down the mountain trail that Mason and Washington had used to reach the plateau. Another squad started to form immediately after. It felt like there was a never-ending flow of men coming down the mountainside.


CHAPTER XIII

Harry Declines to Betray Captain Dynamite

Harry and Bert had hardly time to inspect the bare room in which they were imprisoned, when the door opened again and two men entered. They removed the straps from the boys' wrists and retired without a word. A key grated in the lock after the door had closed. Harry walked over quickly and tried to open it. There was no handle or lock on the inside and it would not yield to pressure.

Harry and Bert barely had time to take a look at the empty room where they were trapped when the door opened again and two men came in. They took off the straps from the boys' wrists and left without saying anything. A key turned in the lock once the door closed. Harry rushed over and tried to open it. There was no handle or lock on the inside, and it wouldn't budge under pressure.

"Well," said Harry, after a short silence, dropping onto one of the beds.

"Well," said Harry, after a brief pause, flopping down onto one of the beds.

"Well," repeated Bert in the same half-questioning tone.

"Well," Bert said again, his tone still half-questioning.

"We are prisoners hard and fast. What do you think they mean to do with us?"

"We're stuck here as prisoners. What do you think they plan to do with us?"

"Send us on to Havana, maybe, for the inspection of Weyler. But in the meantime what are we going to do? I don't believe in letting them have it all their own way, do you?"

"Send us to Havana, maybe, to check out Weyler. But in the meantime, what are we going to do? I don’t think we should just let them have it all their way, do you?"

"No, not when I can get my breath, but their methods are so rapid and one-sided that they make me dizzy."

"No, not when I can catch my breath, but their methods are so fast and one-sided that they make me feel dizzy."

"The first thing to consider is some plan of escape."

"The first thing to think about is a plan to get away."

"And if we escaped we wouldn't be any better[Pg 152] off than we were in the woods. We wouldn't know where to go. However, it would be wise to make a more careful inspection of our prison house for possible future use."

"And if we managed to escape, we wouldn't be any better off than we were in the woods. We wouldn’t know where to go. Still, it would be smart to take a closer look at our prison for potential future use."

Acting on this suggestion the boys made a survey of the room. It was a square apartment, with walls of grey stone. The floor was composed of smooth stone slabs. The ceiling was heavily timbered. There were two barred openings in one of the walls just above their heads. They pushed over the table, and climbing up on it, looked out. In the moonlight, they could see that the outlook was on what was apparently the jail yard, a large space enclosed by a high wall. Nothing interposed between them and the free air outside but two iron bars. They shook these with all their strength, but they were sunk firmly in the stone frame and would not budge.

Acting on this suggestion, the boys checked out the room. It was a square space with grey stone walls. The floor was made of smooth stone slabs. The ceiling was heavily supported by timber. There were two barred openings in one of the walls just above their heads. They pushed the table over, climbed on top of it, and looked out. In the moonlight, they could see that the view overlooked what seemed to be the jail yard, a large area surrounded by a high wall. The only thing between them and the fresh air outside was two iron bars. They shook the bars with all their strength, but they were firmly set in the stone frame and wouldn't move.

"I don't think they need feel uneasy, for fear we will escape," said Harry, after they had finished their inspection.

"I don't think they need to feel uneasy, worried that we will escape," said Harry after they finished their inspection.

"Nothing left but to knock down the turnkey. Must always call 'em turnkeys in a stone jail like this."

"Nothing left to do but take down the guard. You always have to call them guards in a stone jail like this."

There was a sound of a key in the lock and the door swung open again. The man with the clanking keys entered, followed by two others, who promptly slipped a pair of handcuffs on[Pg 153] the wrists of the boys, and taking each boy by the arm they led them out of the jail and back to the building into which they had first been ushered at the muzzles of the guns.

There was a sound of a key in the lock, and the door swung open again. The man with the noisy keys stepped inside, followed by two others, who quickly put handcuffs on the boys' wrists and, holding each boy by the arm, led them out of the jail and back to the building they had first been taken to at gunpoint.[Pg 153]

The same dignitary who had ordered their incarceration still sat at his desk, although in a more dignified attitude. At his right, sat a man who seemed to be a clerk. On the left, stood the fat officer and the four soldiers. An elderly man with grey side-whiskers stood near the desk talking with the presiding personage. When the boys entered he approached them and held out his hand.

The same official who had ordered their imprisonment was still seated at his desk, though he looked more composed. On his right sat a man who appeared to be a clerk. On the left stood the plump officer and four soldiers. An older man with grey sideburns was near the desk, conversing with the main official. When the boys walked in, he came over and extended his hand.

"I am Consul Wyman. I understand you are Americans and in some sort of trouble."

"I’m Consul Wyman. I hear you’re Americans and may be in some kind of trouble."

Both boys grasped his hand warmly. It was a great relief to find one who spoke their tongue and who could make their situation clear to their captors. And the thought that he represented officially the Government of the United States, restored much of their waning confidence in themselves.

Both boys held his hand tightly. It was a huge relief to find someone who spoke their language and could explain their situation to their captors. Plus, knowing that he officially represented the Government of the United States helped restore much of their fading confidence in themselves.

"Mr. Wyman," said Harry, "we certainly are glad to meet you. We are Americans and we are in trouble with these Spanish gentlemen. We do not know why yet. We did not know it was a crime, or against the laws to travel in Cuba or we should have selected some other country for our explorations."[Pg 154]

"Mr. Wyman," Harry said, "we’re really glad to meet you. We’re Americans and we’re having some trouble with these Spanish guys. We don’t know why yet. We didn’t realize it was a crime or against the law to travel in Cuba, or we would’ve picked a different country for our adventures."[Pg 154]

"The trouble is that your presence in this part of the island strikes the authorities as suspicious. You have apparently passed through none of the regular ports of entry, for a careful watch is kept on all strangers here now, and travelling through a country so infested as this is with Cuban bandits——"

"The problem is that your presence in this part of the island raises suspicions with the authorities. You seem to have bypassed all the usual entry points, as they are keeping a close eye on all outsiders here now, and traveling through a country that is so infested with Cuban bandits—"

"Bandits?" interrupted Harry, looking Mr. Wyman straight in the eye. Captain Dynamite's teachings had taken very deep root in the heart of the American boys.

"Bandits?" interrupted Harry, looking Mr. Wyman directly in the eye. Captain Dynamite's lessons had really stuck with the American boys.

"Well," said Mr. Wyman, "they call themselves insurgents, but they are not recognized belligerents you know." Here Mr. Wyman lowered his voice almost to a whisper: "And you know we have to be very diplomatic in dealing with these Spanish gentlemen, they are so sensitive."

"Well," Mr. Wyman said, "they call themselves insurgents, but you know they're not recognized as belligerents." He lowered his voice almost to a whisper: "And we have to be really diplomatic when dealing with these Spanish gentlemen; they're so sensitive."

"Mr. Wyman," asked Harry, "are you an American or a Spaniard?"

"Mr. Wyman," Harry asked, "are you American or Spanish?"

"Oh, an American—an American always," replied the consul, proudly.

"Oh, an American—always an American," replied the consul, with pride.

"Then it seems to me, sir, that you should not let the Spaniards select your words for you," said Harry, with some indignation.

"Then it seems to me, sir, that you shouldn’t let the Spaniards choose your words for you," Harry said, somewhat indignantly.

"Ah, diplomacy, my son, diplomacy," said the consul, drawing himself up with comical dignity. "You do not understand the need for diplomacy. Why, I was selected by our President for this[Pg 155] delicate mission, because of my large experience in matters diplomatic. But let us return to your own affairs. I see the general is getting nervous. This is the Bureau of Justice and I shall see that you have an impartial hearing."

"Ah, diplomacy, my son, diplomacy," said the consul, puffing himself up with mock seriousness. "You don't get the importance of diplomacy. I was chosen by our President for this[Pg 155] delicate mission because of my extensive experience in diplomatic matters. But let’s get back to your situation. I can see the general is getting anxious. This is the Bureau of Justice, and I’ll make sure you get a fair hearing."

"Bureau of Justice," sniffed Bert. "Humph, a pretty one-sided old bureau. I should say it had lost a castor or two."

"Bureau of Justice," Bert scoffed. "Humph, that's a pretty one-sided old agency. I’d say it’s missing a wheel or two."

"Ah, you misjudge General Serano," said Mr. Wyman. "He is an exceedingly fair-minded gentleman."

"Ah, you’re misjudging General Serano," said Mr. Wyman. "He’s a very fair-minded guy."

The consul stepped before the desk of the general and beckoned to the boys to follow him. He spoke in Spanish for a few minutes, and then turned to the boys again.

The consul stepped up to the general's desk and waved for the boys to follow him. He spoke in Spanish for a few minutes and then turned back to the boys.

"The general will examine only one. He thinks that will be sufficient."

"The general will look at just one. He believes that will be enough."

"Very well," said Harry, stepping up to the desk. "I will go the general one round."

"Alright," Harry said as he approached the desk. "I'll go for the general one round."

"My young sir," said Mr. Wyman, with some concern, "let me advise you to treat the court with due deference. This gentleman will act as interpreter, as I understand you do not speak or understand the language."

"My young man," Mr. Wyman said with some concern, "let me suggest that you show the court the respect it deserves. This gentleman will be your interpreter, as I understand you don’t speak or understand the language."

A man with a heavy black mustache waxed to needle points, and who seemed to wear a perpetual smile, took a position beside Harry, and the examination began.[Pg 156]

A man with a thick black mustache styled to sharp points, who always seemed to be smiling, stood next to Harry, and the examination started.[Pg 156]

"What is your name?"

"What's your name?"

"Harry Hamilton."

"Harry Hamilton."

"Your age?"

"How old are you?"

"Fifteen."

"15."

"Your nationality?"

"What's your nationality?"

"American," answered Harry, "but look here, Mr. Interpreter, I wish you would ask the general what right he has to ask me these questions; why I was interfered with by his soldiers; why I was prodded in the back by their guns; why I was thrust into your old prison; why I am handcuffed, and why I am here; and just tell him firmly, Mr. Interpreter, that I do not propose to answer any more of his questions until he answers a few of mine."

"American," Harry replied, "but listen, Mr. Interpreter, could you ask the general what authority he has to question me; why his soldiers interrupted me; why I was poked in the back with their guns; why I was thrown into your old prison; why I’m handcuffed, and why I’m here; and make sure to tell him clearly, Mr. Interpreter, that I’m not going to answer any more of his questions until he responds to a few of mine."

The clerk, who was transcribing the testimony looked up in amazement as the interpreter began to literally and faithfully translate Harry's words. Mr. Wyman looked worried and leaned forward, and said:

The clerk, who was typing out the testimony, looked up in shock as the interpreter started to directly and accurately translate Harry's words. Mr. Wyman appeared concerned and leaned in, saying:

"Treat the court with due deference, my young sir, or even my diplomacy may not be powerful enough to save you from the wrath of the general."

"Show the court the respect it deserves, young man, or even my ability to negotiate might not be strong enough to protect you from the general's anger."

"I think I must have a few rights here, Mr. Wyman. I certainly have a right to know with what crime I am charged before I am examined."

"I believe I have some rights here, Mr. Wyman. I definitely have the right to know what crime I'm being accused of before I'm questioned."

"Yes, yes, that is quite true, quite true," re[Pg 157]plied the consul, advancing to the desk and speaking to the general.

"Yes, yes, that's absolutely true, absolutely true," replied the consul, moving to the desk and talking to the general.

"You are charged with being suspicious characters," said the interpreter, repeating the words of the presiding officer.

"You are accused of being suspicious characters," said the interpreter, repeating the words of the presiding officer.

"Oh, thank you," said Harry, politely. "You can now tell the judge he may proceed."

"Oh, thank you," Harry said politely. "You can let the judge know he can go ahead."

The interpreter wisely refrained from repeating Harry's words.

The interpreter wisely avoided repeating Harry's words.

"What are you doing in Cuba?"

"What are you doing in Cuba?"

"Travelling."

"Traveling."

"How many were there in your party?"

"How many people were in your group?"

"Now, that's such a foolish question, general; that little fat officer there knows there were only two of us. In fact, here we are; you can see for yourself."

"Now, that's a pretty dumb question, general; that little chubby officer over there knows there were only two of us. In fact, here we are; you can see for yourself."

"How did you reach Cuba?"

"How did you get to Cuba?"

"By steamer."

"By ferry."

"Where did you land?"

"Where did you arrive?"

"On the coast."

"By the coast."

"General Serano says your answers are not satisfactory," said the interpreter.

"General Serano says your answers aren't good enough," said the interpreter.

"Surely he wants me to tell him the truth," said Harry, affecting surprise.

"Surely he wants me to tell him the truth," Harry said, pretending to be surprised.

"Yes, but he wants all the truth."

"Yeah, but he wants to know the whole truth."

"I have answered his questions truthfully and directly. If he wants further information and doesn't know how to ask for it, he cannot expect the prisoner to supply the questions."[Pg 158]

"I've answered his questions honestly and straightforwardly. If he needs more information and doesn't know how to ask for it, he can't expect the prisoner to provide the questions."[Pg 158]

"At what point or place on the coast of Cuba did you land?"

"At what point or place on the coast of Cuba did you arrive?"

"I do not know."

"I don't know."

"Does your companion know?"

"Does your friend know?"

"He is as densely ignorant on that point as I am."

"He is just as clueless about that point as I am."

"What was the name of the steamer?"

"What was the name of the boat?"

"I refuse to answer."

"I'm not answering."

The little fat officer poked one of his soldiers in the ribs in a very unmilitary fashion, and the general looked at the consul with an expression that said, "I told you so." The consul himself looked at Harry in honest amazement.

The chubby officer prodded one of his soldiers in the side in a way that was anything but military, and the general glanced at the consul with a look that clearly said, "I warned you." The consul, in turn, stared at Harry in genuine disbelief.

"Do you refuse to answer on the ground that you might incriminate yourself?"

"Do you refuse to answer because it might get you in trouble?"

"No, on the ground that I might incriminate someone else," answered Harry, promptly.

"No, because it might get someone else in trouble," Harry replied quickly.

"Who is that someone else?"

"Who is that other person?"

"Now, general, that is another one of those foolish questions. If I could answer one I could answer the other."

"Well, general, that’s just another one of those silly questions. If I could answer one, I could answer the other."

"Then you refuse again?"

"Are you refusing again?"

"I do."

"I do."

"Will you tell the court why you came to Cuba?"

"Can you explain to the court why you came to Cuba?"

"Because I had to. I assure you we are not travelling for our health, and would have been very glad to have been back in the United States[Pg 159] long before we met your little fat officer on the mountain."

"Because I had to. I promise you we're not traveling for our health, and we would have been really happy to be back in the United States[Pg 159] long before we ran into your little overweight officer on the mountain."

"Then why did you come?"

"Then why are you here?"

"To be perfectly frank, general, we were out yachting off Martha's Vineyard—I don't suppose you know where that is—when a steamer ran us down during a storm, picked us up, and brought us along to Cuba—that's all."

"To be completely honest, General, we were out yachting off Martha's Vineyard—I don’t think you know where that is—when a steamer collided with us during a storm, rescued us, and took us to Cuba—that's it."

"And you still persist in refusing to give the name of the steamer?"

"And you still refuse to give the name of the steamer?"

"Yes, sir, but with due respect to the court," Harry smiled pleasantly at the consul. He looked upon the examination as a mere farce, and did not now regard their position as at all serious. Although he did not consider the consul a particularly forceful representative of the United States, he felt confident that the Spanish general would not dare to ignore his demands. Could he have forseen the occurrences of the next few days he would not have felt so easy in his mind. The general turned again and addressed the boy.

"Yes, sir, but with all due respect to the court," Harry said with a pleasant smile at the consul. He viewed the examination as just a show and didn't see their situation as serious at all. Even though he didn't think the consul was a very strong representative of the United States, he was confident that the Spanish general wouldn't risk ignoring his demands. Had he known what was going to happen in the next few days, he wouldn't have felt so relaxed. The general turned back and spoke to the boy.

"According to your testimony," repeated the interpreter, "your presence here on the island is entirely accidental, therefor it is difficult to reconcile this testimony with your refusal to answer the simple questions of the court. In this I wish to say that your consul and representative here concurs with me. I now warn you that you must[Pg 160] answer the questions that I am about to ask you or take the consequences that your refusal will entail. Personally, I believe that you could, if you would, clear yourself and your companion of all suspicion, and if your explanation of your presence on board this mysterious steamer is true, and I believe it is, your refusal to answer the questions will only further complicate the case against you."

"According to your statement," the interpreter reiterated, "your being here on the island is completely coincidental, so it’s hard to align this statement with your refusal to respond to the simple questions from the court. I want to emphasize that your consul and representative here agrees with me. I now warn you that you need to[Pg 160] answer the questions I’m about to ask or face the consequences of your refusal. Personally, I believe that if you wanted to, you could clear yourself and your companion of all suspicion, and if your explanation for being on that mysterious steamer is true, which I believe it is, your refusal to answer will only complicate things further in this case against you."

"The general is quite right, my boy," said the consul earnestly. "You can see that he means to give you every opportunity to clear yourself."

"The general is absolutely right, my boy," said the consul sincerely. "You can tell that he wants to give you every chance to prove your innocence."

"Very well, sir. Suppose you have another try," said Harry, turning to General Serano. "I assure you that I will answer any question that I honorably can."

"Sure thing, sir. Go ahead and give it another shot," Harry said, turning to General Serano. "I promise I'll answer any question I can honestly."

"Very well: I repeat, what is the name of the steamer that brought you to Cuba?"

"Alright then: I’ll ask again, what’s the name of the steamer that brought you to Cuba?"

"I cannot answer," replied Harry, promptly.

"I can't answer," Harry replied quickly.

"Remember, I have warned you. At what place on the coast did you land?"

"Remember, I told you to be careful. Where on the coast did you land?"

"I have told you, general, that I do not know."

"I've told you, General, that I don't know."

"How far from here in miles?"

"How many miles is it from here?"

"I couldn't even guess that, general."

"I couldn't even imagine that, general."

"How long had you been away from the steamer when my men found you?"

"How long had you been away from the boat when my guys found you?"

"I cannot answer."[Pg 161]

"I can't answer."[Pg 161]

"Do you mean that you are unable to answer, or that you refuse?"

"Are you saying that you can’t answer, or that you won’t?"

"I refuse."

"I won't."

"Where were you going?"

"Where are you headed?"

"To tell the plain truth we were very well lost when your friend there overtook us."

"Honestly, we were completely lost when your friend here caught up to us."

"But you had an objective point that you were trying to reach. What was that?"

"But you had a specific goal you were trying to achieve. What was it?"

"I cannot answer."

"I can't answer."

"Very well; you may step aside."

"Okay, you can step aside."

After a few words from General Serano, the interpreter turned to Bert, and said:

After a few words from General Serano, the interpreter turned to Bert and said:

"Step forward, please. The general wishes to ask you a few questions also."

"Please step forward. The general would like to ask you a few questions as well."

"All right," answered Bert, stepping promptly to the front.

"Okay," replied Bert, quickly stepping to the front.

"You have heard the questions that have been asked your companion?"

"You've heard the questions that your friend has been asked?"

"Yes, sir."

"Yes, sir."

"And you have heard those that he refused to answer?"

"And you've heard the ones he wouldn't answer?"

"Yes, sir."

"Yes, sir."

"Will you answer them?"

"Will you reply to them?"

"No, sir."

"No way, sir."

The answer was apparently not unexpected. The general and the consul began an earnest conversation in Spanish. The latter seemed to protest against the decision of General Serano[Pg 162] who, however, was set and determined. Finally, Mr. Wyman turned to the boys.

The answer was clearly not surprising. The general and the consul started a serious conversation in Spanish. The consul appeared to object to General Serano's decision[Pg 162], but the general was unwavering and resolute. Finally, Mr. Wyman turned to the boys.

"I am very sorry," he said, "that for some reason which I cannot conceive you will not satisfactorily answer the questions of the court. I have endeavored to have you paroled in my custody, but the general will not permit it."

"I’m really sorry," he said, "that for some reason I can’t understand, you won't satisfactorily answer the court's questions. I've tried to get you released into my custody, but the general won’t allow it."

"Do you mean that we are to be sent back to jail?" asked Harry, in surprise.

"Are you saying we have to go back to jail?" Harry asked, surprised.

"That is the general's intention. It is not too late for you to answer his questions, though, and I am sure that if you do, you will be promptly released."

"That is the general's intention. It's not too late for you to answer his questions, though, and I’m sure that if you do, you will be released quickly."

"And has the United States Consul no power or authority?"

"And doesn’t the United States Consul have any power or authority?"

"He has the power to see that you have a fair and impartial hearing. You have had that, and must blame only yourselves for the position in which you now find yourselves. I shall not desert you, and if you care to make a confidant of me, perhaps I can suggest some way to extricate you from this tangle."

"He has the ability to ensure that you receive a fair and unbiased hearing. You’ve had that chance, and you can only blame yourselves for the situation you’re in now. I won’t abandon you, and if you’d like to confide in me, maybe I can offer some advice to help you get out of this mess."

"We will take a little time to think the matter over, Mr. Wyman, thank you. It is not alone ourselves who are involved, or would be involved, if we attempted now to clear ourselves."

"We’ll take some time to think this over, Mr. Wyman, thank you. It’s not just us who are involved, or would be involved, if we tried to clear ourselves now."

General Serano now indicated that he wished[Pg 163] to speak to the prisoners, and the consul fell back.

General Serano now indicated that he wanted[Pg 163] to speak to the prisoners, and the consul moved aside.

"Young men," repeated the interpreter, "the conditions in Cuba are such, and particularly in this province, that the utmost vigilance is necessary on the part of the authorities. Your explanation of the suspicious circumstances under which you are detained is entirely unsatisfactory to me. You are found alone in a country infested by men who are in revolt against the Government, travelling with seeming security; you admit having landed on the coast from a steamer whose name you refuse to tell; you are apparently headed for the center of the insurgent uprising. You will not tell where you are going or from whence you come. It is my duty to hold you, and you are therefore remanded to jail pending a further investigation. Perhaps in a few hours, or say to-morrow, you may be willing to answer my questions, in which case you may so inform your consul, and he will take such steps as are necessary to reopen the hearing. I am sorry that you will not be guided by the more mature mind of Mr. Wyman in a matter that may be more serious in its consequences than you imagine."

"Young men," the interpreter repeated, "the situation in Cuba, especially in this province, requires the utmost vigilance from the authorities. Your explanation regarding the suspicious circumstances of your detention does not satisfy me at all. You are found alone in a country plagued by rebels against the Government, traveling with what seems like security; you admit to having landed on the coast from a steamer whose name you refuse to disclose; and you appear to be heading towards the heart of the insurgent uprising. You won’t say where you’re going or where you came from. It’s my duty to hold you, so you are being taken to jail while we investigate further. Maybe in a few hours, or by tomorrow, you’ll be willing to answer my questions. If so, let your consul know, and he’ll take the necessary steps to reopen the hearing. I regret that you won't listen to the more experienced perspective of Mr. Wyman concerning a matter that may have more serious consequences than you realize."

The general waved his hand, and the fat officer, with a malignant smile of triumph marshalled his men and approached Harry and Bert with[Pg 164] the muzzles of their guns once more extended toward them. A sharp word from General Serano caused them to lower their guns and assume a less dictatorial manner toward the prisoners.

The general waved his hand, and the overweight officer, with a cruel grin of victory, organized his men and walked toward Harry and Bert with[Pg 164] the barrels of their guns pointed at them again. A sharp command from General Serano made them lower their guns and take a less authoritative approach toward the prisoners.

Once more the boys were conducted to the gloomy white jail and the doors of their prison room closed upon them.

Once again, the boys were taken to the dreary white jail, and the doors of their cell shut behind them.


CHAPTER XIV

The Hidden Passage

Two men entered the room shortly after the door had closed on the boys, and removed the handcuffs. They passed out in the same silent manner, and the prisoners were left alone again. There was no light in the room, but the moonbeams entered through the barred windows, and cast two streaks of light across the floor that was sufficient to enable the boys to see almost as well as by daylight. They each sat down dejectedly upon a bed and for a long time neither uttered a word. Harry was trying to think out the true meaning of their position, which began to assume a more serious phase to him. There was no element of play in it, now.

Two men walked into the room right after the door closed behind the boys and took off the handcuffs. They exited quietly, leaving the prisoners alone again. The room was dark, but moonlight streamed in through the barred windows, creating two patches of light on the floor that allowed the boys to see almost as clearly as in daylight. They both sat down sadly on a bed, and for a long time, neither of them said a word. Harry was trying to figure out the real meaning of their situation, which was starting to feel more serious to him. This wasn’t a game anymore.

He reviewed his recent examination by General Serano, and wished he had not assumed quite so nonchalant an air, although he felt that he could not have answered the questions which would perhaps involve the safety of Captain Dynamite. They were unquestionably in a disagreeable situation. He realized that if he were to tell the entire truth they would be immediately released, but the truth would at once set the Spaniards on the heels of O'Connor, and Harry[Pg 166] could not forget the personal risk the man had taken to save their lives after he had run them down, nor the kindness with which they, as unbidden guests on his ship, had been treated. To betray his confidence would be a dastardly act, for, even if he could have doubted the words of O'Connor, the actions of the commander of the gunboat were sufficient to indicate that it would go hard with the intrepid skipper of the Mariella if he should fall into the hands of the Spaniards.

He thought back to his recent questioning by General Serano and wished he hadn't played it so cool, even though he knew he couldn't have answered the questions that might put Captain Dynamite in danger. They were definitely in a tough spot. He realized that if he told the whole truth, they would be let go immediately, but that would put O'Connor in danger, and Harry[Pg 166] couldn't forget how much O'Connor had risked to save their lives after he had captured them, nor the kindness they received as uninvited guests on his ship. Betraying his trust would be a terrible thing to do, because, even if he had doubts about what O'Connor said, the actions of the gunboat's commander clearly indicated that it would be rough for the brave captain of the Mariella if he fell into Spanish hands.

Mason and Washington were still to be counted on. He felt sure that they would continue on their way to O'Connor and that he would make some move to effect their rescue. There was one strong objection to waiting for O'Connor. Whatever plan he might adopt for their relief must necessarily be attended by violence, for in no other way could he approach their captors, except it be by strategy, and there seemed to be no chance of escape in that way.

Mason and Washington were still dependable. He was confident that they would head to O'Connor and that he would take some action to rescue them. However, there was one major drawback to waiting for O'Connor. Any plan he might come up with for their rescue would likely involve violence, since there was no other way to confront their captors except by using strategy, which seemed unlikely to lead to an escape.

He feared for O'Connor's sake to take the consul into their confidence, except as a last resort. While he had the utmost respect for the man's integrity he feared the influence of General Serano. At all events there was nothing that could be done to-night. He turned to Bert who was sitting in an equally dejected frame of mind on the edge of his bed with his head in his hands.[Pg 167]

He was afraid to trust the consul with their secrets for O'Connor's sake, except as a last resort. While he had huge respect for the man's integrity, he worried about General Serano's influence. In any case, there was nothing that could be done tonight. He looked at Bert, who was sitting on the edge of his bed in a similarly downcast mood, his head in his hands.[Pg 167]

"Let's turn in, Bert, old man. Things may be brighter in the morning."

"Let's get some sleep, Bert. Maybe things will look better in the morning."

"I don't see much hope. Do you think Captain Dynamite would care if we told that Spanish gentleman the whole truth as to how we came here?"

"I don't see much hope. Do you think Captain Dynamite would mind if we told that Spanish guy the whole truth about how we got here?"

"No, I don't," replied Harry, indignantly. "If O'Connor could advise us I know the man well enough to believe that the first thing he would tell us to do would be to make a clean breast of everything. But I would hate to say what I should think of myself, or of you, if either of us did such a thing. Why man, you know as well as I do that it would set the Spaniards after him like a pack of hounds on the trail. And you know there is a price on his head and a big one, too. Don't let any more such bubbles get into your think tank or you and I will have to part company."

"No, I don't," Harry replied, indignantly. "If O'Connor could give us advice, I know him well enough to believe that the first thing he'd tell us to do would be to come clean about everything. But I would hate to think about what that would say about me, or you, if either of us did that. Come on, you know just as well as I do that it would send the Spaniards after him like a pack of hounds on a scent. And you know there's a bounty on his head, and a big one, too. Don't let any more ideas like that get into your head, or you and I will have to split up."

"You are right, Hal," said Bert, sheepishly. "I didn't think of the danger to him."

"You’re right, Hal," Bert said, feeling embarrassed. "I didn’t consider the risk to him."

"Well, then, let's go to bed."

"Okay, let's go to bed."

The boys threw off only their outer clothing and lay down on the hard husk mattresses and were soon fast asleep notwithstanding the uncertainty and danger of their predicament.

The boys took off just their outer clothes and lay down on the tough husk mattresses, quickly falling asleep despite the uncertainty and danger of their situation.

The place was in almost total darkness when Harry awakened suddenly and sat bolt upright[Pg 168] in bed. He listened for a moment intently, as if for the repetition of the sound that had awakened him.

The room was almost completely dark when Harry suddenly woke up and sat up in bed[Pg 168]. He listened carefully for a moment, as if expecting to hear the sound that had disturbed his sleep.

"What was it, I wonder. Something must have wakened me."

"What was it, I wonder? Something must have woken me up."

He sat motionless for a long time, but not a sound broke the stillness of the night.

He sat still for a long time, but no sound disturbed the quiet of the night.

"I know I heard something," he said to himself as he dropped back on the bed again. He could not sleep, however, for the sense that he had been awakened by a strange sound, and the mental effort that he had made to catch a repetition of it, had completely aroused him. He lay on his back looking up into the darkness when he heard a sound like a smothered sigh.

"I know I heard something," he said to himself as he fell back onto the bed again. He couldn't sleep, though, because the feeling that he had been awakened by a strange noise, and his mental effort to catch it again, had fully woken him up. He lay on his back looking up into the darkness when he heard a sound like a muffled sigh.

"Bert," he whispered, as he sprang up and sat on the edge of his bed, "was that you?"

"Bert," he whispered, sitting up quickly on the edge of his bed, "was that you?"

"What's that? What's the matter, old man?" asked Bert, aroused from his sleep.

"What's that? What's wrong, old man?" Bert asked, waking up from his sleep.

"Was that you?"

"Was that you?"

"Was what me—what's the matter with you, Hal?"

"What's wrong with you, Hal?"

"Have you been awake?"

"Have you been up?"

"No, not until you called me."

"No, not until you called me."

"Then you didn't sigh?"

"So you didn't sigh?"

"Not unless it was in my sleep."

"Not unless it happened while I was sleeping."

"This wasn't a sleepy sigh."

"This wasn't a casual sigh."

"Say, Hal, what is the matter with you? You make me feel creepy."[Pg 169]

"Hey, Hal, what's wrong with you? You’re giving me the creeps."[Pg 169]

"I heard a sigh."

"I heard someone sigh."

Bert groped his way over to Harry's bed and sat down beside him.

Bert navigated his way over to Harry's bed and sat down next to him.

"Say, old man, you're not asleep, are you?"

"Hey, old man, you’re not sleeping, are you?"

"No; Listen! There it is again."

"No; Listen! There it is again."

The boys drew closer together and put out their hands until they touched one another. The sound they heard seemed to come from nowhere in particular.

The boys huddled together and reached out their hands until they were touching. The noise they heard seemed to come from nowhere specific.

"What do you think it is, Hal?"

"What do you think it is, Hal?"

"I don't know. Wait until we hear it again."

"I don't know. Let's wait until we hear it again."

By this time their eyes had become accustomed to the darkness of the room, and aided by the star-lighted sky, they could see into every corner. There was no one in the room. Somewhat reassured they waited. The next time the sound was an unmistakable sob, and it seemed to be wafted through the barred windows on the still night air.

By this point, their eyes had adjusted to the darkness of the room, and with the light from the stars, they could see into every corner. The room was empty. Feeling a bit more at ease, they waited. The next sound was clearly a sob, carried through the barred windows on the calm night air.

"I know what it is," said Harry, eagerly jumping from the bed and pulling the table under the window. "It's some one in the cell next to ours. Let's try to talk to him."

"I know what it is," Harry said, eagerly jumping off the bed and moving the table under the window. "It's someone in the cell next to ours. Let's try to talk to him."

"He's probably a Spaniard or a Cuban, and will not be able to understand you."

"He's probably from Spain or Cuba, and won't be able to understand you."

"I'm going to try, anyway. Misery loves company, you know."

"I'm going to give it a shot, anyway. Misery loves company, you know."

Harry mounted the table and put his face between the bars.[Pg 170]

Harry climbed onto the table and pressed his face between the bars.[Pg 170]

"Hist," he said.

"History," he said.

A low moaning cry answered him.

A soft, low moan responded to him.

"Bert, it's a woman," said Harry, turning in amazement to his companion, who now mounted the table beside him.

"Bert, it's a woman," Harry said, turning in shock to his friend, who was now climbing up onto the table beside him.

"How do you know?"

"How do you know that?"

"Couldn't you hear? It was a woman's voice."

"Didn’t you hear? It was a woman's voice."

"Hist," said Harry, again, as loudly as he dared. "Who are you? Can we help you in any way?"

"Hey," said Harry, again as loudly as he dared. "Who are you? Can we help you in any way?"

He hardly expected a reply for he felt, as did Bert, that they would not find any other English-speaking prisoners confined there. His surprise was great therefore, when a low voice, with just a suspicion of soft Spanish accent, asked:

He barely expected a response because he felt, just like Bert, that they wouldn’t find any other English-speaking prisoners held there. So, he was really surprised when a quiet voice, with a hint of a soft Spanish accent, asked:

"Who are you?"

"Who are you?"

"We are two American boys who would like to assist you if we can."

"We're two American guys who want to help you if possible."

"Are you prisoners also?"

"Are you guys prisoners too?"

"We are."

"We exist."

"Then I fear you can be of little assistance to me, but I thank you very much for your interest. What have they shut you up for; are you friends of the insurgents?"

"Then I'm afraid you won't be much help to me, but I really appreciate your interest. Why are they keeping you locked up; are you friends with the insurgents?"

"We have one very good friend among them, but until we met him we did not know an insurgent from a Spanish regular. May I ask what offense you have committed against the laws of this fussy country?"[Pg 171]

"We have one really good friend among them, but before we met him, we couldn't tell an insurgent from a Spanish regular. Can I ask what crime you committed against the laws of this picky country?"[Pg 171]

"I am a Cuban," said the soft voice, with a little gasping sob.

"I’m a Cuban," said the soft voice, with a small gasping sob.

"Is that a crime?"

"Is that a crime?"

"Yes; to be a true Cuban."

"Yes, to be a real Cuban."

"O, I see. You are what they call a sympathizer."

"Oh, I get it. You're what they call a sympathizer."

"Yes."

Yes.

"How long have you been here?"

"How long have you been here?"

"I have lost count of the days and nights. I think a week."

"I've lost track of the days and nights. I think it's been a week."

"Have they ill-treated you?"

"Have they mistreated you?"

"Not yet, but they threaten to if I do not give them the information they seek, to-morrow."

"Not yet, but they’re threatening to if I don’t give them the information they want by tomorrow."

"What do they want to know that you can tell them?"

"What do they want to know that you can share with them?"

"Much, very much, about the insurgent arms."

"There's a lot, really a lot, about the rebel weapons."

"And you will tell them to-morrow?"

"And you will tell them tomorrow?"

"Not to-morrow—not ever."

"Not tomorrow—not ever."

The voice was low and full of tears, but there was a ring of determination that told of a strong heart despite her woman's weakness.

The voice was soft and tearful, but there was a tone of determination that revealed a strong heart despite her feminine vulnerability.

"Hooray," whispered Bert. "Good for you."

"Hooray," whispered Bert. "That's great for you."

"And have you no friends who can aid you?"

"And don't you have any friends who can help you?"

"Yes, one, but he may even now be dead or dying in a Spanish dungeon. It is for him I weep, not for myself. There is a price upon his head."

"Yes, one, but he may even now be dead or dying in a Spanish dungeon. I'm crying for him, not for myself. There's a bounty on his head."

"What," said the boys in a breath.

"What," the boys said in unison.

"Is he Captain Dynamite of the Mariella?" asked Harry, excitedly.[Pg 172]

"Is he Captain Dynamite of the Mariella?" Harry asked, excitedly.[Pg 172]

"He is sometimes called so. His name is Michael O'Connor. What do you know of him?"

"He's sometimes called that. His name is Michael O'Connor. What do you know about him?"

The woman's voice trembled with excitement.

The woman's voice shook with excitement.

"Hoop la," whispered Harry, hardly able to refrain from shouting. "Captain Dynamite is not in any dungeon cell, Miss Juanita, and if I am not mistaken he is already devising some plan with Gomez to effect your rescue."

"Wow," whispered Harry, barely able to hold back from yelling. "Captain Dynamite is not locked up in any dungeon, Miss Juanita, and if I'm right, he's already working on a plan with Gomez to rescue you."

"Who are you," whispered the girl in amazement, "who know O'Connor and my name so well?"

"Who are you," whispered the girl in amazement, "who knows O'Connor and my name so well?"

"I told you, Miss Juanita, that we had one friend among the Cubans; that is Captain Dynamite. We made the last trip with him on the Mariella, though not willingly. We'll tell you that story some other time when you are well out of this."

"I mentioned to you, Miss Juanita, that we had a friend among the Cubans; that would be Captain Dynamite. We made our last trip with him on the Mariella, though it wasn’t by choice. We’ll share that story with you another time when you’re safely away from this."

"He was well?" nervously whispered the girl.

"He was okay?" the girl whispered nervously.

"Yes, until he got the dispatch from Gomez telling him that you had been captured. Then he was off to Cubitas like a shot in the middle of the night. We were trying to join him when they nabbed us."

"Yeah, until he got the message from Gomez saying that you had been captured. Then he hurried off to Cubitas in the middle of the night. We were trying to catch up with him when they caught us."

"But they have not learned from you where he is?"

"But they haven't found out from you where he is?"

"Miss Juanita, you wrong us. We do not betray our friends."

"Miss Juanita, you’re mistaken. We don’t betray our friends."

"Oh, and it is because you will not betray him that you are here. I kiss your hands."[Pg 173]

"Oh, and it's because you won't betray him that you're here. I kiss your hands."[Pg 173]

"Permit us to kiss yours—figuratively—Miss Juanita," said Harry, gallantly, while Bert gulped down a lump in his throat when he thought of his suggestion to tell the Spanish general the truth.

"Let us kiss yours—figuratively—Miss Juanita," Harry said bravely, while Bert swallowed hard at the thought of his idea to tell the Spanish general the truth.

"But I wouldn't have done it, Hal, old man," he said, involuntarily.

"But I wouldn't have done it, Hal, my friend," he said, without thinking.

"Wouldn't have done what?"

"Wouldn't have done that?"

"Not when it came right down to bed rock."

"Not when it came down to the basics."

"What are you talking about, Bert?"

"What are you talking about, Bert?"

"Oh, nothing. I was just thinking."

"Oh, nothing. I was just thinking."

"Well, don't think so loud unless you are going to take me into your confidence. Any chance of getting out of that dungeon cell of yours, Miss Juanita?"

"Well, don’t think so loudly unless you’re planning to share what’s on your mind. Is there any chance I can escape your dungeon cell, Miss Juanita?"

"None."

"Nothing."

At this moment they heard the sound of regular footsteps outside.

At that moment, they heard the sound of steady footsteps outside.

"'Sh," whispered the voice. "It is the guard. Go away from the window."

"'Sh," whispered the voice. "It's the guard. Move away from the window."

The boys jumped down from the table, and as they did so, Bert stumbled and fell heavily against the wall. When he recovered his balance they heard a strange grinding sound like a heavy door creaking on rusty hinges. The boys listened in wonder.

The boys jumped down from the table, and as they did, Bert stumbled and crashed against the wall. When he regained his balance, they heard a strange grinding sound like a heavy door creaking on rusty hinges. The boys listened in amazement.

"Gee, but this is a creepy old place," said Bert, as the noise continued. "Now, what do you suppose that is?"[Pg 174]

"Wow, this place is really creepy," said Bert, as the noise went on. "What do you think that is?"[Pg 174]

"It sounds as if it came from the wall there. Let's investigate."

"It sounds like it came from that wall. Let's check it out."

They moved nervously over to the stone wall that separated their prison room from that of Miss Juanita. The noise seemed nearer and more distinct, but they could see nothing that might cause it. Still the strange sound continued. In the semi-darkness they watched in wonderment the blank face of the wall from which the sound seemed to proceed. Suddenly Harry seized Bert by the arm.

They nervously approached the stone wall that separated their prison room from Miss Juanita’s. The noise sounded closer and clearer, but they couldn’t see anything that might be making it. Yet the strange sound kept going. In the dim light, they watched in amazement at the blank face of the wall where the sound seemed to be coming from. Suddenly, Harry grabbed Bert by the arm.

"Look!" he whispered in a tense voice. He pointed to a large stone in about the centre of the wall. "Doesn't it move?"

"Look!" he whispered anxiously. He pointed to a big stone near the middle of the wall. "Doesn't it move?"

The stone to which Harry referred was larger than any other, being three feet square, and placed about waist-high from the floor. Bert watched intently. It seemed to him that he could see a slight trembling movement and then an almost imperceptible jump as the hand of an electric clock advances with a jerk. The face of the stone, too, seemed to be out of line with the others.

The stone that Harry mentioned was bigger than all the others, measuring three feet square and positioned about waist-high from the ground. Bert watched closely. He thought he noticed a slight trembling and then an almost invisible jump, like the hand of an electric clock moving suddenly. The surface of the stone also appeared to be misaligned with the others.

They advanced closer, and Harry passed his hand cautiously under the stone. Unquestionably it had moved, either by accident or design. The upper edge projected into the room beyond the line of the wall at least an inch and the lower edge receded in the same way. As Harry's hand[Pg 175] rested on the stone he felt it tremble and jump and the upper edge advanced another quarter of an inch into the room.

They moved closer, and Harry carefully slid his hand underneath the stone. It definitely had shifted, whether on purpose or by chance. The top edge stuck out into the room past the wall by at least an inch, and the bottom edge pulled back similarly. As Harry's hand[Pg 175] rested on the stone, he felt it shake and lift, and the top edge pushed another quarter of an inch further into the room.

"That stone is revolving on a horizontal axis," said Harry, confidently, after his inspection. "Now the question is: How and why?"

"That stone is spinning on a horizontal axis," said Harry, confidently, after his inspection. "Now the question is: How and why?"

"It seems uncomfortably like the times of the inquisition," said Bert, shuddering.

"It feels way too much like the times of the inquisition," said Bert, shuddering.

"Oh, pshaw, don't you see that wall separates us from the cell of Miss Juanita, and the Spaniards would have nothing to do with opening this passage?"

"Oh, come on, can't you see that wall separates us from Miss Juanita's cell, and the Spaniards wouldn't want to open this passage

"Do you think she is doing it, then?"

"Do you think she’s actually doing it, then?"

"No, for had she known of the stone she would have mentioned it when I asked her if there was any chance of escape from her prison. It has come about through an accident, I feel sure, but how? Of course there must be some secret spring that works it, but where is it and how and by whom has it been operated?"

"No, if she had known about the stone, she would have mentioned it when I asked her if there was any chance of escaping from her prison. I'm sure it's happened by accident, but how? There must be some secret mechanism that activates it, but where is it, how does it work, and who has operated it?"

"Hal, I believe I did it," whispered Bert, excitedly.

"Hal, I think I did it," Bert whispered, excited.

"What on earth do you mean?"

"What do you mean?"

"You know when I jumped down from the table I fell against the wall. It was immediately after that we heard the creaking."

"You know when I jumped off the table I fell against the wall. It was right after that we heard the creaking."

"Thunder, you are right. You must have touched the spring."[Pg 176]

"Thunder, you're right. You must have activated the spring."[Pg 176]

"I think so. Let's look for it."

"I think so. Let's search for it."

The boys carefully examined the wall near the place where Bert had stumbled, and to the left of the revolving stone they found a small, diamond-shaped stone that to the casual observer would appear to have been set in the wall to fill in the broken corner of one of the larger stones. Upon close inspection they found that it was set loosely in the wall without mortar. They dared not touch it for fear it might stop the invisible machinery that it had evidently set in motion.

The boys closely looked at the wall by where Bert had tripped, and to the left of the revolving stone, they discovered a small, diamond-shaped stone that would seem to a casual observer to be placed in the wall to fill the broken corner of one of the bigger stones. However, upon closer inspection, they realized it was set loosely in the wall without any mortar. They didn’t dare touch it, fearing it could halt the invisible mechanism it clearly had set in motion.

Slowly the stone continued its unsteady revolution, until at the end of about five minutes the creaking stopped, there was a clicking sound as if a cog had settled into place, and all movement ceased. The big slab, which was six inches thick, had now obtained a horizontal position, leaving an opening above and below into the next room, or cell. The axis upon which the stone revolved was a little above the centre, so that the lower opening was nearly eighteen inches high.

Slowly, the stone kept moving unsteadily until, after about five minutes, the creaking stopped, followed by a clicking sound as if a gear had locked into place, and all movement came to a halt. The large slab, which was six inches thick, was now flat, creating an opening above and below into the next room or cell. The axis on which the stone turned was slightly above the center, so the lower opening was nearly eighteen inches high.

The boys peered through into the darkness of the next cell.

The boys looked into the darkness of the next cell.

"Miss Juanita," called Harry, softly. "May we come in? Perhaps this scheme of opening walls may continue through to the outside world."

"Miss Juanita," Harry called softly. "Can we come in? Maybe this idea of opening walls could extend to the outside world."


CHAPTER XV

Dawn Execution

"Who is there?" came a frightened voice from the farthest corner of the room.

"Who’s there?" a scared voice called from the farthest corner of the room.

"It's the American boys who were talking with you at the window," answered Harry, reassuringly. "We are friends. Do not fear."

"It's the American guys who were talking to you at the window," Harry said, trying to reassure her. "We're friends. Don't be afraid."

"Oh," came in a gasp of relief. "I thought they were about to inflict some new horror upon me. What have you done?"

"Oh," she gasped with relief. "I thought they were about to bring some new nightmare upon me. What did you do?"

"We do not quite know ourselves. In some way we touched a secret spring that rolled over this stone and formed a passage between these two cells. It is just possible that there may be another one. May we come in and look?"

"We don’t really know ourselves. In some way, we reached a hidden spring that flowed over this stone and created a passage between these two cells. It's possible there might be another one. Can we come in and take a look?"

"Yes, yes, come in. Oh, perhaps it is true—perhaps we shall be able to escape from this horrible place."

"Yes, yes, come in. Oh, maybe it's true—maybe we can escape from this terrible place."

"Do not hope for too much. It was only a chance thought of mine. However, we better see."

"Don’t expect too much. It was just a passing thought of mine. But we should take a look."

The boys climbed through the opening without difficulty and found themselves in a room exactly similar to the one they had left, except that it was furnished a little more comfortably for a woman.

The boys climbed through the opening easily and found themselves in a room that was just like the one they had left, except it was furnished a bit more comfortably for a woman.

The moon had set, but they were now so used to[Pg 178] the darkness that with the little starlight that penetrated through the barred windows they were able to see quite well. They went at once to the wall directly opposite and began an eager search for a diamond-shaped stone. There was none, nor was there any big slab-like stone resembling the revolving one in the wall through which they had just passed. They tried the other two walls, but also without avail. It was evident that only these two cells were connected.

The moon had gone down, but they were so used to[Pg 178] the darkness that with the little starlight that got through the barred windows, they could see pretty well. They immediately went to the wall directly opposite and eagerly searched for a diamond-shaped stone. There was none, nor was there any large slab-like stone similar to the revolving one in the wall they had just come through. They tried the other two walls, but had no luck either. It was clear that only these two cells were connected.

"Well, Miss Juanita," said Harry, when they had assured themselves that there was no other opening, "we have only succeeded in widening our prisons. There is no other means of exit but the doors. I am very sorry to have raised your expectations."

"Well, Miss Juanita," Harry said, after they made sure there was no other way out, "we've only managed to make our prisons bigger. The only way out is through the doors. I really regret raising your hopes."

The girl, who had followed them eagerly from place to place as they examined the walls, held out her hands in protest at Harry's words.

The girl, who had eagerly followed them around as they looked at the walls, stretched out her hands in protest against Harry's words.

"Oh, let me thank you for the ray of happiness you have brought me," she said, quickly.

"Oh, let me thank you for the burst of happiness you’ve given me," she said quickly.

"I can't think that we have in any way lightened your burden, except that you may count on us to do anything in our power to help you, but I fear that is very little."

"I don't think we've really lightened your burden at all, except that you can rely on us to do anything we can to help you, but I’m afraid that’s not much."

"Ah, but you brought me news of him and—and the knowledge of the near presence of friends is cheering."[Pg 179]

"Ah, but you brought me news of him, and knowing that friends are close is uplifting."[Pg 179]

"Yes, Miss Juanita, and I think you can bank on hearing more news from him in the very near future."

"Yes, Miss Juanita, and I believe you can expect to hear more from him shortly."

"I hope so for—for all our sakes."

"I hope so—for all our sake."

"Now that we are literally up against a stone wall, I think we better climb back into our own cell before the guard takes it into his head to look around. Cheer up, Miss Juanita, Captain Dynamite will be on the march before long, I'll warrant you. Good night."

"Now that we're literally up against a brick wall, I think we should climb back into our own cell before the guard decides to check things out. Cheer up, Miss Juanita, Captain Dynamite will be on the move before you know it, I promise. Good night."

"Good-night, my friends."

"Goodnight, my friends."

"Now I wonder how the old stone works backwards?" said Harry, when they had returned to their own room.

"Now I'm curious how the old stone works backward?" said Harry, after they had returned to their room.

"Press the button and the stone will do the rest," said Bert, with a grim attempt at humor. He pressed the diamond-shaped stone as he spoke, but there was no answering creak, nor did the slab move.

"Press the button and the stone will handle the rest," Bert said, trying to be funny. He pressed the diamond-shaped stone as he spoke, but there was no creak in response, nor did the slab shift.

"It is not likely that the same spring does double duty. We will have to hunt up the other," said Harry. "Now, by all the laws of symmetry there should be another similar stone on the other side of the slab—and here it is."

"It’s unlikely that the same spring serves two purposes. We’ll have to find the other one,” Harry said. “Now, according to all the rules of symmetry, there should be another identical stone on the opposite side of the slab—and here it is.”

He pushed on this as he spoke, and at once the grinding sound began again and the stone slowly settled back into place.

He pressed on this as he spoke, and immediately the grinding noise started up again and the stone slowly moved back into position.

"Well, our discovery of the Don's secret in[Pg 180]quisitorial passage does not appear to have done us much good," said Bert, as they stretched themselves out on their beds again.

"Well, finding out the Don's secret in[Pg 180]the inquisitorial passage doesn't seem to have helped us much," said Bert, as they lay back down on their beds again.

"I'm not so sure of that," replied Harry, thoughtfully. "I think I see a way by which at least one of us three can benefit by it."

"I'm not so sure about that," Harry replied, thoughtfully. "I think I see a way for at least one of us three to benefit from it."

"How?"

"How so?"

"Wait until I get it all thought out. In the meantime I am going to get a little more sleep."

"Just wait until I figure it all out. In the meantime, I'm going to get a bit more sleep."

They did not return to their own cell any too soon, for they had no more than turned over for their second nap when a light flashed in their eyes and they sat up to find their silent jailor had opened the door noiselessly and was inspecting the room with the aid of a large lantern. He nodded his head in a satisfied way and passed out again.

They didn't get back to their cell too soon, because they had barely settled in for their second nap when a light suddenly flashed in their eyes. They sat up to see that their silent jailer had opened the door quietly and was examining the room with a large lantern. He nodded to himself in satisfaction and stepped back out.

"Say, Hal, old man, this sort of thing is getting on my nerves," said Bert, when the man had gone.

"Hey, Hal, my friend, this kind of stuff is really getting on my nerves," Bert said after the man had left.

"I wouldn't mind a few streaks of daylight myself, Bert."

"I wouldn’t mind a little bit of daylight myself, Bert."

Tired as they were, the boys' nerves were so worked upon that they were unable to go to sleep again and tossed on their cots until the gray dawn began to show through the windows. They lay in a sort of lethargy watching the sky grow brighter and brighter until they were aroused to action by the loud voices of men and the clanking of guns in the jail yard below.[Pg 181]

Tired as they were, the boys couldn’t settle down because their nerves were so frazzled. They tossed and turned on their cots until the early light began to creep through the windows. They lay in a kind of daze, watching the sky get brighter and brighter until they were jolted into action by the loud voices of men and the clanking of guns in the jail yard below.[Pg 181]

"Holloa, I wonder what's up now," said Harry, jumping up and climbing on the table to peer out.

"Holla, I wonder what's going on now," said Harry, jumping up and climbing on the table to look out.

The yard was still full of dark shadows and the forms of men were not fully distinguishable, but Harry could make out a group of armed soldiers standing at ease, chatting and smoking cigarettes near one of the gray walls. An officer, apart from his men, strutted pompously up and down the yard.

The yard was still filled with dark shadows, and the shapes of the men were hard to make out, but Harry could see a group of armed soldiers standing casually, chatting and smoking cigarettes near one of the gray walls. An officer, separate from his men, walked around the yard with an air of arrogance.

"I guess they must be going to drill," said Bert, who had climbed up beside Harry.

"I guess they must be getting ready to drill," said Bert, who had climbed up next to Harry.

"Pretty early for drill."

"Pretty early for practice."

"Time doesn't seem to cut any figure in this country. I've been doing something night and day ever since we struck the place. I should like to get home to a quiet life again."

"Time doesn’t seem to matter in this country. I’ve been busy day and night ever since we got here. I really want to go back home to a peaceful life."

Another officer entered the yard and approached the man who paced to and fro. He handed him a paper which the other read, nodded as if in assent, and turning to the men gave an order in a sharp voice. The soldiers fell into a file of threes and at another word of command marched quickly into the jail, the officer following them, leisurely rolling a cigarette.

Another officer came into the yard and walked over to the man who was pacing back and forth. He handed him a piece of paper that the man read, nodded as if he agreed, and then turned to the soldiers to give an order in a sharp voice. The soldiers formed a line of three and, after another command, marched quickly into the jail, with the officer following them, casually rolling a cigarette.

In another moment the boys heard the tramp of feet at the lower end of the corridor outside of their cell.[Pg 182]

In a moment, the boys heard the sound of footsteps at the far end of the corridor outside their cell.[Pg 182]

"Are they coming for us, do you think, Hal?" asked Bert, in a tremulous voice.

"Do you think they're coming for us, Hal?" Bert asked, his voice shaking.

The footsteps came nearer and nearer. Now they were just outside the door and the boys involuntarily caught their breath. They passed on without stopping and they heard them die away down the passage. Again there was silence and then a sound as if a heavy iron door had been closed with a bang. This was followed again by the regular tramp of the soldiers' feet as they returned along the corridor. They passed the door of the boys' cell and again the sound died away.

The footsteps got closer and closer. Now they were right outside the door, and the boys held their breath without meaning to. The footsteps continued without stopping, and they heard them fade down the hallway. Once again, there was silence, followed by a loud bang, like a heavy iron door slamming shut. This was followed again by the steady rhythm of the soldiers' boots as they made their way back down the corridor. They walked past the boys' cell, and once more, the sound faded away.

Harry turned again to the window. The soldiers filed rapidly into the yard, but this time there was another in their ranks. A man in his shirt sleeves with his hands bound behind his back marched with head erect between the two middle ranks. He was a tall, muscular man, broad of shoulder and lithe of limb. His face was pale, but the expression was calm and determined. His step was firm and the soldiers at his back found no need to urge him on. They marched straight to the wall of the yard that faced the jail, and at a command from the officer, the soldiers parted, leaving the man standing with his back to the wall and facing his captors.

Harry turned back to the window. The soldiers quickly filed into the yard, but this time there was another person among them. A man in his shirt sleeves with his hands tied behind his back marched with his head held high between the two middle ranks. He was tall and muscular, broad-shouldered and agile. His face was pale, but his expression was calm and resolute. He walked confidently, and the soldiers behind him didn’t need to push him along. They marched straight to the wall of the yard that faced the jail, and at a command from the officer, the soldiers spread apart, leaving the man standing with his back to the wall and facing his captors.

As the soldiers fell back they formed ranks of six on either side of the prisoner, the butts of their[Pg 183] rifles resting on the ground. Down this narrow human alley the commander strode until he stood face to face with the man against the wall. He spoke to him in Spanish and the prisoner replied briefly, at the same time lifting his head proudly and looking his questioner firmly in the eye. Although the boys could understand nothing that was said, it was easy to tell that the officer had made some offer which the other proudly rejected. The boys looked on with a feeling that they were about to witness a tragedy, but some strange fascination prevented them from turning away.

As the soldiers fell back, they formed ranks of six on either side of the prisoner, the butts of their[Pg 183] rifles resting on the ground. Down this narrow human alley, the commander walked until he stood face to face with the man against the wall. He spoke to him in Spanish, and the prisoner replied shortly, lifting his head proudly and looking his questioner directly in the eye. Although the boys didn’t understand any of the conversation, it was clear that the officer had made some offer that the prisoner proudly rejected. The boys watched on, sensing that they were about to witness a tragedy, but some strange fascination kept them from looking away.

The commander turned to the jail and lifted his hand as a signal. A friar in long solemn robes walked slowly down between the ranks of soldiers, his eyes fixed on the ground. As he reached the prisoner, he stopped in front of him and raised his head. In his thin, worn face there was an expression of gentle sorrow. He spoke a few words and raised a cross before the face of the other, who leaned eagerly forward and kissed it. The friar bowed his head and fell back a few paces. In a low voice he repeated what was apparently a prayer, and then once more holding the cross for a moment before the eyes of the doomed man, he turned and walked slowly back to the jail, his lips still moving in prayer.

The commander turned to the jail and raised his hand as a signal. A friar in long, solemn robes walked slowly down between the rows of soldiers, his eyes focused on the ground. When he reached the prisoner, he stopped in front of him and lifted his head. His thin, worn face showed a look of gentle sorrow. He spoke a few words and held a cross up before the other man, who leaned eagerly forward and kissed it. The friar bowed his head and stepped back a few paces. In a quiet voice, he repeated what sounded like a prayer, and then, once more holding the cross momentarily in front of the condemned man’s eyes, he turned and walked slowly back to the jail, his lips still moving in prayer.

A man stepped out of the ranks and tied a silk[Pg 184] handkerchief over the eyes of the prisoner. The boys, watching breathlessly through the bars of the window, were pale with the horror of the scene. They now understood the tragedy that was about to be enacted, but they could not shake off the desire to look.

A man stepped out of line and tied a silk[Pg 184] handkerchief over the prisoner’s eyes. The boys, watching anxiously through the bars of the window, were pale with the shock of what they were witnessing. They realized the tragedy that was about to unfold, but they couldn't resist the urge to watch.

The soldier moved back into the ranks, there was another sharp command and the lines wheeled and marched in a single rank of twelve back to the jail wall. They were now directly under the boys and out of their line of vision. All they could see was the man with the bound hands and bandaged eyes standing calmly facing them.

The soldier stepped back into formation, and with another quick command, the lines turned and marched in a single row of twelve back to the jail wall. They were now directly beneath the boys and out of their sight. All they could see was the man with his hands tied and bandaged eyes, standing calmly and facing them.

There was another quick command, followed instantly by a rattle of arms.

There was another quick command, immediately followed by the clashing of weapons.

The boys cast off the spell that had held them, and with a cry of horror jumped down from the table and throwing themselves on the beds placed their hands over their ears.

The boys broke the spell that had trapped them, and with a scream of fright, jumped off the table and threw themselves onto the beds, covering their ears.

Another command in a low tone, and the discharge of twelve guns as one ended it.

Another command in a quiet voice, and the firing of twelve guns marked its end.

"I hope she did not see," said Harry, raising his white face.

"I hope she didn't see," said Harry, lifting his pale face.

He had scarcely uttered the words, when the wild shriek of a woman rang out on the morning air.

He had barely spoken the words when a woman's wild scream pierced the morning air.

A loud, coarse laugh from the jail yard followed the pitiful cry and Harry clenched his hand in futile anger.

A loud, harsh laugh from the jail yard followed the sad cry, and Harry clenched his fist in frustration.


CHAPTER XVI

The Escape

It was sometime before the boys recovered from the unpleasant effects of the scene they had witnessed in the jail yard.

It took a while for the boys to get over the terrible effects of what they had seen in the jail yard.

"I wonder who he was?" said Bert, after a long silence.

"I wonder who he was?" Bert said, breaking a long silence.

"Probably an insurgent. But whoever he was, he was a brave man."

"Probably an insurgent. But whoever he was, he was a courageous person."

The door of their cell quietly opened at this moment and a man brought food and set it on the table. The boys, who had not eaten anything for many hours, disposed of the porridge and some mysterious sort of meat stew with relish. They had scarcely finished their meal when the cell door opened again and the gentleman with the genial smile, who had acted as interpreter, appeared.

The door to their cell quietly opened at that moment, and a man brought in food and placed it on the table. The boys, who hadn’t eaten for many hours, dug into the porridge and some strange kind of meat stew with enthusiasm. They had barely finished their meal when the cell door opened again, and the friendly man, who had served as the interpreter, came in.

"Good morning," he said, cheerily. "Did you sleep well?"

"Good morning," he said cheerfully. "Did you sleep well?"

"Very well, thank you," replied Harry, wondering what the purpose of the man's visit might be.

"Very well, thank you," replied Harry, wondering what the man's visit could be about.

"Thought I would drop in and see if there was any message you would like to send to the general or to Consul Wyman."[Pg 186]

"Just wanted to check in and see if you had any message you wanted to send to the general or to Consul Wyman."[Pg 186]

"You mean that you were sent to see if we were ready to talk yet, don't you?"

"You mean you were sent to check if we were ready to talk, right?"

"Just a different way of putting it."

"Just a different way to say it."

"Well, you may tell General What-You-May-Call-Him that we have nothing more to say than we said yesterday; and you may also inform him that our situation is known to our friends by this time, and that he will be held to a strict accounting by Uncle Sam for this outrage upon two American citizens."

"Well, you can tell General What-You-May-Call-Him that we have nothing more to add to what we said yesterday; and you can also let him know that our friends are aware of our situation by now, and that he will be held accountable by Uncle Sam for this wrongdoing against two American citizens."

"You have communicated with your friends—how?"

"You've talked to your friends—how?"

The genial smile on the man's face faded into a look of surprise and anxiety. He glanced quickly around the room to see if there was any means by which they could have communicated with the outside world.

The friendly smile on the man's face disappeared into an expression of shock and worry. He quickly looked around the room to see if there was any way they could have communicated with the outside world.

"That is another one of those questions that we claim the privilege of refusing to answer."

"That's just one of those questions we feel entitled to not answer."

"I will deliver your message, but I warn you that it will not be well for you to arouse the anger of General Serano. He fears no one."

"I'll pass on your message, but I need to warn you that it won't be good for you to provoke General Serano. He doesn't fear anyone."

"It is entirely up to the general whether he gets angry or not. I really do not see any necessity for it."

"It’s completely up to the general if he gets angry or not. I really don’t see any reason for it."

"Will you send any message to Consul Wyman?"

"Are you going to send any message to Consul Wyman?"

"No—yes, come to think of it, I should like[Pg 187] to speak to Mr. Wyman. Will you ask him if it will be too much trouble for him to see us here?"

"No—yes, now that I think about it, I would like[Pg 187] to talk to Mr. Wyman. Could you ask him if it would be too much trouble for him to meet us here?"

"General Serano will be pleased to furnish you with an escort to the consul's. The air will do you good this morning."

"General Serano will be happy to provide you with an escort to the consul's. The fresh air will do you good this morning."

"When I go to the American consul I shall go without an escort, as you call it—guard I think would be more like it."

"When I visit the American consul, I’ll go alone, as you put it—guard is what I think fits better."

The man shrugged his shoulders.

The guy shrugged.

"I will send your message to the consul," he said.

"I'll send your message to the consul," he said.

"What do you want of the consul, Hal?" asked Bert, when the man had gone.

"What do you want from the consul, Hal?" Bert asked after the man had left.

"He is a part of my secret-passage plot, but I do not know whether he will be game or not."

"He’s involved in my secret passage plan, but I’m not sure if he’ll be on board or not."

Mr. Wyman did not keep them waiting long. He bustled in behind the turnkey and greeted them heartily.

Mr. Wyman didn’t make them wait long. He walked in behind the guard and greeted them warmly.

"Good morning, boys," he said. "I understand you want to see me. I hope you have changed your minds and will now sensibly answer the general's questions and set yourselves at liberty."

"Good morning, guys," he said. "I understand you want to talk to me. I hope you've reconsidered and will now wisely answer the general's questions so you can set yourselves free."

"No, Mr. Wyman, we will never do that—at least not until we know that the one we might injure by so doing is quite safe. We did think, however, sir, that we would like to take you into our confidence."[Pg 188]

"No, Mr. Wyman, we will never do that—at least not until we are sure that the person we could hurt by doing so is completely safe. However, sir, we did think that we would like to trust you with our confidence."[Pg 188]

"The best thing you can do, boys. I may be able to help you out of your trouble; at least, I can act with more intelligence in your interests."

"The best thing you guys can do is let me help you out of your trouble; at least, I can be smarter about looking out for your interests."

"Yes, sir, so we thought," answered Harry meekly, glancing at Bert, who sat open mouthed, utterly in ignorance of Harry's plans. "Do you think there is any chance of our being disturbed?" he continued, looking at the door.

"Yes, sir, that's what we thought," Harry replied quietly, glancing at Bert, who was sitting there with his mouth open, completely unaware of Harry's plans. "Do you think there's any chance we'll be interrupted?" he added, looking at the door.

"None whatever. The man with the key will not open the door until I rap three times."

"Not at all. The guy with the key won't unlock the door until I knock three times."

"Very well, sir, if you will take that chair I shall be quite comfortable here on the bed."

"Alright, sir, if you take that chair I’ll be totally comfortable here on the bed."

The consul drew his chair up close to Harry and sat down. Bert also seated himself on the bed. Beginning with the wreck of their sail boat, Harry then told Mr. Wyman in sequence the events that had led up to their present incarceration in a Spanish jail in Cuba.

The consul pulled his chair up next to Harry and sat down. Bert also sat on the bed. Starting with the wreck of their sailboat, Harry then explained to Mr. Wyman in order the events that had led to their current imprisonment in a Spanish jail in Cuba.

"Now, sir," he said, as he concluded, "you can understand why we cannot tell anything that will in any way bring harm to Captain Dynamite."

"Now, sir," he said as he finished, "you can see why we can't say anything that would harm Captain Dynamite in any way."

"Yes, yes," said the consul, who had been deeply interested in the boy's story. "A marvelous man, and there are many more like him in the service of Cuba. I believe they will win. I—I hope they will win."

"Yes, yes," said the consul, who had been very interested in the boy's story. "A remarkable man, and there are many more like him serving Cuba. I believe they will win. I—I hope they will win."

Mr. Wyman lowered his voice and looked around the room as if to see whether there was[Pg 189] anyone to overhear him. Harry looked at him in surprise.

Mr. Wyman lowered his voice and looked around the room as if to see whether there was[Pg 189] anyone to overhear him. Harry looked at him in surprise.

"I thought you were a Spanish sympathizer, Mr. Wyman," he said.

"I thought you were a supporter of Spain, Mr. Wyman," he said.

"Diplomacy, my boy, only diplomacy."

"Diplomacy, my friend, just diplomacy."

"I am very glad to hear you say so, sir; you may fall in with my plan quicker."

"I'm really glad to hear you say that, sir; you might agree with my plan sooner."

"What plan?" asked the consul, suspiciously.

"What plan?" the consul asked, sounding suspicious.

"I will tell you presently, but I have not finished my story yet. You see that wall?" Harry pointed to the wall between their cell and the one occupied by Miss Juanita. The consul nodded. "Behind that wall is a young woman—a Cuban sympathizer—who is awaiting torture, perhaps death, at the hands of her captors, because she will not betray the cause. And that young woman is Miss Juanita, the sweetheart of Captain Dynamite."

"I'll tell you in a moment, but I’m not done with my story yet. You see that wall?" Harry pointed to the wall between their cell and the one occupied by Miss Juanita. The consul nodded. "Behind that wall is a young woman—a Cuban sympathizer—who is facing torture, maybe even death, at the hands of her captors because she refuses to betray the cause. And that young woman is Miss Juanita, the girlfriend of Captain Dynamite."

"How do you know this, boys?" asked Mr. Wyman, springing to his feet in excitement.

"How do you know this, guys?" asked Mr. Wyman, jumping to his feet in excitement.

"Do you see that big slab in the wall?"

"Do you see that large piece in the wall?"

"Yes."

Yes.

"That closes a secret passage between this room and hers. Last night we accidentally touched the spring that rolls back the stone, and we talked to her. If you can depend upon our not being disturbed, I will open it now and you can see for yourself."[Pg 190]

"That seals a hidden passage between this room and hers. Last night, we accidentally triggered the mechanism that moves the stone, and we spoke to her. If you trust that we won’t be interrupted, I’ll open it now, and you can see for yourself."[Pg 190]

"I will answer for the man with the key. He now and then gets a little present from me. I find it convenient to be in touch with all hands. Diplomacy, my boy, diplomacy."

"I'll take responsibility for the guy with the key. Every now and then, I send him a small gift. I think it's useful to stay connected with everyone. It's all about diplomacy, my boy, diplomacy."

Harry stepped to the wall and pressed the diamond-shaped stone. The groaning and creaking of the rusty mechanism of the revolving stone began and in five minutes the passage was open. Harry peered through and started back with a cry.

Harry walked over to the wall and pressed the diamond-shaped stone. The rusty mechanism of the revolving stone groaned and creaked, and in five minutes, the passage was open. Harry peeked through and jumped back with a shout.

The young woman lay face downward on the stone floor of her cell.

The young woman lay face down on the stone floor of her cell.

"Miss Juanita," called Harry, softly. "What is the matter? Get up. It is your friends again."

"Miss Juanita," Harry called softly. "What's wrong? Get up. It's your friends again."

She did not stir.

She didn't move.

"She may be dead," said Harry, in fear, as he climbed through the passage. He kneeled down beside her and turned her limp body over so that he could see her face. "No, she still breathes."

"She might be dead," Harry said nervously as he crawled through the passage. He knelt beside her and rolled her limp body over to see her face. "No, she's still breathing."

"Perhaps she has fainted," said Mr. Wyman from the other side of the passage. "Take some water from that pitcher there and bathe her face."

"Maybe she has passed out," said Mr. Wyman from the other side of the hallway. "Get some water from that pitcher over there and wipe her face."

Harry did as directed and soon a faint sigh escaped from her pallid lips, and in a moment more she opened her eyes and looked up, dazed and frightened.

Harry did as instructed, and soon a faint sigh slipped from her pale lips. Moments later, she opened her eyes and looked up, confused and scared.

"Do not be afraid, Miss Juanita," said Harry, nervously. "It is the American boys again. What has happened?"[Pg 191]

"Don't be scared, Miss Juanita," Harry said, nervously. "It's those American boys again. What happened?"[Pg 191]

"I think I fainted," she said, weakly. "Oh, it's all so terrible."

"I think I passed out," she said, weakly. "Oh, it's all so awful."

Painfully she dragged herself to her feet and sank into a chair that Harry placed for her.

Painfully, she pulled herself up and collapsed into a chair that Harry had set up for her.

"What is so terrible?" he asked.

"What's so wrong?" he asked.

"First the shooting in the jail yard this morning. Did you see it?" Harry nodded his head. "I cried out. I tried not to, but the horror was too great. They laughed. They had wrung from me the first sign of womanly weakness. Then they came to me and repeated their demands for information. But I was strong again and they left me with curses. To-morrow I shall stand where he did in the jail yard. I must have fainted when they left me. But do not mind. It is soon over. Tell him when you see him that I died bravely for—for him and the cause."

"First, the shooting in the jail yard this morning. Did you see it?" Harry nodded. "I cried out. I tried not to, but the horror was too intense. They laughed. They got the first sign of weakness from me. Then they came to me again and repeated their demands for information. But I regained my strength, and they left me with curses. Tomorrow, I'll stand where he did in the jail yard. I must have fainted when they left me. But don’t worry. It will be over soon. Tell him when you see him that I died bravely for—for him and the cause."

The woman buried her face in her hands and sobbed softly.

The woman buried her face in her hands and cried softly.

"Do you mean, Miss," asked Mr. Wyman anxiously, through the opening, "that they told you that to-morrow—that to-morrow——" He could not finish the sentence, but she understood him and nodded her head.

"Do you mean, Miss," asked Mr. Wyman anxiously, through the opening, "that they told you that tomorrow—that tomorrow——" He couldn't finish the sentence, but she understood him and nodded her head.

"Yes—to-morrow—at dawn."

"Yes, tomorrow at dawn."

Harry stooped down and whispered:

Harry bent down and whispered:

"Do not fear, Miss Juanita, it will not be at dawn to-morrow, nor any other day. But much[Pg 192] will depend upon yourself, so dry your eyes, Miss, and be ready to do your part when the time comes."

"Don't worry, Miss Juanita, it won't be at dawn tomorrow or any other day. But a lot[Pg 192] will depend on you, so dry your eyes, and be ready to do your part when the time comes."

The woman looked up at him wonderingly.

The woman looked up at him in amazement.

"Have you heard from him?" she asked.

"Have you heard from him?" she asked.

"Not yet, but you will if you will only arouse yourself a bit and be ready to do as I tell you when I come back."

"Not yet, but you will if you just wake up a bit and are ready to do what I tell you when I get back."

Harry turned from her quickly and hastily climbing through the passage, touched the spring that closed it.

Harry quickly turned away from her and hurriedly climbed through the passage, pressing the spring that closed it.

"Now, Mr. Wyman," he said, as the stone rolled into place. "You have seen and heard."

"Now, Mr. Wyman," he said, as the stone settled into position. "You've seen and heard."

"What an outrage—what a horrible outrage," murmured the consul, gazing blankly ahead of him.

"What an outrage—what a terrible outrage," the consul murmured, staring blankly ahead.

"Will you listen to my plan now, Mr. Wyman?" said Harry.

"Are you ready to hear my plan now, Mr. Wyman?" said Harry.

"Yes, yes," replied the consul, eagerly. "What is it?"

"Yeah, yeah," replied the consul, excitedly. "What’s up?"

Harry drew him down on the bed beside him and in a whisper that even Bert could not hear, unfolded the scheme that had come suddenly into his head in nebulous shape when they had discovered the secret passage.

Harry pulled him down onto the bed next to him and in a whisper so soft that even Bert couldn't hear, revealed the idea that had suddenly popped into his mind in a vague form when they found the secret passage.

"But think of the sacrifice," said the consul in an uncertain tone when Harry had concluded.

"But think about the sacrifice," said the consul in an unsure tone when Harry had finished.

"Never mind that, sir—that is for me to consider, and I have done so. I am willing to take the chance."[Pg 193]

"Don't worry about that, sir—it's something I need to think about, and I have. I'm ready to take the risk."[Pg 193]

"But if you come to my house I shall be at once connected with the escape and that would bring my office into disrepute. I do not care for myself, but the United States must not be brought into the case."

"But if you come to my house, I'll be immediately linked to the escape, and that would ruin my reputation. I don’t care about myself, but the United States must not get involved in this matter."

"But if I never reach your house you cannot in any way be responsible. Listen—all you have to do is to tell General What's-His-Name that I have promised you to tell the whole truth in regard to our landing, but that I insist that I shall be paroled and permitted to visit you alone and without guard. Bert will remain as hostage, so that there can be no suspicion."

"But if I never make it to your place, you can't be held responsible in any way. Listen— all you need to do is tell General What's-His-Name that I promised you I'd tell the whole truth about our landing, but I insist that I should be released on parole and allowed to see you alone and without a guard. Bert will stay as a hostage, so there won't be any suspicion."

"Say, Hal," said Bert, nervously, "you are not going to leave me here alone?"

"Hey, Hal," Bert said nervously, "you're not going to leave me here by myself, right?"

"Not for long, old man. What do you say, Mr. Wyman? Think how you would feel if these men carried out their threat, and they are quite capable of it."

"Not for long, old man. What do you think, Mr. Wyman? Imagine how you would feel if these guys followed through on their threat, and they definitely can do it."

"I'll do my best, my boy. Your risk is the greater, but it is a noble act."

"I'll do my best, my boy. Your risk is greater, but it's a noble thing to do."

Mr. Wyman rose and shook Harry's hand vigorously. He rapped three times on the door and as the jailer opened it he turned again and said: "You will hear from me shortly, when I have laid your case before General Serano."

Mr. Wyman stood up and shook Harry's hand firmly. He knocked three times on the door, and as the jailer opened it, he turned back and said: "You'll hear from me soon, once I’ve presented your case to General Serano."

"Say, Hal," said Bert, as soon as the door closed, "what is this plan of yours, and why am I kept in the dark like an outsider?"[Pg 194]

"Hey, Hal," Bert said as soon as the door shut, "what’s this plan of yours, and why am I being left out like an outsider?"[Pg 194]

"Because I want to take all the responsibility and do not want to have you mixed up in it if it should fail."

"Because I want to take full responsibility and don’t want you to get caught up in it if it doesn’t work out."

"But I am willing to take equal chances with you, old man. It isn't fair."

"But I'm ready to take the same risks as you, old man. It's not fair."

"Oh, yes, it is. You will understand later."

"Oh, yes, it is. You'll understand later."

Bert moped for a time in resentment, but as Harry refused to be affected by his mood, he soon cheered up and determined to watch for developments that might enlighten him as to the plot that Harry and the consul were hatching. But nothing developed. A guard brought in their dinner and it was nearly nightfall before their door opened again and the smiling interpreter entered.

Bert sulked for a bit in annoyance, but since Harry wouldn't let it bother him, he quickly perked up and decided to keep an eye out for anything that could give him clues about the scheme that Harry and the consul were planning. But nothing happened. A guard brought in their dinner, and it was almost dark before their door opened again and the cheerful interpreter walked in.

"So you have thought better of it, after all, young gentlemen?" he said.

"So you have reconsidered, after all, young gentlemen?" he said.

"I do not know whether it is better or worse, but we have thought differently, if that's what you mean," answered Harry.

"I don't know if it's better or worse, but we think differently, if that's what you mean," replied Harry.

"I mean that you have decided to tell the general what he wants to know."

"I mean that you've decided to tell the general what he wants to know."

"No, I have decided to tell Consul Wyman."

"No, I've decided to tell Consul Wyman."

"Yes, but he will tell the general."

"Yes, but he will inform the general."

"That will be his concern."

"That will be his problem."

"Very well. Here is a pass from General Serano through the guards. When you are[Pg 195] ready to go, rap three times on the door and it will be opened. Only one of you is to leave this place; the pass is for only one. Should both of you attempt to use it you would be at once arrested. I simply warn you."

"Alright. Here’s a pass from General Serano for the guards. When you’re[Pg 195] ready to leave, knock three times on the door and it will be opened. Only one of you is allowed to leave; the pass is only for one person. If both of you try to use it, you'll be immediately arrested. Just giving you a heads-up."

"Thank you. We have no intention of trying to escape. We enjoy your hospitality too much and the longer we board with you the longer the score you will have to settle with Uncle Sam."

"Thank you. We don’t plan on trying to escape. We enjoy your hospitality too much, and the longer we stay with you, the longer you’ll have to deal with Uncle Sam."

Harry took the pass from the man, who then left the cell.

Harry took the pass from the man, who then left the cell.

"Now to work, Bert," said Harry, eagerly, as the door closed. "Listen! When it is dark I am going through the passage. You must close it at once, so that in case any one should come in it will not be discovered."

"Now let's get to it, Bert," said Harry eagerly as the door closed. "Listen! When it gets dark, I'm going to go through the passage. You need to close it immediately so that if anyone comes in, it won't be found."

"But suppose the jailor should come in; how can I account for your absence?"

"But what if the jailer comes in? How am I supposed to explain your absence?"

"You cannot understand him nor he you, and he would probably rush off to make a report of my escape. Before his return I will be back. But that will not be very likely to happen. When I have been in the other cell ten minutes, open the passage again, and when I come through do not speak, no matter what you may see or hear. Then close the passage at once. Do you understand?"

"You can't understand him and he can't understand you, and he’ll probably hurry off to report my escape. I’ll be back before he returns. But that’s unlikely to happen. After I've been in the other cell for ten minutes, reopen the passage, and when I come through, don’t say a word, no matter what you see or hear. Then close the passage immediately. Got it?"

"Yes."[Pg 196]

"Yes."

"And after I have left this room see to it that the door is safely closed again, and then once more open the passage."

"And after I leave this room, make sure the door is securely closed again, and then open the passage once more."

"What for?"

"Why?"

"Never mind that now. Do you know what you are to do?"

"Forget about that for now. Do you know what you need to do?"

"Yes; close and open the passage twice and say nothing."

"Yeah; open and close the door twice and don’t say anything."

"That's it."

"That's all."

They did not have to wait long for darkness. Night was now falling rapidly. They sat in silence as the dark shadows began to fill the room. Harry was in a serious, thoughtful mood and talked but little. Finally, when the room became so dark that they could not see one another's faces, he rose.

They didn’t have to wait long for night to fall. It was getting dark quickly. They sat quietly as the shadows filled the room. Harry was serious and deep in thought, speaking very little. Eventually, when it got so dark that they couldn’t see each other’s faces, he stood up.

"It is time now, Bert," he whispered. "Remember your part."

"It’s time now, Bert," he whispered. "Don’t forget your part."

He stepped to the wall and groping around until he found the spring, pressed it and the stone began to revolve. When the passage was fully open, he peered through into the darkness of the other cell, and whispered:

He moved over to the wall and felt around until he found the spring, pressed it, and the stone started to turn. When the opening was fully revealed, he looked into the darkness of the other chamber and whispered:

"Miss Juanita, do not be afraid; it is the American boys. Are you there?"

"Miss Juanita, don’t be scared; it’s the American guys. Are you there?"

"Yes," came a soft answer.

"Yes," came a gentle reply.

Harry climbed through the passage and Bert promptly touched the spring that closed it. The[Pg 197] heavy stone moved slowly back into place and Bert was alone.

Harry crawled through the passage, and Bert quickly pressed the spring that closed it. The[Pg 197] heavy stone moved slowly back into position, leaving Bert alone.

He had no watch, so he counted the seconds. The ten minutes seemed an hour to him. At last they passed and he opened the passage again. For some reason he expected to see Harry and the young woman climb through, but only the form of the boy appeared in the gloom. He waited a moment to be sure that the girl did not follow, and then closed the passage. As the stone settled into place, the form moved quickly to the door and rapped three times. Almost instantly it swung open and the jailor with his lantern stood without. As the boy's form glided silently out past the stolid turnkey, Bert started back and with difficulty suppressed a cry of amazement. For a moment the light of the lantern had fallen on the face of the form in the doorway.

He didn’t have a watch, so he counted the seconds. Those ten minutes felt like an hour to him. Finally, they were over, and he reopened the passage. For some reason, he expected to see Harry and the young woman come through, but only the boy appeared in the shadows. He paused for a moment to make sure the girl wasn’t following, and then closed the passage. As the stone settled back into place, the boy quickly moved to the door and knocked three times. Almost immediately, it swung open, and the jailor with his lantern stood outside. As the boy slipped silently past the unfazed guard, Bert stepped back and struggled to hold back a gasp of surprise. For a moment, the lantern light illuminated the boy's face in the doorway.


CHAPTER XVII

"You Will Be Shot as Spies"

When Bert had somewhat recovered from his surprise, he rushed to the wall and pressed the spring to open the passage. A form in girl's clothes climbed quickly through, but it was the voice of Harry that whispered:

When Bert had calmed down a bit from his shock, he hurried to the wall and pressed the button to open the passage. A figure in a girl's outfit quickly climbed through, but it was Harry's voice that whispered:

"Hustle, Bert, and close the passage. No telling when they may discover that the bird has flown. I must get under cover with these duds on."

"Hurry, Bert, and close the entrance. We don't know when they might find out that the bird has gone. I need to get out of sight in these clothes."

He jumped into bed and drew the sheet up close around his neck.

He jumped into bed and pulled the sheet up tight around his neck.

"I'm quite ill, you know; sudden attack of malaria. Can't receive any callers."

"I'm pretty sick, you know; I had a sudden attack of malaria. I can't accept any visitors."

"Has Miss Juanita gone to see the consul?" asked Bert.

"Has Miss Juanita gone to see the consul?" Bert asked.

"Not unless the consul has taken a trip to the mountains."

"Not unless the consul has gone on a trip to the mountains."

"What do you mean—why don't you let me in on your plot now that you seem to have carried it out successfully?"

"What do you mean—why won't you share your plan with me now that it seems to have worked out?"

"Can't be sure of success just yet, but I think it will work."

"Can't say for sure if it will succeed, but I think it will work."

"And when do we get out?"

"And when do we get to leave?"

"I don't know; maybe we are in it tighter than[Pg 199] ever. Sure to be if they find that we or rather I had anything to do with her escape, and I guess they must sooner or later."

"I don't know; maybe we're in it deeper than[Pg 199] ever. We'll definitely be in trouble if they find out that we—or rather I—had anything to do with her escape, and I guess they will eventually."

"Where has she gone?"

"Where did she go?"

"I hope by this time she is pretty well out of the town, headed for the open between here and the mountains. In the darkness she is all right and the deception will not be discovered. She makes a very good boy and as she is about the same heighth as I am my clothes fit her first rate. The pass will carry her through the lines all right and as she knows the country like a book, I hope she may make the mountains and the road to Cubitas before daylight. If she does she is safe, and I have a strong conviction that she will meet Captain Dynamite on the march before midday to-morrow. And gee, what a meeting that will be—I should like to be there and see the expression on big O'Connor's face when he sees her."

"I hope by now she’s well out of town, heading for the open lands between here and the mountains. In the dark, she’s fine, and the disguise won’t be uncovered. She makes a convincing boy, and since she’s about my height, my clothes fit her perfectly. The pass will get her through the lines without a hitch, and since she knows the area like the back of her hand, I hope she can reach the mountains and the road to Cubitas before dawn. If she does, she’ll be safe, and I’m pretty sure she’ll run into Captain Dynamite on his way before midday tomorrow. And wow, what a reunion that will be—I’d love to be there to see the look on big O’Connor’s face when he sees her."

"Then your plan did not have anything to do with our release from this place?"

"Then your plan didn’t have anything to do with us getting out of here?"

"Nope—only Miss Juanita's. She was in danger; we are not."

"Nope—only Miss Juanita's. She was in trouble; we are not."

"We may be after this."

"We might be pursuing this."

"Yes, but I think we can depend upon O'Connor. Mason and Washington should have reached him by this time."

"Yes, but I believe we can rely on O'Connor. Mason and Washington should have gotten to him by now."

"What can he do to help us?"[Pg 200]

"What can he do to help us?"[Pg 200]

"I don't know, Bert, but I think he is the sort of man who will find something to do."

"I don't know, Bert, but I think he's the kind of guy who will figure something out."

"What are you going to do for clothes?"

"What are you going to wear?"

"That's another problem that will have to work itself out. Meanwhile I shall have to stick to Miss Juanita's dress. Didn't you think it fitted well? I shall have to have it let out around the waist a little, I think. I guess they don't serve any supper in this hotel, and as I got very little sleep last night, I think I will take a snooze while we wait for something to happen."

"That's another issue that will have to resolve itself. In the meantime, I’ll have to stick with Miss Juanita's dress. Didn’t you think it fit well? I’ll need to have it let out a bit at the waist, I think. I guess this hotel doesn’t serve any dinner, and since I hardly slept last night, I think I’ll take a nap while we wait for something to happen."

Harry was soon fast asleep, but Bert, though also very tired, was more anxious as to the outcome of their affairs and sat for a long time on the edge of his bed, thinking. The moon rose in a clear sky and cast two bright beams through the barred windows and across the prison floor. Bert's revery was disturbed by the sound of hurrying feet in the corridor and the clamor of loud voices approaching their cell.

Harry quickly fell asleep, but Bert, although also exhausted, was more worried about how things would turn out. He sat for a long time on the edge of his bed, deep in thought. The moon rose in a clear sky, sending two bright beams through the barred windows and across the prison floor. Bert’s daydreaming was interrupted by the sound of hurried footsteps in the corridor and the din of loud voices getting closer to their cell.

"I guess something's going to happen," said Bert, nervously to himself. "Perhaps I better be asleep, too." He rolled over onto the bed and appeared to be deep in slumber when the door was thrown open roughly and three men entered the room. They were General Serano, who was scowling darkly; Consul Wyman and the ever-smiling interpreter.[Pg 201]

"I think something's about to happen," Bert said nervously to himself. "Maybe I should pretend to be asleep, too." He turned over onto the bed and acted like he was in a deep sleep when the door suddenly swung open, and three men walked into the room. They were General Serano, who had a deep frown; Consul Wyman, and the always-smiling interpreter.[Pg 201]

"I wonder why he always mixes up in everything," thought Bert as he peeked at their visitors out of the corner of his eye.

"I wonder why he always gets involved in everything," thought Bert as he glanced at their visitors out of the corner of his eye.

Serano stopped just beyond the threshold and in surprise pointed to the two occupied beds. Then he said something in Spanish to Mr. Wyman, who replied calmly:

Serano paused just past the entrance and, surprised, pointed to the two occupied beds. Then he said something in Spanish to Mr. Wyman, who responded calmly:

"I told you that neither of them had been at my house. You see for yourself that they are both here. There must be some mistake."

"I told you that neither of them had been at my house. You can see for yourself that they are both here. There must be some mistake."

"But there can be no mistake about one of them having left this place within two hours," said the interpreter. "The jailer let him out."

"But there's no doubt that one of them left this place within two hours," said the interpreter. "The jailer let him out."

"Then he must have let him in again, for there they both are soundly sleeping."

"Then he must have let him in again, because there they both are, sound asleep."

"But the jailor says that he did not, and it was the boy's long absence that caused the general to send me to your house to see if he was there. You have not seen him; some one unquestionably left the prison; no one has returned and yet they are both here—what does it mean?"

"But the jailer says he didn't, and it was the boy's long absence that made the general send me to your house to check if he was here. You haven't seen him; someone definitely left the prison; no one has come back, and yet they are both here—what does that mean?"

Mr. Wyman shrugged his shoulders and turned to the general.

Mr. Wyman shrugged and turned to the general.

"The boys indicated to me that they were ready to give the information that you desired. I made arrangements as you know, to have one of them come to my house and there tell his story.[Pg 202] Neither of them came. Perhaps they changed their minds."

"The boys told me they were ready to share the information you wanted. As you know, I made plans for one of them to come to my house and tell his story there.[Pg 202] Neither of them showed up. Maybe they changed their minds."

"Let us question them."

"Let's question them."

The interpreter stepped to Bert's bedside and as he did so the boy sat up and rubbed his eyes as if just awakened.

The interpreter walked over to Bert's bedside, and as he did, the boy sat up and rubbed his eyes as if he had just woken up.

"Good evening, gentlemen. Good evening, Mr. Wyman. What can we do for you? Is it morning yet?"

"Good evening, everyone. Good evening, Mr. Wyman. How can we help you? Is it morning already?"

"Did either of you leave the prison to-night?" asked the interpreter quickly, without preliminary. Bert, who was entirely ignorant of what course Harry intended to pursue, dared not answer, fearing that he might undo some of his companion's plans.

"Did either of you leave the prison tonight?" the interpreter asked quickly, without any preamble. Bert, who had no idea what Harry was planning to do, didn't dare to answer, worried that he might mess up some of his friend's plans.

"Why, I've been asleep for some time and my friend has a bad attack of malaria," he answered yawning. "I see that is moonlight and not daybreak. Can't you call around in the morning on your way to breakfast? We'd ask you to take a bite with us, but I do not think you would like the bill of fare."

"Well, I've been asleep for a while, and my friend is having a bad case of malaria," he replied, yawning. "I see that it's moonlight and not dawn. Can you swing by in the morning on your way to breakfast? We’d invite you to join us for a bite, but I don't think you'd be fond of the menu."

"Will you or not answer a plain question? The general waits."

"Will you answer a simple question or not? The general is waiting."

"Tell the general not to let me detain him. Ask him to drop in in the morning, too, when he has more time."

"Tell the general not to let me hold him up. Ask him to stop by in the morning as well, when he has more time."

The man turned to Serano and shook his head.[Pg 203]

The man turned to Serano and shook his head.[Pg 203]

"They are impossible, sir."

"They're impossible, sir."

Bert saw an amused smile creep around the corners of the consul's mouth.

Bert saw a playful smile slowly appear at the corners of the consul's mouth.

"Let us try the other."

"Let's try the other one."

As he spoke the general touched Harry on the shoulder. The boy drew the sheet closer around his neck, and murmured:

As he spoke, the general placed a hand on Harry's shoulder. The boy pulled the sheet tighter around his neck and whispered:

"Please go 'way."

"Please go away."

"We only want to know if you left the prison to-night to see Mr. Wyman. He is here with us."

"We just want to know if you left the prison tonight to see Mr. Wyman. He's here with us."

"No, I haven't been out of your old prison since you put us here."

"No, I haven't left your old prison since you put us in here."

"But you intended to go."

"But you planned to go."

"Yes, but I changed my mind. I'm very apt to do that. I'm sorry if it put you out any, but I do not see why you couldn't wait until morning for my apologies."

"Yeah, but I changed my mind. I'm really prone to doing that. I'm sorry if it bothered you, but I don't see why you couldn't wait until the morning for my apologies."

"But the jailor says he let one of you out to-night and that no one returned."

"But the jailer says he let one of you out tonight and that no one came back."

"Your jailor is very silly. If he let one of us out and didn't let him back how could we both be here now? I don't want to cast any reflections on General What's-His-Name's intellect, but I should think he might figure that out for himself. Come around in the morning and we will talk it over. But I should advise you to look around for another jailor. This one's imagination is too strong."[Pg 204]

"Your jailer is really foolish. If he let one of us out and didn’t bring him back, how could we both be here now? I don’t want to criticize General What’s-His-Name’s intelligence, but I would think he could figure that out on his own. Come back in the morning and we’ll discuss it. But I suggest you find another jailer. This one has too vivid of an imagination." [Pg 204]

"Then if you did not leave the jail and you have changed your mind, you have no use for that pass that General Serano sent you," said the interpreter, with his genial smile. Bert looked at Harry in dismay. How was he to get out of this snarl?

"Then if you didn’t leave the jail and you've changed your mind, you have no need for that pass that General Serano sent you," said the interpreter, with his friendly smile. Bert looked at Harry in dismay. How was he going to get out of this mess?

"No, that's quite true. Bert, will you get the pass for the general out of the pocket of my coat on the chair there?"

"No, that's totally true. Bert, can you grab the pass for the general from the pocket of my coat on that chair?"

"Your coat is not here, Hal," said Bert in apparent surprise as he stepped to the chair.

"Your coat isn't here, Hal," Bert said in feigned surprise as he walked over to the chair.

"Not there? What nonsense. Tell the general that I shall hold his jailor responsible for my clothes. How under the sun am I to go about in my underclothes. It is not the value of the suit at all. It is pretty well used up now, but it's the principle of the thing."

"Not there? What nonsense. Tell the general that I'll hold his jailer accountable for my clothes. How on earth am I supposed to walk around in my underwear? It's not about the value of the suit at all. It's pretty much worn out now, but it's the principle of the matter."

As Harry talked he thrashed about under the bed-clothing as if in anger.

As Harry spoke, he kicked around under the blankets as if he were angry.

"And then there was nothing of importance in the pockets—no papers that could be of any possible value to any one. It is an outrage—tell General What-You-May-Call-Him that I consider it an outrage on a helpless prisoner to have his clothing sneaked away in the middle of the night, either for the profit of the jailor or the possible information of his captors. Mr. Wyman, is there nothing that can be done in this matter?"[Pg 205]

"And then there was nothing important in the pockets—no papers that could be of any value to anyone. This is outrageous—tell General What-You-May-Call-Him that I think it's an injustice to deprive a helpless prisoner of his clothing in the middle of the night, either for the benefit of the jailer or for the potential gain of his captors. Mr. Wyman, is there really nothing that can be done about this?"[Pg 205]

General Serano spoke a few words to the interpreter, who promptly repeated them with evident glee.

General Serano said a few words to the interpreter, who immediately echoed them with clear delight.

"The general says you are to get out of bed."

"The general says you need to get out of bed."

"It's all up now," thought Bert, and his face turned a shade paler.

"It's all done now," thought Bert, and his face went a bit pale.

"The general is inconsiderate; however, since he insists I will take the chances of another chill."

"The general is thoughtless; however, since he insists, I will risk facing another chill."

As Harry spoke he drew his legs up from under the sheet and stood down on the floor clad only in his underclothing. He had somehow managed to slip out of the girl's dress while he protested against the disappearance of his clothing. Bert drew a breath of relief; but the respite was brief. General Serano, either thoughtlessly or by design, threw back the sheet from Harry's bed as soon as he touched the floor and disclosed the dress from which he had with difficulty extricated himself.

As Harry spoke, he pulled his legs out from under the sheet and stood up on the floor in just his underwear. He had somehow managed to get out of the girl's dress while he complained about his missing clothes. Bert let out a sigh of relief, but it was short-lived. General Serano, whether intentionally or not, pulled back the sheet from Harry's bed as soon as he got on the floor and revealed the dress that he had struggled to escape from.

"Whose is this?" demanded the general, pouncing on the garment and holding it out for inspection.

"Whose is this?" asked the general, grabbing the garment and holding it out for everyone to see.

"Whose is this?" repeated the interpreter like a parrot.

"Whose is this?" the interpreter repeated like a parrot.

"How should I know," answered Harry.

"How should I know?" Harry replied.

"Probably belongs to one of your former tenants."

"Probably belongs to one of your old tenants."

"It's a woman's dress."

"It's a lady's dress."

"Yes, it looks like it. Better look up your register and see who had this room last."

"Yeah, it seems that way. You should check your records and find out who had this room before."

At this moment there was a sound of hurrying footsteps in the corridor accompanied by a volley[Pg 206] of Spanish expletives uttered in a frightened voice.

At that moment, there were hurried footsteps in the hallway along with a barrage[Pg 206] of Spanish curses spoken in a scared tone.

"I wonder what's going to happen now," whispered Harry to Bert. "These people are so full of life it makes me tired to watch them."

"I wonder what's going to happen next," Harry whispered to Bert. "These people are so full of energy it makes me tired just watching them."

The turnkey burst into the room with hands uplifted and eyes bulging. He spoke a few panting words to General Serano who seized him by the neck in anger.

The doorkeeper burst into the room with his hands raised and eyes wide. He gasped out a few words to General Serano, who grabbed him by the neck in anger.

"She is gone, fool? How can she be gone unless you let her out?"

"She's gone, idiot? How could she be gone if you didn't let her out?"

Then, as if struck by a sudden thought, he dropped his hold on the man and turning to Mr. Wyman, held out Juanita's dress excitedly.

Then, as if hit by a sudden idea, he let go of the man and turned to Mr. Wyman, holding out Juanita's dress enthusiastically.

"See, she is gone."

"Look, she's gone."

"Who is gone?" asked the consul, calmly.

"Who is gone?" the consul asked, calmly.

"She—she in the next cell. This dress is here; the boy's clothes are gone and some one left this room to-night."

"She—she's in the next cell. This dress is here; the boy's clothes are gone and someone left this room tonight."

"You mean to infer that the boys contrived the escape of the woman in the next cell?" asked Mr. Wyman.

"You’re saying that the boys helped the woman in the next cell escape?" asked Mr. Wyman.

"Yes, yes, what other inference is there?"

"Yeah, yeah, what other conclusion could there be?"

"But can you explain how they could have communicated with her, how they could have exchanged clothes and how she could have left this cell?"

"But can you explain how they might have communicated with her, how they could have swapped clothes, and how she managed to leave this cell?"

"No, no, I cannot explain that, but here is the evidence—here and there;" and he pointed excitedly to the wall of the next cell.[Pg 207]

"No, no, I can’t explain that, but here’s the evidence—here and there;" and he pointed excitedly to the wall of the next cell.[Pg 207]

"The irascible old general seems to be wise on the passage," said Harry, under his breath.

"The grumpy old general seems to be right about this," Harry said quietly.

"How can that be evidence if you cannot explain it, general?" asked the consul, gravely.

"How can that be evidence if you can't explain it, general?" asked the consul seriously.

"No, he's not on, after all," whispered Bert.

"No, he's not on, after all," Bert whispered.

"They shall explain," said the general, sternly pointing to the boys.

"They will explain," said the general, sharply pointing at the boys.

"We're in it again," said Bert. "I wish he wouldn't do that. It makes me nervous."

"We're in it again," Bert said. "I wish he wouldn't do that. It makes me anxious."

The general seemed to be working himself into a fury. He raised his voice as he delivered what was apparently an ultimatum to the consul.

The general appeared to be getting really angry. He raised his voice as he gave what seemed to be an ultimatum to the consul.

"No, no, not that," cried Mr. Wyman, in frightened protest.

"No, no, not that," Mr. Wyman shouted in fear.

Without a word in reply General Serano turned on his heel and strode out of the room.

Without saying a word, General Serano turned on his heel and walked out of the room.

"What did the angry gentleman say, Mr. Wyman?" asked Harry.

"What did the mad guy say, Mr. Wyman?" asked Harry.

"He said that if you did not explain the disappearance of Miss Juanita within forty-eight hours you would be taken out into the jail yard and shot as spies."

"He said that if you didn’t explain the disappearance of Miss Juanita within forty-eight hours, you would be taken out to the jail yard and shot as spies."

"Ah, Miss Juanita, eh. Then they know her," said the genial interpreter as he slunk from the room. "I must tell General Serano."

"Ah, Miss Juanita, huh. Then they know her," said the friendly interpreter as he sneaked out of the room. "I need to tell General Serano."

Before the eyes of the boys there rose with vivid distinctness the picture of the jail yard at dawn.

Before the boys' eyes, the image of the jail yard at dawn appeared with striking clarity.


CHAPTER XVIII

Captain Dynamite Discovers Juanita

While these events had been transpiring in the Spanish town, Captain Dynamite had not been idle. As the last man of the little Cuban army filed down the mountain-side, he rose from his chair, and tightening his belt stretched his big body as was his custom when any action was imminent.

While these events were happening in the Spanish town, Captain Dynamite had not been sitting around. As the last member of the small Cuban army made his way down the mountainside, he got up from his chair, tightened his belt, and stretched his large body, as he usually did when action was about to happen.

"Well, my lad, I must be off. There is no time to spare if we hope to be of use. You will remain at Cubitas and when it is all over I will send Washington and a squad to pick you up."

"Alright, buddy, I have to go. We don’t have time to waste if we want to be helpful. You’re staying at Cubitas, and when it’s all done, I’ll send Washington and a team to come get you."

"Oh, no you won't, Cap. When it's all over I shall be right where you are."

"Oh, no you won't, Cap. When it's all over, I'll be right where you are."

O'Connor could not repress a laugh. Mason bristled with indignation at the thought of being left behind.

O'Connor couldn't help but laugh. Mason was fuming with anger at the idea of being left out.

"There may be a good bit of fighting, my lad," said O'Connor.

"There might be a fair amount of fighting, my boy," said O'Connor.

"Well, I'm not spoiling for a scrap, but I can't stay behind when I may be of some use to the fellows. Better let me go along with you, Cap, for I shall be close on your trail if you don't."

"Well, I'm not looking for a fight, but I can't just hang back when I could be helpful to the guys. It's better to let me go with you, Cap, because I'll be right on your tail if you don't."

"Suppose I have you locked up for safe keeping?"[Pg 209]

"Imagine I have you secured for your own safety?"[Pg 209]

"Now you wouldn't do that, Cap, would you? You can't expect a fellow to sit still and chew his thumbs in safety while his chums are in danger. You wouldn't do it, would you?"

"Now you wouldn't do that, Cap, would you? You can't expect someone to just sit there and chew his thumbs while his friends are in danger. You wouldn't do it, would you?"

"All right, youngster, come along. I don't blame you for wanting to have a hand in it. And you may be of some use after all."

"Okay, kid, let's go. I can't blame you for wanting to be involved. You might actually be helpful after all."

"I hope you will give me a try, Cap," said the Midget, straightening up his small form boldly.

"I hope you'll give me a chance, Cap," said the Midget, standing tall with confidence.

"Do you think you can stand the tramp? You haven't had much sleep and you may not get any more for twenty-four hours."

"Do you think you can handle the hike? You haven't gotten much sleep and you might not get any more for twenty-four hours."

"That little nap I got on the bench was as good as a night's rest. Besides, this country is so strenuous one doesn't need much sleep anyway. I think if I lived here long I should give up sleeping as a useless accomplishment."

"That little nap I took on the bench was as good as a full night's sleep. Plus, this country is so demanding that you don't really need much rest anyway. I think if I lived here for long, I'd probably stop sleeping altogether as it seems pointless."

They started on down the mountain and before daybreak had overtaken the men camped on the bank of the narrow stream where they were preparing breakfast. O'Connor and Mason joined Gomez and his staff. They ate a light meal and were ready for the march again. The men all seemed to know O'Connor and the officers saluted him respectfully as he passed among them. After a conference with the general the latter called one of the officers to him, and said:

They started down the mountain and, before dawn, caught up with the men set up along the bank of the narrow stream who were getting breakfast ready. O'Connor and Mason joined Gomez and his team. They had a light meal and were ready to march again. Everyone seemed to recognize O'Connor, and the officers greeted him respectfully as he walked by. After talking with the general, the latter called one of the officers over and said:

"Captain Dynamite is in command. You will[Pg 210] take your orders from him. With your company he will take the lead in the advance."

"Captain Dynamite is in charge. You will[Pg 210] take your orders from him. He will lead the way in the advance with your company."

The man saluted and then turned to O'Connor for instructions.

The man gave a salute and then turned to O'Connor for directions.

"Report to me when you are ready to move."

"Let me know when you're ready to go."

"I am ready now, sir."

"I'm ready now, sir."

"Very well, detach your company and cross the ford. We will keep about half a mile in advance of the main body until I give you other instructions. Deploy your men in twos and advance as rapidly as you can. You know the rendezvous and understand the necessity for caution. That is all."

"Alright, break off from your group and cross the river. We'll stay about half a mile ahead of the main group until I give you further instructions. Split your men into pairs and move forward as fast as you can. You know where to meet and the importance of being careful. That's it."

The man saluted and in five minutes his men were fording the stream with O'Connor and Mason close in their rear. Across the open valley they made rapid progress, the men marching in regular order, but when they reached the wooded country at the foot of the next mountain the officer in command gave an order in Spanish and the men deployed in twos and disappeared like shadows into the brush. In a moment not a man was to be seen, and as O'Connor and Mason entered the woods there was not even a sound to be heard that would indicate that fifty men were making their way through the thick bushes ahead of them.

The man saluted, and in five minutes, his team was crossing the stream with O'Connor and Mason close behind. They quickly made their way across the open valley, marching in neat formation, but when they reached the forest at the base of the next mountain, the officer in charge gave an order in Spanish, and the men spread out in pairs and vanished like shadows into the underbrush. In an instant, not a single person was visible, and as O'Connor and Mason entered the woods, there wasn't even a sound to suggest that fifty men were moving through the thick bushes ahead of them.

The route O'Connor followed was not so pre[Pg 211]cipitous as that taken by Washington and they reached the summit of the mountain by noon. Still O'Connor pushed on, stopping only to drink from a mountain stream and to dash the cool water over his head and face, an example that Mason quickly followed. They had scarcely spoken since leaving the ford, O'Connor saving breath for the work in hand. Once or twice he had turned to the Midget who toiled manfully on at his side and asked him if he felt tired. Satisfied with the boy's ready answer that he was "all right," he would plod on again.

The path O'Connor took wasn't as steep as the one Washington chose, and they reached the mountain peak by noon. Still, O'Connor continued on, stopping only to drink from a mountain stream and splash the cool water over his head and face, a move that Mason quickly copied. They had hardly spoken since leaving the crossing, with O'Connor conserving his breath for the task at hand. A couple of times, he turned to the Midget who was working hard at his side and asked if he was feeling tired. Satisfied with the boy's quick reply that he was "fine," he would keep moving forward.

They had made their way about a mile down the mountain side when an officer stepped out of the bushes in front of them and saluted O'Connor.

They had walked about a mile down the mountainside when an officer stepped out of the bushes in front of them and saluted O'Connor.

"Well, what is it?" asked the captain in Spanish.

"Well, what is it?" asked the captain in Spanish.

"A scout has brought in a prisoner."

"A scout has brought back a prisoner."

"Who is he?"

"Who’s he?"

"A boy. He is apparently faint from exhaustion."

"A boy. He looks visibly weak from tiredness."

"A boy?" said O'Connor, wonderingly. "I wonder if they can have escaped?" He repeated the man's words to Mason who despite his own fatigue, leaped and capered wildly.

"A boy?" O'Connor said, curious. "I wonder if they managed to escape?" He repeated the man's words to Mason, who, despite his own tiredness, jumped and danced around excitedly.

"It's Hal Hamilton, I'll bet," he said joyfully. "They must have escaped. Trust Hal to fool the Dons."[Pg 212]

"It's Hal Hamilton, I bet," he said happily. "They must have gotten away. Leave it to Hal to outsmart the Dons."[Pg 212]

"He knows the countersign and your name, sir, and he keeps repeating them in a dazed way. That's why the captain thought you might want to see him."

"He knows the password and your name, sir, and he keeps repeating them in a dazed way. That's why the captain thought you might want to see him."

"I guess it's one of the boys all right, but I wonder where the other is. If I know them as I think I do one would not leave without the other. Where is he?" he asked turning again to the man.

"I guess it's one of the boys for sure, but I wonder where the other one is. If I know them like I think I do, one wouldn't leave without the other. Where is he?" he asked, turning back to the man.

"About a mile below, sir. We found him lying in a little clearing."

"About a mile down, sir. We found him lying in a small clearing."

"All right, I will go to him."

"Okay, I’ll go talk to him."

"Ask him how he was dressed," said Mason as they hastened on.

"Ask him what he was wearing," Mason said as they hurried along.

The man described the boy's suit as well as he could.

The man described the boy's suit as best as he could.

"That's Hal, sure," said Mason when the reply had been translated to him. "Bert can't be far away."

"That's Hal, for sure," Mason said after the reply was translated for him. "Bert can't be too far off."

"Did he have light hair?"

"Did he have blond hair?"

The man shook his head.

The man shook his head.

"Black," he answered.

"Black," he replied.

"Pshaw, he's made a mistake. It must be Hal."

"Pfft, he made a mistake. It has to be Hal."

As they entered the clearing the prisoner sat with his back against a tree. His head was turned almost away from them, but Mason recognized the clothing and rushed forward with a glad cry.

As they stepped into the clearing, the prisoner was sitting with his back against a tree. His head was turned nearly away from them, but Mason recognized the clothes and rushed forward with a happy shout.

"Cheer up, Hal, old man," he shouted as he bounded across the clearing and dropped on his[Pg 213] knees at the boy's side. He was on his feet in a moment, his face scared and white.

"Cheer up, Hal, buddy," he yelled as he sprinted across the clearing and dropped to his[Pg 213] knees next to the boy. He was back on his feet in no time, his face pale and terrified.

"It's not Hal, Cap," he whispered as O'Connor approached at a more dignified pace. "But he's got Hal's clothes on."

"It's not Hal, Cap," he whispered as O'Connor walked over at a more dignified pace. "But he's wearing Hal's clothes."

"What mystery is this?" said the big man as he strode around so that he could see the face of the prisoner. The next moment he turned as white as marble, but his eyes gleamed with joy as he sank down and took the almost inanimate form in his arms.

"What mystery is this?" said the big man as he walked around to see the prisoner's face. The next moment, he turned as pale as marble, but his eyes sparkled with joy as he sank down and took the almost lifeless body in his arms.

"Juanita," he gasped. "Thank God, you are safe. Quick boy, some water."

"Juanita," he breathed. "Thank God you're okay. Quick, kid, get some water."

"Thunder, it's a girl," said Mason as he stooped and looked into the face that was now resting on Captain Dynamite's shoulder. He brought some water in his cap and O'Connor bathed the girl's head and chafed her hands until she began to show some signs of returning vitality. She raised her head and looked around in a dazed manner. Then her eyes fell on O'Connor.

"Thunder, it's a girl," Mason said as he bent down to look at the face resting on Captain Dynamite's shoulder. He brought some water in his cap, and O'Connor gently washed the girl's head and warmed her hands until she started to show signs of coming back to life. She lifted her head and glanced around in a confused way. Then her eyes landed on O'Connor.

"Michael," she whispered, and her head sank again on his shoulder with a sigh of relief.

"Michael," she whispered, resting her head back on his shoulder with a sigh of relief.

The men knew well the story of O'Connor's love and they silently withdrew from the glade leaving only Mason and an orderly with the strangely reunited couple. Finally Juanita was strong enough to sit up and leaning back against the tree[Pg 214] again, she smiled into O'Connor's anxious eyes.

The men were familiar with O'Connor's love story and quietly left the clearing, leaving only Mason and an orderly with the strangely reunited couple. Finally, Juanita felt strong enough to sit up and, leaning back against the tree[Pg 214], she smiled into O'Connor's concerned eyes.

"I could go no further, Michael," she whispered, "but I thought you would find me here."

"I couldn't go any further, Michael," she whispered, "but I thought you would find me here."

"How did you escape, Juanita?" asked O'Connor, softly.

"How did you get away, Juanita?" O'Connor asked gently.

"Ah, yes, the brave American boys saved me. Oh, I fear they will suffer much for it. I tried not to go for they are suspected already of being Cuban spies and this will make it worse for them; but the one they call Hal would listen to no reason, no argument. They had a friend in the American consul, he said, who would look out for them and I—I was already doomed."

"Ah, yes, the brave American boys saved me. Oh, I’m scared they’re going to suffer a lot for it. I tried not to go because they’re already suspected of being Cuban spies, and this will make things worse for them; but the one they call Hal wouldn’t listen to any reasoning or arguments. They had a friend in the American consul, he said, who would help them, and I—I was already doomed."

"Doomed," repeated O'Connor, starting forward, his eyes snapping.

"Doomed," O'Connor repeated, moving forward, his eyes flashing.

"Yes, it was to have been this morning at dawn."

"Yes, it was supposed to be this morning at dawn."

O'Connor choked back something suspiciously like a sob and for a few minutes neither spoke. The man was thinking with a chill at his heart how near to death she had been. Then he beckoned to Mason.

O'Connor held back what seemed like a sob, and for a few minutes, neither of them said anything. The man felt a coldness in his heart as he thought about how close she had come to dying. Then he called over Mason.

"Come here, youngster, and hear what your brave comrades have been doing. This is the young woman we set out from the Mariella to save. Your friends have done that nobly for us; now we must return the compliment with proper interest."

"Come here, kid, and see what your brave friends have been up to. This is the young woman we left the Mariella to rescue. Your friends did a great job for us; now we need to return the favor properly."

The Midget bowed gravely and sat down on the ground beside O'Connor.[Pg 215]

The Midget bowed solemnly and sat down on the ground next to O'Connor.[Pg 215]

"They are resourceful youngsters, Juanita, as I have reason to know, but how under the sun did they manage it? I see you are wearing the suit of one of them."

"They're clever kids, Juanita, as I know well, but how on earth did they pull it off? I see you're wearing one of their suits."

"Their cell was next to mine. Night before last they heard me crying at my window. They could not see me but they spoke and asked me what they could do to help me. There was nothing to be done, so we talked and they tried to cheer me up and in some way they learned who I was and they—they told me you were safe and then I didn't mind so much. Then the guard came and we had to go away from the windows. As one of them jumped down from the table on which they had been standing, he touched the spring of an old secret passage between the cells. The next day, I don't know how, they got a pass from General Serano to visit the American consul. The pass was good anywhere within the lines. That night, just after dark, they touched the secret spring and rolled back the rock between the cells and one of them insisted that I should put on his suit and take the pass and escape. As I have told you he would listen to no form of argument and in the darkness of the cell I put on his clothes and he took my dress. I felt so strangely that I was sure the deceit must be discovered at once, but no one questioned me[Pg 216] from the time I left the prison until I passed safely through the lines."

"Their cell was next to mine. The night before last, they heard me crying at my window. They couldn't see me, but they spoke and asked what they could do to help. There was nothing to be done, so we talked, and they tried to cheer me up. In some way, they figured out who I was, and they told me you were safe, which made me feel better. Then the guard came, and we had to move away from the windows. As one of them jumped down from the table he had been standing on, he accidentally triggered the spring of an old secret passage between the cells. The next day, somehow, they got a pass from General Serano to visit the American consul. The pass was valid anywhere within the lines. That night, just after dark, they pressed the secret spring and rolled back the rock between the cells. One of them insisted that I wear his suit and take the pass to escape. As I mentioned, he wouldn’t consider any arguments, and in the darkness of the cell, I put on his clothes while he took my dress. I felt so uneasy, I was sure the trick would be discovered immediately, but no one questioned me[Pg 216] from the moment I left the prison until I successfully passed through the lines."

"Hooray for Hal Hamilton," shouted Mason, enthusiastically. He had listened breathlessly to the girl's story of her escape and the part his chums had played in it.

"Hooray for Hal Hamilton," shouted Mason, excitedly. He had listened intently to the girl's story about her escape and the role his friends had played in it.

"But your escape must have been discovered in the morning if not before. What were the boys to do then? How was Hamilton to account for the absence of his clothes?"

"But your escape must have been discovered in the morning, if not earlier. What were the boys supposed to do then? How was Hamilton going to explain the missing clothes?"

"They would not explain that or anything."

"They wouldn't explain that or anything."

"And why are they suspected of being Cuban spies?"

"And why do people think they might be Cuban spies?"

"Because they will not explain their presence on the island for fear of endangering you."

"Because they won't explain why they're on the island for fear of putting you in danger."

O'Connor leaped to his feet excitedly.

O'Connor jumped to his feet excitedly.

"May Providence guard them until I get there. Juanita, our paths diverge here again for a little time. My duty lies where those boys are imprisoned. You will go on with an escort to the Mariella. She lies safely in the old place and your mother awaits you there."

"May fate protect them until I arrive. Juanita, our paths split here once more for a while. My responsibility is where those boys are held. You will continue on with a guard to the Mariella. She is secure in the usual spot, and your mother is waiting for you there."

"Oh, Michael, how can I thank you?"

"Oh, Michael, how can I ever thank you?"

O'Connor called the orderly.

O'Connor called the nurse.

"Tell Captain Fernandez to send me a guard of ten men, all of whom know the route to the lagoon, and tell him that one of them must speak English." Then turning to Mason he said: "I am going to[Pg 217] ask a favor of you. I cannot take Miss Juanita on with me, nor can I leave her here. Will you take command of the guard and escort her safely to the Mariella?"

"Tell Captain Fernandez to send me a guard of ten men, all of whom know the way to the lagoon, and make sure one of them can speak English." Then turning to Mason he said: "I'm going to ask a favor of you. I can’t take Miss Juanita with me, and I can't leave her here. Will you take charge of the guard and safely escort her to the Mariella?"

"Cap, I had hoped to get closer into the mix-up, but I see you are embarrassed by the presence of this young lady and I assure you, Miss and you, sir, that as a gentleman I am pleased to serve you both."

"Cap, I was hoping to get more involved in the situation, but I can see you're uncomfortable with this young lady here. I promise you, Miss and you, sir, that as a gentleman, I'm happy to help you both."


CHAPTER XIX

Reeling the Net In

"I hold, sir, that there has been no connection shown between the escape of the woman prisoner and the presence of this dress in the cell of these boys, and I therefore ask that the charge against them be dismissed."

"I believe, sir, that there has been no evidence linking the escape of the female prisoner to the presence of this dress in the boys' cell, and I request that the charges against them be dropped."

It was Consul Wyman who spoke, addressing General Serano who again sat in judgment on Harry and Bert in the Hall of Justice. It was two days after the discovery of the escape of Miss Juanita and following the dire threat of the general to have the boys shot as spies if they did not make a full and complete confession. There had been little sleep for them after the night visit to their cell, and the next day no one had visited them save the jailor with food. The following morning, however, after their breakfast had been served, they had been summarily hauled before the still fuming commander, heavy-eyed and pale, Harry wearing an old Spanish uniform which the jailor had given to him.

It was Consul Wyman who spoke, addressing General Serano, who was once again judging Harry and Bert in the Hall of Justice. This was two days after the discovery of Miss Juanita's escape, and right after the general's serious threat to have the boys executed as spies if they didn’t fully confess. They had barely slept after the night visit to their cell, and the next day, the only person to see them was the jailer, who brought food. However, the following morning, after their breakfast had been served, they were quickly dragged before the still-angry commander, heavy-eyed and pale, with Harry wearing an old Spanish uniform that the jailer had given him.

Again they had been subjected to a severe cross-examination, and again they had firmly refused to answer any question that in any way endangered the safety of Captain Dynamite.[Pg 219]

Again they had gone through a tough cross-examination, and once more they had steadfastly refused to answer any questions that could potentially put Captain Dynamite in danger.[Pg 219]

Mr. Wyman, who fully appreciated the serious position in which the boys were placed, also showed the effects of loss of sleep. He was an able man and beneath his little exterior conceit about his powers of diplomacy, there beat an honest and fearless heart. He had come to the conclusion that the existence of the secret passage was unknown to the present authorities, and without this knowledge no case could be made out, legally, against the boys. He also knew that the legal rights of prisoners were not always considered by General Serano, and for this reason he had determined, as a last resort, to fall back on his official prerogatives and demand the release of the boys in the name of the United States, or, failing in this, a hearing before a higher authority in Havana.

Mr. Wyman, who fully understood the serious situation the boys were in, also showed signs of sleep deprivation. He was a capable man, and under his slight arrogance about his diplomatic skills, there was a genuine and brave heart. He had concluded that the current authorities were unaware of the secret passage, and without this knowledge, no legal case could be made against the boys. He also recognized that General Serano didn’t always respect the legal rights of prisoners, which is why he decided, as a last resort, to use his official powers to demand the boys' release on behalf of the United States, or, if that failed, to request a hearing with a higher authority in Havana.

"Admitting that your contention in regard to the presence of the dress of the escaped prisoner in the room of the accused to be well taken, how can you account for the fact that the pass which was given to them in order that they might communicate with you was used by another?"

"Admitting that your argument about the escaped prisoner’s dress being in the accused’s room is valid, how do you explain that the pass given to them to contact you was used by someone else?"

General Serano smiled grimly as he put this question to the consul. Mr. Wyman staggered. He had forgotten the pass. For a moment he did not reply, and then, pulling himself together, he said:[Pg 220]

General Serano smiled grimly as he asked the consul this question. Mr. Wyman was taken aback. He had forgotten the pass. For a moment, he didn't respond, and then, gathering himself, he said:[Pg 220]

"We do not admit that fact, sir."

"We don’t accept that fact, sir."

"Very well. Let the captain of the guard step forward."

"Alright. Let's have the captain of the guard come forward."

A man with a sword clanking at his side stepped up and saluted.

A man with a sword clanging at his side approached and saluted.

"What was your duty night before last?" asked the general.

"What was your duty the night before last?" asked the general.

"I was in command of the picket line three miles outside of the city," replied the man.

"I was in charge of the picket line three miles outside the city," the man replied.

"Did any one pass through the lines from the city while you were in command?"

"Did anyone come through the lines from the city while you were in charge?"

"Yes, sir."

"Yes, sir."

"Who?"

"Who?"

"A boy."

"A kid."

"A boy—are you sure of that?"

"A boy—are you really sure about that?"

"A person wearing boy's clothes, sir."

"A person wearing boys' clothes, sir."

"Very well; why did you let the person wearing boy's clothes pass through your lines?"

"Alright; why did you let the person in boy's clothes go past your lines?"

"He—the person wearing boy's clothes showed a pass from you, sir."

"He—the person in boy's clothes—showed a pass from you, sir."

"At what hour was this?" continued General Serano, looking triumphantly at the consul, who bit his lip and thought hard.

"At what time did this happen?" General Serano asked, looking triumphantly at the consul, who bit his lip and thought hard.

"About two hours after sundown."

"About two hours after sunset."

"That will do. Now, Mr. Wyman, can you explain this for the benefit of the prisoners?"

"That’s enough. Now, Mr. Wyman, could you explain this for the prisoners?"

"All this does not prove that the pass pre[Pg 221]sented by a boy to this officer was the same pass that was given to the prisoners."

"All this does not prove that the pass presented by a boy to this officer was the same pass that was given to the prisoners."

"I issued but one pass that day."

"I only issued one pass that day."

"There is nothing to show that that was the one."

"There’s no evidence that it was the one."

"Captain of the guard, what date did the pass bear?"

"Captain of the guard, what date was on the pass?"

"It was of even date."

"It was the same date."

"Now, Mr. Wyman."

"Okay, Mr. Wyman."

The consul hesitated a moment and then stepped closer to the desk of General Serano. Lifting his arm impressively, and looking the general steadily in the eye, he said:

The consul paused for a moment and then moved closer to General Serano's desk. Raising his arm dramatically and making direct eye contact with the general, he said:

"I still hold, sir, that there is not a scintilla of legal evidence against the prisoners. We might admit for the sake of argument, that the dress found in their room was that of the escaped woman prisoner; we might also admit, that the pass used by the boy in passing through the lines last night was the one issued by you to the prisoners, but what evidence is there to show that the one using the pass obtained it from these prisoners, or that it was the escaped prisoner?"

"I still believe, sir, that there's not a shred of legal evidence against the prisoners. For the sake of argument, we could accept that the dress found in their room belonged to the escaped female prisoner; we could also accept that the pass used by the boy to get through the lines last night was the one you issued to the prisoners, but what evidence is there to prove that the person using the pass got it from these prisoners or that it was the escaped prisoner?"

"The evidence is absolutely circumstantial."

"The evidence is purely circumstantial."

"That is just it. It is purely circumstantial; there is no direct evidence connecting these boys in any way with the escape of the woman."

"That's exactly it. It's totally circumstantial; there’s no solid evidence linking these boys to the woman’s escape in any way."

"Let me inform you, Mr. Wyman," said Gen[Pg 222]eral Serano, scowling savagely, "that I shall assume that the person who passed through the lines last night was the prisoner and further," here he leaned toward the consul, "I shall assume that the clothes she wore was the boy's missing suit."

"Just so you know, Mr. Wyman," said General Serano, scowling fiercely, "I'm going to assume that the person who crossed through the lines last night was the prisoner. And," here he leaned toward the consul, "I'm going to assume that the clothes she wore were the boy's missing suit."

"Very well, then," said Mr. Wyman, calmly, "let us admit that the person was the woman, and the clothes she wore were the boy's, do not all the known facts point to a plot conceived and executed by those outside rather than inside a prison cell? Those inside had absolutely no means of communication; those outside had easy access to both cells. Unless some method can be shown by which these prisoners could have communicated with the prisoner in the next cell there can be no legal construction of the present evidence that will connect either of the boys with the escape of the woman. You know the strength of your locks and the thickness of your jail walls. How could these two boys here have contrived to release this woman through stone and iron? By way of the barred windows, ten feet apart? Even if the exchange of clothing could have been accomplished by this means, which I contend is impossible, who liberated her, General Serano? There was only one means of escape and that was through the door of her cell. If these boys,[Pg 223] themselves, confined by locks, walls, and bars, could have unlocked the door of her prison-house, then they are possessed of supernatural powers that should enable them to walk out of your jail themselves. No, General Serano, unless you can establish the fact of physical communication between these prisoners and the escaped woman they can in no way be held responsible for her disappearance, and I ask that the unfounded charge against them be dismissed."

"Alright then," Mr. Wyman said calmly, "let’s agree that the person was the woman and the clothes she wore were the boy's. Don’t all the known facts suggest that this was a plot carried out by people outside of a prison cell rather than by those inside it? The prisoners inside had no way to communicate; those outside could easily access both cells. Unless there’s a way to show how these prisoners could have communicated with the prisoner in the next cell, there’s no legal interpretation of the current evidence that would link either of the boys to the woman's escape. You know how strong your locks are and the thickness of your jail walls. How could these two boys possibly have freed this woman through stone and iron? Through the barred windows, which are ten feet apart? Even if the clothing exchange could somehow happen this way, which I believe is impossible, who set her free, General Serano? The only way out was through the door of her cell. If these boys, [Pg 223], locked in by walls and bars, could have unlocked her prison door, then they must have supernatural powers that would allow them to escape your jail themselves. No, General Serano, unless you can prove that there was physical communication between these prisoners and the escaped woman, they cannot be held responsible for her disappearance, and I ask that the baseless charges against them be dropped."

Mr. Wyman bowed to the general and stepped back. He had made a good fight and fired his last shot in the boys' behalf. General Serano, impressed by the wisdom of his argument, was silent for a time, as if thinking. Then he leaned forward to the consul and said in a low tone:

Mr. Wyman bowed to the general and stepped back. He had fought well and made his last appeal for the boys. General Serano, struck by the logic of his argument, was quiet for a moment, as if pondering. Then he leaned forward to the consul and spoke in a low voice:

"There is one thing more, Mr. Wyman. After the discovery of the escape of the woman prisoner her name was not spoken in your presence nor in the presence of the other prisoners, and yet when I had left the cell you referred to her by her given name. Will you tell me how this was?"

"There’s one more thing, Mr. Wyman. After we found out that the woman prisoner had escaped, her name wasn’t mentioned around you or the other prisoners, but when I left the cell, you referred to her by her first name. Can you explain how that happened?"

Mr. Wyman's face flushed, and he drew himself up defiantly, as he replied:

Mr. Wyman's face turned red, and he stood tall with defiance as he replied:

"It is immaterial to this case how I came by that knowledge."

"It doesn't matter how I acquired that knowledge in this case."

"It is material so far as it influences my decision."[Pg 224]

"It matters as much as it affects my decision."[Pg 224]

Mr. Wyman bowed without speaking. Nothing could be gained by dwelling upon this unfortunate occurrence. At this point an aged and decrepit man was led into the room by two soldiers. He was so weak that he had to be supported on either side. General Serano looked up and scowled at him as an intruder, and turned to an aide for an explanation, when the smiling interpreter glided to his side and whispered in his ear. He started back in eager surprise, and then cast another glance of triumph at the consul as he said:

Mr. Wyman nodded silently. There was no point in focusing on this unfortunate event. At that moment, an old and frail man was brought into the room by two soldiers. He was so weak that he needed support on both sides. General Serano glanced up and frowned at him as if he were an unwelcome guest, then turned to an aide for clarification. Just then, the smiling interpreter stepped up and whispered in his ear. He stepped back in eager surprise and then shot another triumphant look at the consul as he said:

"Bring him forward."

"Bring him up."

All eyes were now turned on the tottering old man as he was slowly led to a chair which was placed in front of General Serano's desk.

All eyes were now on the unsteady old man as he was slowly guided to a chair set in front of General Serano's desk.

"You have some information in regard to this case which you wish to impart to me?" asked the general.

"You have some information about this case that you want to share with me?" asked the general.

"What case?"

"What's the case?"

The old man's dim eyes turned in the direction of the speaker like those of one who is almost blind. He seemed dazed and frightened.

The old man's faded eyes turned toward the speaker like someone who can barely see. He looked confused and scared.

"Well, never mind the case. Were you ever the warden of the jail here?"

"Well, forget about the case. Have you ever been the warden of this jail?"

"Oh, yes sir, but that was many, many years ago."

"Oh, yes, sir, but that was a long time ago."

"Yes, I know," said the general, coaxingly, "but what do you know about the jail?"[Pg 225]

"Yeah, I get it," the general said softly, "but what do you know about the jail?"[Pg 225]

"Nothing much now, sir, not for many, many years."

"Not much, sir, not for a long time."

"No, no, what do you know that no other man now living knows?"

"No, no, what do you know that no other man alive today knows?"

"Much, sir, much, for they have all gone on before."

"Very much, sir, very much, because they have all gone ahead."

"Do you know any secret of the jail?"

"Do you know any secrets about the jail?"

"Secret? Oh, yes, a secret. No man knows but me, no man knows."

"Secret? Oh, definitely a secret. No one knows it but me, no one knows."

The old man shook his head stupidly, and rubbed his gnarled hands.

The old man shook his head in confusion and rubbed his twisted hands.

"What is the secret?" General Serano leaned forward to catch the answer.

"What’s the secret?" General Serano leaned in to hear the response.

"I have forgotten."

"I forgot."

"No, no, you knew it ten minutes ago—think."

"No, no, you knew it ten minutes ago—just think."

"No man knows—they've all gone before," muttered the old man.

"No one knows—they've all left," muttered the old man.

Mr. Wyman uttered a sigh of relief. The old jailer evidently knew of the existence of the secret passage, but his mind was so far gone that the consul was hopeful that General Serano's examination might fail.

Mr. Wyman let out a sigh of relief. The old jailer clearly knew about the secret passage, but his mind was so deteriorated that the consul felt hopeful that General Serano's investigation might not succeed.

"Do you know of any secret passage?" asked the general in an insinuating tone.

"Do you know of any hidden passage?" asked the general in a suggestive tone.

"Passage—who said passage," said the old man bristling up and looking around the room with unseeing eyes. "There is no passage; it's a lie. No one knows—no one knows but the old jailer."[Pg 226]

"Passage—who mentioned a passage?" the old man said, standing up stiffly and scanning the room with blank eyes. "There’s no passage; it’s a deception. No one knows—no one knows except for the old jailer."[Pg 226]

The interpreter stepped up to the old man and whispered something in his ear. The wrinkled face cracked into a hideous grin that showed his almost toothless gums.

The interpreter approached the old man and whispered something in his ear. The wrinkled face broke into a creepy grin that revealed his nearly toothless gums.

"Money," he chortled, "yes, give me money—gold." He reached out his gnarled hands and grasped at the air. The interpreter at a sign from General Serano, placed a peseta in one of his outstretched palms. He felt it for a moment, and then held it close to his nearly sightless eyes.

"Money," he laughed, "yeah, give me money—gold." He reached out his twisted hands and grabbed at the air. The interpreter, at a signal from General Serano, placed a peseta in one of his outstretched palms. He felt it for a moment, then held it up to his nearly blind eyes.

"No, no, you can't fool the old jailer," he whined. "That's silver. Gold, give me gold. The secret's worth it. 'Sh. You can go at night. Just touch the spring and slowly—slowly the stone will roll back. And then the rack. Ha, ha, the rack—that makes 'em talk."

"No, no, you can't trick the old jailer," he complained. "That's silver. Gold, I want gold. The secret's worth it. 'Sh. You can go at night. Just touch the spring and slowly—slowly the stone will roll back. And then the rack. Ha, ha, the rack—that makes them talk."

Mr. Wyman shuddered when he thought of the scenes of horror the old jailer might have witnessed.

Mr. Wyman shuddered at the thought of the horrifying scenes the old jailer might have seen.

"Here is gold; will you show us the passage, now?"

"Here’s the gold; will you show us the way through now?"

"Yes, come."

"Yes, come over."

The man started to his feet, and the interpreter, taking the place of one of the soldiers, guided his steps toward the door. General Serano rose from his seat and followed.

The man got up, and the interpreter, stepping in for one of the soldiers, directed him toward the door. General Serano stood up from his seat and followed.

"Mr. Wyman, will you accompany us? The old[Pg 227] man's mysterious secret passage may interest you."

"Mr. Wyman, will you join us? The old[Pg 227] man's secret passage might intrigue you."

"The old man is imbecile. His evidence is valueless."

"The old man is foolish. His testimony is worthless."

"But his secret passage cannot be imbecile too."

"But his secret passage can't be stupid either."

"He is dreaming."

"He’s dreaming."

"Let us see. Bring the prisoners." He motioned to an officer, who detailed two men to accompany the boys. Harry and Bert were ignorant of what had been going on, all having spoken in Spanish, and as they followed the old man to the jail, Mr. Wyman explained to them briefly what had taken place. Harry's first thought was of the girl.

"Let’s see. Bring the prisoners." He signaled to an officer, who assigned two men to accompany the boys. Harry and Bert had no idea what had been happening, since everyone had been speaking in Spanish, and as they followed the old man to the jail, Mr. Wyman briefly explained to them what had occurred. Harry's first thought was of the girl.

"Then Miss Juanita has gotten away safely," he said with satisfaction.

"Then Miss Juanita has made it away safely," he said with satisfaction.

"Yes," replied Mr. Wyman, "I think there is no doubt she is all right, but think of the price."

"Yes," replied Mr. Wyman, "I have no doubt she’s fine, but consider the cost."

"We haven't paid it yet, Mr. Wyman."

"We haven't paid it yet, Mr. Wyman."

When they reached the jail the old man was led directly into the boys' cell. He was weary from his exertion, and sank into a chair and his head fell on his breast. In a moment he was fast asleep. The interpreter, who seemed to be general factotum to Serano, shook him roughly by the shoulder.

When they got to the jail, the old man was taken straight into the boys' cell. He was exhausted from his efforts, and dropped into a chair, his head hanging down. In no time, he was fast asleep. The interpreter, who appeared to be Serano's general assistant, shook him roughly by the shoulder.

"Come, come, you have your gold, now show us the passage."[Pg 228]

"Come on, you’ve got your gold, now let’s see the passage."[Pg 228]

The man roused himself and looked stupidly around the room. By chance his eyes rested upon the big slab in the wall, but he could not see it. Still he raised his bony finger either by intuition or luck, and pointed directly at it.

The man woke up and looked around the room vacantly. His gaze happened to land on the large slab in the wall, but he couldn’t actually see it. Still, he raised his skinny finger, either by instinct or coincidence, and pointed straight at it.

"It is there," he said, and his head dropped again.

"It’s over there," he said, and his head dropped again.

Mr. Wyman shuddered. The scene was a gruesome one, and the possibility that the man might disclose the passage was so imminent that his nerves were at their greatest tension. All hope of clearing the boys of the charge of being Cuban spies it seemed would be lost if the old man's mind should clear sufficiently for him to indicate the secret spring.

Mr. Wyman shuddered. The scene was horrifying, and the chance that the man might reveal the passage was so close that his nerves were at their highest tension. It seemed all hope of proving the boys innocent of being Cuban spies would be lost if the old man's mind sharpened enough for him to point out the secret spring.

"Yes, yes, it is there, old man, but where is the spring?"

"Yeah, yeah, it’s there, old man, but where’s the spring?"

Again he raised his head and looked blankly at the wall, and then once more his head drooped.

Again he lifted his head and stared vacantly at the wall, and then once more his head fell.

"I cannot remember," he murmured. Mr. Wyman drew a long breath. It was at least another respite. There was a sound of clanking chains in the jail corridor. The old man trembled and raised his head feebly.

"I can't remember," he whispered. Mr. Wyman took a deep breath. It was at least another break. There was a noise of clanking chains in the jail corridor. The old man shook and lifted his head weakly.

"What's that?" he whispered. "Chains?"

"What's that?" he whispered. "Chains?"

Again the sound was heard.

The sound was heard again.

"Yes, yes, they're coming. Quick, we'll chain him down—chain him hand and foot. Quick—open the passage."[Pg 229]

"Yes, yes, they're on their way. Hurry, let’s tie him up—bind his hands and feet. Quickly—open the passage."[Pg 229]

He struggled to his feet and tottered to the wall. For a moment he groped in blindness, while the boys held their breath and then, with a low chuckle he placed his finger unerringly on the little diamond-shaped stone. The creaking and grinding noise began, and the stone slowly revolved before the astonished eyes of General Serano. When the passage was fully open the general stepped to the wall and inspected it curiously. Then he turned to Mr. Wyman and said:

He fought to get up and stumbled over to the wall. For a moment, he groped in the dark while the boys held their breath, and then, with a quiet laugh, he confidently found the small diamond-shaped stone. The creaking and grinding sounds started, and the stone slowly turned in front of General Serano's amazed eyes. Once the passage was completely open, the general walked up to the wall and examined it closely. Then he turned to Mr. Wyman and said:

"The case against the accused is complete. You may inform them that the sentence imposed will be carried out unless they make a full confession before sundown to-night."

"The case against the defendant is complete. You can let them know that the sentence will be carried out unless they make a full confession before sunset tonight."

"And I, General Serano, knowing that they are innocent of any connection with the cause of the insurgents, warn you in the name of their Government that you will commit an outrage for which you must pay dearly. I shall communicate with General Weyler at once."

"And I, General Serano, aware that they have no ties to the insurgents, warn you on behalf of their Government that you will commit an act for which you'll pay a high price. I will contact General Weyler immediately."

Serano shrugged his shoulders.

Serano shrugged.

"General Weyler has the utmost confidence in my judgment."

"General Weyler has complete trust in my judgment."

"Will you suspend sentence until I can communicate with my Government?"

"Will you postpone the sentence until I can get in touch with my government?"

"No. Your Government has nothing to do with the matter. All that can be settled afterward."[Pg 230]

"No. Your government has nothing to do with this. Everything can be sorted out later."[Pg 230]

"One last request, General Serano—give me forty-eight hours to communicate with General Weyler."

"One last request, General Serano—give me 48 hours to get in touch with General Weyler."

"Oh, as it will be the same in the end, you may have the forty-eight hours."

"Oh, since it will all be the same in the end, you can have the forty-eight hours."

He turned to the jailer, who had watched the opening of the wall in wonder. "Take the prisoners to another cell where they cannot find a secret passage."

He turned to the jailer, who had watched the wall open in amazement. "Take the prisoners to a different cell where they can't find a secret passage."

As the boys were being led from the cell they passed the interpreter, who smiled genially at them. Harry could scarcely refrain from showing him how much he despised him.

As the boys were taken out of the cell, they walked by the interpreter, who smiled warmly at them. Harry could barely hold back from showing him how much he hated him.


CHAPTER XX

Captain Dynamite to the Rescue

Consul Wyman sat in his study in deep thought. His heart was heavy and in his mind plan after plan to save the boys from their threatened fate was formed, only to be abandoned as not feasible. His wife sat with him aiding now and then by a suggestion. She, too, was deeply interested in the fate of the American boys, of whose adventures and self-sacrifice her husband had told her.

Consul Wyman sat in his study, lost in thought. He felt weighed down, and in his mind, he created one plan after another to save the boys from the danger they faced, only to discard them as unrealistic. His wife sat with him, occasionally offering suggestions. She was also very concerned about the American boys, whose adventures and selflessness her husband had shared with her.

"Everything falls to the ground, Annie," he said finally. "There is only one hope and that is an appeal to the government."

"Everything comes crashing down, Annie," he said finally. "There's only one hope, and that's to appeal to the government."

"But you know the red tape and delay that means, John," said his wife.

"But you know what all the bureaucracy and delays mean, John," said his wife.

"We have forty-eight hours from dawn to-morrow."

"We have forty-eight hours from dawn tomorrow."

"Far too short a time to reach Washington through Spanish sources, I fear."

"There's way too little time to get information about Washington through Spanish sources, I’m afraid."

"I believe you are right."

"I think you're right."

"And you cannot stir Serano?"

"And you can't stir Serano?"

"He is adamant."

"He's determined."

"Then I can see nothing but an appeal to Weyler."

"Then all I can see is a call to Weyler."

"There is scarcely time for that."[Pg 232]

"There’s hardly any time for that." [Pg 232]

"There can be no delay."

"No delays allowed."

"But the courier. I know of no one whom I can trust and who would act in the boys' interests. It is a diplomatic mission. There must be neither pleading nor threatening."

"But the courier. I don’t know anyone I can trust who would act in the boys' best interests. This is a diplomatic mission. There should be no pleading or threatening."

"Then you must go, John."

"Then you have to go, John."

"That is what I have been thinking, my dear. I am glad you see it in the same way."

"That's what I've been thinking, my dear. I'm glad you see it the same way."

"When will you start?"

"When are you starting?"

"Within an hour. If you will leave me now, I will prepare a brief to present to General Weyler."

"Give me an hour. If you leave me now, I’ll put together a brief to present to General Weyler."

Mrs. Wyman left the room and the consul drew his chair closer to his desk where a student lamp burned. The room was large, opening by a casement window upon a garden filled with luxuriantly growing plants and shrubs. The night was warm and the window stood open, admitting the heavy perfume of flowers. The lamp, which was the only light in the room, cast a bright circle on the desk. All the rest of the apartment was in deep shadow.

Mrs. Wyman left the room, and the consul pulled his chair closer to his desk, where a student lamp was on. The room was spacious, with a casement window opening up to a garden filled with lush plants and shrubs. The night was warm, and the window was open, letting in the strong fragrance of flowers. The lamp, the only light in the room, created a bright circle on the desk, while the rest of the apartment was in deep shadow.

Mr. Wyman had been writing about half an hour when he turned to the window behind him as if he had heard an unusual sound. Then he returned to his writing. Again he swung around in his chair and listened. Then he rose and walked quickly to the window.

Mr. Wyman had been writing for about half an hour when he turned to the window behind him, as if he had heard something unusual. Then he went back to his writing. Once again, he spun around in his chair and listened. Then he stood up and quickly walked to the window.

"Annie, is that you?" he called.[Pg 233]

"Annie, is that you?" he called.[Pg 233]

There was no reply.

No reply.

"I am sure I heard a sound in the garden," he said to himself.

"I’m pretty sure I heard a noise in the garden," he thought to himself.

"Probably you are right, consul, although I tried to make as little noise as possible."

"You're probably right, consul, even though I tried to be as quiet as I could."

Mr. Wyman started back involuntarily. The words which were spoken in a whisper, seemed to come from a clump of bushes at the right of the window. Mr. Wyman peered into the darkness but could see no one.

Mr. Wyman jumped back without thinking. The words that were whispered seemed to come from a cluster of bushes to the right of the window. Mr. Wyman squinted into the darkness but couldn't see anyone.

"Who are you?" he asked loudly, "who comes stealing into my garden under the cover of darkness?"

"Who are you?" he shouted, "who's sneaking into my garden in the dark?"

"Are you alone?" was the only reply.

"Are you by yourself?" was the only response.

"And of what concern is that to you?"

"And why should that matter to you?"

"Sure, and if you were me you would concern yourself a good bit about it."

"Sure, if you were in my shoes, you'd worry about it a lot."

"Well, I am alone; now who are you and what is your business here at this time of night?"

"Well, I'm alone; so who are you and what are you doing here at this hour?"

For answer a dark form crept stealthily out from the shadow of the bush, leaped lightly in the window, and as quickly drew the hanging curtain across it, shutting out all view from the outside. Although the night was warm, the man wore a coat with the broad collar turned up so as to conceal his face, and a broad sombrero slouched down over his eyes. He kept close within the shadows in the corner of the room.[Pg 234]

For an answer, a dark figure quietly crept out from the shadow of the bush, jumped lightly through the window, and quickly pulled the curtain shut, blocking all visibility from the outside. Even though it was a warm night, the man wore a coat with a wide collar turned up to hide his face, and a large sombrero pulled down over his eyes. He stayed close to the shadows in the corner of the room.[Pg 234]

"Pardon me, Mr. Wyman, for entering your house in this unceremonious manner, but there was no other way that offered just at present. My mission is of the utmost importance, but it would not be well for either of us if I were discovered here. Can we depend upon being undisturbed?"

"Pardon me, Mr. Wyman, for coming into your house like this, but there wasn't any other option available right now. My purpose is really important, but it wouldn't be good for either of us if I were found here. Can we count on not being interrupted?"

"How do you know that I wish to be undisturbed? You seem to know me, but refuse to disclose your identity. I cannot consent to this one-sided interview. Who are you?"

"How do you know that I want to be left alone? You seem to understand me, but you won’t reveal who you are. I can’t agree to this one-sided conversation. Who are you?"

"If I tell you that I am a friend of the American boys, is that enough?"

"If I say I'm a friend of the American guys, is that enough?"

"Quite. You need have no fear; we shall be undisturbed here."

"Definitely. You don’t need to worry; we’ll be undisturbed here."

The man, reassured, stepped forward and threw off his coat and hat. Mr. Wyman looked him over curiously for a moment and then pointed to a chair.

The man, feeling reassured, stepped forward and took off his coat and hat. Mr. Wyman examined him with curiosity for a moment and then gestured to a chair.

"Be seated, Captain Dynamite," he said, quietly.

"Have a seat, Captain Dynamite," he said softly.

O'Connor started back in some dismay.

O'Connor stepped back, a bit taken aback.

"You know me?" he said. "How?"

"You know me?" he asked. "How?"

"The boys described you to me very accurately. You have a pair of very staunch friends in those youngsters, sir."

"The boys described you to me very accurately. You have a couple of really loyal friends in those kids, sir."

"Yes, yes, I know," said O'Connor, eagerly. "Tell me of them—they are safe?"

"Yeah, yeah, I get it," O'Connor replied eagerly. "Tell me about them—they're okay?"

"They are alive and well, but they are not safe."[Pg 235]

"They are alive and doing fine, but they're not out of danger."[Pg 235]

"What do you mean?"

"What do you mean?"

"In the first place tell me if Miss Juanita reached you in safety?"

"In the first place, let me know if Miss Juanita arrived safely."

"Yes, thank God, and she has told me much of what the boys have risked for her and me. That is why I am here."

"Yes, thank God, and she has shared with me a lot about what the guys have sacrificed for her and me. That’s why I’m here."

"Yes, and there is not another man with a price upon his head who would place it in the lion's mouth as you are doing. Why did you come here alone? You can do no good single handed."

"Yes, and there isn’t another man with a bounty on his head who would put himself in danger like you are doing. Why did you come here by yourself? You can’t accomplish anything on your own."

O'Connor leaned forward and whispered:

O'Connor leaned in and whispered:

"But I am not alone. There are twelve picked men with me."

"But I'm not alone. I've got twelve chosen guys with me."

"Where are they?"

"Where are they now?"

"Pardon me the liberty, but they are out there in your garden."

"Pardon my boldness, but they're out there in your garden."

"How did you get here?"

"How did you arrive here?"

"By methods known only to Indians and Cubans."

"By methods known only to Indigenous people and Cubans."

"Humph," said Mr. Wyman, somewhat annoyed, "I may not get clear of this affair without getting shot myself. But what can twelve men do?"

"Humph," said Mr. Wyman, a bit annoyed, "I might not get out of this situation without getting shot myself. But what can twelve men do?"

"Twelve such men as those can do much. But tell me, please, so that I may act with proper dispatch, just what the situation is in regard to the boys."[Pg 236]

"Twelve men like those can accomplish a lot. But please, tell me exactly what the situation is with the boys so I can act quickly."[Pg 236]

The men drew their chairs closer together and in a low tone Mr. Wyman began to tell in sequence the events that had transpired since he had been involved in the affair.

The men pulled their chairs closer and in a quiet voice, Mr. Wyman started to recount the events that had happened since he got involved in the situation.

"So," said O'Connor, when Mr. Wyman had finished, "then I am not much too soon. Now, let us consider what is the best way to proceed. I shall probably have to ask you for a trifle of aid."

"So," O'Connor said when Mr. Wyman finished, "I'm just in time. Now, let's think about the best way to move forward. I might need to ask you for a bit of help."

"But I must be off to Weyler. I have not a minute to waste if I wish to reach him in time."

"But I have to get going to Weyler. I don’t have a minute to waste if I want to reach him on time."

"In time for what?" asked O'Connor, in surprise.

"In time for what?" O'Connor asked, surprised.

"In time to secure a reprieve."

"In time to get a break."

"Nonsense, man."

"Nonsense, dude."

"May I ask what is nonsense, Captain Dynamite?" said Mr. Wyman, whose dignity was injured.

"Can I ask what you mean by nonsense, Captain Dynamite?" said Mr. Wyman, feeling his dignity was hurt.

"In the first place, it is nonsense to expect any aid from Weyler, who always staunchly supports his lieutenants, whether right or wrong, and in the second place, we do not want a reprieve. We've got to get them clean away from here before they will be safe—clean off the blooming island. I'll take them back to the old Mariella—that's the safest place for them. I wish to goodness they had never left her."

"In the first place, it's ridiculous to expect any help from Weyler, who always backs his lieutenants, no matter if they're right or wrong. And second, we don't want a delay. We need to get them completely out of here before they’ll be safe—off the damn island for good. I'll take them back to the old Mariella—that's the safest place for them. I really wish they had never left her."

"But how, my good sir—how under the sun are you going to get them to the Mariella[Pg 237] when they are locked up in a Spanish jail?"

"But how, my good sir—how on earth are you going to get them to the Mariella[Pg 237] when they're locked up in a Spanish jail?"

"No jail is impregnable."

"No prison is impenetrable."

"But you cannot storm it in the face of a garrison of men with a handful of twelve."

"But you can’t charge in when there’s a whole army of men and you only have a group of twelve."

"There are more than fifty times twelve almost within gunshot, but I still think the twelve will be sufficient for my purpose."

"There are over fifty times twelve nearly within reach, but I still believe the twelve will be enough for what I need."

"Do you mean that the city is threatened by insurgents?" Mr. Wyman looked worried. "I must get my wife away, sir."

"Are you saying that the city is at risk from insurgents?" Mr. Wyman looked concerned. "I need to get my wife out of here, sir."

"Don't worry, consul. If it comes to that the American flag is sacred to the insurgents; but if there is any fighting it will be on the picket line only, I fancy."

"Don't worry, consul. If it comes to that, the American flag is sacred to the insurgents; but if there's any fighting, I think it will be only on the picket line."

"But what is your plan?"

"But what's your plan?"

"To take the boys out of that jail first."

"To get the boys out of that jail first."

"How?"

"How?"

"Is it strongly guarded?"

"Is it well guarded?"

"Inside and out. It is a military prison."

"From the outside and the inside, it’s a military prison."

"How many men?"

"How many guys?"

"Four outside and four within, in charge of an officer."

"Four outside and four inside, supervised by an officer."

"Oh, that's easy."

"Oh, that's simple."

"But the first sound of a conflict would arouse the garrison, which is directly in the rear of the prison."

"But the first sound of a conflict would wake up the garrison, which is located just behind the prison."

"There will be no sound of conflict after we get to work, Mr. Wyman."[Pg 238]

"There won't be any noise from conflict once we start working, Mr. Wyman."[Pg 238]

"How can I aid you?"

"How can I help you?"

"By securing permission to visit the boys in their cell. Can you do it?"

"Can you get permission to visit the boys in their cell?"

"I am not sure. General Serano's mood is not the best in the world just now. The boys have tantalized him beyond measure. He cannot seem to beat them, and aside from his official pride, his personal dignity has suffered. My position as defender of the youngsters has gained for me his ill-will. But I will try. What am I to do?"

"I’m not sure. General Serano isn’t in the best mood right now. The boys have pushed him to his limits. He just can’t seem to win against them, and besides his official pride, his personal dignity has taken a hit. My role as their defender has earned me his resentment. But I’ll give it a shot. What should I do?"

"Simply leave the jail at a time that I shall fix. We will do the rest. You will not be involved in any way, except that you may be seemingly handled a little roughly, but that will only be done to divert suspicion from yourself. Do not resist."

"Just leave the jail at a time I'll set. We'll take care of everything else. You won't be involved at all, except you might be treated a bit harshly, but that's just to throw off any suspicion from you. Don't resist."

"There will not be too much violence, I hope?"

"There won't be too much violence, will there?"

"No more than is needed, sir. I do not like violence myself. There may be a broken head or two, but they are soon mended. It it now nine o'clock. What time does the watch change?"

"No more than necessary, sir. I’m not a fan of violence myself. There might be a couple of broken heads, but they heal quickly. It’s now nine o’clock. When does the watch change?"

"At midnight."

"At midnight."

"Very well. Now, if you will permit me, I will call one of my men."

"Alright. Now, if you don’t mind, I’ll call one of my guys."

"Make what use you please of me and my house. I wish to aid you in any way I can."

"Do whatever you want with me and my house. I want to help you in any way I can."

O'Connor stepped to the window and drew[Pg 239] aside the curtain. As he did so, a dark form darted into the shadow of a bush. O'Connor saw it and paused.

O'Connor walked over to the window and pulled back[Pg 239] the curtain. As he did, a dark figure quickly moved into the shadow of a bush. O'Connor noticed it and hesitated.

"There is someone in your garden beside my men," he whispered to the consul.

"There’s someone in your garden next to my guys," he whispered to the consul.

"Impossible. The servants have gone to bed."

"That's impossible. The staff has already gone to bed."

"Someone was listening at this window."

"Someone was eavesdropping at this window."

"Whom can it be?"

"Who can it be?"

"Someone who suspects you. Can you think whom it would be?"

"Someone who is suspicious of you. Can you figure out who it might be?"

"No." The consul shook his head nervously.

"No." The consul shook his head anxiously.

"Very well, we'll see."

"Alright, we’ll see."

O'Connor turned and darted out of the window. In a moment he returned holding General Serano's official spy by the scruff of the neck. The interpreter's genial smile had given place to a look of terror and he trembled with fear. O'Connor swung him around so that he faced the consul.

O'Connor turned and jumped out of the window. A moment later, he came back holding General Serano's official spy by the collar. The interpreter's friendly smile had turned into a look of fear, and he was shaking with terror. O'Connor spun him around so he was facing the consul.

"Do you know him?" he asked.

"Do you know him?" he asked.

"Yes," answered Mr. Wyman, as he looked the man over with an expression of disgust, "he is General Serano's man Friday." Then to the man he said sternly: "What are you doing here, in my garden, at this time of night?"

"Yeah," Mr. Wyman replied, eyeing the man with a look of disgust, "he's General Serano's right-hand man." Then he turned to the man and said sternly, "What are you doing here, in my garden, at this time of night?"

"Preoccupation, Mr. Wyman, preoccupation of the mind. I must have strayed in by mistake. I hope you will pardon me."

"Sorry for interrupting, Mr. Wyman, it’s just that I was lost in thought. I must have come in here by accident. I hope you can forgive me."

"Well, we will think that over, my man,"[Pg 240] interrupted O'Connor. "How long had you been listening at the window?"

"Well, we'll think about that, my man,"[Pg 240] interrupted O'Connor. "How long were you listening at the window?"

"Listening! O, sir, far be it from me to listen at the window of our esteemed consul."

"Listening! Oh, sir, it’s nothing I would do to eavesdrop at the window of our respected consul."

"You weren't very far from it just now."

"You were really close just now."

"I had just discovered my error, sir, and was about to retrace my steps——"

"I just found out my mistake, sir, and was about to go back——"

"Having heard all that you wished," O'Connor broke in.

"After hearing everything you wanted," O'Connor interrupted.

"I hope the gentleman is jesting. I should be grieved indeed if he held so evil an opinion of me."

"I hope the guy is just joking. I would be really upset if he thought so poorly of me."

"Please consider yourself grieved. Now, Mr. Wyman, I should like to still further impose on your hospitality. This gentleman, I believe, is very anxious to serve me—is that not true, Mr. Friday?"

"Please consider yourself upset. Now, Mr. Wyman, I would like to impose on your hospitality a bit more. This gentleman, I believe, is very eager to help me—isn't that right, Mr. Friday?"

"Oh, quite true, sir; it shall be my pleasure; but the name, sir, is not Friday—it is Villamonte."

"Oh, that's absolutely right, sir; I'd be happy to help; but the name, sir, isn’t Friday—it’s Villamonte."

"Mr. Wyman, can I trouble you for a short piece of rope?"

"Mr. Wyman, could I ask you for a short piece of rope?"

The consul left the room and returned with a piece of clothes-line about three feet long which he handed to O'Connor.

The consul left the room and came back with a piece of clothesline about three feet long, which he handed to O'Connor.

"Now Mr. Monte, I shall have to ask you to extend your hands behind you."

"Now, Mr. Monte, I need you to put your hands behind your back."

"Surely your excellency will not bind me?"

"Surely, your excellency, you won't restrict me?"

"My excellency sure will. Stick 'em out and be quick about it."[Pg 241]

"My excellence definitely will. Stick them out and be quick about it."[Pg 241]

"I protest. General Serano shall hear of this outrage."

"I object. General Serano will hear about this outrage."

"I am quite confident of that, but I am not ready to lose your company yet, Monte."

"I’m really sure about that, but I’m not ready to lose your company yet, Monte."

O'Connor turned the man around much as he might have done a child, and bound his hands behind him. Then he led him to a chair into which he thrust him and lashed his hands tightly to the back, Villamonte jabbering vehemently in Spanish the while.

O'Connor turned the man around like he would have with a child and tied his hands behind him. Then he took him to a chair, shoved him into it, and secured his hands tightly to the back, while Villamonte was angrily talking in Spanish the whole time.

"Now, Mr. Wyman," said O'Connor, when he finished, "this gentleman's providential preoccupation of mind will relieve you from the necessity of visiting General Serano. I think he will be very glad to carry out any instructions I may give him." As O'Connor spoke, he carelessly removed a pistol from his belt, and as he examined it he held the muzzle so that it covered the trembling Villamonte, who cowered back in the chair.

"Now, Mr. Wyman," O'Connor said when he was done, "this guy's fortunate distraction will save you from having to go see General Serano. I think he’ll be more than happy to follow any instructions I give him." As O'Connor spoke, he casually took a pistol from his belt, and while checking it, he aimed the muzzle at the trembling Villamonte, who cowered back in the chair.

"Won't you, Mr. Monte?"

"Will you, Mr. Monte?"

"Whatever his excellency wishes shall be my pleasure," stammered the interpreter.

"Whatever you want, it will be my pleasure," stammered the interpreter.

"Good; now we understand each other, Monte."

"Great; now we get each other, Monte."


CHAPTER XXI

General Serano Meets Captain Boom

The new cell in which the boys had been placed when the escape of Miss Juanita was discovered, looked out through its barred windows onto the main street of the little straggling town. In the distance, although the house was concealed from view by intervening buildings, they could see the American flag floating over the consulate. This outlook had afforded them some occupation during the day, and even when night fell they stood together gazing silently out into the deserted street, lighted only by the brilliant moon. They began now to feel that their position was critical, and Bert, who more easily yielded to the depressing effects of circumstances, bemoaned his fate and all the series of events that had led up to their present unenviable plight. He was inclined to blame Harry for the initial step.

The new cell where the boys had been put after Miss Juanita's escape was situated with its barred windows overlooking the main street of the small, scattered town. In the distance, even though the house was hidden from view by other buildings, they could see the American flag flying over the consulate. This view had kept them occupied during the day, and even at night, they stood together, silently staring out at the empty street lit only by the bright moon. They were starting to realize that their situation was dire, and Bert, who more easily succumbed to the weight of their circumstances, lamented his fate and all the events that had led to their current unfortunate state. He was inclined to blame Harry for the initial decision.

"If you only hadn't taken it into your Quixotic head to try to aid Captain Dynamite, who is able to take care of himself, we might now be safe on the Mariella," he growled, "instead of waiting patiently for some one to take us out and shoot us."[Pg 243]

"If you hadn't gotten it into your head to help Captain Dynamite, who can handle himself just fine, we might be safe on the Mariella right now instead of just waiting for someone to come and shoot us."[Pg 243]

"Why, Bert, old man, we've got two more days before we step out and play targets. Many things may happen in that time."

"Hey, Bert, buddy, we’ve got two more days before we go out and play targets. A lot could happen in that time."

"Nothing to help us out of this scrape that I can see."

"There's nothing that can help us get out of this mess that I can see."

"Mr. Wyman will surely do all that lies in his power to aid us."

"Mr. Wyman will definitely do everything he can to help us."

"Yes, but you know yourself that since Serano suspects his connection with the escape of Miss Juanita his power has been very much curtailed."

"Yes, but you know that since Serano thinks he’s linked to Miss Juanita’s escape, his power has really been limited."

"Well, there's Captain Dynamite yet to be counted on."

"Well, we still have Captain Dynamite to account for."

"Humph, where is he and what could he do if he were here?"

"Humph, where is he and what would he be able to do if he were here?"

"I don't know, Bert, but you can't make me believe that he would abandon us completely to our fate. It's not like him, I tell you."

"I don't know, Bert, but you can't make me believe that he'd just leave us to deal with this on our own. That's not like him, I'm telling you."

"If all the hope we have is centred in Dynamite or Wyman I think it is time we began to think of doing something for ourselves."

"If all our hope is focused on Dynamite or Wyman, I think it's time we started considering doing something for ourselves."

"Sure," answered Harry in surprise, "but what under the sun can we do, Bert?"

"Sure," Harry replied, surprised. "But what on earth can we do, Bert?"

"We might——" Bert hesitated and glanced nervously at his companion; "we might effect some compromise with Serano."

"We could—" Bert hesitated and looked nervously at his companion; "we could reach some kind of compromise with Serano."

"How?" asked Harry, coldly.

"How?" Harry asked, coldly.

"We might agree to tell him what he wants to know about how we got to the island when we[Pg 244] can be assured that it will injure no one."

"We might agree to tell him what he wants to know about how we got to the island when we[Pg 244] can be sure it won’t hurt anyone."

"There are two reasons why that plan would be useless. In the first place how are we going to tell when Captain Dynamite is safe, and in the second place the affair has gone so far now that I do not think Serano would be satisfied with simply that information. He is pretty well convinced that in some way we are connected with the Cuban cause."

"There are two reasons why that plan is pointless. First, how are we supposed to know when Captain Dynamite is safe? Second, the situation has escalated so much that I don’t think Serano would be satisfied with just that information. He’s pretty convinced that we’re connected to the Cuban cause in some way."

"Oh, gee, I wish I had never gone sailing."

"Oh man, I wish I had never gone sailing."

"That's going back a long way to make a connection between cause and effect, Bert," said Harry, who could not help smiling at his companion's hopeless view of the situation.

"That's reaching pretty far to link cause and effect, Bert," said Harry, who couldn't help but smile at his friend's overly pessimistic take on the situation.

They were silent again for a time. Not a sound broke the stillness of the night save the regular steps of the sentinel below them. Some light clouds scurried across the moon, shutting off for a time the flood of silver light and throwing a gray shadow over the street.

They were quiet for a while again. The only sound that broke the stillness of the night was the steady footsteps of the guard below them. Light clouds hurried across the moon, temporarily blocking the cascade of silver light and casting a gray shadow over the street.

"Look," said Harry, suddenly. "Didn't you see a man creeping along there?"

"Look," Harry said suddenly. "Didn’t you see a guy sneaking along there?"

"Where?" asked Bert, eagerly.

"Where?" Bert asked eagerly.

"In the deep shadow close in by the wall of that house."

"In the deep shade right next to the wall of that house."

"I can see no one," said Bert, after straining his eyes in an effort to penetrate the darkness.

"I can't see anyone," said Bert, after squinting his eyes to try to see through the darkness.

"Watch," whispered Harry. "I know I saw[Pg 245] some one creeping along as if he did not want to be seen."

"Look," whispered Harry. "I swear I saw[Pg 245] someone sneaking around like they didn’t want to be noticed."

"Even if you did, what does it signify?"

"Even if you did, what does that mean?"

"Captain Dynamite would come that way," answered Harry, confidently.

"Captain Dynamite would come this way," Harry replied, confidently.

Suddenly the clouds swept on and again the street was flooded with a radiance that made the shadows cast by the walls of the houses as black as the darkest night in contrast.

Suddenly, the clouds moved away and once again the street was bathed in a light that made the shadows from the walls of the houses appear as dark as the deepest night.

"Then did you see?" asked Harry, excitedly.

"Did you see that?" Harry asked, excitedly.

Bert nodded quickly in the affirmative.

Bert quickly nodded in agreement.

As the moon flashed out they had both seen a man dart closer into the protection of the deep shadow of the wall.

As the moonlight flickered, they both noticed a man quickly move into the safety of the wall's dark shadow.

"There's another," whispered Bert, pointing out through the bars in his eagerness, to a point about ten feet beyond where the first man had appeared. "What if the guard should see them too?"

"There's another one," whispered Bert, eagerly pointing through the bars to a spot about ten feet beyond where the first man had appeared. "What if the guard sees them too?"

"The sentinels are on the same level and cannot see as well as we can up here. I wonder who they are. See, there is another."

"The guards are at the same level and can’t see as well as we can up here. I’m curious about who they are. Look, there's another one."

"Who can they be?"

"Who could they be?"

"I'll bet you a dinner when we get home that Captain Dynamite is in town."

"I'll bet you a dinner when we get home that Captain Dynamite is in town."

"O, Hal, do you think we will ever get home?"

"O, Hal, do you think we'll ever get back home?"

"I'm beginning to feel very sure of it. See, there are other men in the distance and all are coming toward the jail."[Pg 246]

"I'm starting to feel really confident about this. Look, there are other men in the distance and they're all heading toward the jail."[Pg 246]

The prison stood in a narrow plaza or square facing the main street. Toward the dark shadow of a building that formed a corner of the square the indistinct forms of the men seemed to be making their way. The boys counted nearly a dozen, closely hugging the walls of the low houses, slip one by one into the wider shadow of the corner building. Still the regular steps of the guard below told that the mysterious gathering had not been discovered.

The prison was located in a small plaza facing the main street. In the dark shadow cast by a building at the corner of the square, the vague shapes of the men appeared to be moving. The boys counted nearly a dozen, pressing themselves against the walls of the low houses, slipping one by one into the deeper shadow of the corner building. Yet the steady footsteps of the guard below indicated that the mysterious gathering had not been noticed.

Presently four men emerged boldly from the shadow, and arm in arm, and with unsteady gait approached the prison. In hiccoughing tones they sang a Spanish drinking song. In the bright glare of the moonlight the boys could see that they wore the uniform of Spain.

Currently, four men stepped boldly out of the shadows, arm in arm, swaying slightly as they made their way to the prison. In slurred voices, they sang a Spanish drinking song. In the bright moonlight, the boys could see that they were wearing the uniform of Spain.

"Pshaw," said Harry, in a disgusted tone. "They are only a lot of drunken Spanish soldiers after all, making their way back to the barracks."

"Pshaw," said Harry, in a disgusted tone. "They’re just a bunch of drunk Spanish soldiers, heading back to the barracks."

Harry was keenly disappointed. He had been confident that the strange movements of the men indicated that some action was on foot which he imagined Captain Dynamite was directing.

Harry was really disappointed. He had been sure that the unusual movements of the men meant that something was happening, which he thought Captain Dynamite was in charge of.

"But where are the others?" whispered Bert. "There are more in the shadow."

"But where are the others?" Bert whispered. "There are more in the shadows."

"Probably waiting a chance to slip into the barracks without attracting too much attention from their officers."[Pg 247]

"Probably waiting for a chance to sneak into the barracks without drawing too much attention from their officers."[Pg 247]

The four men reeled on. The regular pacing of the sentinel ceased and he hailed the approaching quartet in a jocular way. They answered with thick tongues and coarse laughter. Presently they passed out of view of the boys, having come close within the shadow of the wall below them.

The four men kept moving. The guard's steady pacing stopped, and he greeted the approaching group in a joking manner. They responded with slurred speech and rough laughter. Soon, they were out of sight of the boys, having come right up to the shadow of the wall below them.

Then suddenly there was a muffled sound as of one trying to cry out with a heavy pressure on his throat, the hard breathing of men desperately struggling, and then silence.

Then suddenly there was a muffled sound like someone trying to shout while being strangled, the labored breathing of men desperately fighting, and then silence.

The boys looked at one another in wonderment. What could it mean? Possibly a drunken squabble between the men and the guard. Now the slow pacing of the sentinel was resumed. Apparently the difficulty had been adjusted.

The boys exchanged curious glances. What could it mean? Maybe it was just a drunken fight between the men and the guard. Now the sentinel's slow pacing started again. It seemed like the issue had been resolved.

"I think we might as well get to bed," said Harry, after they had waited for ten minutes without any further developments. "There is nothing doing to-night, I guess."

"I think we should just go to bed," said Harry, after they had waited for ten minutes without anything else happening. "I guess there's nothing going on tonight."

As he spoke, the cry of a night bird sounded on the still air, but, strangely enough, it seemed to come from directly below their window, instead of from the air above. Almost immediately an answering call was heard in the distance, and then all was still again.

As he spoke, a night bird's call echoed in the quiet air, but strangely, it seemed to come from right below their window rather than from above. Almost instantly, a response came from far away, and then everything fell silent once more.

"I am not so sure, after all, that those men were Spaniards," said Harry, as he turned eagerly to the window again.[Pg 248]

"I’m not so sure, after all, that those guys were Spaniards," said Harry, as he turned eagerly to the window again.[Pg 248]

"Why?"

"Why?"

"Did you hear those signals?"

"Did you hear those signals?"

"I heard a bird."

"I saw a bird."

"I don't think it was a bird."

"I don't think it was a bird."

"Listen; if they were birds we shall hear them again."

"Listen; if they were birds, we'll hear them again."

The boys listened patiently for several minutes, but the sound was not repeated.

The boys waited patiently for a few minutes, but the sound didn't happen again.

"I believe they were signals, and—look—look! Isn't that Captain Dynamite himself coming out of the shadow further up the street?"

"I think those were signals, and—look—look! Isn't that Captain Dynamite himself coming out of the shadows further up the street?"

"It certainly looks like him," gasped Bert, "but who is that with him and how does he dare to walk openly in the streets?"

"It definitely looks like him," Bert gasped, "but who's that with him, and how can he walk around openly in the streets?"

"It's the Spanish interpreter," whispered Harry, after a minute's inspection; "and—and Captain Dynamite, sure. Hooray."

"It's the Spanish interpreter," Harry whispered after looking closely for a minute, "and—and Captain Dynamite, for sure. Hooray."

"Don't hooray yet," said Bert, wagging his head disconsolately. "Remember there are more Spaniards in the shadow there."

"Don't celebrate just yet," said Bert, shaking his head sadly. "Remember, there are more Spaniards hiding in the shadows over there."

"Yes, if they are Spaniards."

"Yes, if they're Spaniards."

"And see how closely the interpreter walks. Can Captain Dynamite be a prisoner?"

"And look how closely the interpreter follows. Could Captain Dynamite really be a prisoner?"

"Not of that little man," sniffed Harry. "Look at the size of him beside O'Connor."

"Not that little guy," sniffed Harry. "Look at how big he is next to O'Connor."

The two men whom the boys had seen in the distance were indeed O'Connor and Villamonte. They came on through the bright moonlight[Pg 249] apparently as unconcerned as if there were not a price on the head of one. And they walked as close together as bosom friends, but a pistol in the coat pocket of Captain Dynamite pressed closely against the side of his companion.

The two men the boys had spotted in the distance were definitely O'Connor and Villamonte. They walked through the bright moonlight[Pg 249] looking as relaxed as if there wasn’t a bounty on one of their heads. They strolled side by side like close friends, but a pistol in Captain Dynamite's coat pocket pressed tightly against his companion's side.

"Now you are sure you know your part, Monte?" said O'Connor, as they neared the prison.

"Are you sure you know your part, Monte?" O'Connor asked as they got closer to the prison.

"Sure, your excellency."

"Of course, your excellency."

"And you know what it means to play any tricks, do you?" As he spoke O'Connor emphasized his remark by jabbing the muzzle of the pistol into Villamonte's ribs.

"And you know what it means to pull any tricks, right?" As he spoke, O'Connor emphasized his point by jabbing the muzzle of the pistol into Villamonte's ribs.

"Surely your excellency can trust me," quaked the interpreter.

"Surely you can trust me, your excellency," the interpreter said, trembling.

"Yes, under the circumstances. You also want to recollect that I understand Spanish, so you cannot fool me in that way—- and my finger is always on the trigger. At the first word or sign of warning off it goes. Now take that scared expression off and look pleasant; we are nearly there."

"Yeah, given the situation. Also, remember that I understand Spanish, so you can't trick me like that—and I'm always ready for action. At the first word or hint of trouble, I'm on it. Now wipe that scared look off your face and smile; we’re almost there."

At the door of the prison they were met by a Spanish officer, who received Villamonte with great deference and looked wonderingly at O'Connor, who wore his cloak and sombrero so that little of his face was visible.

At the entrance of the prison, they were greeted by a Spanish officer, who acknowledged Villamonte with great respect and stared curiously at O'Connor, who had his cloak and sombrero on in a way that made most of his face hidden.

"Now you've got your cue," said O'Connor, in[Pg 250] English, in a low tone, at the same time pressing the pistol harder into Villamonte's side.

"Now you've got your signal," said O'Connor, in[Pg 250] English, in a quiet voice, while pressing the pistol more firmly into Villamonte's side.

"We come from General Serano," said the interpreter reluctantly. "He wishes the American boys removed secretly to the government house, as he anticipates a plot to release them."

"We come from General Serano," the interpreter said hesitantly. "He wants the American boys moved quietly to the government house, as he expects a plan to free them."

The officer bowed and Villamonte and O'Connor passed into the jail.

The officer nodded, and Villamonte and O'Connor walked into the jail.

"Do you wish your escort to enter also?" asked the officer.

"Do you want your escort to come in too?" asked the officer.

Villamonte turned in surprise and saw eight men close upon their heels, but as he quickly noted that they all wore Spanish uniforms, he smiled triumphantly.

Villamonte turned in surprise and saw eight men right behind them, but when he quickly noticed that they were all in Spanish uniforms, he smiled triumphantly.

"Yes," said O'Connor, in English, and again the pressure against his side brought Villamonte to his senses.

"Yes," O'Connor said in English, and once more the pressure against his side snapped Villamonte back to reality.

"Yes," he repeated to the officer, and the men filed silently in and the door was closed behind them.

"Yes," he repeated to the officer, and the men walked in quietly, and the door was closed behind them.

"Now," said O'Connor, turning to the officer in command, and for the first time speaking in Spanish, "if you will kindly conduct us to the cell of the American prisoners we shall be obliged to you, and if we wish to please General Serano, haste is essential."

"Now," O'Connor said, turning to the officer in charge, and for the first time speaking in Spanish, "if you could please take us to the cell of the American prisoners, we would appreciate it, and if we want to make General Serano happy, we need to be quick."

The officer preceded them down the corridor, which was lighted dimly, and then ascended a[Pg 251] winding stone staircase to the floor above. He opened the door of a cell and stood aside for them to enter.

The officer led them down the dimly lit corridor and then climbed a[Pg 251] winding stone staircase to the floor above. He opened the door to a cell and stepped aside for them to enter.

As Harry saw O'Connor's big form in the doorway he rushed forward with a glad cry:

As Harry spotted O'Connor's large figure in the doorway, he hurried over with a joyful shout:

"I knew it, Bert, it's Captain Dynamite. I told you he would come."

"I knew it, Bert, it's Captain Dynamite. I told you he would show up."

"Hush," said O'Connor, as he took the youngsters in his arms, much as one would two children and gave them a bear-like hug, "not so loud. We can take no chances, for we are not out of the woods yet."

"Hush," said O'Connor as he gathered the kids in his arms, similar to how someone would hold two children, and gave them a big bear hug, "keep it down. We can’t take any chances, because we’re not in the clear yet."

"It's the terrible Captain Dynamite," cried the officer in dismay. Then he turned and fled down the stairs. Villamonte, relieved from the pressure on his ribs, slunk towards the door. O'Connor saw him and laughed.

"It's the dreaded Captain Dynamite," cried the officer in shock. Then he turned and ran down the stairs. Villamonte, relieved from the pressure on his ribs, crept toward the door. O'Connor saw him and laughed.

"Run along, Monte, if you wish. I don't need you any more."

"Go ahead, Monte, if that's what you want. I don’t need you anymore."

"But he will give the alarm," said Harry, in a frightened tone.

"But he's going to sound the alarm," said Harry, in a scared tone.

"No, I think not; but gather up your things, if you have any, for we must lose no time in getting out of here."

"No, I don't think so; but collect your things, if you have any, because we need to leave here as soon as possible."

"We've got nothing but what we stand in, Cap," said Harry, laughing, "and this old Spanish uniform does not fit me very well, at that. Maybe Miss Juanita is through with my clothes by this time."[Pg 252]

"We've got nothing but the clothes on our backs, Cap," Harry said with a laugh, "and this old Spanish uniform isn't a great fit for me, either. Maybe Miss Juanita has finished with my clothes by now."[Pg 252]

"God bless you, youngster, they served her well."

"God bless you, kid, they took good care of her."

"She is all right?"

"Is she okay?"

"Right as a trivet and safe aboard the old Mariella by this time, thanks to you."

"Right as rain and safely aboard the old Mariella by now, thanks to you."

As they reached the lower corridor one of the men saluted and said:

As they got to the lower hallway, one of the men saluted and said:

"We put them in there, sir," pointing to a room opening off the corridor, which was used by the officer in command of the watch. O'Connor looked in and burst into one of his hearty laughs.

"We put them in there, sir," he said, pointing to a room off the corridor that the officer in charge of the watch used. O'Connor looked inside and broke into one of his big laughs.

"Come here, youngsters, and take a last look at the valiant jailers," he said. The boys stepped forward and looked into the room. The four soldiers, gagged and bound hand and foot, were sitting with their backs against the wall, and facing them, and also bound in the same ignominious manner, were the commander and Villamonte.

"Come here, kids, and take one last look at the brave jailers," he said. The boys stepped forward and looked into the room. The four soldiers, gagged and tied hand and foot, were sitting with their backs against the wall, and facing them, also bound in the same humiliating way, were the commander and Villamonte.

Harry could not refrain from gloating a little over his fallen enemy.

Harry couldn't help but gloat a bit over his defeated enemy.

"How about the glory of Spain, Mr. Interpreter?" he enquired. Villamonte scowled but did not reply.

"What's the deal with the glory of Spain, Mr. Interpreter?" he asked. Villamonte frowned but didn’t answer.

"Come now, boys, we must be moving. This place is pretty hot for me," said O'Connor.

"Come on, guys, we need to get going. This place is pretty hot for me," said O'Connor.

At this moment some one knocked loudly on[Pg 253] the door of the prison and a deep voice called in Spanish:

At that moment, someone knocked loudly on[Pg 253] the prison door, and a deep voice called out in Spanish:

"Open, captain of the guard; it is I."

"Open up, captain of the guard; it’s me."

"Who is I?" asked O'Connor.

"Who am I?" asked O'Connor.

"Open at once. I am General Serano."

"Open up right now. I'm General Serano."

The boys caught the name and it struck terror to their souls. O'Connor smiled.

The boys heard the name, and it filled them with fear. O'Connor smiled.

"Is General Serano alone?" he enquired.

"Is General Serano by himself?" he asked.

"Yes; why do you keep me here. Open, I say."

"Yes; why are you keeping me here? Open, I say."

O'Connor motioned to the boys to step behind the men, who were grouped a few feet in the rear of the corridor awaiting instructions. Then he threw open the prison door and stood back for General Serano to enter.

O'Connor signaled the boys to move behind the men, who were gathered a few feet back in the corridor waiting for instructions. Then he swung open the prison door and stepped aside for General Serano to go in.


CHAPTER XXII

The Escape—Villamonte Loses Again.

As General Serano stepped ever the threshold of the jail, O'Connor slipped the heavy bolts and turned the big key in the lock; then he placed the key in his pocket.

As General Serano stepped over the threshold of the jail, O'Connor slid the heavy bolts and turned the large key in the lock; then he put the key in his pocket.

"Who are you, and where is the captain of the guard?" asked Serano, starting back in surprise when he saw O'Connor.

"Who are you, and where's the captain of the guard?" asked Serano, stepping back in surprise when he saw O'Connor.

"The captain is engaged at present," said O'Connor, bowing and smiling impudently; "what can I do for your excellency?"

"The captain is currently busy," O'Connor said, bowing and smiling cheekily. "How can I assist you, your excellency?"

"Take me at once to the American prisoners. I have decided to revoke the two days' reprieve. Their sentence shall be executed in the morning unless they choose to bend their stubborn spirits and tell me for whom they are acting. They are not alone in this thing. Even now their friends may be gathering and threatening our outposts."

"Take me right away to the American prisoners. I've decided to cancel the two-day stay of execution. Their sentence will be carried out in the morning unless they choose to lower their stubborn spirits and tell me who they are working for. They aren’t alone in this. Even now, their friends might be gathering and threatening our outposts."

"That is quite true, your excellency; it certainly is wise to take every precaution. Your visit was very well timed, as a few minutes later you might have found the prisoners out. They were just starting for a little airing. The prison is very close, don't you think?"[Pg 255]

"That’s absolutely right, your excellency; it’s definitely smart to take all necessary precautions. Your visit was perfectly timed, as just a few minutes later, you might have found the prisoners outside. They were just about to go for a short walk. The prison is very close, don’t you agree?"[Pg 255]

Serano looked puzzled, and O'Connor said, in English:

Serano looked confused, and O'Connor said, in English:

"Step forward, boys, and say 'How-de' to his excellency."

"Step forward, guys, and say 'Howdy' to his excellency."

Harry and Bert came from behind the men, and stopping in front of the general, saluted him gravely.

Harry and Bert came up from behind the men and stopped in front of the general, giving him a serious salute.

"What does this mean?" demanded Serano, looking from the boys to O'Connor, as a suspicion that all was not right flashed into his mind. "Where is the captain of the guard? I insist that he shall report to me at once. And who are you, sir, who usurps the authority of the commandant here?"

"What does this mean?" Serano demanded, glancing from the boys to O'Connor, as a troubling suspicion crossed his mind. "Where's the captain of the guard? I demand he report to me immediately. And who are you, sir, to take over the commandant's authority here?"

"I am Captain Dynamite, at your service, your excellency," said O'Connor, making an elaborate bow and doffing his sombrero so that his features were revealed to the now thoroughly frightened general.

"I am Captain Dynamite, at your service, your excellency," said O'Connor, making an exaggerated bow and removing his sombrero so that his features were fully visible to the now very scared general.

Serano leaped back and for a moment seemed dazed. Then his eyes fell on the eight soldiers standing back of the boys. His waning courage returned, and drawing himself up, he pointed his finger at O'Connor as he addressed the men.

Serano jumped back and for a moment looked stunned. Then his gaze landed on the eight soldiers standing behind the boys. His fading courage returned, and straightening himself up, he pointed his finger at O'Connor as he spoke to the men.

"There is a price on that man's head. Seize him and see to it that he does not escape."

"There’s a bounty on that guy's head. Capture him and make sure he doesn’t get away."

Not a man stirred. O'Connor, who had rolled a cigarette, turned to Serano.[Pg 256]

Not a single person moved. O'Connor, who had rolled a cigarette, turned to Serano.[Pg 256]

"May I trouble you for a light, general. There is no reason why we should not talk this thing over calmly."

"Could I ask you for a light, General? There's no reason we can't discuss this calmly."

"Dogs," continued the general, stamping his foot, "why do you not obey me? Seize that man. He is a desperate outlaw."

"Dogs," the general said, stamping his foot, "why won’t you obey me? Grab that man. He’s a dangerous outlaw."

Some of the men jeered and others took a threatening step or two in the direction of the general, who jumped back into a corner of the corridor.

Some of the men mocked him, while others took a menacing step or two toward the general, who jumped back into a corner of the hallway.

"What plot is this?" he gasped.

"What kind of scheme is this?" he exclaimed.

"Those are my men, general," said O'Connor calmly. "I should advise you not to be so violent. They do not like your language, you see. May I trouble you for that light?"

"Those are my guys, General," O'Connor said calmly. "I suggest you cool it with the aggression. They aren't fans of your language, you know. Can I ask you for that lighter?"

Serano drew out his match box and held it at arms length, lest O'Connor come too near him.

Serano pulled out his matchbox and held it at arm's length, trying to keep O'Connor from getting too close.

"Have no fear, sir," said O'Connor, who saw his perturbation, "No harm will come to you if you are wise enough to follow my instructions. You see, you are helpless. We hold the jail and no one will discover the plot until the watch is changed at midnight. Your guards are bound and gagged, and enjoying a siesta with your spy, Villamonte, in there." "Villamonte, too," exclaimed Serano, in surprise.

"Don't worry, sir," O'Connor said, noticing his distress. "You'll be safe as long as you follow my instructions. You see, you're in a tough spot. We control the jail, and no one will uncover the plan until the guard shift changes at midnight. Your guards are tied up and enjoying a nap with your spy, Villamonte, in there." "Villamonte, too?" Serano exclaimed in shock.

"Yes; he was kind enough to secure for me the entree to your jail, a favor any one in[Pg 257] town would have been eager to grant, I doubt not, but Monte was the first to present himself. Perhaps you would like to see him. You will find him in there with the others."

"Yes, he was kind enough to get me access to your jail, something anyone in[Pg 257] town would have eagerly offered, I'm sure, but Monte was the first one to come forward. Maybe you’d like to see him. You'll find him in there with the others."

General Serano walked to the door of the officers' room and looked in. He started back with an expression of anger.

General Serano walked to the door of the officers' room and peered inside. He immediately recoiled with a look of anger.

"This is an outrage on her majesty's soldiers for which you shall pay dearly, sir."

"This is an outrage against Her Majesty's soldiers, and you will pay dearly for it, sir."

"Let's not talk about pay between gentlemen, General Serano. I think you will admit that if it came to a settlement I have rather the best of it just now, and if I were so inclined, I could remove one of Cuba's most implacable enemies with one stroke of a machete. But I am not here for that purpose. There are others who will undoubtedly attend to that later. Now, all that I require of you is that you sit down at that table and write me a pass that will take me and my friends through your lines."

"Let’s skip the topic of payment between gentlemen, General Serano. I think you’d agree that if it came down to it, I currently have the upper hand, and if I wanted to, I could eliminate one of Cuba’s most relentless foes in a single swing of a machete. But that’s not why I’m here. Others will certainly handle that later. Right now, all I need from you is to sit at that table and write me a pass that will allow me and my friends to cross your lines."

"Never, sir. I will call the outside guard," and the general made a leap for the door.

"Not a chance, sir. I'll call the outside guard," and the general lunged for the door.

"The night is warm, general. Don't over-exert yourself. The door is locked and the key is in my pocket, and besides, if I should let you out you would only fall into the hands of more of my men. Your outside guard is also bound and gagged, and reclining against the wall of the jail[Pg 258] in the shadow. The sentinels you saw on patrol when you approached the jail are my men. You see, there is no escape."

"The night is warm, General. Don't push yourself too hard. The door is locked, and the key is in my pocket. Besides, if I let you out, you'd just end up in the hands of more of my men. Your outside guard is also tied up and gagged, leaning against the wall of the jail[Pg 258] in the shadows. The guards you saw on patrol when you got near the jail are my men. So, you see, there's no way out."

"But the uniforms—they are Spain's."

"But the uniforms—they belong to Spain."

"Yes, they belonged to unfortunate men who fell fighting for your cause. We Cubans have quite a stock of them on hand. I think you said you would write that pass."

"Yes, they belonged to unfortunate men who died fighting for your cause. We Cubans have quite a supply of them. I think you mentioned you would write that pass."

"No, sir, never," roared the general, with a rattling Spanish oath.

"No way, sir," the general shouted, cursing in Spanish.

"Very well, then I am sure you will pardon a few liberties."

"Alright, then I'm sure you'll forgive me for taking a few liberties."

O'Connor turned to the waiting men and said: "Remove the general's uniform."

O'Connor turned to the waiting men and said, "Take off the general's uniform."

"What is the meaning of this new outrage?" gasped Serano, backing into his corner again as O'Connor's men started to execute his order.

"What’s going on with this new outrage?" gasped Serano, retreating to his corner again as O'Connor's men began to carry out his order.

"Your uniform will serve as a passport if you refuse to write the pass," said O'Connor laughing.

"Your uniform will act like a passport if you choose not to write the pass," O'Connor said with a laugh.

"I'll write the pass," said the general quickly, and O'Connor motioned back his men. "My uniform shall never be so disgraced."

"I'll write the pass," the general said quickly, and O'Connor signaled for his men to step back. "My uniform will never be so dishonored."

"Suit yourself, general—uniform or pass—it's all the same to me. There is pen and ink."

"Do what you want, general—uniform or pass—it makes no difference to me. I've got pen and ink."

Serano sat down and with ill grace wrote something on a piece of paper which he handed to O'Connor. The latter read it and handed it back, with a shake of his head.[Pg 259]

Serano sat down and ungraciously wrote something on a piece of paper that he gave to O'Connor. O'Connor read it and returned it, shaking his head.[Pg 259]

"You will have to try again, general," he said. "Now write as I dictate."

"You'll need to try again, general," he said. "Now write down what I say."

"Never, sir."

"Never, sir."

"Your nevers come trippingly on the tongue, general. Boys, the general's uniform, please."

"Your 'nevers' roll off the tongue easily, sir. Guys, the general's uniform, please."

"No, no, I'll write it."

"No, I'll write it."

"Very well, but please to remember that I have no time for elocutionary exercises. One more never and off comes that uniform. I'll give you just three minutes to write this: 'Pass Captain O'Connor and his party through all Spanish lines and outposts.' That's right; now sign it."

"Alright, but please remember that I don't have time for speech exercises. One more time and that uniform comes off. I'll give you just three minutes to write this: 'Let Captain O'Connor and his team through all Spanish lines and outposts.' That's right; now sign it."

Reluctantly Serano affixed his signature.

Serano signed it reluctantly.

"Thank you," said O'Connor, with mock respect, as he took the paper. "Now there is just one more little favor that I feel sure you will be pleased to grant me, and that is to step upstairs with my men and see how you like the room the American boys have just vacated. You will find it quite comfortable. Our accommodations are a little overtaxed just now. Don't forget to leave your key at the office when you go out, and don't blow out the gas. Now boys, show the new guest to his room."

"Thank you," O'Connor said sarcastically as he took the paper. "Now there's just one more small favor I’m sure you’ll be happy to grant me, and that’s to go upstairs with my guys and check out the room the American boys just left. You'll find it quite cozy. Our accommodations are a bit stretched at the moment. Don’t forget to leave your key at the front desk when you head out, and don’t turn off the gas. Now, guys, show the new guest to his room."

O'Connor laughed until he was forced to hold his sides as his men, delighted with their task, roughly hustled the astonished and fuming officer along the corridor and up the steps. They[Pg 260] heard an iron door slam and the men returned and saluted with grinning faces.

O’Connor laughed until he had to hold his sides as his men, thrilled with their job, roughly pushed the shocked and angry officer down the hallway and up the stairs. They[Pg 260] heard an iron door slam, and the men returned to salute with big grins on their faces.

"Always find it a good thing to let your men have a little enjoyment mixed in with their work. Come on now, let's say good-bye to Monte and go. It only lacks an hour of midnight and when the watch changes it will not be long before our little game is discovered."

"Always think it's a good idea to let your guys have some fun along with their work. Come on, let’s say goodbye to Monte and leave. It’s just about an hour before midnight, and when the watch changes, it won’t be long before our little game gets found out."

As he spoke, O'Connor walked to the door of the officer's room and looked in, followed by the boys.

As he talked, O'Connor walked over to the officer's room door and peered inside, with the boys following him.

"Good-bye, Mr. Interpreter," said Harry, "what are the quotations on glory to-night?"

"Goodbye, Mr. Interpreter," said Harry, "what are tonight's quotes on glory?"

Villamonte wagged the ends of his waxed mustache in an effort to speak. O'Connor laughed and turning to the door, unlocked it, and slipping back the bolts, gave a low whistle, like the one the boys had heard from their cell window. In a moment the answer came.

Villamonte twirled the ends of his waxed mustache as he tried to talk. O'Connor chuckled, turned to the door, unlocked it, and slid back the bolts, giving a soft whistle similar to the one the boys had heard from their cell window. In a moment, a response came.

"Come on," said O'Connor, "the coast is clear."

"Come on," O'Connor said, "the coast is clear."

They passed silently out into the night. The eight men joined their comrades and the next moment, one by one, they darted across the streak of moonlight and disappeared in the deep shadow of the building at the corner of the square. O'Connor stopped and looked around to see if they had been observed, but the streets were deserted.[Pg 261]

They quietly stepped out into the night. The eight men met up with their teammates and then, one by one, they rushed across the strip of moonlight and vanished into the deep shadows of the building at the corner of the square. O'Connor paused and glanced around to check if anyone had seen them, but the streets were empty.[Pg 261]

"Aren't you afraid that General Serano will yell through the window and give an alarm?" asked Harry, looking up to the bars of the cell they had so recently occupied.

"Aren't you worried that General Serano will shout through the window and raise the alarm?" Harry asked, glancing up at the bars of the cell they had just left.

"My men never leave a prisoner so that he can yell," said O'Connor, chuckling. "We have about an hour's start, and if we make the best of that we should be well out of the woods before the escape is discovered."

"My guys never leave a prisoner who can shout," O'Connor said with a laugh. "We've got about an hour's head start, and if we use that wisely, we should be long gone before anyone realizes we're escaping."

O'Connor walked rapidly and they soon reached the outskirts of the little straggling town without meeting anyone to question them. Now and then Harry saw dark forms ahead gliding along in the shadows of the low buildings or darting swiftly across patches of moonlight, and he knew O'Connor's men were within call. O'Connor, himself, walked openly, with a boy on each side of him. In half an hour they had left the last of the huts of the reconcentrados behind them and struck boldly out into the open country, the twelve men, at a command from O'Connor, falling into marching order behind him.

O'Connor walked quickly, and they soon reached the edge of the small, scattered town without encountering anyone to ask for directions. Occasionally, Harry spotted dark figures ahead slipping through the shadows of the low buildings or darting quickly across patches of moonlight, and he realized O'Connor's men were nearby. O'Connor himself walked openly, flanked by a boy on each side. Within half an hour, they had left the last of the huts occupied by the reconcentrados behind them and ventured confidently into the open countryside, with twelve men forming a marching line behind O'Connor at his command.

In the dim distance lay their haven of safety: the dark, wooded foothills of the mountain that towered in black, ragged outlines before them, and the low-lying jungle at its base, within whose shelter O'Connor knew nearly a thousand determined men lay, only waiting word from him that[Pg 262] his mission had failed, to move like a whirlwind on the unsuspecting outposts entrenched between them and the town.

In the dim distance lay their safe haven: the dark, wooded foothills of the mountain that loomed in jagged outlines before them, and the low jungle at its base, where O'Connor knew nearly a thousand resolute men were waiting for his signal that[Pg 262] his mission had failed, ready to move like a whirlwind against the unsuspecting outposts positioned between them and the town.

"We must be getting close to their lines," said O'Connor, looking at his watch. Then he turned quickly and put his hand to his ear in a listening attitude. At first the boys could not distinguish the sound that his quick ear had caught, and then indistinctly a faint, hollow clatter came over the plain from behind them. They strained their eyes but could see nothing that might cause it.

"We must be getting close to their lines," O'Connor said, glancing at his watch. Then he quickly turned and put his hand to his ear, listening intently. At first, the boys couldn't make out the sound that O'Connor's sharp hearing had detected, but soon they heard a faint, hollow clatter coming from behind them across the plain. They squinted but couldn't see anything that could be causing it.

"It's a horse—galloping hard," said O'Connor, and his mouth set into that straight line that the boys knew so well. "Lie down."

"It's a horse—running fast," O'Connor said, his mouth tightening into the straight line the boys recognized so well. "Get down."

O'Connor set the example and dropped on his stomach, with his ear to the ground. After a moment he raised his head slightly, and said:

O'Connor led by example and lay down on his stomach, putting his ear to the ground. After a moment, he lifted his head a little and said:

"I think there is only one, but it will be safer to get under cover. Crawl to those bushes and lie low."

"I think there's just one, but it’s better to take cover. Crawl to those bushes and stay low."

They all wriggled along the ground until they were partially concealed from view by one of the clumps of low trees and shrubs that dotted the plain.

They all wriggled along the ground until they were partly hidden from view by one of the clusters of low trees and bushes scattered across the plain.

"Do you think they have discovered our escape?" asked Bert.

"Do you think they found out we're trying to escape?" Bert asked.

"Can't tell yet," answered O'Connor, who was standing up behind a tree, trying to catch a glimpse[Pg 263] of the rider whose approach was heralded by the vigorous pounding of his horse's hoofs. "I am satisfied that there is but one horse and it hardly seems likely that one man would set out in pursuit of a dozen, nor can I think it is a courier riding so hard at this time of night."

"Can't say for sure yet," replied O'Connor, who was standing behind a tree, trying to catch a glimpse[Pg 263] of the rider whose arrival was announced by the loud pounding of his horse's hooves. "I'm pretty sure there's only one horse, and it doesn't seem likely that one man would chase after a dozen. Plus, I doubt it's a courier riding this hard at this time of night."

The clatter of hoofs now became distinct, and away in the distance they could see a speck that grew larger each minute, until it took the form of a horse and rider. The course he was taking would bring him within an eighth of a mile of the party. As he came nearer O'Connor strained his eyes to make out the rider. The moon was getting low, but there was still light enough on the plain to make it possible to distinguish faces at some distance.

The sound of hoofbeats became clear, and far off in the distance, they could see a small dot that grew bigger by the minute, until it turned into a horse and rider. The path he was following would take him within an eighth of a mile of the group. As he got closer, O'Connor squinted to see who the rider was. The moon was low, but there was still enough light on the plain to make out faces from a distance.

On came the horse, and the watchers could see that his rider was urging him with voice and spur. Nearer and nearer they came until the foam flecks shone white in the moonlight.

On came the horse, and the watchers could see that his rider was urging him with voice and spur. Closer and closer they approached until the foam flecks glistened white in the moonlight.

"By thunder," said O'Connor, suddenly; "it's the old villain, Monte. How did he get out?"

"By thunder," O'Connor said suddenly, "it's the old villain, Monte. How did he escape?"

"Who is it?" asked Harry, eagerly.

"Who is it?" Harry asked eagerly.

"Villamonte, the interpreter."

"Villamonte, the translator."

"Then the escape has been discovered."

"Then the escape has been found out."

"Undoubtedly."

"Definitely."

"But what is he doing out here alone?"

"But what is he doing out here by himself?"

There was a moment's silence while O'Connor[Pg 264] watched the panting horse come tearing on. Now he was almost abreast of the clump of trees, and even the boys, with their untrained eyes, could make out their persistent enemy, Villamonte.

There was a brief silence as O'Connor[Pg 264] watched the exhausted horse charging forward. Now he was nearly level with the group of trees, and even the boys, with their inexperienced eyes, could see their relentless foe, Villamonte.

"He's riding for the outpost to revoke this pass," said O'Connor, slowly tapping the pocket that contained the paper. "They think that is the best means of trapping us."

"He's heading to the outpost to cancel this pass," O'Connor said, slowly tapping the pocket that held the paper. "They believe that’s the best way to catch us."

"It's all up with us then, if he gets there first," said Bert, "and we have no horses to stop him."

"It's all over for us if he gets there first," said Bert, "and we have no horses to stop him."

"No, but we have something just as good," said O'Connor, turning quickly to the man behind him; "let me have your Mauser, Pedro."

" No, but we have something just as good," O'Connor said, quickly turning to the man behind him. "Can I get your Mauser, Pedro?"

He took the rifle and stepped out into the open. Dropping on his knee, he raised the weapon to his shoulder and seemingly without aiming at the flying mark, fired. The boys shrank back involuntarily. Bloodshed, no matter how necessary, was revolting. Still, they could not help watching to see the result of O'Connor's shot. The horse pitched forward and rolled over on his side, pinning his rider beneath him.

He grabbed the rifle and stepped outside. Dropping to one knee, he raised the gun to his shoulder and, seemingly without aiming at the moving target, fired. The boys instinctively recoiled. Bloodshed, no matter how justified, was disturbing. Still, they couldn't help but watch to see what happened with O'Connor's shot. The horse stumbled forward and collapsed on its side, trapping its rider underneath.

"Shoot the horse if he is not already dead, and bring in the man," said O'Connor, coolly handing the rifle back. Two men started on a dog trot for the fallen horse and rider.

"Shoot the horse if it’s not dead already, and bring in the guy," O'Connor said, coolly handing the rifle back. Two men began to jog over to the fallen horse and rider.

"Is—is he dead?" asked Harry, hesitatingly.

"Is he dead?" Harry asked, hesitantly.

"The horse or the man?"[Pg 265]

"The horse or the guy?"[Pg 265]

"The man."

"The guy."

"No, there is nothing the matter with Monte more than a broken arm perhaps. I shot at the horse. I am sorry—I would almost rather have shot the man. But it had to be done."

"No, there's nothing wrong with Monte except maybe a broken arm. I shot at the horse. I’m sorry—I would almost have preferred to shoot the man. But it needed to be done."


CHAPTER XXIII

Back to the Mariella

Perspiration dripped from the drooping ends of Villamonte's waxed mustache as the men brought the discomforted interpreter before O'Connor. He had suffered nothing worse than a few bruises, but he was covered with dust and dirt and his expression was a strange mixture of fear and amazement. He could not seem to comprehend what had happened.

Perspiration dripped from the tips of Villamonte's waxed mustache as the men brought the uncomfortable interpreter in front of O'Connor. He hadn’t suffered much more than a few bruises, but he was covered in dust and dirt, and his expression was a strange blend of fear and amazement. He seemed unable to understand what had happened.

"We couldn't lose you, could we, Monte?" said O'Connor laughing. "I am sorry to have had to deprive you of your horse, but you were riding faster than the speed limit. Now I think the safest thing to do with you is to take you right along with us. You seem to like our company. Pedro, bind the gentleman's hands behind him and slip a gag into his mouth. We cannot take any more chances with you, Mr. Interpreter."

"We can't lose you, can we, Monte?" O'Connor said with a laugh. "I'm sorry I had to take your horse, but you were going over the speed limit. I think the safest thing to do now is to take you with us. You seem to enjoy our company. Pedro, tie the man's hands behind him and put a gag in his mouth. We can't take any more chances with you, Mr. Interpreter."

Villamonte, who knew that it would be useless to protest, contented himself with scowling at O'Connor and the boys. Then they took up the march again and met with no further obstacle until they were challenged by the outposts at the trenches. General Serano's pass took them[Pg 267] into the presence of the officer in command, who looked the party over with some surprise.

Villamonte, knowing it would be pointless to protest, settled for scowling at O'Connor and the guys. Then they started marching again and faced no more obstacles until they were challenged by the sentries at the trenches. General Serano's pass brought them[Pg 267] before the officer in charge, who surveyed the group with some surprise.

"You are escorting a prisoner, Captain O'Connor, I see," he said. "General Serano does not mention him in his pass."

"You’re escorting a prisoner, Captain O'Connor, I see," he said. "General Serano doesn’t mention him in his pass."

"I did not know that General Serano had to explain his affairs to his subordinates, sir."

"I didn't know that General Serano had to explain his situation to his team, sir."

"It is a little unusual."

"It's a bit unusual."

"I should advise you to ask no questions in this matter. It is a mission in which the general is deeply interested. These two young men have been for some days his guests, awaiting an opportunity to get to the coast. This prisoner is a man of so desperate a character that it is not deemed safe to even grant him ordinary privileges. I dare not remove the gag from his mouth even while safe within the lines, lest some secret signal he might utter bring a horde of insurgents about our ears. There is a price on his head. General Serano does not mention him in the pass, captain, because of this. In the strictest confidence I will mention a name to you that will explain the need for extraordinary caution."

"I advise you not to ask any questions about this matter. It’s a mission that the general cares about deeply. These two young men have been staying with him for several days, waiting for a chance to get to the coast. This prisoner is so dangerous that it's not considered safe to even give him normal privileges. I can't take the gag off his mouth, even when we're safe within our lines, for fear that he might give some secret signal that could attract a group of insurgents. There’s a bounty on his head. General Serano doesn’t mention him in the pass, captain, because of this. I will confidentially mention a name to you that will clarify why we need to be extraordinarily cautious."

O'Connor lowered his voice almost to a whisper as he leaned confidentially toward the officer and said:

O'Connor lowered his voice to almost a whisper as he leaned in closely to the officer and said:

"Captain Dynamite is in this party."

"Captain Dynamite is at this party."

"Ah! He is the terrible Captain Dynamite?"[Pg 268] gasped the commander, taking a few steps backward and pointing at Villamonte. O'Connor put his finger to his lips and said:

"Ah! So he's the infamous Captain Dynamite?"[Pg 268] gasped the commander, stepping back a bit and pointing at Villamonte. O'Connor raised a finger to his lips and said:

"'Sh! Remember I have not said so."

"'Sh! Just remember I didn't say that."

"I understand, Captain O'Connor. I am honored by your confidence. Pass on with your prisoner with what speed you may."

"I get it, Captain O'Connor. I'm grateful for your trust. Move on with your prisoner as quickly as you can."

The party made their way rapidly through the lines and within an hour, with O'Connor as guide, they had reached the shelter of the thick brush that separated them from the lagoon where the Mariella lay.

The group quickly moved through the lines, and within an hour, with O'Connor leading the way, they had arrived at the cover of the dense brush that kept them hidden from the lagoon where the Mariella was anchored.

"Now, boys," said O'Connor, as he slackened his pace, "you are as safe as if you were under your own roof trees. There are a thousand men at our command lying within these woods and stretched from the coast to the mountain yonder. All of Spain's army could not fight its way through that line."

"Okay, guys," O'Connor said, slowing down, "you're as safe as if you were at home. We have a thousand men ready to fight in these woods, stretching from the coast to the mountains over there. Not even the entire Spanish army could break through that line."

"Why have we not been challenged by the sentries?" asked Harry. "The Spaniards might creep among them as we have done."

"Why haven't the guards challenged us?" Harry asked. "The Spaniards could sneak past them just like we did."

"O, no, we are expected and our approach has been watched and covered by ready guns for some time. There are men now within ten feet of us. See?"

"O, no, we’re expected and our movements have been monitored and covered by ready weapons for a while. There are people now within ten feet of us. See?"

O'Connor uttered that peculiar bird cry, which was answered at once from the bushes near at[Pg 269] hand, and the next moment, as silently as an Indian, a man stepped out in front of them and saluted O'Connor.

O'Connor made that strange bird call, which was immediately echoed from the bushes nearby[Pg 269], and the next moment, as quietly as an Indian, a man emerged in front of them and greeted O'Connor.

"Where is the general?" asked the captain.

"Where's the general?" asked the captain.

"At his headquarters in the clearing. He wished to be notified of the safe arrival of your party."

"At his headquarters in the clearing, he wanted to be informed when your group arrived safely."

"We will go to him at once. Take this prisoner and keep him securely bound, but you can remove the gag now. My dear Monte, you will kindly accompany this gentleman. And now, my men," he continued to his twelve companions, who still grouped themselves about him, "you have done your part well. I thank each of you for your fidelity. You can join your separate companies and present my thanks to your commanders."

"We'll head to him right away. Take this prisoner and make sure he's securely tied up, but you can take the gag off now. My dear Monte, please go with this gentleman. And now, my men," he continued to his twelve companions, who were still gathered around him, "you've all done a great job. I appreciate each of you for your loyalty. You can go back to your groups and pass on my thanks to your leaders."

The men, as they passed O'Connor, shook his hand warmly. There was something about the man that made everyone with whom he came in contact glad to serve him.

The men, as they walked by O'Connor, shook his hand warmly. There was something about him that made everyone he met happy to assist him.

"Now, come on, boys; we will go to the general and thank him for his aid."

"Alright, guys; let's go thank the general for his help."

"What general is it?" asked Bert.

"What general is it?" Bert asked.

"General Gomez, bless him," answered O'Connor, doffing his sombrero to an imaginary presence.

"General Gomez, bless him," O'Connor said, taking off his hat to an imaginary presence.

"Then we shall see General Gomez," said Harry, eagerly.

"Then we'll see General Gomez," Harry said eagerly.

"That ye will, and a fine bit of a fighter ye'll see, too."[Pg 270]

"That you will, and you'll see what a great fighter he is, too."[Pg 270]

With O'Connor in the lead they pushed their way through the dense brush until they came out into an open space that had been cleared by axe and machete, but that it was no new rendezvous was evident from the directness with which O'Connor approached it through the pathless underbrush. It was about forty feet square and in the middle there had been erected a rough shelter, or hut, without walls, the thatched roof being supported by four poles. Under this, in a reclining camp chair, sat the grizzled old warrior, with several of his staff officers. He rose as they entered the clearing and advanced toward O'Connor with his hand extended in greeting.

With O'Connor in the lead, they made their way through the thick brush until they emerged into a clearing that had been cut down with axes and machetes. It was clear this wasn’t a new meeting spot, as O'Connor navigated straight to it through the unmarked underbrush. The clearing was about forty feet square, and in the center stood a rough shelter, or hut, without walls, its thatched roof propped up by four poles. Underneath it, in a reclining camp chair, sat the weathered old warrior along with several of his staff officers. He stood as they stepped into the clearing and walked toward O'Connor, hand outstretched in greeting.

For some time they talked earnestly together, O'Connor making a report of his expedition into the town and the rescue of the prisoners. Now and then the old general would turn his weather-beaten face toward the boys, and in the flickering light of the camp fire they could see the expression of cold severity melt away into a smile as soft and gentle as a woman's. Presently, the conference ended, he stepped over to Harry and Bert, shook each by the hand, and then retired to the hut again, and at once began to issue orders to his staff. One by one they saluted and left him.

For a while, they talked seriously, with O'Connor sharing details about his trip into town and the rescue of the prisoners. Occasionally, the old general would turn his weathered face toward the boys, and in the flickering light of the campfire, they could see his harsh expression soften into a smile as gentle as a woman's. Soon, the meeting wrapped up; he walked over to Harry and Bert, shook their hands, then returned to the hut and immediately started giving orders to his staff. One by one, they saluted him and left.

"Are they going to attack the town?" asked Harry.[Pg 271]

"Are they going to attack the town?" Harry asked.[Pg 271]

"No, my boy, not now. Had we not appeared the attack would have been made within an hour. As it is, the general will return to Cubitas to continue his campaign as originally planned, and Captain Morgan, who moved up here to co-operate with the general, will return and cover the removal of our cargo. All that remains now is to take the old Mariella safely out of these waters and then we can say, 'All's well that ends well!' In the meantime, as I am a bit anxious myself to get away, we will press on and make the lagoon by dawn. Then you boys will have a chance to put in a little sleep, for, as our friend Washington would say, I'm not such a mucher at guessing, but I'll warrant you are running a little short of rest since your arrival on these lively shores."

"No, my boy, not right now. If we hadn’t shown up, the attack would have happened within an hour. As it stands, the general will head back to Cubitas to continue his campaign as originally planned, and Captain Morgan, who came up here to assist the general, will also return to oversee the removal of our cargo. All that's left to do is get the old Mariella safely out of these waters, and then we can say, 'All's well that ends well!' In the meantime, since I’m a bit eager to leave myself, we’ll push on and reach the lagoon by dawn. Then you boys can grab a little sleep, because, as our friend Washington would say, I'm not great at guessing, but I bet you're running low on rest since you got to these lively shores."

The boys were indeed completely fagged out. The reaction following the nervous strain and the excitement of the past few days was beginning to set in, and Harry felt that if he could once more climb into his bunk on the Mariella he could sleep for twenty-four hours. Still, they pulled themselves together and struck out again into the bush close in the wake of O'Connor, who seemed to be made of iron.

The boys were definitely worn out. The aftermath of the stress and excitement from the last few days was starting to hit them, and Harry thought that if he could get back into his bunk on the Mariella, he could sleep for a full day. Still, they gathered their strength and set off again into the bush, following closely behind O'Connor, who seemed unstoppable.

As they reached the shores of the lagoon the sky was just brightening with the gray dawn. The outlines of the Mariella were dimly dis[Pg 272]cernable. Bert and Harry, now completely exhausted, threw themselves at full length on the beach. O'Connor put his fingers to his lips and again that strange bird cry floated out on the still air over the dark lagoon. There was no answer, but in a moment the sound of creaking ropes could be heard, and then there was the splash of a boat in the water, followed presently by the regular sound of oars. O'Connor lighted a match and held it for a second above his head as a signal to the rowers.

As they reached the shores of the lagoon, the sky was just starting to brighten with the gray dawn. The outlines of the Mariella were faintly visible. Bert and Harry, now completely worn out, collapsed flat on the beach. O'Connor raised his fingers to his lips and, once again, that strange bird call echoed in the still air over the dark lagoon. There was no response, but soon the sound of creaking ropes could be heard, followed by the splash of a boat in the water and then the steady rhythm of oars. O'Connor lit a match and held it above his head for a moment as a signal to the rowers.

A boat's keel grated on the sand and Suarez leaped out and seized O'Connor's hand in both of his.

A boat's keel scraped on the sand, and Suarez jumped out and grabbed O'Connor's hand with both of his.

"Glad to see you back safe, sir," he said, earnestly. "Miss Juanita and her mother are safe on board and I see you have the two young gentlemen with you, so we are all accounted for again."

"Glad to see you back safe, sir," he said sincerely. "Miss Juanita and her mom are safely on board, and I see you have the two young gentlemen with you, so we're all here again."

"Good, Suarez, and how about the cargo?"

"Great, Suarez, how’s the cargo?"

"Nearly all on shore. We shall be ready for sea again by midnight if Morgan returns to take charge of the removal on shore."

"Almost everyone is on shore. We'll be ready to set sail again by midnight if Morgan comes back to oversee the unloading on shore."

"Morgan and his men will be here within a few hours. Keep the cargo moving; I shall not feel at rest until I get well out to sea again."

"Morgan and his crew will be here in a few hours. Keep the cargo moving; I won't feel at ease until I'm far out at sea again."

Suarez turned toward the boat and the boys heard him mutter:[Pg 273]

Suarez turned to the boat, and the boys heard him mumble:[Pg 273]

"Petticoats always do knock the pluck out of a man."

"Petticoats always take the courage out of a man."

As they rowed alongside of the Mariella, day had dawned and the boys could distinguish Miss Juanita, Mason, and Washington leaning over the rail. Little Mason swung his cap and shouted in his joy.

As they rowed next to the Mariella, daylight broke, and the boys could see Miss Juanita, Mason, and Washington leaning over the railing. Little Mason waved his cap and shouted with joy.

At this point Washington seized him and dragged him back, at the same time placing his finger on his own lips to indicate that he should be quiet.

At this moment, Washington grabbed him and pulled him back, while also placing his finger on his lips to signal that he should be quiet.

"O, bother," grunted Mason, "who's afraid now the cap's back?"

"O, come on," grunted Mason, "who's scared now that the cap's back?"

Miss Juanita greeted them warmly as they came over the side. She took a hand of each boy and kissed it with a pretty little courtesy. Washington was so jubilant that he could not refrain from a few steps of a double shuffle on the deck.

Miss Juanita greeted them warmly as they came over the side. She took a hand of each boy and kissed it with a charming little bow. Washington was so excited that he couldn’t help but do a few steps of a double shuffle on the deck.

"Ah guessed Massa Cap'n Dynamite'd bring 'em all back all right, all right, an' ah ain't such a mucher at guessin' either," he said, with a wide grin.

"Yeah, I figured Captain Dynamite would bring them all back just fine, and I’m not even that great at guessing," he said with a big grin.

The boys, quite abashed by Miss Juanita's demonstrative thanks, stammered a few words in reply and turned to greet their eager companion.

The boys, feeling a bit embarrassed by Miss Juanita's enthusiastic thanks, stumbled over a few words in response and turned to welcome their eager friend.

"Say, fels, tell me all about it," said the Midget, dragging them off to the forward part of the deck.

"Hey, guys, fill me in," said the Midget, pulling them toward the front of the deck.

"First got to go to the galley with George Wash[Pg 274] Jenks and get some coffee and bite to eat. Ah bet you suah hungry, Misser Harry an' Misser Bert."

"First, we need to head to the kitchen with George Wash[Pg 274] Jenks to grab some coffee and a snack. I bet you're really hungry, Mister Harry and Mister Bert."

"We suah are, Washington. What have you got to eat in there?"

"We sure are, Washington. What do you have to eat in there?"

"Ah guess ah got some suah 'nough fresh doughnuts."

"Ah guess I got some sure enough fresh doughnuts."

"Oh, doughnuts for ours," cried the boys in chorus.

"Oh, doughnuts for us," shouted the boys in unison.

"Also for mine, Wash," said Mason solemnly. "I may not be a hero, but I've got just as good an appetite for fresh doughnuts as if I had rescued the maiden all forlorn. How about that, Wash?"

"Also for me, Wash," Mason said seriously. "I may not be a hero, but I have just as strong an appetite for fresh donuts as if I had rescued the maiden in distress. What do you think, Wash?"

"Suah, Misser Mason, you get doughnuts too."

"Suah, Misser Mason, you get donuts too."

"Very well, then, lead on."

"Alright, lead the way."

They followed the grinning and happy negro into the galley, while O'Connor and Miss Juanita joined her mother on the after deck. For half an hour they were busy tucking away Washington's doughnuts and coffee, while Mason waited patiently for the story of their adventures. Full stomachs and a sense of safety after a period of excitement and danger, however, brought about a lethargy that only rest and sleep could dispel, and with heavy eyes and weary legs they dragged themselves aft to their stateroom, and crawling into their bunks, fully dressed as they were, fell into a heavy sleep despite the disgusted protests of Mason, who was finally obliged to leave them to their dreamless slumber.

They followed the smiling and cheerful Black man into the kitchen, while O'Connor and Miss Juanita joined her mother on the back deck. For half an hour, they were busy enjoying Washington's doughnuts and coffee, while Mason patiently waited to hear about their adventures. However, full bellies and a feeling of safety after a period of excitement and danger brought on a tiredness that only rest and sleep could relieve. With heavy eyes and tired legs, they dragged themselves to their stateroom, and crawling into their bunks, still fully dressed, fell into a deep sleep despite Mason's frustrated protests, who eventually had to leave them to their dreamless slumber.


CHAPTER XXIV

Escape from the Lagoon

When the boys awoke it was dark again. They had slept through the day without a break. Mason, who had been hovering around restlessly all day, poked his head into the stateroom just as Harry was rubbing his eyes.

When the boys woke up, it was dark again. They had slept through the day without waking up. Mason, who had been moving around restlessly all day, peeked into the stateroom just as Harry was rubbing his eyes.

"O, say, you chaps, have you returned to life again? Do you know you have been pounding your ears for thirteen hours?"

"O, hey, guys, have you come back to life? Do you realize you’ve been hitting your heads for thirteen hours?"

"Where are we, Midget?" asked Harry, yawning.

"Where are we, Midget?" Harry asked, yawning.

"Still in the blooming lagoon."

"Still in the blooming lagoon."

"Oh, yes, I remember now." Harry sighed comfortably and turned over.

"Oh, yes, I remember now." Harry sighed happily and rolled over.

"Oh, say, you fellows; turn out. You have had sleep enough and I am as lonely as a cow in a strange pasture. You've had all the fun; now the least you can do is to get up and tell me about it."

"Oh, come on, you guys; get up. You've slept enough and I feel as lonely as a cow in a new pasture. You've had all the fun; now the least you can do is get up and share what happened."

"Fun, eh?" said Bert, who had been awakened by the conversation. "I wish you had had my part of the enjoyment. More quiet amusement will do for me."

"Fun, right?" said Bert, who had been woken up by the conversation. "I wish you had experienced the enjoyment I had. A little more peace and quiet is what I prefer."

"I am as hungry as a bear," said Harry, jumping out of bed. "If you won't let us sleep we must eat. Have you had supper yet?"[Pg 276]

"I’m as hungry as a bear," Harry said, jumping out of bed. "If you won’t let us sleep, we’ve got to eat. Have you had dinner yet?"[Pg 276]

"No; Cap said he was going to wait until you waked up."

"No; Cap said he would wait until you woke up."

"All right; if you'll get a bucket of water we'll be ready in short order. I've got to wash up. I'm as dirty as a digger Indian."

"Okay, if you grab a bucket of water, we'll be ready soon. I need to clean up. I'm as dirty as a digger Indian."

When Harry turned out he found his own suit, carefully mended and pressed, laid out over a chair. He gladly discarded his badly fitting Spanish uniform, and after a good wash, donned his own clothing again and made quite a presentable appearance as he walked out on deck, where he found O'Connor and Miss Juanita and her mother lounging lazily in steamer chairs.

When Harry turned around, he saw his own suit, neatly repaired and pressed, laid out on a chair. He happily tossed aside his poorly fitting Spanish uniform and, after a good wash, put on his own clothes again, looking quite presentable as he walked out on deck, where he found O'Connor and Miss Juanita with her mother lounging lazily in steamer chairs.

O'Connor jumped up and warmly welcomed the boys, and Miss Juanita insisted upon presenting them to her mother as "the brave American lads who had saved her from the vengeance of General Serano."

O'Connor jumped up and warmly welcomed the boys, and Miss Juanita insisted on introducing them to her mother as "the brave American guys who saved her from General Serano's vengeance."

"And now, youngsters," said O'Connor, as soon as they had blushingly acknowledged the warmly expressed gratitude of Miss Juanita's mother, "I know you are hungry and dinner waits. My Waldorf chef has done himself proud in honor of the occasion and George Wash Jenks, his assistant, has begged to be allowed to serve us. Let's get busy." He rose as he spoke and the boys saw that he had dressed himself with scrup[Pg 277]ulous care again, in a suit of light flannel, yachting cap, and immaculately white canvas shoes.

"And now, kids," O'Connor said, once they shyly acknowledged Miss Juanita's mother's heartfelt thanks, "I know you're hungry and dinner is ready. My Waldorf chef has outdone himself for this occasion, and George Wash Jenks, his assistant, has begged to serve us. Let's get to it." He stood up as he spoke, and the boys noticed he had dressed with meticulous care again, in a light flannel suit, a yachting cap, and spotless white canvas shoes.

It was a merry party that gathered around the cabin table, which, with its elaborate setting of crystal and silver, would have been a credit to any domestic establishment. Washington, in a white coat and apron, his face wide ajar with a happy grin, served them skillfully. After dessert had been cleared away and O'Connor had secured permission from the ladies to smoke his cigarette, Mason, who had been for many hours impatiently waiting to hear the story of his comrades' adventures, saw his opportunity, and rising and bowing to the company with his funny, grave expression, said:

It was a joyful gathering around the cabin table, which, with its fancy setup of crystal and silver, would have been impressive in any home. Washington, wearing a white coat and apron, had a big smile on his face as he served them skillfully. After dessert had been cleared and O'Connor got permission from the ladies to light up his cigarette, Mason, who had been waiting for hours to hear his friends' stories, saw his chance. He stood up and bowed to the group with his comical, serious look and said:

"Ladies and gentlemen, and our distinguished host: Little as I am accustomed to public speaking, I wish right here to say that I consider that I have been very shabbily treated. Fickle fortune robbed me of an opportunity to become a hero, and it looks as if I would now be denied even the poor gratification of enjoying the thrilling adventures of my brave comrades by word of mouth. I know I'm little and perhaps my suit would not have fitted Miss Juanita as well as my friend Hamilton's, but it was not because of my size that unkind fate singled him out for the hero part and left me not so much as an understudy. It was[Pg 278] pure hard luck, and now I demand, as the slighted party, that the story of the rescue from the Spanish prison be told in the minutest detail for the benefit of the assembled company by those who acted the principal parts. Captain Dynamite, I leave it to you if it is not due to a disappointed, would-be hero?"

"Ladies and gentlemen, and our distinguished host: Although I’m not used to public speaking, I want to express that I feel I’ve been treated unfairly. Unlucky fate took away my chance to be a hero, and it seems I’m now being denied even the small satisfaction of hearing the thrilling tales of my brave friends. I know I’m small, and maybe my outfit wouldn’t have suited Miss Juanita as well as my friend Hamilton's, but it wasn’t my size that made fate choose him for the hero role while I was left with nothing, not even a secondary role. It was[Pg 278] just bad luck, and now I insist, as the overlooked party, that the story of the rescue from the Spanish prison be told in full detail for the benefit of everyone here, by those who played the main roles. Captain Dynamite, I leave it to you to decide if it’s not fair to share this with a disappointed would-be hero?"

O'Connor laughed heartily at the boy, who kept a serious and sober face during his harangue.

O'Connor laughed loudly at the boy, who maintained a serious and composed expression during his rant.

"Your position is well taken, Master Mason," he said. "I propose that Master Hamilton begin the story at the point where he and his companion fell into the hands of the Spaniards."

"Your point is valid, Master Mason," he said. "I suggest that Master Hamilton start the story from where he and his companion were captured by the Spaniards."

After some urging Harry told in an easy narrative style the story of his and Bert's adventures, to which Mason listened breathlessly, while Washington, who had been permitted to stand behind O'Connor's chair, alternately grinned and stared in amazement. The story of the misfortune of Villamonte seemed to amuse him greatly, and as Harry described his expression as he lay bound and gagged in the prison, the negro slapped his leg in glee, and for a moment forgetting himself, cried out.

After some encouragement, Harry shared the story of his and Bert's adventures in a relaxed, easy-going way. Mason listened eagerly, while Washington, who had been allowed to stand behind O'Connor's chair, alternately grinned and stared in surprise. The tale of Villamonte's misfortune seemed to entertain him a lot, and when Harry described Villamonte's expression while he was tied up and gagged in prison, Washington couldn't contain himself; he slapped his leg in delight and momentarily forgot himself, shouting out.

"Ah guess Misser Tree Card Monte not bother Massa Cap'n Dynamite no more. He, he, ha, ha."

"Guess Mr. Tree Card Monte won't bother Captain Dynamite anymore. Ha, ha!"

They all joined with Washington in his mirth, and in the midst of their hilarity the cabin door[Pg 279] opened and Suarez, with a reproachful expression, looked in at O'Connor and waited for the noise to subside.

They all laughed along with Washington, and in the middle of their fun, the cabin door[Pg 279] opened, and Suarez, looking disappointed, peeked in at O'Connor and waited for the noise to die down.

"Captain Morgan's sentinels on the point report a light off shore, sir," he said, as soon as he could make himself heard.

"Captain Morgan's watchmen on the point are reporting a light offshore, sir," he said, as soon as he could get himself heard.

"What sort of a light, Suarez?" asked O'Connor, without showing any excitement.

"What kind of light, Suarez?" O'Connor asked, keeping his calm.

"Probably a vessel's light, sir."

"Probably a ship's light, sir."

"Very well. Call me if it seems to be making in shore."

"Okay. Call me if it looks like it's coming ashore."

Suarez cast another glance at O'Connor that seemed to say, "Petticoats are out of place on filibusters," but he wisely refrained from expressing any such opinions aloud.

Suarez glanced at O'Connor again as if to say, "Dresses don't belong on filibusters," but he wisely kept those thoughts to himself.

Harry continued his narrative and O'Connor appeared to listen with as great an interest as if he were not familiar with the details already. Harry noticed, however, that every now and then he cast a glance at the door as if he expected Suarez to return. He had reached that point in his story where they discover Villamonte riding madly after them on the plain and Washington's eyes were bulging with excitement, when the door again opened and Suarez stepped in and saluted.

Harry kept telling his story, and O'Connor seemed to listen with just as much interest as if he didn't already know the details. However, Harry noticed that every now and then, O'Connor glanced toward the door as if he was waiting for Suarez to come back. He had gotten to the part of his story where they see Villamonte chasing after them on the plain, and Washington was visibly excited, when the door opened again and Suarez walked in and greeted them.

"I think you had better come on deck, sir," he said, quietly.[Pg 280]

"I think you'd better come up on deck, sir," he said softly.[Pg 280]

"All right, Suarez," said O'Connor, jumping up quickly. "Go on with your story, my boy, I will join you again shortly. Keep up the interest; you've got your audience in the proper mood now." With a light laugh, intended to allay any anxiety Suarez's words might have caused his guests, O'Connor left the cabin.

"Okay, Suarez," O'Connor said, standing up quickly. "Continue with your story, my boy; I'll be back in a bit. Keep it interesting; you've got everyone in the right mood now." With a light laugh meant to ease any tension Suarez's words might have created among his guests, O'Connor left the cabin.

Harry realized that some danger threatened them, but catching a significant look in the eyes of the captain as he left the room, fell in with his purpose readily and continued his story as if nothing had happened.

Harry recognized that some danger was looming over them, but after catching a significant glance from the captain as he exited the room, he quickly aligned with his intent and continued his story as if nothing was wrong.

"What is it, Suarez?" asked O'Connor, as soon as they were alone on deck.

"What is it, Suarez?" O'Connor asked as soon as they were alone on deck.

"She's headed in shore and directly for the inlet, sir."

"She's heading inshore straight for the inlet, sir."

"Can you make her out yet?"

"Can you see her now?"

"I have not been ashore, sir, but Morgan's men say they can only see her lights."

"I haven’t been on land, sir, but Morgan's crew says they can only see her lights."

"Lower a boat and let me take your glasses. I do not want to alarm the ladies by returning to the cabin for mine."

"Lower a boat and let me grab your glasses. I don’t want to worry the ladies by going back to the cabin for mine."

"Women are a bit of a nuisance at such times, sir," said Suarez, who could no longer refrain from expressing his views, however mildly.

"Women can be a bit of a hassle at times like this, sir," said Suarez, who could no longer hold back his thoughts, even if gently.

"No, you are wrong there, Suarez," said O'Connor, who understood the mate's aversion to everyone and everything that was not working[Pg 281] directly for the good of the cause. "They are only an incentive to extra caution, which you must admit is an admirable thing for me." Suarez shook his head doubtfully as he went forward to get the boat in the water and O'Connor laughed at his officer's crochet.

"No, you're mistaken about that, Suarez," said O'Connor, who got the mate's dislike for anyone and anything that wasn't directly helping the cause. "They're just a reason to be extra careful, which you have to agree is a good thing for me." Suarez shook his head uncertainly as he went ahead to get the boat in the water, and O'Connor laughed at his officer's uncertainty.

A boat was quickly lowered and manned, and O'Connor was rowed to the point of land that separated the lagoon from the ocean. He made his way to a group of men who, in the shelter of some palm trees, were watching the red and green lights of an approaching vessel.

A boat was quickly launched and crewed, and O'Connor was rowed to the land that separated the lagoon from the ocean. He walked over to a group of men who, under the shade of some palm trees, were watching the red and green lights of an approaching ship.

"Can you make her out?" asked O'Connor, eagerly.

"Can you see her?" asked O'Connor excitedly.

"No, sir. We have no glasses. Perhaps you can tell what she is."

"No, sir. We don’t have any glasses. Maybe you can figure out what she is."

O'Connor took a long look at the lights, which were yet mere specks.

O'Connor stared at the lights, which were still just tiny dots.

"I can't make her out yet," he said, as he lowered his glasses, "but whoever she is she must know the coast hereabouts pretty well to head in so close."

"I can't figure her out yet," he said, as he took off his glasses, "but whoever she is, she must know this area really well to come in so close."

He sat down with his back to one of the trees and his face to the sea and rolled a cigarette. He smoked calmly for ten minutes and then put his glasses to his eyes again.

He sat down with his back against one of the trees and his face toward the sea and rolled a cigarette. He smoked quietly for ten minutes and then put his glasses back on.

"She's a gunboat," he said finally. "Let me know in fifteen minutes if she still holds her course."[Pg 282]

"She’s a gunboat," he said at last. "Let me know in fifteen minutes if she’s still on course."[Pg 282]

He turned back to his boat and was rowed rapidly back to the Mariella. Suarez met him at the gangway.

He turned back to his boat and was quickly rowed back to the Mariella. Suarez greeted him at the gangway.

"Did you make her out, sir?" he asked eagerly.

"Did you recognize her, sir?" he asked eagerly.

"Yes, she's a gunboat—I think our old friend the Belair, and if it be she there is no significance in her presence here. She has probably been cruising up and down the coast since we left her trying to solve the mystery of our sudden disappearance. But in any event you better prepare for the worst; but quietly, Suarez, quietly. We do not want to alarm the ladies unnecessarily."

"Yes, she’s a gunboat—I think it’s our old friend the Belair, and if it is her, then her presence here doesn’t mean much. She’s probably been cruising up and down the coast since we left, trying to figure out the mystery of our sudden disappearance. But anyway, you should prepare for the worst; but keep it low-key, Suarez, keep it low-key. We don’t want to alarm the ladies unnecessarily."

"Bother the ladies," grumbled Suarez to himself, as he went forward to carry out the captain's orders. O'Connor leaned on the rail facing the black point of land that hid them from view. Presently a boat put out from the shore and as she came under the Mariella's quarter, O'Connor whispered:

"Bother the ladies," Suarez mumbled to himself as he moved to follow the captain's orders. O'Connor rested on the rail, looking at the dark point of land that concealed them from sight. Soon, a boat launched from the shore, and as it approached the Mariella's side, O'Connor whispered:

"Well?"

"What's up?"

"Only the red light shows now, sir," answered a man in the small boat.

"Only the red light is showing now, sir," replied a man in the small boat.

"She has changed her course, then. Good. Keep a sharp lookout and let me know at once if she changes again."

"She has changed her course, then. Good. Stay alert and let me know right away if she changes again."

"It seems to be steady, sir. I think she has come to anchor."

"It looks stable, sir. I think she has dropped anchor."

"Whew," whistled O'Connor; "that's bad."[Pg 283]

"Whew," whistled O'Connor; "that's rough."[Pg 283]

The little boat put back to shore and O'Connor stood leaning over the rail in deep thought. Meanwhile dark shapes moved quickly, but silently, across the deck as the men took their quarters. The mate aroused O'Connor from his reverie.

The small boat returned to shore, and O'Connor leaned over the railing, lost in thought. Meanwhile, dark figures moved swiftly but quietly across the deck as the crew took their places. The mate snapped O'Connor out of his daydream.

"All is ready, sir," he said.

"All set, sir," he said.

"Very good, Suarez. I think I know what her game is now. She's beating the coast for just such hidden spots as this lagoon. Get word at once to the men on the point to watch carefully for the approach of a launch or small boat. There is to be no demonstration unless they find the inlet. In that case let them see that no one gets out again. And Suarez, the machete—no guns. There must be no noise to tell the Belair what has happened."

"Great job, Suarez. I think I understand her plan now. She's scouting the coast for hidden spots like this lagoon. Inform the guys at the point to keep a close watch for any launches or small boats. There should be no action unless they find the inlet. If that's the case, make sure no one gets out again. And Suarez, the machete—no guns. There must be no noise to alert the Belair about what’s going on."

O'Connor rejoined the party in the cabin with a smile on his lips that belied the weight of anxiety on his mind.

O'Connor returned to the group in the cabin with a smile on his face that masked the heavy anxiety in his mind.

"Now ladies," he said cheerily, "if Harry has finished his tale of adventure we will bid you good night, as I have to make ready for sea. You will occupy my cabin, as I have no doubt the boys will be quite willing to bunk with me in a spare stateroom forward."

"Now ladies," he said happily, "if Harry has wrapped up his adventure story, we will say good night, as I need to get ready for the sea. You will stay in my cabin since I'm sure the guys will be more than happy to share a spare stateroom up front with me."

The boys bade the ladies good night and retired to the deck with the captain.[Pg 284]

The boys said goodnight to the ladies and went back to the deck with the captain.[Pg 284]

"What's up, Cap?" asked Harry, as soon as the door closed behind them.

"What's up, Cap?" Harry asked as soon as the door shut behind them.

"Can't fool you, eh?" laughed O'Connor.

"Can't trick you, huh?" laughed O'Connor.

"I knew something had gone wrong, sir, as soon as you left the cabin."

"I knew something was off, sir, as soon as you left the cabin."

"Well, I suppose I might just as well tell you boys, for you will find out sooner or later, but I do not want a word of it to reach the ladies; you understand?"

"Well, I guess I might as well tell you guys, since you'll find out sooner or later, but I don’t want a word of it to get to the ladies; got it?"

"We'll be as silent as clams at high water," said Mason, "but I should like to have it thoroughly understood that I am next in line for any hero parts."

"We'll be as quiet as clams at high tide," Mason said, "but I want it to be clear that I’m next in line for any hero roles."

"There is a Spanish gunboat—the same one we had the little mix-up with coming down, I think—lying just off the inlet. I believe that her commander suspects that we have hidden away in some such place as this and he is beating the shore with small boats in the hope of locating us."

"There’s a Spanish gunboat—the same one we had the little incident with on the way down, I think—anchored just off the inlet. I believe her commander suspects that we’re hiding out in a place like this, and he’s sending small boats along the shore in hopes of finding us."

"But what chance would a small boat have if she did discover us?"

"But what chance would a small boat have if it did find us?"

"If the boat crew discovered us and got away the gunboat could shell us out or sink us in the lagoon."

"If the boat crew spotted us and escaped, the gunboat could bombard us or sink us in the lagoon."

"Another cheery outlook," groaned Bert. "I thought we were safe on the Mariella and it seems that it is only a choice between Spanish guns ashore and Spanish shells at sea."[Pg 285]

"Another cheerful perspective," Bert sighed. "I thought we were safe on the Mariella, but it looks like we're just choosing between Spanish guns on land and Spanish shells at sea."[Pg 285]

"Oh, it's not quite so bad as that, Master Wilson," said O'Connor laughing, but with an anxious look in the direction of the cabin. "If they do not discover our hiding-place we shall sneak out all right under cover of darkness, and if they do discover it, we shall have to fight for it; but in either event we shall get out." O'Connor's mouth tightened into that straight line that indicated his desperate moods. He stepped over to the rail and fixed his eyes on the black shore of the lagoon. It was his usual abrupt method of closing a conversation, and the boys who were now familiar with his peculiarities, did not attempt to question him further.

"Oh, it’s not as bad as that, Master Wilson," O'Connor said, laughing, but he had a worried look toward the cabin. "If they don’t find our hiding spot, we’ll slip out fine under the cover of darkness. If they do find it, we’ll have to fight for it; but in either case, we’ll get out." O'Connor's mouth tightened into that straight line that showed he was feeling desperate. He walked over to the rail and stared at the dark shore of the lagoon. This was his usual way of ending a conversation abruptly, and the boys, now used to his quirks, didn’t try to question him further.

The tide was running into the inlet and the Mariella had swung around on her anchor chains until she was pointed directly for the hidden opening to the sea. The boys left O'Connor to his thoughts and strolled forward. The sky was partially overcast and the moon, which had just risen, was almost obscured by heavy, slowly moving clouds. Now and then, however, it broke through a rift, flooding the lagoon with its silvery light and throwing the black sides of the Mariella into bold relief. Not a breath of air stirred leaf or twig.

The tide was coming into the inlet, and the Mariella had turned on her anchor chains until she was facing the hidden entrance to the sea. The boys left O'Connor to his thoughts and walked forward. The sky was partly cloudy, and the moon, which had just risen, was mostly hidden by thick, slowly drifting clouds. Every now and then, though, it would peek through a gap, flooding the lagoon with its silvery light and highlighting the dark sides of the Mariella. Not a single breath of air stirred any leaves or twigs.

"We are ready for action," whispered Harry, as they passed the silent forms of the men standing[Pg 286] quietly at their stations. "They won't catch Captain Dynamite napping, any way."

"We're all set," whispered Harry, as they walked past the silent figures of the men standing[Pg 286] quietly at their posts. "They won't catch Captain Dynamite off guard, that's for sure."

Near the fo'c'sle deck they found Washington at his post, a Mauser in his hand and machete and pistols in his belt.

Near the forecastle deck, they found Washington at his post, holding a Mauser in one hand and with a machete and pistols at his belt.

"Hullo, Wash," said Mason, "are we going to have another mix-up?"

"Helloo, Wash," said Mason, "are we going to have another mix-up?"

The negro grinned and bobbed his head rapidly at the same time placing his finger on his lips.

The man smiled and nodded quickly while putting his finger to his lips.

"What's the matter? Lost your tongue again?"

"What's wrong? Lost your words again?"

"'Sh. George Wash Jenks can't talk on fightin' duty."

"'Sh. George Wash Jenks can't talk about fighting duty."

"That's right, Wash; obey orders," said Harry, as they passed on.

"That's right, Wash; follow the orders," said Harry, as they moved on.

The dark forms of the waiting men, the dead silence that hung over the steamer, and the tense air of anxiety and doubt that pervaded all began to have a disquieting effect upon the boys who, at first, full of confidence in the courage and experience of O'Connor, had regarded their situation as only remotely dangerous. For a long time they stood looking off at the screen of trees and vines that separated them from the sea, where the gunboat lay in wait for its prey.

The shadowy figures of the waiting men, the complete silence that surrounded the steamer, and the heavy atmosphere of anxiety and doubt began to unsettle the boys who, at first, were confident in O'Connor's bravery and experience and thought their situation was only slightly risky. They stood there for a long time, gazing at the curtain of trees and vines that blocked their view of the sea, where the gunboat was lying in wait for its target.

A black cloud that had obscured the face of the moon slowly passed over it, and again the shores of the lagoon stood out in detail, almost as if the sun shone upon them. Harry placed a hand[Pg 287] quickly on Bert's shoulder and pointed ahead of them. There was a commotion in the leafy screen as if something was forcing its way through. The next moment the bow of a boat crept slowly out until its full length was visible within the lagoon. Another cloud began to draw a fleecy fringe across the moon, but before its darker center passed over the shining disc, the boys could see many black moving spots on the surface of the water, rapidly approaching the boat from behind.

A black cloud that had covered the moon gradually moved away from it, and once again, the shores of the lagoon became clearly visible, as if the sun was shining on them. Harry quickly placed a hand[Pg 287] on Bert's shoulder and pointed ahead. There was a rustling in the foliage, as if something was pushing its way through. In the next moment, the bow of a boat slowly emerged until its full length was visible in the lagoon. Another cloud began to cast a soft shadow across the moon, but before its darker part covered the bright disc, the boys could see many black moving spots on the water’s surface, rapidly approaching the boat from behind.

"We must tell the captain," said Harry, turning quickly, only to find O'Connor with folded arms standing silently behind them, watching the scene with contracted brow. He did not appear to notice the presence of the boys.

"We have to tell the captain," said Harry, turning quickly, only to see O'Connor with his arms crossed, standing silently behind them, watching the scene with a furrowed brow. He didn't seem to notice the boys were there.

"Now, quick," he hissed between his teeth, as if coaching someone in the distance, and at the same time the boys saw the black spots rise from the water, as many arms shot up and seized the gunwale of the boat. Then a veil of darkness shut out the dramatic scene as the cloud shut out the light of the moon.

"Now, hurry," he whispered through clenched teeth, as if directing someone far away, and at that moment, the boys noticed dark shapes emerging from the water, as multiple arms reached up and grabbed the side of the boat. Then a shroud of darkness covered the dramatic scene like a cloud blocking the moonlight.

There was a sound of splashing water, a low cry or two and then silence again. O'Connor turned away and joined the mate, who had watched the brief spectacle from the bridge.

There was the sound of splashing water, a low cry or two, and then silence again. O'Connor turned away and joined the mate, who had watched the brief scene from the bridge.

"It was well done, Suarez," said O'Connor.

"It was well done, Suarez," O'Connor said.

"Aye, aye, sir; it was a neat job. Trust Mor[Pg 288]gan's men for that." The splash of oars alongside interrupted them and the sentries' boat appeared again. O'Connor leaned over the bridge.

"Aye, aye, sir; it was a tidy job. You can count on Morgan's men for that." The splash of oars nearby interrupted them, and the sentries' boat showed up again. O'Connor leaned over the bridge.

"Boat and four men captured at the inlet, sir," called a voice from out of the darkness.

"Boat and four men captured at the inlet, sir," called a voice from the darkness.

"Good; anyone hurt?"

"Okay; is anyone hurt?"

"Not a soul, sir. We were two to one and they threw up their hands when we climbed over the stern of their boat. What shall we do with the prisoners?"

"Not a soul, sir. We were two to one and they raised their hands when we climbed over the back of their boat. What should we do with the prisoners?"

"Turn them over to Captain Morgan; and now, Suarez, when can we go to sea?"

"Give them to Captain Morgan; and now, Suarez, when can we set sail?"

"Whenever you please, sir. The cargo is all ashore."

"Whenever you want, sir. The cargo is all off the boat."

"Get up steam at once."

"Get going right now."

"Are you going to take her out to-night, sir, in the face of the Belair?"

"Are you going to take her out tonight, sir, in front of the Belair?"

"If I don't take her out to-night we shall have to run the gauntlet in a hail of solid shot. It will not be long before they will suspect that something has happened to that boat. By daybreak the Belair will move in. Our only chance is to get out under cover of darkness. She is well within range now, but we can get clear of the inlet with a bit of speed on before she discovers us, and if we've got to fight I prefer the open sea."

"If I don't take her out tonight, we're going to face a barrage of trouble. It won't be long before they start to suspect that something's gone wrong with that boat. By sunrise, the Belair will be moving in. Our only chance is to slip out under the cover of darkness. She's well within range right now, but we can escape the inlet with some speed before she realizes we're here, and if we have to fight, I'd rather do it on the open sea."

"Very well, sir. Shall I heave the anchors?" asked Suarez.[Pg 289]

"Sure thing, sir. Should I pull up the anchors?" asked Suarez.[Pg 289]

"You can't heave the anchors until you get up steam, man."

"You can't lift the anchors until you build up some steam, man."

"I told you we were ready for sea, sir," said Suarez, in a reproachful tone. "The Mariella is always at your command."

"I told you we were ready to set sail, sir," said Suarez, in a disapproving tone. "The Mariella is always at your service."

Fifteen minutes later O'Connor stood in the pilot house with his hand on the wheel. He looked back for a moment at the two sentinel palms and then he rang the bell for full speed ahead.

Fifteen minutes later, O'Connor stood in the pilot house with his hand on the wheel. He glanced back for a moment at the two sentinel palms and then rang the bell for full speed ahead.

The engines throbbed, the screws churned the still water of the lagoon into a white froth and the Mariella, with rapidly increasing speed, poked her nose into the green foliage that barred her passage to the sea. Branches and vines scraped along her sides for a moment and then, released from their impeding embrace, she forged ahead with a tremble and start into the open sea. The red portlight of the waiting gunboat gleamed in the darkness a few points off her port bow. O'Connor swung her head around until the light was off the Mariella's quarter. Then he turned the wheel over to the steersman who stood beside him.

The engines roared, the propellers churned the calm water of the lagoon into a white froth, and the Mariella, picking up speed, pushed her way into the green foliage that blocked her path to the sea. Branches and vines scratched against her sides for a moment, and then, freed from their grasp, she surged forward with a shudder into the open sea. The red portlight of the waiting gunboat shimmered in the darkness a short distance off her port bow. O'Connor turned her head until the light was off the Mariella's side. Then he passed the wheel to the steersman standing next to him.

"Keep her steady, now," he said, as he left the pilot house and returned to the bridge, where Suarez stood with his glasses trained on the red light.[Pg 290]

"Keep her steady now," he said as he left the pilot house and went back to the bridge, where Suarez was focusing on the red light with his binoculars.[Pg 290]

"No sign of movement, yet, sir," he said.

"No signs of movement yet, sir," he said.

"You have no lights burning?"

"Do you have any lights on?"

"Not a light aboard, sir, except in the binnacle."

"There's no light on board, sir, except in the binnacle."

"All depends upon the moon then. She'll hardly make us out against the shore. If the moon stays in for fifteen minutes we shall be out of range of her guns and we can outfoot her in a stern chase."

"Everything depends on the moon then. She'll barely see us against the shore. If the moon stays out for fifteen minutes, we'll be out of reach of her guns, and we can outrun her in a chase."


CHAPTER XXV

Home Again

Mrs. Hamilton sat on the broad veranda of her cottage looking wistfully out to sea. She was pale and languid from the weight of many anxious days and sleepless nights. Before her lay the treacherous ocean, now calm and peaceful, rippling laughingly in the summer sunshine. The white sails of tiny pleasure craft skimmed lightly over its placid surface, and in striking contrast to her unhappy mood, nature and the world seemed to show their cheeriest faces. The laughing voices of merry youngsters, the twitter of the sparrows in the trees, the soft notes of a girl's happy song wafted to her from a passing yacht, all grated harshly on her overwrought nerves. Day in and day out, in sunshine and storm, since Harry's disappearance, she had sat in a sheltered corner of the veranda and—waited.

Mrs. Hamilton sat on the wide porch of her cottage, gazing longingly out at the sea. She looked pale and tired from the stress of many anxious days and sleepless nights. In front of her stretched the treacherous ocean, now calm and peaceful, rippling joyfully in the summer sunshine. The white sails of small boats glided lightly across its smooth surface, and in sharp contrast to her unhappy mood, nature and the world seemed to be at their brightest. The cheerful laughter of young kids, the chirping of sparrows in the trees, and the soft notes of a girl’s happy song drifting to her from a passing yacht all grated on her frazzled nerves. Day after day, in sunshine and storm, ever since Harry’s disappearance, she had sat in a sheltered spot on the porch and—waited.

Mr. Hamilton stepped out of the cottage, and drawing a chair beside her, took her hand gently in his and caressed it silently.

Mr. Hamilton stepped out of the cottage, pulled a chair up beside her, took her hand gently in his, and stroked it quietly.

"There is no word yet?" she said, finally, without taking her eyes from the dancing water.

"There’s no news yet?" she said, at last, still keeping her gaze on the dancing water.

"None."[Pg 292]

"None."

"And you have been unable to learn anything of the steamer,—the Mariella?"

"And you haven't been able to find out anything about the steamer, the Mariella?"

"All that my agents can find out is that she is apparently a tramp, and that she cleared from Boston for southern ports with a cargo of general merchandise."

"All my agents can find out is that she seems to be a tramp, and that she left Boston for southern ports with a load of general merchandise."

"And she has not been reported since?"

"And she hasn't been reported missing since?"

"No."

"Nope."

"There can be little hope then?"

"There can’t be much hope then?"

"We must not despair yet."

"Let's not lose hope yet."

"There could have been no mistake in the name of the steamer that picked them up?"

"There couldn't have been any mistake in the name of the steamer that picked them up?"

"I hardly think so. I saw the captain of the steamer that reported them and he is positive that he could have made no mistake in reading the signal."

"I seriously doubt that. I spoke with the captain of the steamer that reported them, and he is sure he didn't make any mistake in reading the signal."

"Then she should have arrived at some port long ago."

"Then she should have reached some port a long time ago."

"Yes; but these tramp steamers are sometimes very slow and it is not unusual for them to be many days overdue and turn up all right. I think, Mary, it is best that you should go home. This anxiety is killing you and the surroundings here keep you constantly overwrought. I have every point covered from which a report of the steamer might be received, and then, who knows, if Harry should land in the South, he might go West at once."[Pg 293]

"Yeah, but these cargo ships can be really slow, and it often happens that they are several days late but still arrive fine. I think, Mary, it’s better for you to go home. This worry is wearing you down, and the situation here keeps you on edge. I’ve covered every way a report about the ship could come in, and who knows, if Harry lands in the South, he might head West right away."[Pg 293]

Mrs. Hamilton shook her head and pointed out over the sea.

Mrs. Hamilton shook her head and pointed out at the ocean.

"No, Edward, that is the way he went and I shall wait for him here."

"No, Edward, that's the way he went, and I’ll wait for him here."

A boy on a bicycle rode up to the house.

A boy on a bike rode up to the house.

"Telegram for Mr. Hamilton," he called, as he jumped from his wheel.

"Telegram for Mr. Hamilton," he shouted, as he hopped off his bike.

"Quick, Edward, it may be news from Harry," said Mrs. Hamilton, rising eagerly as her husband took the yellow envelope from the boy and broke the seal hastily.

"Quick, Edward, it might be news from Harry," said Mrs. Hamilton, getting up eagerly as her husband grabbed the yellow envelope from the boy and quickly broke the seal.

"The Mariella is bound in," he almost shouted, as he passed the paper to his wife. She took it in her trembling hands and read:

"The Mariella is docked," he nearly yelled as he handed the paper to his wife. She took it in her shaky hands and read:

Edward Hamilton,
Cliff Cottage,
Cottage City, Mass.

Edward Hamilton,
Cliff Cottage,
Cottage City, MA.

Tramp steamer Mariella just reported passing in. Bound for Boston.

Tramp steamer Mariella has just reported that it's coming in. Heading to Boston.

William Coffin, Nantucket.

William Coffin, Nantucket.


Mrs. Hamilton sank back into her chair, an expression of eager hope lighting up her wan face.

Mrs. Hamilton sank back into her chair, a look of eager hope brightening her pale face.

"Do you suppose that Harry is on board, Edward? Can it be that he is coming home at last?"

"Do you think Harry is on board, Edward? Is it possible that he’s finally coming home?"

"I hope so, Mary, but I cannot understand it. Where has the steamer been and why has she not been reported out?"[Pg 294]

"I hope so, Mary, but I just don't get it. Where has the steamer been and why hasn't it been reported out?"[Pg 294]

"Can this be a mistake?" asked the woman plaintively, holding out the telegram.

"Could this be a mistake?" the woman asked sadly, holding out the telegram.

"No, I think not."

"No way, I don't think so."

"Then let us go to Boston at once and meet him."

"Then let's head to Boston right away and meet him."

"That would be unwise. By the time we could reach there, Harry—if he is aboard—might be on his way here. It is best to wait, Mary, and hope for the best. In the meantime, I will wire to my agent in Boston to meet the steamer."

"That would be a bad idea. By the time we get there, Harry—if he’s on the ship—might be on his way here. It’s better to wait, Mary, and hope for the best. In the meantime, I’ll send a message to my agent in Boston to meet the steamer."

With a sigh of resignation, Mrs. Hamilton resumed her weary vigil. Suddenly she started up with a new idea.

With a sigh of acceptance, Mrs. Hamilton returned to her tired watch. Suddenly, she jumped up with a fresh idea.

"Edward," she said, "if she is coming in she will pass out there."

"Edward," she said, "if she's coming in, she'll walk past out there."

"Yes, but too far out for you to see her, Mary."

"Yes, but she's too far away for you to see her, Mary."

"Never mind; bring me the glasses. It will help to pass the weary hours of waiting."

"Never mind; bring me the glasses. It will help pass the long hours of waiting."

Mr. Hamilton brought her a pair of marine glasses, and rearranging the cushions behind her head with a tender hand, he left her eagerly scanning the horizon for some sign of a passing steamer.

Mr. Hamilton brought her a pair of binoculars, and adjusting the cushions behind her head gently, he left her eagerly looking out at the horizon for any sign of a passing steamer.

When he returned from the telegraph office she called to him eagerly:

When he got back from the telegraph office, she called out to him excitedly:

"Look, Edward, just off the point. There is a steamer."

"Look, Edward, just off the point. There's a steamer."

"Yes, probably a collier."[Pg 295]

"Yes, probably a coal miner."[Pg 295]

"But she seems to be headed this way."

"But she looks like she's coming this way."

"They go up the sound to New York."

"They head up the sound to New York."

"But might she not be the—the——"

"But could she possibly be the—the——"

"No, Mary; she would have to head out around Cape Cod to make Boston."

"No, Mary; she would need to go around Cape Cod to get to Boston."

"I know, I know, but perhaps she may land him here."

"I get it, I get it, but maybe she can catch him here."

"That would take her out of her course and mean the loss of time. Her captain would not do that."

"That would throw her off her course and result in wasting time. Her captain wouldn't allow that."

For fifteen minutes more, Mrs. Hamilton watched the steamer in silence and then she turned again to her husband, and said:

For another fifteen minutes, Mrs. Hamilton watched the steamer silently, and then she turned back to her husband and said:

"She is not going up the sound, Edward; she is headed in here." Mr. Hamilton took the glasses and scanned the steamer.

"She's not going up the sound, Edward; she's coming in here." Mr. Hamilton took the binoculars and looked over the steamer.

"She does seem to be headed this way."

"She definitely seems to be coming this way."

"It is the Mariella, Edward."

"It's the Mariella, Edward."

Mrs. Hamilton spoke in a low tone of deep conviction. Her husband looked at her anxiously.

Mrs. Hamilton spoke in a low voice with deep conviction. Her husband looked at her worriedly.

"You are trying to make coincidences fit your wishes, Mary," he said. "Do not build up false hopes; the disappointment will be too much for your worn nerves."

"You’re trying to make coincidences match what you want, Mary," he said. "Don’t get your hopes up; the disappointment will be too hard on your already frayed nerves."

"I shall not be disappointed, Edward; see, she is headed straight in now."

"I won't be disappointed, Edward; look, she's coming straight in now."

"It is strange," said Mr. Hamilton, beginning himself to take an interest in the steamer, which[Pg 296] was now certainly headed almost for the cottage.

"It’s weird," said Mr. Hamilton, starting to take an interest in the steamer, which[Pg 296] was definitely headed almost straight for the cottage.

"Quick, Edward, the glasses; I can see people on her decks."

"Quick, Edward, the glasses; I can see people on her decks."

Mrs. Hamilton rose from her chair as she spoke and almost snatched the glasses from her husband's hands in her eagerness. For a long time she stood like a statue with the glasses trained on the steamer, and then suddenly she took a white shawl from her shoulders and waved it wildly above her head.

Mrs. Hamilton got up from her chair as she spoke and almost grabbed the glasses from her husband's hands, excitedly. She stood like a statue for a long time, focusing the glasses on the steamer, and then suddenly she took off her white shawl and waved it wildly above her head.

"It is Harry," she cried, sobbing with excitement, as she thrust the glasses into her husband's hands. "See, they have seen us, too, and Harry is waving his hat."

"It’s Harry," she exclaimed, crying tears of joy as she handed the glasses to her husband. "Look, they’ve spotted us too, and Harry is waving his hat."

Her overwrought nerves could not stand the excess of joy and she sank into her husband's arms.

Her overwhelmed nerves couldn't handle the flood of joy, and she collapsed into her husband's arms.

Mr. Hamilton carried her into a big room that overlooked the water and placed her gently on a lounge. When she recovered consciousness and opened her eyes, she looked up into the face of her son, who bent anxiously over her.

Mr. Hamilton carried her into a large room that looked out over the water and gently placed her on a couch. When she regained consciousness and opened her eyes, she looked up into the face of her son, who was leaning anxiously over her.

"Harry," she whispered, her happiness sending the warm blood back into her face again.

"Harry," she whispered, her joy flushing warmth back into her face.

"Mother," he cried, seizing her in his strong young arms.

"Mom," he shouted, wrapping her up in his strong, youthful embrace.

When she was stronger they led her out to her seat on the veranda where she had kept her weary vigil, and she warmly greeted Bert and the Midget,[Pg 297] who had just returned from the telegraph office, where they had sent word at once to their homes telling of their safe arrival in America. O'Connor who had come ashore at Harry's earnest solicitation, stood in the background talking with Mr. Hamilton, to whom he had briefly outlined the adventures of the three boys since they had been his guests on the Mariella.

When she felt stronger, they brought her out to her seat on the porch where she had patiently waited, and she warmly welcomed Bert and the Midget,[Pg 297] who had just come back from the telegraph office, where they had quickly sent messages home to inform everyone of their safe arrival in America. O'Connor, who had come ashore at Harry's strong request, stood in the background chatting with Mr. Hamilton, to whom he had briefly shared the adventures of the three boys since they had been his guests on the Mariella.

Harry took the big man by the hand and led him over to his mother.

Harry grabbed the big man's hand and took him over to his mom.

"Mother," he said, proudly, "I want you to know my friend, Captain Dynamite."

"Mom," he said, proudly, "I want you to meet my friend, Captain Dynamite."

"Captain Dynamite?" repeated Mrs. Hamilton, in wonder.

"Captain Dynamite?" Mrs. Hamilton repeated, astonished.

"Captain O'Connor, I mean; they call him Dynamite because when you touch him off there's sure to be something doing. He saved our lives twice—once from the sea, and once from the Spaniards."

"Captain O'Connor, I mean; they call him Dynamite because when you set him off, you can bet something's going to happen. He saved our lives twice—once from the sea, and once from the Spaniards."

"The Spaniards—my son, what are you talking about?"

"The Spaniards—what are you talking about, my son?"

"That's a long story, mother. I will tell you that to-night."

"That's a long story, Mom. I'll tell you tonight."

After much persuasion, O'Connor was induced to remain overnight on condition that all hands would dine on the Mariella. He went back to the steamer and sent a large boat ashore for his guests and no happier party could have been[Pg 298] found that night than those who gathered around the table in the cabin of the old Mariella. Miss Juanita made Mrs. Hamilton's heart glow with the pride of a mother as she told of Harry's sacrifice to save her, and after dinner, as they all gathered on the after deck under the starlit sky, Mr. and Mrs. Hamilton listened with breathless interest as the various actors told the story of their adventures during the voyage with Captain Dynamite.

After a lot of convincing, O'Connor agreed to stay overnight on the condition that everyone would have dinner on the Mariella. He went back to the steamer and sent a big boat ashore for his guests, and no happier group could have been found that night than those who gathered around the table in the cabin of the old Mariella. Miss Juanita made Mrs. Hamilton's heart swell with pride as she shared Harry's brave act to save her, and after dinner, as they all gathered on the after deck under the starry sky, Mr. and Mrs. Hamilton listened with rapt attention as the different participants recounted their adventures during the voyage with Captain Dynamite.

It was long after midnight when all the farewells had been said and the boat that was to put the departing guests ashore left the side of the Mariella. As the sailors pushed off, O'Connor and Juanita stood at the rail, his big hand resting gently on hers.

It was well past midnight when all the goodbyes were said and the boat that was taking the departing guests to shore pulled away from the side of the Mariella. As the sailors pushed off, O'Connor and Juanita stood at the railing, his large hand resting softly on hers.

"Say, Cap," shouted the Midget, as they moved away, "count us in when you cut that wedding cake."

"Hey, Cap," yelled the Midget as they walked away, "count us in when you cut that wedding cake."

[THE END.]

[THE END.]




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!